Home

IP Office Release 6.0

1. PeVUNILKY Voicemail Pro Client Offline COUNTER COUNTERS Properties for VBScript COUNTERS I tr ific Reporting Results COUNTER 10 a Specific Start Points ty Prompts Specific Reporting Results a Users Enter VBScript COUNTER11 COUNTER12 Groups Sub Main dlgid J Tgp Short Codes dim registration PROUNIERIS G Set Voice CreateObject vmprov5 voicescript COUNTER14 a a Delaul Stat Barks registration Voice Register dlaid g User Variables if registration Then COUNTERIS cPO CP1 E Modules p serz FE 12ndMenu COM Properties CP3 COM Methods CP4 si age 1_DialByName User Variables cP6 1_GetMail cP7 S 1_TimeOtDay C Expand Line 1 Remaining Characters 10000 cPs Eis 1_Weekend cP9 oS 354444 ee win as age andytest2 x CP12 CP13 Data Modified Local CP14 VB Scripting is enabled by the IP Office Advanced Edition license Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 252 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Extended Personal Greetings In INTUITY emulation mode the VoiceMail Pro system has the ability to hold a number of greetings within each user s mailbox that can be played to a caller In addition to the standard mailbox greetings the extended personal greetings provide the ability to present the caller with a greeting that reflects where the call has come from internal or external or why
2. Call Details amp Abbey Nortin amp Anne Webb amp Barry Shear amp Barry Smith Directory Queue Panel iS if Held Calls i or Extn201 1 Extn202 1 BLF Panel Park Slots Status Bar Connected Profile 209 Missed Calls 37 New Messages 2 SoftConsole has been designed to be easy to use while offering a look and feel which will appeal to experienced and novice operators alike Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 222 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 The SoftConsole screen is divided into the following areas e Main Menu Bar Sea aaa eUbueluwls o Boa Commands and actions are available through menus Some features can only be used when the right conditions If they are not available the feature will be grayed out until conditions change that allow the feature to be used The following features are available on the tool bar e Login e Save Profile e New call e Answer call e Hold call e Transfer call e Transfer complete e Reattempt transfer e e Conference e Call Details Panel Hang up Page Record call Compact view Dial Pad Access conference room 1 Access conference room 2 Options Calling Name Calling Number Called Name Called Number Call Status Duration Call Information Betty Edmunds 204 Anne Webb 209 Alerting Incoming 00 02 The cal
3. lou 4 l x 5 uno 6 Pars 7 tv 8 wxyz 9 1 a PE ccs a LOG led Les Conf Redial Spkr Hold Transfer End D a Contacts History Directory vA j gt Family gt Friends gt Work y AVAYA Softphone can also be configured to be minimized to the system tray when not in use to smaller or larger configurations to save desk space Product Description IP Office Release 6 0 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 213 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 aa oo 4 90 5 amo 6 rcns 7 rw 8 were 9 S T a E Call establishes 4690 d Video Other Hols M IP Office Softphone with dialpad active call and Call Log History 12 14 2009 11 50 4690 12 14 2009 11 59 127142009 11 58 F Deskphonebuttons for IP Office Features Wolf Brian J wolf IP Office Directory Sample Video Picture Active Video Call with self view Sotphone View Contacts veo daz E Wayne Barker Softphone x C AVAYA aana IP Office Softphone in smallest mode b Application mode the Softphone runs in the background and standard call control is accomplished through productivity applications such as one X Portal for IP Office that is part of the User profiles described above If run with one X portal it provides the following additional value 1 Consistent user
4. ceceeeeeereerenees 185 Scalable Platform eee eee teeeeeeeeeeaeees 17 Internetworking with Other Avaya Products 187 Telephone Options 00 0 eee eeeeeeeteneeeneeeeneeeaes 18 Common Networking Features eee 190 Application and Feature Licensing ccceeee 18 8 Data Networking Services 2 IP Office Essential Edition LAN WAN Service ssssssssssssssssssssssssssseesesessssen 194 PARTNER Version Internet ACCOSS 0 ccscccceceeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeeeaeeeeeas 194 Fatdware sinini nni ire itu dno 21 Remote Access Features sees eeeeeees 195 Tel phoie sii nat a Mea demadcatne casey 23 LAN to LAN FOULING ss ccastiniescacnncstsrnenstn ined vedanteats 195 System Administration ccccccccsscscscsesestsceeeneees 28 Data Networking Features 196 3 IP Office Platform 9 User Call Control Applications IP Office Control Unit lt 2 cence tivasentecaienitarenes 45 one X Portal for IP OffiCe cesses 204 IP500 Base Carden cciyhis criti niedetieemisies 47 IP Office Video SOftphone eseseeseeeeeeeeen 213 IP500 Trunk Card Staceid wera iei actin nearcatanated 52 Feature SUMMALY escesecssecseeeeseseeseesseeseeseenses 219 External Expansion Modules cscccccseeeeeeeees 54 10 Receptionist 4 Telephones SoftConsole OptionS c cccsccecsess cesses 227 9600 Series IP Telephones 59 SoftConsole Administration c cccccccccccsceseeesees 228 1600 Series IP Telephon
5. Routing I nformation Protocol RI P RIP is a distance vector protocol that allows routers to determine the shortest route to a destination network It does this by measuring the number of intermediary routers that need to be traversed to reach the destination network If more that one route exists to the same destination the shortest route is used If a fault occurs on the shortest route it will be remarked as being infinite and any alternative route will become the new shortest route This behavior can be used to add resilience into a data network Where a customer has an existing data network comprising of third party routers IP Office added to the network can provide back up using its routing and dial up capability RIP enabled routers share their knowledge of the network with each other by advertising and listening to routing table changes IP Office Supports both the RIP I and RIP II standards Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 200 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 VPN I PSec Tunneling 192 168 42 0 A i 192 168 43 0 IPSec tunnels allow a company to pass data between locations over unsecured IP networks such as the public internet The company data is secured using 3DES encryption making it unintelligible to other parties that might be eaves dropping on the traffic Tunneling can be applied to link offices together or provide workers access to the office over the internet All IP Off
6. Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 273 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Chapter 14 Audio Conferencing Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 275 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 14 Audio Conferencing A problem familiar to any organization is that of communicating effectively As more and more people work from home or from dispersed locations how do you ensure that employees are planning and working together effectively and regularly keeping in touch when separated by time and distance In addition many companies choose to sub contract some services such as payroll logistics or manufacturing to third party suppliers How do you ensure that you can act as one virtual enterprise Audio conferencing provides a simple and effective solution Audio conferencing makes it easy to include key people in decision making wherever they are with minimum interruption from their work It responds to business needs that every company faces e More meetings but less time available e Increasing pressure to be at two locations at once e Travel restrictions e Environmental pressures green initiatives As a result of using conferencing the benefits gained are e Reduction in travel leading to lower costs less wasted time and lower carbon emissions e Increased worker productivity and personal security e More effective working practices leading to sh
7. Telephones PARTNER Version supports the following telephones e 14xx Series Digital Telephones 234 e Partner ACS Sets 245 e PARTNER ACS Euro Sets 25 gt e Wireless Sets 26 gt e Analog POTS Telephones 274 1400 Series Telephones The following 1400 series telephones are supported e 1416 Display Set e 1408 Display Set e 1403 Display Set e DBM32 Button Module 1416 Digital Phone 1408 Digital Phone Programmable Buttons As well as the usual dialing keys Avaya 14xx digital phones have dedicated function buttons like Mute Volume Hold Conference and Transfer In addition to these there are keys that can be programmed with a range of selected special functions These keys can be used for calling other extensions on the system Direct Station Select or DSS keys or can be used for options from speed dialing numbers to controlling features such as Do Not Disturb Many features use an indicator to show whether a feature is enabled Button programming is done through the TUI or Simplified Manager as part of the system configuration Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 23 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 PARTNER ACS Sets The following PARTNER ACS telephones are supported on PARTNER Version e 6 Button Display Set e 18 Button Display Set e 34 Button Display Set up to 4 per system 2 per ETR card Not Supported e Call Assist 48 CA 48 Adjunct De
8. 5 mins max _ Okay Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 210 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Profiles By setting and creating using profiles the user is able to easily control where your calls are directed and how they are treated There are 3 default profiles called Office Mobile and Home These can be edited but not deleted The user can create up to 5 additional profiles A special profile called Detected may also appear and it is displayed when the current telephone system settings don t match any of the profiles By selecting which of the saved profiles is the current one the user applies that set of settings to the telephone system When creating or editing a profile there are 4 settings that the user will have to select e Mobility The user can choose between e The default desk phone e A number to forward the calls to e Mobile Twinning with the number to twin e Telecommuter with the number where the user is based e Voicemail The user can choose to activate deactivate the following options e Voicemail on call not answered e Voicemail ringback e Voicemail Outcalling e Voicemail to be listened on PC or on phone e Active Greeting The user can choose which recorded greeting to make active e Call Pick Up on off Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 211 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Server Browser and Other Requ
9. A hunt group can be switched in or out of Night Service mode by a user dialing the appropriate short code by any extension or by specific users Time Profiles Time Profiles can be used to define when a Service Hunt Group Least Cost Route Conference Bridge or a user s dial in facility are operational For example a time profile can be used to route hunt group calls to a manned extension or voicemail outside of office hours or be used to apply different Least Cost Routes at varying times of day to take advantage of cheaper call rates Multiple Time Entries can be created so that a Time Profile can be used to define specific hours in the day e g 09 00 12 00 and 13 00 17 00 Outside of a Time Profile voice calls would be re routed according to the configuration but any currently connected calls at the time the Time Profile changes would not get cut off as the change only affects the routing Data calls will get cut off as the time profile goes out of service but a new data call will start immediately if specified From Release 4 1 Time Profiles can also be based on specific calendar dates to make allowance for public holidays or other events Queuing Queuing allows calls to a hunt group to be held in a queue when all extensions in the group extension List are busy When an extension becomes free the queued call is then presented The definition of queued calls now includes ringing calls and calls waiting to be presented for ringing The
10. Management of telephones via DHCP and TFTP Voice encoding G711 G 729a Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP 40bit and 128 bit and 802 11i PSK for secure communication Lithium lon Battery pack with up to 8 hours talk time and 160 hours standby IP 53 Design Liquid dust protection MIL 810F Design Shock protection Clips cases lanyard Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved IP Office Release 6 0 Page 104 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 3645 Ruggedized Wireless Telephone The Avaya 3645 Wireless Telephone is a WiFi standard 802 11a b g telephone that runs using H 323 The 3645 supports all of the features of 3641 104 with the following additions e Push to talk PTT functionality for workgroup communication e Enlarged earpiece for operation in noisy environments e Rubberized grips for improved ergonomics and durability Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 105 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 3720 DECT This telephone is fully supported on the Avaya DECT R4 system However it can also be used on an Avaya IP DECT system in GAP mode with functionality limited to standard calling functionality DECT roaming and handover Access to IP Office central directory as well as time of day update is not available in GAP mode Standard DECT handset e Black and white display with Backlight and Icons e Loudspeaker hands free e Graphical user int
11. PRI 14 15 45 47 52 174 176 303 315 334 345 45 303 198 316 PRI30E1 47 PRI 30 E1R2 RJ45 47 PRI48T1 303 PRI60E1 303 Product Description IP Office Release 6 0 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 366 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Index PRIE1 315 PRI ISDN Services 315 PRI ISDN Switch 315 PRIT1 15 47 315 PRI T1 Service 315 PRI T1 J1 315 prices Avaya 7 Primary Rate ISDN 176 Primary Rate Trunks 52 176 345 prioritization 100 Priority 7 77 80 82 100 153 158 160 255 309 Priority Call 153 158 Priority Processors 100 Privacy Mechanism Session Initiation Protocol 316 Private 7 52 136 143 158 160 174 175 183 187 194 199 254 255 300 345 Private Call 136 158 Private Call Off 158 Private CallOn 158 Private Circuit Switched 175 Private Circuit Switched Voice Networking 175 Private Networking 187 Private Voice Networks 52 174 345 Pro 16 121 242 265 279 upgrades 18 Pro provides 16 Product 7 115 118 156 158 187 228 230 231 232 245 265 300 345 receiving 7 time during 18 product configuration documents 158 Product Configurations 158 300 Product Description 156 345 Operating System 228 265 Professional Edition 18 278 303 Standard Edition 45 upgrade 45 prompting PIN 234 Voicemail Pro 248 Protocol Applicability Statement 316 protocol passing 199 Protocols 52 98 100 160 162 163 169 172 183 187 197 199 200 245 296 316 345
12. e Text message support requires AlWS 30 messages sent received storable message length 160 characters Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved IP Office Release 6 0 Page 107 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Avaya 3720 and 3725 DECT Handsets Feature Overview Telephone 3720 DECT 3725 DECT Telephone Telephone Keys Keypad yes lt oO oa Hook on off buttons Softkeys e wf lt M wn wf lt wn Navigation cluster Volume buttons T o lt I o lt Alarm button Display Display illuminated 112 x 115 128 x 160 pixels Black pixels 64K and white colors Battery indicator oO Wn Signal strength indicator Time and date display Handsfree yes 2 way speakerphone x jx lt p p 1 oa Headset interface 2 5 mm lt oO ra Bluetooth 2 0 Headset profile i Oo Supported Ring tones Ring tone volume 8 levels Vibration Ringing options Ring Vibration visual Usage profiles supported lt oO oa Keyes beep yes selectable Volume control 8 levels 8 levels Message LED Red green Call log Local m D hb a Programmable in Call Feature menu Programmable Call Services Menu Polymer Dust uiquidProtectiontevel fe Cid Ruggedness IEC 68 2 32 procedure 1 dropped 12 times from 1 metre 133 x 53 x 24 134 x 53 x 26 mm Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 108 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05
13. 501 Pickup Group Extensions 502 Calling Group Extensions 503 Night Service Button 504 _ Night Service Group Extensions 505 Hunt Group Extensions 506 VMS Hunt Dely 507 VMS Hunt Schedule 601 Fax Machine Extensions 602 MusicOn Hod SSS 603 honne SSS 605 Doorpnone Extension2 610 SMDR Output Format 612 Contact Closure Group 613 Contact Closure Operation Type 617 Loudspeaker Paging ne 728 System Reset Programming Saved 730 Remote Administration Password Centralized Telephone Programming Extensions 10 and 11 can program other extensions on the system from their telephones Product Description IP Office Release 6 0 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 42 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Chapter 3 IP Office Platform Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 43 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 3 IP Office Platform IP Office is a modular communications solution that scales from 2 to 384 extensions It provides a hybrid PBX with both Time Division Multiplexing TDM and IP phone support that can be used in either mode or both concurrently IP Office has data capabilities built in providing IP routing switching and Firewall protection between LAN and WAN IP Office has a web based applications suite that delivers contact center reporting voice and email messaging Interactive Voice Response conferencing and computer telephony
14. O m Albert 300 07 Jul 10 37 AM 1s E Chris 400 16 Jul 3 37 24 PM 0s 7 O P Alex 456 16 May 8 50 PM 22s C Q Spare 8 425 15 Jul 3 37 24 PM 0s 7 5 O amp Alison 289 15 May 6 44 PM oF Pt Marke 670 15 Jul 3 36 53 PM 20s 10 t E Claire 443 16 May 6 44 PM 5s E marke 670 Peni ESI Al ias E 5 14 Jul8 3417 AM O 1 O0 m John 678 15 May 6 30 PM os Pr EE a t Mark 431 14 Jul 7 36 42 AM 14s 43 t y Simon 455 16 May 6 30 PM 38 imon ay s k Clear Tab Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 204 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Calls Gadget Caller I D Name Presentation Caller ID is presented as standard where provided allowing users to see who s calling before answering The caller s phone number and name if known to IP Office are clearly shown in the call status area The same information is also displayed should a second incoming call be presented allowing users to easily switch between calls Calls Enter name or number Call More U D 0 wo Oo ond oO O mw w O i Agent A 288 00 00 04 Desktop PC Telephony Controls one X Portal for IP Office has telephony buttons in the call gadget that activate standard telephone functions such as Answer Drop Hold Retrieve Record Consult and Transfer so that users don t need to remember IP Office specific feature codes These functions are context sensitive and appear depending
15. Receptionist Users IPO LIC RECEPTIONIST RFA 1 TRIAL LIC CU 189783 VMPro Networked Messaging IPO LIC NTWKD MSGING TRIAL RFA LIC DS 189776 VMPro TTS ScanSoft IPO LIC AVAYA TTS TRIAL RFA 1 LIC CU 189778 Audix Voicemail IPO LIC ACM CENTRAL VM TRIAL LIC DS 189786 IPSec Tunneling IPO LIC IPSec VPN RFA TRIAL LIC DS 189806 SIP Trunk Channels IPO LIC SIP TRUNKING TRIAL RFA 5 205820 1P500 Voice Networking IPO LIC IP500 VCE NTWK ADD 4 TRIAL 205823 Avaya IP End Points IPO LIC R6 AV IP ENDPOINT 5 TRIAL 229449 Release 6 onwards Third Party P End Points IPO LIC IP ENDPOINT RFA 5 TRIAL 227040 Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 330 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Licensing Examples Some features require a combination of licenses Example 1 1P500 Small Community Network Each I P500 Required e P500 Voice Networking 4 Channels Licenses Optional e P500 Voice Networking Additional Channels Licenses Example 2 Messaging in an I P500 Small Community Network Central I P500 Remote I P500 Required 1P500 Voice Networking 4 Channels e IP500 Voice Networking 4 Channels Licenses s Preferred Edition Messaging 4 Ports Optional 1P500 Voice Networking Additional e 1P500 Voice Networking Additional Licenses Channels Channels Additional Messaging ports e Preferred Edition Messaging 4 Ports e Ad
16. Telephony application button to return to main telephone screen e Contacts button Call log button LED quick access voicemail Message button with LED and corner message indicator e Programmable Contextual buttons e 4 contextual softkey buttons Context sensitive allocation of e g Hold Transfer Conference and more Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 60 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 e 12 virtual Appearance Feature buttons accessible through navigation cluster Three features shown at a time with three LED indicators e Key Labels Icons and text used on fixed feature keys e Features Menu Mobile cell phone style menu with access to most often used features like Call Forwarding Park Settings etc On screen status indication for activated features like call forwarding e Speakerphone Full duplex speakerphone e Hearing Aid Compatible Yes ergonomic hearing aid compatible handset also supporting TTY acoustic coupler e Message Waiting Indicator Yes also useable as a ringing call alert indicator e Personalized Ring Patterns Yes 8 e Headset Socket Yes e Embedded Applications e Centralized call log and contact application fully transparent between 9600 phones 1408 1416 1608 1616 phones and one X Portal for IP Office e Contacts application up to 100 entries and Call Log Missed Incoming Outgoing up to 30 calls Please note that the Voice dial feat
17. 16 24 and 30 channels of compression The echo cancellation capabilities of the VCM cards vary The VCM 4 8 16 and 24 cards offer 64ms of echo cancellation while the VCM 30 card offers 25ms The 1P406 V2 supports a single VCM while the P412 can have any two VCMs installed The following table shows how many of each card are supported by each platform Each card requires the use of an IP500 Legacy Card Carrier I P400 Internal Modem Card An internal modem card with 12 modems can be installed in both the IP406 V2 and IP412 to provide dial up capacity that is better matched to remote access requirements of customers The Internal Modem card allows up to 12 simultaneous V 90 56kbps analog modem calls into the IP Office Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 351 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 352 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Index Index Absence Text 133 setting 133 strings 133 Absent Text Message 185 Acceptable Delay 170 Access Point 100 accessing Database Information within Call Flows 250 Email 246 Office LAN 334 Account 16 143 170 176 200 231 234 245 257 265 310 Account Code Recording 257 Account Codes 143 257 310 ACD 156 ACM 18 187 260 ACM RFA 260 Acquire Call 134 executing 156 waiting 156 ACSII CSV 293 Active Directory 245 ActiveX Data Objects 250 Addi
18. 2 el o EE Basic User This functionality would be suitable for common areas e g meeting rooms or users with less communication needs A basic user has all basic core functions enabled including mailbox and VPN phone usage This is the default functionality for users on the system when no licenses are applied Mobile Worker This User Profile is targeted at users with mobile devices and no internet connection to the office e g field sales and service staff who are often on the road They are provided with functions such as one number access and call control as if in the office enabling them to never miss a call The Mobile Worker license enables a user to be configured to use the IP Office Mobility features Those features include Mobile Twinning Mobile Call Control 1P500 only one X Mobile Client IP500 only and use of Text to Speech TTS for listening to your emails remotely The license instances are consumed by a user being configured for any mobility feature Release 5 only e Mobile Worker License 1 User IPO LIC MOBILE WORKER RFA 1 195569 e Mobile Worker License 5 Users IPO LIC MOBILE WORKER RFA 5 195570 e Mobile Worker License 20 Users IPO LIC MOBILE WORKER RFA 20 195572 Release 6 onwards e Mobile Worker License 1 User IPO LIC R6 MOBILE WORKER 1 229434 e Mobile Worker License 5 Users IPO LIC R6 MOBILE WORKER 5 229435 e Mobile Worker License 20 Users IPO LIC R6 MOBILE WO
19. 300 312 Base Unit Power Supply Adapter 113 BaseT Ethernet 77 80 82 85 86 87 Basic Commands 261 Basic Rate 176 196 345 347 Basic Rate ISDN 345 347 B channel 64kbps 315 Bellcore Special Report SR4287 315 Belt Clip 100 111 112 113 bi directional 160 BLF 185 227 228 256 form 148 groups 222 BLF Groups 227 BLF Panel 222 228 Blind Transfer 131 BlindTransfer 308 Book Shop 251 BOOTP 316 Bootstrap Protocol 316 Bothway 199 bps 170 branch maximizes 174 branches 7 160 174 DEFINITY ACM 187 Branch to Branch 15 Brazilian 236 251 Break Out 158 256 set 136 Break Out Dialing 136 Breakout 185 235 Reception 261 Breakout Dialing 185 BRI 45 52 54 140 174 176 315 334 345 BRI ISDN 174 BRI S interfaces ISDN 54 BRI So8 45 BRI 4 45 BRI 8 45 47 Bridged Appearance 138 140 141 bridged appearance button matches 141 Bridged Appearance Buttons 140 141 Built in IP 183 Business moving 303 business needs 143 business requiring 190 303 business to business 194 Busy DND 222 Busy Lamp Field 148 185 219 222 Busy Lamp Field Panel 222 Busy On Held 158 Busy Subscriber Call Completion 176 Busy Engaged 253 buy lease 7 bypass DND 135 Bytes 170 a C3000 245 Cable 44 47 52 55 125 167 312 348 349 Cable Lengths 312 CALA 125 300 Call 85 146 154 191 194 200 230 258 292 Advice of charge during 176 Call Appearance 138 140 141 Call Appearance button 138 140 141 Call Appearance Feature 58 84 c
20. 347 IP500 BRI So8 Expansion Module IP500 BRI So8 Module 347 54 347 Product Description IP Office Release 6 0 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 362 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Index IP500 BRI Trunk Card 52 IP500 Cards 47 IP500 Compact Flash voicemail 16 IP500 Control Unit 45 47 300 303 IP500 Digital Station 52 54 55 303 IP500 Digital Station Expansion Module 54 IP500 Digital Station Module 55 IP500 Expansion Modules 45 IP500 Feature Key 303 IP500 Feature Key A Law 303 IP500 Legacy Card Carriers 47 52 300 303 345 351 IP500 Media Card Voice Compression Module 32 300 IP500 Media Card Voice Compression Module 64 300 IP500 Phone 54 IP500 Phone Expansion Module 54 IP500 PRI 52 IP based WiFi 90 IPCP 316 IP DECT 98 IPSec 15 183 201 316 IPSec Tunneling 201 IPSec VPN 183 IP telephony 167 Ireland 302 ISAKMP 316 ISBN asked 251 enters 251 ISDN 14 52 153 169 172 175 194 195 196 219 300 315 345 347 BRI S interfaces 54 following 176 incoming 176 outgoing 176 ISDN Basic 176 ISDN Basic Rate 176 ISDN BRI S interface 300 ISDN DSS1 176 ISDN MSN 153 ISDN Ports 315 ISDN Primary 176 300 ISDN Primary Rate 176 300 ISDN T Bus Basic Rate Interface 300 ISDN PRI 153 ITAddress 308 ITU T Recommendation E 164 316 IVR 7 16 236 250 261 providing 252 J Japanese 236 251 Juniper 115 K Kbps 185 LAN 171 Point 171 Kentrox 115 Key Management Protocol 316 Ke
21. 56k data for 5ESS 56 64 64 restricted for 4ESS PRI ISDN Switch support 4ESS 5ESS DMS 100 DMS 250 includes conformance to ANSI T1 607 and Bellcore Special Report SR4287 1992 PRI ISDN Services AT amp T Megacom 800 AT amp T WATS 4ESS AT amp T SDS Accunet 56kB s and 64kB s 4ESS AT amp T Multiquest 4ESS RJ 45 sockets Loop start Ground start regional dependant RJ 45 sockets BRI B channel 64kbps or 56kbps D channel 16kbps PRI B channel 64kbps or 56kbps D channel 64kbps RJ 45 sockets CLI Schemes DTMFA DTMFC DTMFD FSK and UK20 REN 2 External Bell via POT port REN 1 Off Hook Current 25mA Ring Voltage 40V nominal RMS RJ 45 sockets Auto negotiating 10 100 BaseT Ethernet 10 100Mbps 1P406 V2 and IP412 37 way D Type female sockets X 21 interface to 2048k bps V 35 interface to 2048Kbps and V 24 Interface to 19 2Kbps 3 5mm Stereo Jack socket Input impedance 10k channel Maximum AC signal 200mV rms 3 5mm Stereo Jack socket Switching Capacity 0 7A Maximum Voltage 55V DC On state resistance 0 7 Short circuit current 1A Reverse circuit current capacity 1 4A 1P406 V2 and IP500 512MB Compact Flash memory card Product Description IP Office Release 6 0 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 315 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Protocols Protocol FC Information vi20 A standard Rate Adaptation mechanism vio standard Rate Adaptation mechani
22. A sound card is needed if audio features are required IP Office System Requires J ava Virtual Machine 1 4 2 or Status later Each SSA session takes about 35M of Application i RAM Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 319 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Windows Operating System Support The following table gives a summary of the Server amp Client Operating Systems OS on which various IP Office applications are tested and supported for IP Office Release 6 0 Microsoft Server OS 12 IP Office SSA VM TAPI SMDR Customer one X Portal Manager Pro 3rd party Call WAV Reporter Yes 2003 Server SP2 Y Oo Yes XP Professional SP3 Y Oo No O XP Professional SP3 64bit 2008 Server Y 2008 Server 64bit Y Microsoft Client OS 1 IP Office SSA VM Manager Pro Console XP Professional SP3 Yes XP Professional SP3 64bit5 Yes Vista Business Enterprise SP1 Vista Ultimate SP1 Yes Vista Business Enterprise 64bit gt Vista Ultimate 64bit gt o o nn nn lt lt x oO a alae lt oO wn es es es es M lt 0 ale oO wn lt Non OS Applications UMS web Phone Contact voicemail Manager Store Database Microsoft Exchange 2003 Microsoft Exchange 2007 Notes 1 Windows ME Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows NT4 and Windows 2000 operating systems are no longer supported by Avaya They may function but have n
23. Audiotex Multi Level Tree Structure Message Announcements Whisper Announce Alarm Calls Assisted Transfers Dial by Name Direct Dial by Number Other Features Call Recording Test Conditions Personal Numbering Speaking Clock Campaign Manager VoiceMail Pro Manager Customized Voicemail Intuity TUI emulation mode Forward Emails to External Systems VPI M Third Party Database Access IVR Text To Speech within call flows Support for Visual Basic Scripts IP Office Preferred Edition VoiceMail Pro Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes IP Office Preferred Edition VoiceMail Pro Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes IP Office Preferred Edition VoiceMail Pro Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes IP Office Essential Edition Embedded Voicemail Yes Yes No No No No No IP Office Essential Edition Embedded Voicemail Yes No No No No Yes Yes IP Office Essential Edition Embedded Voicemail No No No No No No No No No No No No Product Description IP Office Release 6 0 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 263 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 IP Office VoiceMail Pro Intuity Audix Emulation Features Voicemail Box ntuity Feature support Feature Basic Commands VoiceMail Pro support 4 or H Help Yes 7 or R Return to main menu Yes 9 or W Wait Yes 6 or N Look up number name Yes Q or X Exit system Yes 0
24. Busy Not Availabe 7 Calis Waiting 7 Current Wait Time 7 Grade of Service 7 InternalMade hostcalls 7Y New Messages 7 No Answer Y Outbound Calis External _ Overflowed Answered 7 Overflowed Calis 7 Overflowed Calls Waiting 7 OverflowedLost 7 Queue State 7 Queue State Time Y Routed to Voicemail Y Transferred Y Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 290 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Chapter 16 Management Utilities Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 291 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 16 Management Utilities This section gives an overview of the management applications that are common to all IP Office platforms e IP Office Manager 29 IP Office s main configuration tool e Monitor 296 A trace utility for trouble shooting e SNMP 29 Alerts and alarms from IP Office systems to SNMP tools or to SMTP email e System Status Application SSA 29 A diagnostic tool to monitor and check the status of IP Office systems Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 292 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 IP Office Manager This application is IP Office s main configuration tool Using a Windows Graphical User Interface Manager provides an intuitive interface for installation configuration and subsequent
25. Feature e Display of the caller s number on incoming calls where supplied by the service provider e Sending of calling number on outgoing external calls Benefit e Confirmation and recognition of who is calling e Storage of Caller ID numbers for return calls e Directory name matching to Caller ID numbers e Screen Popping customer records in compatible applications Description Where supplied by the service provider the IP Office can receive and use the callers Caller ID The Caller ID is passed through to the answering phone or application and is included in any call log or history supported by the phone or application If the Caller ID matches a number in the IP Office s Directory the matching directory name is shown instead of the number Where IP Office Phone Manager or the TAPI service is used to link to database software on the users PC it is possible to have an automatic query performed on the supplied Caller ID and have the caller s record in front of the user before the call is answered For outgoing calls the IP Office can insert a system wide Caller ID or set a flag to have Caller ID withheld For users with a direct dial number routed to their extension that direct dial number is also used as their Caller ID for outgoing calls Alternatively short codes can be used to specify the Caller ID that should be sent with outgoing calls Note that the sending and receiving of Caller ID is subject to the service provider supporting that s
26. Gain Control Ready for future support of G 722 wideband codec QoS Options UDP Port Selection DiffServ and 802 1p q VLAN SNMP Support Yes IP Address Assignment Static or dynamic IP address assignment Ethernet Ports e 9640 Ethernet 10 100 line interface with a secondary 10 100 port for co located laptop or PC with VLAN separation e 9630G 9640G Gigabit Ethernet 10 100 1000 line interface with a secondary 10 100 1000 port for co located laptop or PC with VLAN separation e Support of optional integrated Gigabit Ethernet adapter using adapter interface Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 63 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 9650 9650C I P Telephones Smart sleek stylish and highly functional the Avaya 9650 IP Telephone is designed for the Essential and Navigator user profiles who need one touch access to features and bridged appearances of team Partner buttons Building receptionists executive admin staff are examples of Navigator users who answer incoming calls transfer customers to other extensions and monitor several bridged appearances throughout the day This is the ideal solution for receptionists executive assistants Contact Center Agents as well as Knowledge workers that need quick access to partner and team features Communication Manager Common Features e Display Housing e 9 line 3 8 inch backlight graphical display with 320 240 pixels 9650
27. IP Office Release 6 0 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 355 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Index 16 18 16 236 Compact Business Center Compact Contact Center Compact Flash 300 Compact Mode 219 companies LANs 160 company s IP Telephony unites 160 compared 98 Service Provider conferencing 276 Compressing IP UDP RTP Headers 316 Compression Control Protocol 316 Computer Telephony Integration 44 230 231 Concise MIB Definitions 316 Concurrent Calls Maximum Number 261 Conference Add 158 Conference Bridge 7 155 277 278 279 Conference Calling 14 157 Conference Control Display 219 Conference entry exit 279 Conference Held Calls 222 Conference Meet Me 158 Conference Resources 278 Conference Room 125 222 227 conferencing 14 44 45 77 80 82 113 129 148 222 227 276 277 278 298 347 benefits relating 279 Eliminating 7 manage 279 relating 279 Conferencing Center 18 45 157 219 222 278 conferencing service 7 Conferencing tone 129 Conferencing tone depending 129 congestion control 172 Connected Line Identification Restriction 176 connection oriented 183 Contact Center 16 44 58 124 156 250 256 334 Contact Center Features 156 Contact Management 16 Contact ability 249 contactable 90 ContactStore 18 45 236 257 258 265 ContactStore Search 236 Continuous Loop Greeting 261 Control Unit Conference Capabilities 278 controlled according 258 controlling calls 144 cop
28. IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Chapter 8 Data Networking Services roduct Des ROD 2010 AVAYA All rights reserve d Page 193 iP Office Re sled e 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 8 Data Networking Services LAN WAN Services The IP500 and IP500 V2 support a firewalled 2 port Layer 3 Ethernet Switch When computers on the LAN communicate they do not care where the destination is they just send messages with the address of the destination These messages are likely to be received at all other computers on the same network but only one the target destination will act on the message Where the destination is on another network the router is needed to be the gateway to the rest of the world and find the optimum route to send the message on to the destination The router alleviates the need to establish and hold a call for the duration of a communication session when messages or IP packets are being sent between source and destination by automatically establishing a connection only when data is to be passed Routers may be connected together using WAN Wide Area Network links that could be point to point leased lines managed IP networks Frame Relay networks or exchange lines Central Office The IP Office system supports all of these types of network connections IP Office has an integral router with support for bandwidth on demand that allows the negotiation of extra bandwidth dynamically over time W
29. IP Office s WAN 183 IP Packet 172 183 IP Packet Flow Control 172 IP PBX 160 IP Phone Adapter 167 IP Phone Power Adapter 167 IP Phones 44 45 77 80 82 149 156 162 167 IP Power 167 IP Security Document Roadmap 316 IP Service 194 IP Telephone Power Consumption 167 IP400 3rd PRTY IVR RFA 250 IP400 Access Point RFA 300 IP400 Analog 16 17 IP400 Analog Trunk 16 17 54 303 350 IP400 Analog Trunk 16 Module 54 350 IP400 BRI Card 345 IP400 BRI 8 300 IP400 Digital Station 55 349 IP400 Digital Station V2 Module 55 349 IP400 DualE1R2 345 IP400 Dual PRIE1 300 345 IP400 Dual PRIT1 300 345 IP400 E1R2 345 IP400 Internal Modem Card 351 IP400 Modem 12 300 IP400 Modems 300 IP400 Phone 131 303 348 IP400 Phone Manager PC SoftPhone RFA 10 303 IP412 15 17 44 45 54 88 157 163 171 194 196 234 261 278 300 312 315 334 345 351 IP412 Control Units 300 312 334 IP412 Maximum Heat Dissipation 312 IP412 Office A Law Base Unit 300 IP412 Office Mu Law Base Unit 300 IP412 providing 300 IP412 Supports Two 64 party Conference Banks 278 IP500 15 16 17 18 44 47 54 55 88 157 163 171 176 185 194 196 234 236 261 278 300 303 312 315 345 347 351 default 45 existing 52 voicemail 235 IP500 Analog Phone 52 IP500 Analog Trunk 16 54 IP500 Analog Trunk 16 Expansion Module 54 IP500 Analog Trunk 16 Module 54 IP500 Analog Trunk Card 52 IP500 BRI 52 54 176 347 IP500 BRI So8 54
30. Immediate Ring Delayed Ring or No Ring for incoming calls on a line appearance programmed on the extension Log All Calls Up to 3 extensions can be designated to log all calls both answered and unanswered regardless of where they terminated in the system Music on Hold Connect an audio source to the Music On Hold port on the processor module so that a caller hears music when placed on hold when the Music On Hold feature has been activated Network Time Synchronization 128 Use this feature to specify whether you want to synchronize the system clock with the network time delivered by your service provider over Caller ID If Network Time Synchronization is set to Active the system will use the network time provided by your service provider if it is set to Not Active the system will use the time provided by its system clock Night Service When Night Service is on and a call comes in all extensions in the Night Service Group ring immediately regardless of normal Line Ringing settings Paging Features INTERCOM 70 and INTERCOM 70 e Loudspeaker Paging Users can initiate a call either manually dialed or intercom auto dialed to an extension connected to an analog station port that connects them to an external loudspeaker paging system e Simultaneous Paging is a feature that pages both the external loudspeaker paging system via the paging port as well as voice signals all of the extensions in Calling Group 1 Prod
31. PPP is used over dial up or leased line circuits where a single channel is used to connect the two locations together e g A single channel maybe a 64K channel on a dial up circuit or a 256K leased line etc Multi Link Point to Point Protocol ML PPP IP Office supports Multi Link PPP allowing additional calls to be made where bandwidth greater than a single channel is required The maximum number of channels available to data can be set on a service by service basis When the available bandwidth reaches a user defined limit additional channels can be automatically added Similarly when traffic falls then the number of channels in use can be automatically reduced If there is no data traffic on any of the channels in use then all lines can be cleared Since most carriers have a minimum charge for calls the period that a channel has to be idle before clearing is configurable Through these mechanisms call costs can be effectively controlled while ensuring that bandwidth is available as and when it is needed Frame Relay Frame relay is a wide area networking protocol based on the X 25 protocol Individual network connections are multiplexed over a common medium by the use of Permanent Virtual Circuits PVC This allows a single Leased Line to provide connectivity to a number of different locations Frame relay is currently implemented in IP Office as a CPE or router end protocol over WAN connections IP Office supports both PPP and RFC1490
32. RFC1155 RFC1212 RFC2453 RFC2401 RFC2402 RFC2403 RFC2405 RFC2406 RFC2408 RFC2409 RFC2410 RFC2661 lala z ie D lt D fa c a a v lt S is 5 N fa U 3 4 D O Ba ul as O 0 D fe oa a 3 w ka Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 316 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 RFC Information eC ML PPP RFC2686 The Multi Class Extension to Multi Link PPP Session I nitiation Protocol e Rec E 164 2 ITU T Recommendation E 164 The international public telecommunication numbering plan e RFC 2833 7 RTP Payload for DTMF Digits Telephony Tones and Telephony Signals e RFC 3261 8 SIP Session Initiation Protocol e RFC 3263 10 Session Initiation Protocol SIP Locating SIP Servers e RFC 3264 11 An Offer Answer Model with Session Description Protocol SDP e RFC 3323 14 A Privacy Mechanism for the Session Initiation Protocol SIP e RFC 3489 18 STUN Simple Traversal of User Datagram Protocol UDP Through Network Address Translators NATs e RFC 3824 24 Using E 164 numbers with the Session Initiation Protocol SIP e RFC 1889 RTP e RFC 1890 RTP Audio e RFC 4566 SDP e RFC 3265 Event Notification e RFC 3515 SIP Refer e RFC 3842 Message Waiting e RFC 3310 Authentification e RFC 2976 INFO e RFC 3323 Privacy for SIP PAI and draft ietf sip privacy 04 RPID Product Description 2010 AVA
33. Speed Dial Options PARTNER Version supports the following types of Speed Dialing e Personal Speed Dial FEATURE 80 99 Each user can store up to 20 frequently dialed numbers in their extension Personal Speed Dial numbers can be dialed quickly by pressing FEATURE or at intercom dial tone on a single line telephone and the two digit speed dial code from 80 through 99 The Personal Speed Dial numbers programmed for a particular extension are for use only at that extension e System Speed Dial FEATURE 600 699 System Speed Dialing is a shared list of up to 100 frequently dialed numbers up to 28 characters in length All users on the system may dial a System Speed Dial number by pressing FEATURE or at intercom dial tone on a single line telephone and the three digit speed dial code from 600 through 699 Station Lock Unlock FEATURE 21 Station Lock helps to prevent unauthorized people from making outside calls from extensions Users enter a four digit code on their telephone dialpad to lock your extension To unlock the phone the user enters the identical code Station Message Detail Reporting SMDR SMDR is a call reporting feature that provides records of call activity It is commonly used in many types of business including Legal Contact Centers Sales and Real Estate Call reporting information allows users to Detect any unauthorized calls Bill clients or projects Bill back by department Reduce telephone c
34. access to phone forwarding settings should a user wish to change their Forwarding or Follow Me number from an external telephone VoiceMail Pro provides message handling for individuals or groups audio information to callers so assisting the operator during periods of heavy call activity and links to business applications through services such as Text to Speech VoiceMail Pro provides a full telephony applications environment where call flows can be set up and interact in real time with business workflow callers can interact via menus and data entry and VoiceMail Pro applications can speak back results For example users can listen to their email messages through the telephone Email I ntegration Integration with email systems is provided by the VoiceMail Pro Unified Messaging Service UMS which is delivered to eligible users as part of the Office Worker Teleworker or Power User license It enables VoiceMail Pro to interact with email systems to provide a synchronization of voicemails and their status new unread read deleted saved between all user devices like desk phones mobile cell phones the UMS web interface one X Portal for IP Office the email client and other devices that are synchronized with the user s email account This will work for email clients that use the IMAP4 protocol like MS Outlook Lotus Notes Mozilla Thunderbird and many others VoiceMail Pro and Exchange Server 2007 Advanced collaboration between VoiceMail Pro
35. e System Directory This is the directory of names and numbers from the IP Office telephone system plus all the users and groups on the telephone system These entries cannot be changed but the user can copy a system directory entry into your personal directory and modify it e External Directory The system administrator can configure one X Portal for IP Office to access one external directory Active Directory LDAP Searching the directories is easy with the Personal Directory and the System Directory as you enter a name or number in the box at the bottom of the tab only matching directory entries will remain in view With the External Directory you must enter a name or number to perform a search The user can make a call directly from the directory gadget by clicking on the number associated with the entry If more than one number is available for this entry they can choose which one to call Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 208 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 User Status Presence For the directory entries of other IP Office users one X Portal for IP Office will indicate the status of the user at their work number This status is available for users across an IP Office Small Community Network The status can be Description The normal state for a user when their extension is not in use The normal state for a user when their extension is on a call The user has set Do
36. encapsulation with fragmentation of large data packets to provide voice quality of service Service Quotas IP Office can be configured to limit the maximum number of minutes that a service such as Internet Access is available for each user This is the sum total of calls made and does not include periods of inactivity Once the quota has been used the service is no longer available The quota can be either automatically refreshed daily weekly or monthly or manually refreshed by dialing a secure feature code on a handset Time Profiles Time profiles set the operational times for service For example a time profile could be set up to make Internet Access available to staff only during lunch times Using time profiles it is also possible to define an alternative service to operate outside the operational hours of the main service This may be used to take advantage of alternative tariffs at off peak periods Switching to this fallback service can also be controlled manually by dialing a secure short code from a handset This can be particularly useful in allowing quick restoration of service in the event of an ISP failure This feature also applies to days of the week or specific calendar dates Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 197 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Password Authentication Protocol PAP PAP is a method of authenticating the remote end of a connection using unencrypted pa
37. grayscale 9650C color e Flip stand dual position e Fixed Buttons 10 plus Four way navigation cluster button e Volume up down separate volume levels for the handset speaker and ringer Mute button LED Speaker button LED Headset button LED e Avaya Menu button browser options and settings access Telephony application button to return to main telephone screen e Contacts button Call log button LED quick access voicemail Message button with LED and corner message indicator e Programmable Contextual buttons 15 e Four contextual softkey buttons Context sensitive allocation of e g Hold Transfer Conference and more e 3 self labeled Appearance Feature buttons with LED for access to 24 administered Appearances Features at the side of the display Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 64 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 e 8 Additional self labeled Appearance Feature buttons with LED with direct access to 2 8 Appearances Features e Key Labels Icons and text used on fixed feature keys e Features Menu Mobile cell phone style menu with access to most often used features like Call Forwarding Park Settings etc On screen status indication for activated features like call forwarding e Speakerphone Full duplex speakerphone e Hearing Aid Compatible Yes ergonomic hearing aid compatible handset also supporting TTY acoustic coupler e Message Waiting Indicat
38. network comprising 200 Network Manager 297 Network Manager application 297 network numbering 191 199 Network Numbering Schemes 191 network ready 7 Network Requirements 169 Network Time Protocol 316 Networked Messaging 236 247 Networked Messaging Solution 247 Networking Features 185 Networking maximizes 174 networks converging voice 100 networks including private 160 New message 131 195 246 new old saved 132 new repeat answered unanswered 118 NI2 176 Night Service 153 154 155 309 Night Service Fallback 154 Pass 155 Night Service Group 154 No Answer 138 146 147 158 222 309 No Answer Interval 146 No Answer Time 138 Node Numbering 191 Node Numbering Scheme 191 North American Primary Rate Interface 176 North American T1 176 Norway 302 Norwegian 111 236 251 Not Disturb 135 146 148 Not Disturb Exception Add 158 Not Disturb Exception Delete 158 Not Disturb Off 158 Not Disturb On 158 Notice 7 Now there s 7 NTP 316 NULL Encryption Algorithm 316 Number service 176 249 number name 261 number 130 Numeric Keystrokes 227 Nylon Pouch 100 O OAI 100 Octel 187 Of Hours 253 Off Hook Current 315 Off Hook Operation 157 Off Hook Station 158 Offer Answer Model 316 offering high resolution 100 high resolution backlight 100 Off Hook Station 157 office heating 236 Office LAN accessing 334 Office quality speakerphone 104 Oldest 156 258 oldest ringing waiting 156 oldest ringing waiting call 156 On D
39. s many locations including mobile workers into a single converged communications network Telephony calls using VoIP go above and beyond what s been possible in the past When it comes to placing telephone calls VolP provides a range of support services and features unequalled in the world of telephony but above all deliver them at low cost How Does VolP Work Voice over Internet Protocol means basically what the acronym states Voice travels over an Internet Protocol Internet Protocol refers to the type of rules that the network uses to send and receive signals IP Telephony works by converting voice communications into data packets Conveniently it runs on the popular Ethernet LAN local area network technology which currently supports over 96 percent of the worlds companies LANs Circuit switched or Time Division Multiplexed Telephony Before digital networking with the Internet took off everyone had to use the Plain Old Telephone Services POTS These run over a network called the Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN The PSTN has been around since the telephone was invented in either analog or digital form using circuit switched technology where the telephone call gets exclusive bi directional use of a wire or circuit while the call is in progress Because the circuit is exclusive to each conversation PSTN and private branch exchanges PBXs must be sized to cope with peak demand and have enough circuits available for a
40. 0 or above and Sun s Java Runtime Environment Several variants of the server are available All Servers come fully installed and preloaded with licenses so no extra installation is needed There is no upgrade available from e g Basic to standard Basic Basic Standard NTP Server IP Office can also act as NTP Server Access To Central Phonebook Access To Corporate Directories LDAP on CM TFTP on IPO TE IPO ee IPO IPO 3 LDAP from release 6 central IP Office phonebook is also supported directly on the Master RBS SMS Handset to Handset mea Basic Web Messaging Netpage Web Messaging Software Download Over The Air Software Download Via Advanced Rack Charger X up to 32 up to 120 handsets handsets up to 32 up to 120 handsets handsets X X up to 32 up to 120 handsets handsets Centralized Handset Configuration Via Advanced Rack Charger X X up to 32 up to 120 handsets handsets up a 32 up to 120 handsets handsets Centralized Handset Configuration Over The Air E X X AIWS as Protocol Converter E OAP Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 95 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 DECT R4 Accessories In addition to the standard chargers a number of high functionality chargers exist q e Basic Charger e Charges one DECT phone 3720 and 3725 e Charge time 4 hours g e Charges one DECT phone 3720 and 3725 e
41. 1408 1416 1608 1616 phones and one X Portal for IP Office e Contacts application up to 100 entries and Call Log Missed Incoming Outgoing up to 30 calls Please note that the Voice dial feature of the 9600 phones on Communication is not available on IP Office e Access to company directory and Visual Voice applications on IP Office External Applications WML Application Interface Upgradeable Firmware Yes Expansion e 2 Adapter interface e USB 1 1 adapter e SBM24 Module interface for up to 3 x SBM 32 button expansion modules Note If more than one button module is used Power Class of phone needs to be switched to Power Class 3 Color Black Mounting Desk or wall mountable with optional wall mount adapter Supports the following languages English French Spanish German Italian Dutch Portuguese and Russian English and 4 of the other languages at once in the phone Note While it may be possible to download other languages onto the phone this will not be applicable to any data sent by IP Office If you switch the language to any not listed above the display will show a mixed of the new language and the user s default language on IP Office Requirements for IP interface Power Supply IEEE 802 3af Power over Ethernet PoE or optional local power supply Power Class 2 for all models including GiG E versions Codecs audio G 711 G 729a b G 726 Dynamic Jitter buffer Echo Cancellation Comfort Noise Automatic
42. 263 and H 264 Video Codecs with resolution of up to 640 480 pixels and 30 frames per second Resolution Pixel Typical Net Video Bandwidth Requirement tow H 263 H 264 176 x 144 QCIF 64 kbps 45 kbps Standard 320 x 200 QVGA 162 kbps 114 kbps High 640 x 480 VGA 776 kbps 545 kps Note The above numbers show an average bandwidth requirement but peak usage might be higher The above numbers do not include the audio bandwidth Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 217 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Supported Languages Currently the following languages are supported e English e French e Spanish e Italian e Portuguese Over the time new languages can be added to the product PC Requirements e Processor e Minimum Pentium 4 2 4 GHz or equivalent Video Card with DirectX 9 0c support e Optimal Intel Core 2 Duo or equivalent Video Card with DirectX 9 0c support e Memory e Minimum 1 GB RAM e Optimal 2 GB RAM e Hard Disk Space 50 MB e Operating System Windows XP Service Pack 2 Windows Vista 32 bit and 64 bit arch Windows 7 32 bit and 64 bit e Additional Microsoft Windows Installer 3 1 Microsoft NET 3 5 SP1 Microsoft VC 9 0 Runtime Service Pack 1 e Connection P network connection broadband LAN wireless e Sound Card Full duplex 16 bit or use USB headset Note that these are recommendations Depending on other applications on the PC Softph
43. 298 300 351 VoIP application 171 VolP calls 170 171 VoIP provides 160 VoIP Standards Supported 172 VoIP Wi Fi Solution 90 VolIP compatible 160 Voltage 118 167 315 Volts 167 Volts Alternating Current 167 Volume 77 80 82 111 112 117 118 148 248 261 Volume Control Ringing 117 Volume Down 77 80 82 Volume Up 77 80 82 VPIM 261 VPN 15 17 18 45 115 183 201 following 90 VPN IPSec L2TP 18 VPN Phone Software 115 VPN Phones 18 45 90 Licenses 115 VPN tunneling 17 VPN access 115 VPN gateways 115 VRL 265 W waiting Acquire Call 156 walkie 100 walkie talkie 103 Wall Plate Adapter 113 WAN 15 17 44 98 169 170 174 194 195 196 197 201 236 296 300 315 switching 183 VCM 169 WAN Expansion Kit 300 WAN link 194 WAN multiplexers 195 WANS 45 54 297 300 312 WANS 10 100 45 54 300 WANS 10 100 Module 300 WANS Module 297 312 WAP WML _ 80 82 Warm Start 293 Watts 167 312 WAV 130 219 227 242 246 258 wav file 130 219 258 waveform 258 Web 7 15 256 257 258 265 Web Server 258 265 Web Server Operation 265 Web site 15 Week Planner 236 WEP 102 104 whats 160 Whisper Announce 236 261 Wide Area 54 98 183 194 197 198 334 Wide Area Expansion 183 Wide Area Network 98 194 198 334 Wide Area Networking Protocol 197 Width 111 312 WiFi 17 58 100 102 103 104 105 125 Wink Start 176 WINS 196 Wire 14 58 85 86 87 100 102 104 157 160 172 228 348 closet switch 16
44. 2GB RAM and 30 GB free hard disk space Note The IP Office Customer Call Reporter server can co reside with a VoiceMail Pro of less than 17 ports IP Office Customer Call Reporter Client Components The client application consists of a secure thin client web browser session to the IP Office Customer Call Reporter server that will provide the Supervisor or Agent with a complete view of the Call Center The following web browsers will be supported e Microsoft Internet Explorer 7 and above Internet Explorer 8 recommended e Mozilla Firefox version 3 0 and above e Windows Safari 3 1 and above e Apple Safari 3 1 and above IP Office Customer Call Reporter Database The database has been designed to provide a simple table schema The database is a Microsoft SQL Server 2005 or 2008 instance and the IP Office Customer Call Reporter will be packaged with the Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Express edition It is recommended that any call center that predicts high call usage should understand the imposed limitations of Microsoft SQL 2005 Express edition and consider using the full version of Microsoft SQL 2005 or 2008 Microsoft SQL 2000 is not supported The database is a pre requisite that must be installed prior to the IP Office Customer Call Reporter install During installation the default location for the installation of the database is on the local drive This can be changed to a remote location on the network If an existing database is to be used
45. 3645 phones provide an improved user interface a new lightweight design and a radio that supports several WiFi standards 802 11a b g With these handsets customers have an increased choice to fit their needs and infrastructure Based on global standards for wireless LAN s the Avaya IP Wireless Telephone Solution simplifies network infrastructure by enabling voice traffic to be carried along with data traffic over the same wireless network 3616 3620 and 3626 telephones are supported but no longer available from Avaya for direct sequence 802 11b WiFi networks the 3641 and 3645 will also work in 802 11a and 802 11g networks These phones are also field upgradeable through external TFTP clients not included so telephones can be updated with new protocols features and capabilities as they become available Users can have a choice of an executive or rugged workplace telephone and all the productivity benefits of their desk telephone in this next generation of wireless telephone solutions Wireless I P Terminals Users can have a choice of 2 WiFi phones to meet their in building mobility needs e Both support the 802 11 a b g standards and up to 12 lines or selected features Both of these handsets are resistant to dust and spraying water and therefore also suitable for harsh environments They also offer office quality speaker phone functionality e Avaya 3641 supports a broad range of enterprise applications and is ideally suited for general
46. 4 plus 10 00 will show Meeting until 10 00 and the text strings are localized to the system language This feature is supported across the IP Office Small Community Network Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 133 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Call Tagging Feature e Display a text message on the user s phone one X Portal for IP Office or Phone Manager when a call is presented to it Benefit e Provide additional information about the call Description This feature is used to provide additional information about the call to the targeted user before they answer it Call Tagging may be used when transferring a call from one X Portal for IP Office Phone Manager or Soft Console to give caller info if the user doing the transfer is not able to announce the call It is possible to add a tag to a call automatically using CTI and IP Office VoiceMail Pro This is also possible based on an Incoming Call Route On some telephones displaying the Tag may mean that it is not possible to display the usual call source and target information Reclaim Call Feature e The ability to recover or reclaim the last call that was at your phone but is now ringing or is connected elsewhere Benefit e If you just miss a call and it goes to voicemail or call coverage you can get the call back while it is still being presented or connected through IP Office Description This is a special version of
47. 8 ports 3rd party Text to Speech To use the maximum of 8 TTS ports a minimum of 8 VoiceMail Pro ports is required The TTS engine has to be purchased licensed separately e Additional VoiceMail Pro ports can be added by purchasing the VoiceMail Pro 2 4 8 and 16 port add on licenses up to the maximum depending on the IP Office System e The IP Office Advanced Edition license enables the following VoiceMail Pro components e VB Scripting e IVR e Contact Store e 3rd party Text to Speech 8 ports separate TTS engine required or MS TTS engine delivered with the Windows operating system e If VoiceMail Pro server is installed without a license it will run for 2 hours and then shutdown Not applicable to Backup VoiceMail Pro use e P Office DVD contains VoiceMail Pro with its components e Switch off any PC and hard disk sleep power down suspend hibernation modes PC Specification e Always refer to the latest Avaya IP Office Technical Tip or Technical Bulletin for any updated information with regards to Operating Systems Service Packs or PC hardware e Refer to Technical Specifications section of the Product Description for Operating System and Hardware requirements Network e The Voicemail PC must be configured and tested for TCP IP networking e The Voicemail PC must have a fixed IP address Disk Space A compact or typical installation requires 500MB for the VoiceMail Pro software A full installation requires up to 2
48. 88 DSS Unit 125 DSS BLF 130 DSS BLF key 130 DSSS 102 DSU 52 176 345 DTE 315 DTE Port 315 DTMF 117 121 144 163 172 176 190 232 248 250 256 316 348 sending 219 DTMF Dialing 117 DTMF Digits RTP Payload 316 DTMF signaling 348 DTMFA 315 DTMFC 315 DTMFD 315 D Type 315 D type on IP412 315 Dual Charger 100 Dual PRIE1 47 Dual PRI E1R2 RJ45 47 Dual PRIT1 47 Dual Universal PRI 45 Dutch 111 112 236 251 DVD 258 265 Dynamic 15 77 80 82 85 86 87 183 316 Dynamic Host Control Protocol 316 Dynamic IP 77 80 82 85 86 87 E E amp MDID 176 E amp M Switched 56K 176 E amp M Tie Line 176 E 164 316 e g 144 190 E1 17 52 140 175 176 187 260 278 334 345 including 14 E1ISDN 278 E1PRI 140 E1 PRI 300 E1 T1 187 196 E1R2 52 140 176 300 334 345 E1R2 Channel Associated Signaling 176 E1R2 MFC 52 345 E1R2 Primary 300 E911 157 Earth Loop Recall 348 Echo 169 300 345 351 128ms 14 e commerce Internet 194 ECT 176 eg 133 Eliminating conferencing 7 ELR TBR switchable 118 Email 7 44 100 132 194 195 199 234 236 265 297 accessing 246 Copy 261 Forward 261 leading 245 reading 16 sends 258 subject 242 Voicemail 242 Email addresses 246 258 Email application 242 email inboxes 16 Email Notification 242 297 Email Reading 246 email reading checkbox 246 Email Systems 16 242 emails 236 242 246 e mails 183 Embedded 17 Embedded Applications 77 80 82 85 86 87 Embedded Messaging 17 132 Em
49. 92 168 44 For Help press F1 localhost Administrator Supervisor Z On customer sites where SNMP management is not available IP Office can email events using up to 3 email addresses each containing a different set of alarms The following system event categories can be chosen for email notification if installed on the system e Generic e Trunk lines e Embedded Messaging Card e VCM e Expansion modules e Applications e License e Phone change e CSU Loop Back IP Office sends email notifications directly to the email server no additional PC client is needed Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 297 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 System Status Application The System Status Application SSA is a diagnostic tool for system managers and administrators to monitor and check the status of IP Office systems locally or remotely SSA shows both the current state of an IP Office system and details of any problems that have occurred The information reported is a combination of real time events historical events status and configuration data to assist fault finding and diagnosis SSA provides real time status historic utilization and alarm information for ports modules and expansion cards on the system SSA connects to all variants of IP Office running release 4 0 using an IP connection that can be remote or local Modem connections at 14 4kbps or above are supported for remote
50. 9600 1600 and 1400 telephones this functionality has been further enhanced by providing a centralized call log directory and personal settings When hotdesking to a different phone call logs and directory are instantly updated and synchronized over the network eliminating e g lost calls as the call log was not available at a remote site Avaya IP Office Desktop phones are designed to meet typical user needs in the small and mid business market e Walk Up Phones in common areas like a meetings room lobby or store The phones are normally used by casual users that walk up to a phone where they make a quick phone call Normally no sophisticated features are needed e Example user Customer Visitor e Everyday Users that need a phone on their desk as part of their everyday job While having a phone is important the phone is just another tool on the desk for users using several alternative communication technologies e Example user Engineer Accountant e Receptionist Assistant A typical user manages a lot of calls often as a significant part of their job In many cases they also manage calls for others users and need to be efficient in connecting callers to the right people e Example user Executive Assistant Receptionist e Executive For these users handling a lot of calls is essential and they are constantly on the phone Quite often they handle multiple calls they must always be connected even when mobile They require a
51. All rights reserved Page 181 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Option 4 Connection to the ITSP through a router equipped with an Application Level Gateway ALG which transparently resolves all NAT issues SIP Service Provider sip Router IP Office For details on SIP ITSPs which have been tested by Avaya please see the Technical Bulletin for the IP Office 4 0 release and or IP Office Knowledge Base at http www avaya com ipoffice knowledgebase Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 182 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Packet Based Voice Networking This section describes the options available for businesses that are able to utilize data networks to support voice solutions such as Voice over IP VoIP IP Office offers networked voice and data communications providing e Built in IP router e One link for voice and data networking e Common access to the Internet share files and send e mails to other sites e Support for RIP 2 protocol for dynamic data routing IPSec VPN firewall and NAT Network Address Translation and for security Centralized management and proactive fault management via SNMP IP Packet based voice networking between IP Office sites can be achieved through e VoIP across the campus LAN e or VoIP across the public network Managed IP FR Network VoIP H 450 WAN Data Circuit Vol P networking across IP network or WAN VoIP
52. All rights reserved IP Office Release 6 0 Page 117 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Interquartz Gemini Phones EMEA and APAC Avaya have tested the new generation Interquartz Gemini analog telephones with IP Office to ensure that telephone and system are compatible The Gemini phones offer good value for money without compromising on quality Their stylish design and rugged build quality make them a popular choice for buyers on a limited budget For sales enquiries and product information contact Interquartz at avaya enquiries interquartz co uk Basic telephone 9330 AV e Visual Message Waiting Indication e Locking mute button with LED indicator e Last number redial e Recall button e Ringer volume adjust e Ringer indicator light e Wall mountable no additional bracket required e Hearing aid compatible e Rubber feet to minimize slippage Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 118 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 CLI Feature phone 9335 AV All features of 9330 AV plus e Caller ID with 80 memories shows date time and new repeat answered unanswered calls e Large 3 line LCD display e P Office feature activation through programmable keys e 100 name and number personal directory e 20 lockable direct access memories e Full handsfree working e Headset port e Switchable Time Break Recall 100 200 300 600 ms e Call timer e Alphanumeric keypad e La
53. August 2010 Telephone 3720 DECT 3725 DECT Telephone Telephone and clip and clip included included Localization Supported languages English German Spanish French Russian Downloadable language one 1 Requires AIWS Server for integration with IP Office 2 Language supported on phone IP Office menu items might appear in English The new DECT R4 handsets will work with the legacy IP DECT system Nevertheless not all features available with the 3701 and 3711 handsets will be available on the DECT R4 handsets as well An incomplete list of working features is e Subscription with PARK e Basic Call e Display Messages with some limitations e g truncation at end of line e Handover e Roaming e R Key Handling Enquiry call Conference e Feature Access Codes e Distinguish between internal external calls e DTMF during call e Local call log calling party numbers are transmitted e Local time and date Features already known to be not working with DECT R4 handsets and the legacy IP DECT system are e Access of external directory e g LDAP e Get time and date from the system Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 109 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 e WML WAP access e SMS Messaging not a feature of the legacy IP DECT system Generally it is highly recommended to do a sample installation with one handset first before rolling out a larger
54. Button Module extends the number of feature buttons on your Avaya 1416 Digital 1616 IP Telephone It provides 32 additional buttons all with dual LEDs red green for easy visibility Up to 3 DBM32 BM32 button modules can be connected to a 1416 1616 phone The total number of DBM32 BM32 button modules supported on one IP Office system is 32 subject to the total system limits Please refer to System Button Module Support 8 for the total system limitations of button modules on IP Office Note that the DBM32 can only be used with the Digital 1416 while the BM32 is for use with the 1616 IP phone Typical uses are e to provide additional lines for calls bridged from one or more other extensions e to provide abbreviated dialing buttons e to provide buttons to access additional switch features like call forwarding Please note that a external power supply is always needed for a DBM32 connected to a 1416 telephone and is needed when connecting more then one BM32 to a 1616 telephone The DBM32 module is planned to become available during the first half of 2010 Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 76 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 5402 5602 SW 2402 4602 SW Telephone These telephones are best suited for the Walkup User Works on IP Office Works on IP Office and Communication Manager Early 2402 telephones can make and receive call but the display will not function
55. Desking is not supported for use with CCC and CCR Breakout Dialing This feature allows the user to select an IP Office system in the network from a displayed list and then dial a subsequent number as if dialing locally on the chosen system This feature is triggered either by a programmable button or short code Branch Branch Branch Branch Branch Branch SESiisssis Branch Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 185 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 e Resilient SCN see the diagram below In an SCN configuration of System A and System B where the centralized voicemail is connected to System B and a number of IP phones are connected to either System A or System B If System B fails then e System A will automatically take over from System B and support Avaya IP phones hunt groups and DHCP if required e VoiceMail Pro will reregister to System A e For users in an Small Community Network SCN when they hot desk to another IP Office system they retain their licensed profile setting as configured on their home system e All System B users Personal contacts Call Logs will continue to be available 1600 Telephones PSTN Resilient A m semen a a C m Sys VoiceMail Huntgroup Huntgroup For Small Community Networks VCM modules are required in all systems being connected The IP lines may be configured in a start or a meshed c
56. Digital and 16 IP All IP Office Small Office Edition s variants have a four port Layer 2 Ethernet Switch and a dedicated switched Ethernet WAN port Layer 3 making the system ideal for connection to local area networks and broadband wide area network services such as ADSL and Cable With Voice over IP as standard and optional IPSec security the system can be quickly configured to provide secure voice and data networking from remote offices or branch locations back to a head office over a broadband connection The IP Office Small Office Edition includes a WAN option slot on the rear of the unit which can be used to support other network connection types such as V35 V24 X21 and T1 leased lines The back of the unit also features a twin PCMCIA socket that can support a plug in voice memory card for use with the embedded voicemail function and a Wireless LAN card when using the system as an Access Point To enable licensed IP Office applications a serial Feature Key can be attached directly to the IP Office Small Office Edition removing the need for an external PC for license verification For resilience under power fail conditions Analog trunk port 2 is connected to POT extension port 1 The pre defined configurations supported in IP Office 3 1 are detailed in the following table IP Office Small Office Edition Analog Analog Digital I P Extensions VoIP Extensions Stations Channels 4T 4A 8DS 3 VolP 4 4 8 16 3
57. IP500 control units and other systems requires voice networking channel licenses within the 1P500 This applies to H323 IP trunks configured on the IP500 including IP trunks being used for an IP Office Small Community Network SCN A voice networking license is also required for the use of trunks configured to for QSIG operation On H323 IP trunk a license instance is consumed for each simultaneous outgoing call incoming calls do NOT consume a license On QSIG trunk the number of calls is limited by the trunk type rather than available licenses e 1P500 Voice Networking Additional Channels License IPO LIC IP500 VCE NTWKG ADD 4 LIC CU 205650 This license enables 4 voice networking channels including the Advanced Networking features distributed groups and hot desking across Small Community Network Additional licenses can be added to achieve the number of voice networking channels required SIP Trunk Channel Licenses These licenses are used to enable channels on SIP trunks added to the IP Office system When a channel is used it requires a license Multiple licenses can be combined for the total number of channels required Note that SIP calls will require VCM channels during call setup and may require VCM channels during the call e SIP Trunk Channels 1 Channel IPO LIC SIP TRNK RFA 1 202967 e SIP Trunk Channels 5 Channels IPO LIC SIP TRNK RFA 5 202968 e SIP Trunk Channels 10 Channels IPO LIC SIP TRNK RFA 10 202969
58. MAPI compliant email client install See Voicemail Email Integration If Text to Speech is installed email text to speech is supported using MAPI In both cases above full email sending from the server PC to users PC should be configured and tested before VoiceMail Pro installation using the same PC user account under VoiceMail Pro will be installed UMS Exchange Integration A Microsoft Exchange Server 2007 is required Earlier versions of Exchange can be integrated using the IMAP capability of UMS Voice Recording Library Management IP Office Voice Recording Library VRL application is IP Office ContactStore This application and its installation are documented separately However e Avaya ContactStore for IP Office should be installed after VoiceMail Pro has been installed and its operation verified e The use of a DVD recorder for long term archiving is recommended e A figure of 7 2MB per hour of archived recordings is given e The archived messages held by IP Office ContactStore are accessed via web browser using the port address 8888 This port address is not configurable and so it is necessary to ensure that it does not conflict with any other web server service running on the same server PC Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 266 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Chapter 13 Mobility Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 267 IP Office Release 6 0 Is
59. Note The 5602 SW and 4602 SW phones are supported by IP Office Release 6 but are no longer available for new sales Common Features Display 2 lines x 24 characters Fixed Feature Buttons 10 Conference Transfer Drop Redial Speaker Messages Hold Mute Volume Up Volume Down Programmable Feature Buttons e DS Phones 2 plus an additional 12 programmable feature keys can be accessed via the FEATURE key e IP Phones 2 Key Labels Icons and text used on fixed feature keys Display labels and icons used on 2 programmable feature keys Speakerphone Listen only handsfree speaker no microphone Hearing Aid Compatible Yes Message Waiting I ndicator Yes On the 2402 and 5402 this is can also be used as a ringing call alert indicator Personalized Ring Patterns Yes 8 via Conference button when idle Headset Socket No this telephone does not support headset operation Embedded Applications None Upgradeable Firmware DS Phones No IP Phones Yes Expansion None Color Multi gray Mounting Desk or wall mountable Adjustable Desk Stand No Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 77 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 78 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Requirements for 5402 and 2402 e Connect to Digital Station DS port e Power Supply From phone system Requiremen
60. PRI cards IP Office supports Primary Rate ISDN trunks on 5ESS or DMS100 central office switches provided by AT amp T Sprint WorldCom and other Local Telcos Channels can be pre configured for the supported services or negotiated on a call by call basis Special Services can be configured to route calls to local operators or pre subscribed carriers for both national and international calls SSS Alternate carriers can also be selected through the configuration of IP Offices Transit Network Selection TNS tables IP Office also supports the Calling Name and Number service over Primary Rate Trunks NI2 Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 178 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Analog Trunks e Loop Start Loop start trunks are available on the IP Office Analog Trunk cards installed within the IP Office control unit or on the Analog Trunk 16 port expansion modules ATM16 The first two trunks on the ATM16 are automatically switched to power fail sockets in the event of power being interrupted They conform to the TIA EIA 646 B standard The loop start trunks also support incoming caller line identification ICLI D conforming to GR 188 CORE and GR 31 CORE standards IP Office can use this information to route calls or provide it to computer applications to display additional information about the caller e Ground Start Ground Start trunks are only available on the ATM16 configured through IP Offi
61. Pro e Privacy In cases where the security of calls is critical in house conferencing is the only way to ensure privacy e Remote Management Allows a single person to manage the conferencing bridge facility from any location Furthermore the full IP Office solution phone system voicemail CTI server router firewall and DHCP server can all be managed from a single management interface called IP Office Manager Feature supported on 1408 1608 2410 5410 4610 5610 and 1416 1616 2420 5420 5621 4621 4625 as well as 9600 Series IP phones Note that any internal party has the option to view amp drop participants not just the conference originator Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 279 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 280 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Chapter 15 The Contact Center Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 281 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 15 The Contact Center Avaya provides Customer Contact solutions that meet the needs of the small to mid size business From the smallest company that requires basic system performance reporting to the larger businesses that need advanced routing and multimedia integration with the Customer Contact Center Avaya provides IP Office Customer Call Reporter as the perfect solution to meet the needs of small busi
62. Reversal e Each analog port can support a device of maximum 1 REN e On analog ports call information is sent while the phone is ringing and cannot be updated during a call or set on an outbound call the phone may do a local match but this is not controlled by the IP Office The primary purpose of displays is to give information about incoming calls Where the Caller Display standard chosen supports the delivery of text extension name as well as the number both are delivered e An analog extension port can be set for external Paging operation It does not operate like a normal extension and is connected to external equipment through an isolation device The Port will always be busy so it cannot be called directly and can only be accessed by using a paging feature When not receiving a Page the port will remain silent When being paged the page tone is sent before the speech path is opened Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 56 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Chapter 4 Telephones Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 57 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 4 Telephones The right phone for the User With a wide choice of telephones supporting both digital and IP interfaces Avaya IP Office has always the right phone for a user Key driven phones for the cost sensitive customer The 1600 IP phone and 1400 digital phones are classical c
63. Time changes Turn this feature off if you live in an area without daylight savings time Automatic Extension Privacy 304 Prevents other extensions with access to the same line from joining a call from their extension Use this feature for extensions connected to a modem fax or any device whose function can be disrupted by someone trying to join it Automatic Line Selection Specifies the order in which the system selects an available line intercom or outside when a user at the extension lifts the handset or presses SPEAKER to make a call without first selecting a specific line button For extensions with analog telephones set Automatic Line Selection to intercom first This enables analog telephones to access system features including intercom calling When users lift the handsets on analog telephones they hear intercom dial tone To access an outside line they must dial 9 Automatic Voice Mail Coverage 310 Use this feature to program a button to turn VMS Cover on and off routing unanswered intercom and transferred calls for a users extension to the Call Answer Service of the voice messaging system after the specified number of rings factory setting is three rings Backup Failure Alarm When an Automatic Backup fails a Backup Failed message is displayed on Extension 10 and 11 Backup Programming Automatic The PARTNER Version does a nightly backup to the system SD card No manual intervention or external PC
64. User It is available in Europe only Common Features Display 1 line with 24 characters alphanumerical plus one line of icons Fixed Feature Buttons 3 keys with printed text labels and 2 for Audio Volume control Programmable Feature Buttons 3 keys with indicators and printed text labels 2 keys with printed text labels Speakerphone Full duplex handsfree speaker and microphone Hearing Aid Compatible Through optional handset Message Waiting and call log Indicator Yes Personalized Ring Patterns Yes 8 ring patterns Embedded Applications Navigation Cursor Control Call signaling via LED and or ringer Alphanumeric entry via dialing keypad Color Graphite gray or polar white Mounting Desk or optional wall mountable Adjustable Desk Stand No Features for T3 Upn only Upgradeable Firmware No Optional Add Ons Up to 3 DSS Modules T3 Headset link for wired headsets Headset Socket No Optional headset add on available Connect to Digital Station DS port Power Supply From phone system Features for T3 IP only e Upgradeable Firmware Yes e Headset Socket Yes e Optional Add Ons No e Power Supply IEEE 802 3af Power over Ethernet PoE or individual power supply unit e Codecs G 711 G 729a b e QoS Options UDP Port Selection DiffServ and 802 1p q VLAN e SNMP Support No e IP Address Assignment Static or dynamic IP address assignment e Ethernet Ports Two port full duplex 10 100 BaseT Ethernet swit
65. a USB handsfree unit for handsfree operation It is possible to switch between the sound devices at any time during the call For alerting in addition to that the PC speakers can be activated to ring the phone For ease of use similar to desktop phones Softphone supports USB devices for audio as well as for call control e g accepting and terminating a call Softphone supports the HID standard for USB devices allowing generic USB devices to be configured A number of USB devices have been tested with Softphone for interoperability including Hook switch control as well as dialing if supported by that device e Audio Devices e Plantronics DSP USB headset e Plantronics 510 Bluetooth headset with USB base e Plantronics CS50 USB wireless headset e GN Netcom 8120 USB headset adapter for GN Netcom headsets e Yealink W1DL Cordless USB phone with Dialpad e Yealink P1K Corded USB Phone with Dialpad e Generic USB soundcard and USB HID interface support with configuration assistant e Video Cameras e Logitech QuickCam Pro 4000 5000 9000 e Creative Webcam NX Pro e Microsoft Lifecam VX 3000 Supported Audio and Video Codecs Softphone supports G 711 and G 729 Audio Codecs Audio Codec negotiation is done by IP Office in order to ensure best quality for local or SCN calls At login the user can select the default mode e g best quality or low bandwidth for remote operation For Video Softphone supports H 263 H
66. a call is made from either twinned phone the call will appear to have come from the primary phone when the secondary is an extension on the IP Office system Other users of the system need not know that the supervisor has two different phones The supervisor s Coverage Timer and No Answer Time are started for the call and if the call is not answered within that time the call will be delivered to available coverage buttons if applicable and then Voicemail if applicable The following features are supported with internal twinning e Follow Me To e Follow Me Here e Forwarding e Do Not Disturb inc exceptions e Context less hunt group actions Membership Service Status Fallback Group configuration e Voicemail On Off Access e Call Log Central Call Log for T3 and 1400 1600 9600 phones only e Redial Central Call Log for T3 and 1400 1600 9600 phones only e Personal Directory Entries for T3 and 1400 1600 9600 phones only Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 269 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 External Mobility Mobility functions for employees working not from the office but mobile are enabled either by the IP Office Power User or the IP Office Mobile Worker license The former Mobile Twinning Mobility License will continue to work with all the features described below The mobility functions enabled by these user licenses are Mobile Twinning and Mobile Call Control as well
67. a dial pad Fax Machine Extensions 601 Allows you to connect your fax machine to your system allowing you to share network facilities Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 35 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Group Calling Ring Page INTERCOM 7G INTERCOM 7G Use this feature to ring page or transfer calls simultaneously to all of the extensions in any one of four Calling Groups G represents a Calling Group number from 1 4 When paging you hear a beep and can begin speaking Your voice is heard on the speakers of all idle system telephones in the selected Calling Group The first extension to answer the call on ETR sets by picking up the handset or pressing SPEAKER on 14xx sets or by pressing the ANSWER softkey on the display is connected to the caller You can group page employees for general announcements this is an inexpensive alternative to a paging system Group Hunting Ring Page INTERCOM 77G INTERCOM 77G Use this feature to distribute call volume among extensions in a group to off load call activity from a single user When an intercom or transferred call is placed to a Hunt Group where G is a Hunt Group number from 1 6 the system rings or voice signals the first available extension in the group passing over busy extensions or those with Do Not Disturb on in a circular hunt If a ringing call is not answered within three rings the call moves to the ne
68. across the LAN In a factory or campus environment voice calls can sent over 10 100 Mbps LAN connections on systems equipped with optional Voice Compression Modules VCM In order to avoid bandwidth contention issues VoIP across the LAN will require some form of bandwidth management through Diffserve Vol P networking across the LAN Vol P across the Public Network IP Office is capable of realizing the benefits of Q 931 and H 450 supplementary service support across a public connection where an appropriate QoS connection can be established Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 183 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Supplementary Services within I P Networks Supplementary services within an IP environment are provided via Q 931 and H 323 IP Office provides the same rich services as enjoyed within a traditional network environment Our standards based approach allows interoperability within mixed vendor networks The basic supplementary service features supported by H 323 on IP Office to IP Office IP trunk links are listed below e Basic call set up voice e Call Hold local e Call Transfer local e Called Calling Name e Called Calling Number Additional features can be added through the use of IP Office Small Community Networking see the following section On IP trunks to non IP Office systems the Supplementary Service will depend on those also supported by the no
69. also requires TAPI WAV licenses Each license enables 4 ports of voice processing e DevLink Pro Provides a real time event stream in addition to the SMDR interface provided in IP Office SMDR The real time event stream takes the form of a call record which is issued whenever the state of any endpoint of a call changes typically there are two end points on a call but for some circumstances such as conference calls intruded calls there may be more e IP Office SMDR Provides an interface to obtain SMDR events A comma separated record is issued for each call when the call is completed This interface is designed for call accounting and call billing applications IP Office SMDR is available free of charge and distributed on the IP Office Admin CD ROM The IP Office SMDR can be output direct from the IP Office control unit to a designated IP address and port e Software Development Kit This toolkit is delivered on a single CD Rom containing the developer documentation for TAPI Link Lite TAPILink Pro DevLink Lite and DevLink pro as well as pre compiled programs for exploring TAPI 2 1 and 3 0 In addition example source code is included making it easy for developers to become familiar with IP Office CTI interfaces Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 231 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 TAPI Link Lite 1st Party TAPI Support TAPILink Lite provides simple first party CTI via Microsoft T
70. and Microsoft Exchange Server 2007 offers voicemail storage into the Exchange message Store This is the single point of storage for all email and voicemail messages and therefore the single source for all message status information When a voicemail should be collected using a desk phone connected to the IP Office VoiceMail Pro will retrieve it directly from the Exchange message store VoiceMail Pro sends the voicemails not just as emails with a WAV attachment but as a message formatted as voicemail so that Exchange can handle them differently from emails If Microsoft Exchange Server 2007 working with a mobility solution server e g a Blackberry Enterprise Server are used to push emails to mobile devices Blackberry or similar VoiceMail Pro will also integrate and deliver voicemails via the Exchange Server to the mobility solution The mobile device will then be able to present voicemails on the visual voicemail interface instead of presenting them as emails with an attachment Voicemail in a Small Community Network SCN A single PC based VoiceMail Pro server can provide voicemail services to multiple IP Office systems in a Small Community Network over the LAN WAN or a Frame Relay network This is referred to as Centralized Voicemail and can reduce costs while facilitating communication between IP Office sites For resilience should the main site fail the Centralized Voicemail will automatically reconnect to an alternative IP Off
71. and a call cost mark up for each user e Call Completion to Busy Subscriber CCBS 2400 4600 5400 5600 T3 T3 IP DECT phones Phone Manager CCBS can be used where provided by the ISDN service provider It allows a callback to be set on external ISDN calls that return busy It can also be used by incoming ISDN calls to a busy user This feature is NOT available on standard ISDN DSS1 phones e Partial Rerouting PR 2400 4600 5400 5600 T3 T3 IP DECT phones Phone Manager When forwarding a call on an ISDN channel to an external number using another ISDN channel partial rerouting informs the ISDN exchange to perform the forward thus freeing the channels to the IP Office This feature is NOT available on standard ISDN DSS1 phones and it is NOT supported on QSIG e Explicit Call Transfer ECT The normal usage of this feature is by a third party application ECT is supported on the SO interface A Call to an SO Endpoint can be transferred to any other device such as an analog digital or IP endpoint or to any trunk The normal usage of this feature is by a third party application connected via one or more SO interfaces to IP Office One example is the VoiceDirector an automatic call assistant Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 177 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 North American T1 Provided by the IP400 PRI T1 and IP500 Universal PRI cards T1 Primary Rate provides up to 24 64K chann
72. and deleting entries from the selected directory Also the operator is able to associate a script or media file with each specific entry e Queue Mode This tab enables the operator to configure the queue window with up to 8 hunt group queues which will include a recall queue Queues can be created edited and deleted while also providing the operator with the additional benefit of positioning them in the queue window in order of operator preference Management by exception is used to monitor queue status by enabling the operator to set up various alarm thresholds such as the Number of calls in queue and Longest waiting call time A WAV media file can be associated with an alarm for further customization e Park Slots This tab enables the operator to define which park slots are accessible on a system wide basis up to a maximum of 16 The operator is also able to assign which numbers are used to access each park slot and where the slot appears in the park slot panel e BLF Groups This tab allows the operator to create and edit BLF groups e Door Entry This tab allows the operator to configure up to two door entries e Directories This tab enables the operator to choose access to the following directories SoftConsole local directory IP Office system directory and Microsoft Outlook contacts Once chosen the operator is able to map fields to directory entries e Conferencing This tab allows the operator to set up the names of the two confere
73. as one X Mobile client support Each feature has to be enabled in IP Office Manager for eligible users Mobile Twinning External Twinning A typical use for Mobile Twinning would be for a salesperson that has a desk extension but is often out of the office They only give out their office phone number to clients but the IP Office Mobile Twinning will ring their mobile cell phone as well as the desk extension External mobile devices can be set as twinning targets even if the primary telephone is logged out e g in the case of a virtual extension Call Back To avoid any call charges when using a mobile cell phone the call back feature has been implemented When calling a particular number at the IP Office the IP Office will reject the call and will call back the mobile number if this number has been identified as an eligible one After accepting this call the mobile user gets a dial tone and can establish another call Depending on the service provider s tariff there are no call charges except possible roaming charges on the mobile invoice This feature is very useful for employees using their personal mobile phone for business only from time to time their personal mobile phone number stays confidential and they do not to claim mobile charges back from their business Avaya one X Mobile Client Support IP Office supports the Avaya one X Mobile Single Mode Clients running on selected Symbian Single Mode or Windows Mobile 5 or 6 x
74. below e Report Name The text entered is used as the main title of the report If the report is saved this is the saved name of the report e Subject This is the main subject of the report The drop down list offers a list of report subjects that are pertinent to the report i e Hunt Group Agent DDI etc e Filter The filter is used to refine the data and again offers filters that are pertinent to the report i e All Answered Lost etc e Exclude Internal When selected internal calls are excluded from the report e Working Hours The start and finish time of the working day can be specified using the spin controls e Group Results by The drop down list offers a list of display options e Scheduled By default this field is shown as Manual If the option Scheduled is selected then additional fields are available e Report Format The format that the report is to be produced in can be selected from Adobe Word Excel Rich Text or Crystal e Email Address An email address can be entered if the report is to be sent by email e Printer The printer path that the report should be sent to e Report Period Selection of days weeks or months from a list box The number of days or weeks is counted from the date that the report is first scheduled to be run Months are from the last full months data i e if the report is scheduled in February then January will be the last month in the report e Report Range The start and en
75. case Note While the 1416 supports three DBM32 availability of the DBM32 will be slightly delayed compared to availability of 1416 Color Black Mounting Desk or wall mountable with optional wall mount adapter Requirements for 1416 Connect to Digital Station DS port Power Supply From phone system Requirements for IP interface 1616 and 1616 1 Power Supply IEEE 802 3af Power over Ethernet PoE class 2 device or optional wall plug local power supply Codecs audio G 711 G 729a b Dynamic Jitter buffer Echo Cancellation Comfort Noise Automatic Gain Control QoS Options UDP Port Selection DiffServ and 802 1p q VLAN SNMP Support Yes IP Address Assignment Static or dynamic IP address assignment Ethernet Ports Ethernet 10 100 line interface with a secondary 10 100 port for co located laptop or PC with VLAN separation Support of optional Gigabit Ethernet Adapter Language Support Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 74 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 e 1416 1616 Supports the following languages English French Spanish German Italian Dutch Portuguese and Russian English and 4 of the other languages at once in the phone Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 75 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 BM32 Button Module for 1616 I P Phones DBM32 Button Module for 1416 Digital Phones The DBM32 BM32
76. cluster button o Volume up down separate volume levels for the handset speaker and ringer Mute button Speaker button Headset button o Avaya Menu button options and settings access Telephony application button to return to main telephone screen o Hold button Conference button Transfer button Drop button Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 71 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 o Contacts button Call log button Redial button quick access voicemail Message button Programmable Contextual buttons 11 o 8 line appearance feature key buttons with dual LEDs red green and paper labels Printing tool available Note For typical installs the first 3 buttons are reserved for standard call appearances a minimum of 2 call appearance buttons is needed for standard operation o Three contextual softkey buttons Key Labels Icons and text used on fixed feature keys Features Menu Mobile cell phone style menu with access to most often used features like Call Forwarding Park Settings etc On screen status indication for activated features like call forwarding Speakerphone High quality two way handsfree speaker and microphone Hearing Aid Compatible Yes ergonomic hearing aid compatible handset also supporting TTY acoustic coupler Message Waiting I ndicator Yes also useable as a ringing call alert indicator Personalized Ring Patterns Yes 8 Headset Socket Ye
77. control 235 236 distribute 254 Email 242 Forwarding 236 242 Hunt Groups 261 Individual 261 Interaction 242 IP500 235 PC 235 routed 253 Virtual 261 Voicemail Box Feature 261 Voicemail Breakout Personal Auto Attendant 235 Voicemail Collect 158 235 Voicemail email 249 265 309 Voicemail Email Connection 265 Voicemail email forwarding 249 Voicemail Email Integration 265 Voicemail Feature Comparison 261 voicemail greeting 16 Voicemail Help TUI 261 Voicemail Node 158 Voicemail Off 158 Voicemail On 158 249 309 VoicemailPC 265 Voicemail Ports 137 169 257 VoiceMail Pro 16 18 45 132 137 155 157 185 187 222 234 236 245 246 247 249 250 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 261 277 279 297 406 334 500MB 265 License 265 pool 251 prompting 248 VoiceMail Pro application 121 Voicemail Pro Client 236 248 250 255 257 VoiceMail Pro Fax 245 VoiceMail ProManager 248 261 VoiceMail Pro Networked Messaging 18 187 254 VoiceMail Pro Networked Messaging RFA 187 VoiceMail Pro Server 187 236 246 247 252 265 voicemail ringback 131 158 261 Voicemail Ringback Off 158 Voicemail Ringback On 158 Voicemail Server 187 195 234 236 265 Voicemail System 255 258 Voicemails 132 137 242 246 261 Product Description IP Office Release 6 0 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 372 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Index VolP 7 14 17 18 47 90 100 124 160 163 169 170 171 172 174 183 187 219
78. correctly Softphone will completely configure itself The user only needs to enter the username and password to get connected If DHCP is not available the user needs to enter a single IP address of the IP Office all other parameters will be set automatically Softphone can be set up so that when the PC starts up the application is automatically started with the default username and password The user can disable automatic login as well as interrupt it any time Username and Twinning When logged in to Softphone with their username and password the user will automatically be logged off from their existing desktop extension so the user is fully available on their normal number without any additional steps For users that are using a physical telephone e g in the office this is very convenient as they do not use a different extension for Softphone calls All calls will be routed automatically to the Softphone when logged in There is no need to use twinning to tie the Softphone to the standard desktop phone Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 216 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Supported Audio and Video Hardware Softphone can run with any Windows sound device supporting full duplex quality If possible audio devices are automatically detected and allocated to the Softphone Softphone supports simultaneous operation of two sound devices e g a headset or USB handset for normal calls and
79. desking user logged in at a remote system will want to dial a number using the system short codes of another system This can be done using either short codes with the Break Out feature or a programmable button set to Break Out This feature can be used by any user within the Small Community Network but is of significant use to remote hot deskers Note Remote Hot Desking is not supported for use with Customer Contact Center CCC or Customer Call Reporter CCR Features handled by the telephone itself are not affected by Hot Desking e g call log and phone speed dials Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 136 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Relay On Off Pulse IP Office is fitted with two independent switch outputs for controlling external equipment such as door entry systems Control of these switches is via allotted handsets allowing the switches to be opened closed or pulsed as required Control of switches is also accessible via Phone Manager Pro SoftConsole and VoiceMail Pro Pickup Call Pickup allows a user to answer a call presented to another extension Types of call pickup include e Pick up any call ringing on another extension e Pick up a hunt group call ringing on another extension where the user must be a member of that hunt group e Pick up a ringing call at a specified extension e Pick up any call ringing on another extension that is a member of the hunt group spec
80. e SIP Trunk Channels 20 Channels IPO LIC SIP TRNK RFA 20 202970 IP Endpoint Licenses With Release 6 0 all IP500 1IP500v2 IP endpoints Avaya IP endpoints as well as 3rd party IP endpoints require an endpoint license There are two different types of licenses available e Avaya IP Endpoint License required for all Avaya endpoints such as 1600 5600 9600 and DECT 3720 25 e 3rd Party IP Endpoint License this is a renaming of the IP End Point License and is required for all 3rd party SIP and H 323 endpoints e For each IP500 VCM32 and IP500 VCM64 card installed in the system the 4 unlicensed VCM channels previously provided by each card are converted to allow unlicensed support of 12 Avaya IP phones e Avaya IP Endpoint Licenses All Avaya 1P500 IP500v2 IP phones including DECT and WiFi phones require an Avaya IP Endpoint license and will consume one instance of that license Note this does not apply to the Avaya IP Office Softphone e Avaya IP Endpoint License 1 Phone IPO LIC R6 AV IP ENDPOINT 1 LIC CU 229444 e Avaya IP Endpoint License 5 Phones IPO LIC R6 AV IP ENDPOINT 5 LIC CU 229445 e Avaya IP Endpoint License 20 Phones IPO LIC R6 AV IP ENDPOINT 20 LIC CU 229447 e 3rd Party IP Endpoint Licenses Non Avaya IP phones SIP or H 323 devices require a 3rd Party IP Endpoint license to register to IP Office and will consume one instance of that license Note that Avaya cannot guarantee operation beyond makin
81. e Dimensions Height x Width X Depth 146 x 55 x 28 mm Optional telephone accessories include e Desktop charger e An adapter cord for use with headsets e Heavy duty belt clip Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 111 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 3711 I P DECT This telephone is fully supported on the Avaya IP DECT system However it can also be used on the Avaya DECT R4 system in GAP mode with functionality limited to standard calling functionality DECT roaming and handover The built in feature list will not work on DECT R4 The 3711 phone supports the same features as the 3701 IP DECT handset but with the following differences e Full handsfree speakerphone operation e Headset connection 2 5 mm jack e Vibrating alarm e Personal phone book with 100 entries e Access to system phone book e Voice Mail indication e Choice from 30 ring tones e Speaker and handset volume 7 levels and mute capability e Automatic call pick up using a headset e 10 menu languages Danish Dutch English Finnish French German Italian Portuguese Spanish and Swedish e Illuminated 5 line graphic display 96 x 60 pixels variable 7 level contrast Optional handset accessories include e Desktop charger e An adapter cord for use with headsets e Heavy duty belt clip Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 112 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 A
82. e Power Supply IEEE 802 3af Power over Ethernet PoE or optional local power supply Power Class 2 e Codecs audio G 711 G 729a b G 726 Dynamic J itter buffer Echo Cancellation Comfort Noise Automatic Gain Control Ready for future support of G 722 wideband codec e QoS Options UDP Port Selection DiffServ and 802 1p q VLAN e SNMP Support Yes e IP Address Assignment Static or dynamic IP address assignment e Ethernet Ports Ethernet 10 100 line interface with a secondary 10 100 port for co located laptop or PC with VLAN separation e Support of optional integrated Gigabit Ethernet adapter using adapter interface Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 65 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Accessories SBM24 Adapter Module The SBM24 Expansion Module is an optional device that extends the number of call appearances and Feature buttons available on the telephone The SBM24 Expansion Module is supported on the 9630 9640 amp 9650 IP Phones and provides 24 additional programmable buttons to be configured as call appearances bridged appearances or feature keys A maximum of three SBM24 modules are supported on a single phone e 24 programmable call appearance feature keys e Two backlight LCD screens for button labels Buttons automatically labeled from the system no paper labels e Connects directly to the associated phone e No separate power supply needed However
83. e T3 DSS units See the Telephones Section for specific limits on the number of each type of telephone supported on DS modules Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved IP Office Release 6 0 Page 349 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 I P400 Analog Trunk 16 Module This expansion module provides an additional sixteen Loop Start or Ground Start two wire analog trunks Ground start trunks are not available in all territories The first two trunks on the module which are automatically switched to power fail sockets on the rear of the unit in the event of power being interrupted must be loop start for correct power fail operation Analog Trunk Ports Individually switchable to loop or ground start PFi PF2 EXPANSION DC Power Input Socket DTE Serial Port Functional Power Fail Analog To IP Office To external power supply 25 pin D type socket Grounding Phone Sockets Control Unit unit Point During power fail PF1 Analog Trunk 1 PF2 Analog Trunk 2 Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 350 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Internal Daughter Cards Internal Daughter Cards are fitted inside the 1P406 V2 and 1P412 control units 1P400 Voice Compression Module 4 8 16 24 30 ports The Voice Compression Module VCM is used for Voice over IP VoIP applications in the IP406 and 1P412 control units Five VCM variants are available supporting 4 8
84. edited before it is actually dialed when going off hook Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved IP Office Release 6 0 Page 152 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Inbound Call Handling IP Office offers several features to provide versatile inbound call processing including PC based applications and a standards based TAPI interface for 3rd party applications Incoming Call Routing Incoming calls can to be presented to an Operator who then decides where to pass the call but IP Office supports intelligent call routing capable of making routing decisions based on a number of criteria The system currently supports routing based on e Call presentation digits from the exchange such as DDI DID or ISDN MSN e Calling telephone number or Caller ID This could even be part of the number received such as an area code e ISDN sub address e ISDN PRI service type i e Voice Call Data Call etc It is even possible to look for multiple criteria so for instance a DDI DID call to a sales group could be handled differently depending on which part of the country the call is originating from Each incoming Call Route also supports a secondary destination Night Service that can provide alternative routing for an incoming call based on time of day and day of week criteria as well as calendar based routing for specific dates Calls that cannot be routed to the configured destination are re routed to a user def
85. extension number e G represents a single digit group number e LL represents a system line number Intercom Dial Feature Code 16xx Call Pickup 166G Group Pickup 168LL Direct Line Pickup Active Line Simultaneous Paging 17G Group Calling Ring Group Calling Page Loudspeaker Paging Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 36 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Intercom Dial Feature Code 177G Group Hunting Ring 1 77G Group Hunting Voice Signal I8LL Direct Line Pickup Idle Line Intercom Dial Tone 309 Use this feature to determine the type of dial tone that the system provides at an extension It may be necessary to change this setting to Machine outside line dial tone for an autodialing device such as a fax or modem that has trouble making calls For example if you have a modem that checks for outside line dial tone before dialing use this procedure to change from Regular to Machine dial tone Intercom Manual Dialing Users can make an internal call to another extension by ringing it dialing it s extension number or voice signaling the extension by prefixing the extension number with a Line Coverage Extension 208 Use this feature to identify an extension as the owner of a specific outside line so the extension can activate Call Coverage or VMS Cover for that line Line Ringing Options This feature specifies the options
86. features for systems based on the IP500 and IP500 V2 control units e IP500 Universal PRI Additional Channel Licenses The IP500 PRI Universal trunk card IP500 PRI U is available in 1 or 2 port variants each port supporting a single PRI trunk connection Through the IP Office configuration the ports can be switched between supporting E1 E1R2 or T1 line types as required for the trunk being connected Each port supports 8 B channels Bearer which do not need to be licensed If additional B channels are required they must be licensed through the addition of the licenses below Multiple licenses can be added to achieve the total number of channels required D channels are not subject to licensing The licenses are consumed by those channels which are configured as being in service in order of the installed 1P500 PRI U cards e IP500 Universal PRI Additional E1 Channels Licenses These licenses are used to enable additional E1 B channels for 1P500 PRI U cards configured for E1 operation Each port can support up to 30 B channels in this mode e 1P500 Universal PRI Additional Channels 2 E1 Channels License IPO LIC IP500 E1 ADD 2CH 215183 e 1P500 Universal PRI Additional Channels 8 E1 Channels License IPO LIC IP500 E1 ADD 8CH 215184 e 1P500 Universal PRI Additional Channels 22 E1 Channels License IPO LIC IP500 E1 ADD 22CH 215185 e IP500 Universal PRI Additional E1R2 Channel Licenses These licenses are used to enable a
87. for people on the move Softphone is part of the Teleworker and the Power user package An applicable Teleworker Power User license for the user of the Softphone is required however Softphone does not require any additional license e g no Avaya P station license Softphone can run in two different operating modes a Softphone client mode The Softphone provides its own User interface similar to a standard IP Office telephone for making calls transferring calls multiple call appearances or making conference calls A programmable feature button list allows one touch access to standard IP Office features This is the preferred usage scenario for customers not running other IP Office productivity applications like one X portal It is also the preferred operation mode for users who want to smoothly migrate from their desktop phone or who use Softphone only occasionally and prefer a phone centric user interface with optional dial pad and standard phone feature keys The user interface is flexible allowing adjustment for personal preferences with detachable specific windows like the directory and call log window The attached picture shows the Softphone with dial pad and feature keys plus a view of the contacts of Softphone E Enter name or number IP Office Sofiphone Joseph Santos Contacts Softphone View i Gulv v Catt 1 asc 2 per 3
88. functionality of the IP Office system The following mobility solutions in particular add mobile devices currently not supported by Avaya for the IP Office so that users with one of these devices can participate from the rich IP Office mobility options Apple iPhone iEC5xx As the iPhone from Apple is increasingly used for business use Avaya has enabled an available DevConnect solution to extend IP Office mobility also to this popular device The application for the iPhone is called iEC5xx and acts like the Avaya one X Mobile clients The same configuration file that is been used to configure the Avaya clients enables the mobility functions at the iPhone The application is available at the Apple App Store For more information see http elinfierno de apps iec5xx Blackberry SoLo DTMF Client One of the most used mobile business devices is the RIM Blackberry To use a Blackberry with similar functions like the Avaya one X Mobile application the solution called SoLo DTMF client from SoSoftware enables selected Blackberry devices to use the IP Office mobility functions For more information and placing orders see http www sosoftware com solo mobile dtmf These 3rd party solutions have the same requirements as the Avaya mobility options Each user who wants to use one of the solutions requires at least one Power User or Mobile Worker license In addition at least a Preferred Edition might be required
89. have different expectations and different budgets to work to Some will be willing to upgrade their networks to use the best possible equipment and practices To others the additional expense may be viewed as unnecessary Examples of standards based Quality of Service protocols include DiffServ and 802 1p q What are Voice Compression Modules VCM s for VCM s are required to support the following scenarios e Internal phone calls between an IP device and a non IP device e Analog digital phones to IP trunks SIP H 323 including managed Frame Relay and managed IP VPN provides echo cancellation e IP phones to ISDN or PSTN trunks convert IP to TDM and vice versa IP device to IP device Call progress tones for example dial tone secondary dial tone etc do not require voice compression channels with the following exceptions e Short code confirmation ARS camp on and account code entry tones require a voice compression channel e Devices using G 723 require a voice compression channel for all tones except call waiting When a call is connected e If the IP devices use the same audio codec no voice compression channel is used e If the devices use differing audio codecs a voice compression channel is required for each Direct Media is a VolP concept that circumvents resources TDM bus Gateway within the system and improves the voice quality If two IP devices are connected on the same system a direct LAN connection bet
90. in 2 variants 16 or 30 extensions For installations in a rack this module requires the IP500 Rack Mounting Kit The IP500 Digital Station Module is functionally identical to the IP400 Digital Station V2 Module IP Office 500 TW 1 19 20 21 22 23 24 17 24 25 30 oooooooo ee000000 eeo00ee0 etetaaranair eee S ee EXPANSION 16 24 DC 5 04 MAX DIGITAL STATION 2 24 DC 1 54 PHONE V2 e Telephones can be located up to 3280 feet 1km from the control unit For extensions located out of the building additional line protection will be needed For more information on cabling and out of building guidelines see the IP Office Installation Manual e For systems where Direct Station Select DSS Units are being used IP Office supports a maximum of e BM32 1616 Up to 32 DBM32s supported 32 buttons each up to 1024 buttons e DSS4450 4412D 4424D Up to 8 DSS4450 modules per system maximum of 2 per DS expansion module including the P406v2 50 buttons each max 400 buttons e DBM32 1416 Up to 32 DBM32s supported 32 buttons each up to 1024 buttons e EU24 EU24BL 4620 4621 5420 5620 5621 4620 4621 5620 5621 Up to 8 EU24s per system 24 buttons each max 196 buttons e SBM24 9630G 9640 9640G 9650 9650C Up to 42 SBM24s per system 24 buttons each up to 1008 buttons e T3 Series All T3 phones Up to 30 T3 DSS modules supported 36 buttons each up to 1080 buttons T3 DS
91. in order to keep all messages synchronized through one user interface Essential Edition also enables some basic messaging through the ability to forward voicemail messages to the user s email inbox Voicemail in general provides a telephone answering machine with a personalized greeting on every employee s desk and allows callers to leave spoken messages when the user cannot answer a telephone call Voicemail messages are retrieved either locally or remotely via any telephone users are prompted for a PIN if they are using any telephone other than their allocated extension or a trusted location e g mobile telephone The voicemail server is multi lingual and can offer different prompts depending on the user s preferred language independently of the default system setup Similarly external callers can hear prompts in their own language depending on their incoming call route e g based on caller ID Voicemail options available are e IP Office Essential Edition e Embedded Voicemail e IP Office Preferred Edition e VoiceMail Pro for single site use e Distributed VoiceMail Pro for multi site use in a Small Community Network SCN e Centralized INTUITY Audix Modular Messaging Voicemail for use with Avaya Communication Manager Positioning Summary For further details refer to Voicemail Feature Comparison 264 at the end of this section Preferred Edition Essential Edition VoiceMail Pro Embedded Voicemail Supported IP Office Sy
92. instantly contactable with many obvious benefits e The wireless telephone is carried in the pocket so users are not tied to the desk in order to remain in contact e Users may be contacted instantly to ensure fast accurate decision making and immediate response to problems through planned radio coverage with no blind spots Avaya Wireless and Remote Solutions IP Office supports the following wireless solutions e DECT R4 is the mainstream IP based DECT solution offered in the EMEA and NA regions and in selected APAC countries With the new Compact base station it is also the first choice for small installs with smaller channel capacity need e P DECT in the EMEA and NA regions and in selected APAC countries is also supported on IP Office Note that the IP DECT solution will be eventually completely replaced by DECT R4 e Digital Wireless North American market e Avaya VolP WiFi Solution offered worldwide in selected countries including North America EU countries and selected others IP Office supports the following VPN remote phone solutions e VPN phone functionality on all supported 9600 phones VPN functionality is a integral part of the 9600 software and does neither require a separate software load nor does it require a license e VPN phone client on 4610SW 4621SW 5610SW and 5621SW IP phones offered worldwide Which DECT solution should be used For all new installs we strongly recommend selection of the new DECT R4
93. integration IP Office solutions are built from hardware units and application software Hardware provides the connectivity for voice and data circuits and processor units for the solution software Each IP Office solution will require a system control unit IP500 or 1P500 V2 trunk connections to service provider and expansion modules for TDM phone cabling IP Phones connect over LAN connections to the IP Office solution Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 44 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 IP Office Control Unit With Release 6 a new control unit IP Office 500 V2 IP500 V2 will be launched The existing IP Office 500 control unit 1P500 will be phased out in the near future The IP500 V2 control unit is compatible with all P500 base extension and VCM cards as well as all external IP500 expansion modules The 1P500 and IP500 V2 are stackable units with an optional 19 rack mounting kit and an optional wall mounting kit for smaller configurations They provide e 4 slots to house a mixture of extension cards and VCM cards e Digital Station 8 card e Phone 2 and Phone 8 cards e VCM 32 and VCM 64 cards e 4 Port Expansion card e ETR 6 port phone card 1P500 V2 only North America only e Combination Card with 10 VCM channels 4 analog trunks 6 Digital Station DS and 2 Phone ports IP500 V2 only e Combination Card with 10 VCM channels 2 BRI trunk interfaces 4 channels 6 D
94. interface when using one X Portal with a desktop phone in telecommuter mode or in combination with Softphone 2 Off line call log with updates even when Softphone is not logged in 3 Additional features of one X Portal e g presence and instant messaging Product Description IP Office Release 6 0 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 214 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Video Support As well as audio calls IP Office Video Softphone supports end to end video calls on a single IP Office or within an IP Office Small Community Network Currently video is limited to end to end calls no multi party conferencing is supported IP OMice Softphone Joseph Softphone View Contacts Call established Kokila Video Softphone aa Sending my video is Video adds a new level of interaction to the standard phone communication so this is especially useful for users working from a remote location needing to get in touch with colleagues in the main site or when used in an IP Office Small Community Network Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 215 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Feature Overview The following feature overview is applicable when using the Softphone in Client mode When used in application mode functionality depends on that application e Making and receiving calls e Multiple Call Appearances No bridged or line appearances e Hold transfer attend
95. jump to particular administration items Centralized Programming is similar to System Administration but it is used to administer buttons and other options for any phone in the system Individual Programming continues to be supported allowing the station user to program buttons on their sets e Graphical User Interface GUI PARTNER Version provides a Simplified Manager mode in the IP Office Manager software allowing you to program the system in less than 30 minutes Simplified Manager is a PC GUI application inherent to the IP Office Manager application Although system administration can be completed via either the TUI or GUI method some advanced features such as SIP and PRI T1 administration require the Manager application When you execute Manager the program searches for any IP500v2 units running PARTNER Version on your network and will automatically connect using the default login and password You are then presented with a Simplified Manager Screen Office R6 Manager Ron s Home 6 0 11044 Administrator Admanestrator System Welcome to IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version Administration What would you like to do Please review the current IP Office Setup below __ Change Remote Administration Password Hardware Installed a RSA Control Unit IP 500 V2 Change System Semegs Internal Modules COMBO6210 ATM4 ETREPRIS U PHONES Create Calling Lists Expansion Modules DIG DCPx16 V2 j Feat
96. long distance or international numbers Analog phone users can only enter account codes before making a call or in response to an audible system prompt to enter a code when making the call Account codes can also be entered through the one X Portal for IP Office and Phone Manager A system wide setting determines whether Phone Manager will display a list of account codes from which the user can select the code required or will hide the account code list In all the cases above the account code entered is included with the call details in the IP Office s call record output SMDR Authorization Codes Authorization codes allow an IP Office user to go to another extension on the system and make calls using their personal toll restrictions this may grant the user greater or fewer privileges than the normal owner of the extension they use Since Authorization Codes are independent of Account Codes the user has to enter both if the required by the system configuration All entered codes are logged in SMDR Dial Emergency Dial emergency is an IP Office Short Code and permits certain numbers to be dialed regardless of call barring or a phone being logged out Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 143 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Call Barring Feature e It is possible to prevent or allow calls to certain numbers such as international numbers or premium rate numbers for individual users
97. looks good to me Inbox Dave 2 0 PC voicemail Voicemail Message Extn202 gt Extn201 From Peter Jones Fri 23 02 2001 08 59 ae 0 PC Voicemail Voicemail Message Extn202 gt Extn201 From 0345385951 Fri 23 02 2001 09 Calendar Alchemy Voicemail redirected message Virus checked by AVP lt end gt f PC Voicemail Voicemail Message Extn202 gt Extn201 From Adam Philpott Fri 23 02 2001 09 Voicemail redirected n aoe Virus checked b To Steve Richards From PC Voicemail Subject Yoicemal Message Extn202 gt Extn201 From 202 Cc ones kts esas ences seca arity AP Office Voicemail redirected message Presentation of Voicemail to Email Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 242 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Unified Messaging Service UMS Unified Messaging Service UMS provides the integration of VoiceMail Pro with email systems A very simple installation and configuration process enables users to manage their voicemail messages by using the device of their choice including email clients or mobile devices UMS is licensed on a per user basis as part of the IP Office Power User Teleworker and Office Worker Depending on the existing infrastructure UMS can be integrated with I MAP based email solutions as well as with Microsoft Exchange Server 2007 environments Voicemail Synchronization via I MAP Email applications such as Outlook which support IMAP
98. multiple devices to share the same line however point to point is the preferred mode Basic rate supports all the services that are supported on the primary rate version with the addition of e Multiple Subscriber Number This service is usually mutually exclusive with the DDI DID service and provides up to 10 numbers for routing purposes very similar to DDI DID Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 176 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Additional I SDN features The following ISDN features are supported by IP Office 4 0 on both PRI and BRI trunks Note that availability of these features is dependant on their also being supported and available from the ISDN service provider for which there may be charges e Malicious Call Identification MCI D 24xx 46xx 54xx 56xx T3 T3 IP DECT phones Phone Manager Short codes and button programming features are available so that users can trigger this activity at the ISDN exchange when required This feature is NOT available on standard ISDN DSS1 phones e Advice of Charge AOC T3 digital and IP phones only Phone Manager Advice of charge during a call AOC D and at the end of a call AOC E is supported for outgoing ISDN calls other than QSIG The call cost is displayable on T3 phones as well as Phone Manager and included in the IP Office Delta Server SMDR output for call accounting purposes The IP Office allows configuration of call cost currency
99. not support the WAN3 10 100 All other platforms support up to two WAN3 10 100 modules WAH Link Status LEDs Unit Status LED LAN Port Red Starting Conects to control unit LAN port Green Started OK Green LED On Connected Yelow LED On Activity DC Power Input Socket DTE Serial Port WAH Ports To external power supply 25 pin D type socket 37 way D type sockets unit I P400 So8 Expansion Module The IP400 So8 module provides 8 S Bus interfaces for Basic Rate ISDN devices such as video conferencing fax servers or ISDN telephones BRI S Ports Unit Status LED Red Starting Green Started OK EXPANSION DC Power Input Socket DTE Serial Port Functional To IP Office Control Unit To external power supply 25 pin D type socket Grounding unit Point The IP Office So8 expansion module supports both point to point and point to multipoint connections A maximum of 10 terminal endpoints identifiers TEIs are supported on each bus Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 338 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Small Office Edition The IP Office Small Office Edition is the entry level control unit of the IP Office solution and is delivered in a compact configuration that provides a mix of Analog trunks Analog and Digital extensions and Voice over IP VoIP capacity Dependant on the model chosen up to a maximum of 28 extensions can be supported 4 Analog 8
100. one X Portal for IP Office accesses the centralized call log and therefore presents a record of all calls even if the user s PC is switched off when a call is received Call log entries can be added to the personal directory IP Office Phone Manager maintains a call history record of the user s last 100 calls The application must be running to record call history Phone Manager Lite can display call history for all calls and missed calls only Phone Manager Pro can display call histories for all calls missed calls inbound calls and outbound calls Entries in the call history can be used for return calls sorted and added to the Phone Managers local directory or speed dials Benefit e Missed calls are easily tracked and can be returned e Call log data is retained even after power down and a system reset 1400 1600 9600 T3 and one X Portal for IP Office e Centralized call log is supported in the SCN when using hotdesking 1400 1600 9600 T3 and one X Portal for IP Office e Consistency between desktop phones and user productivity application 1400 1600 9600 T3 and one X Portal for IP Office Language Avaya digital and IP phone menus and displays are available in many languages and usually the system default setting will be applicable to all phones however it is possible to have language set on an extension by extension basis this will also change the language of menus for IP Office Voicemail Product Description 20
101. open SIP standard giving customers a choice of endpoints of different manufacterers including special purpose devices like conference phones hotel phones or terminal adapters In order to use a SIP endpoint with IP Office a Third party IP endpoint license is needed This license will continue to support endpoints based on the H 323 standard but will also be required for generic SIP endpoints on IP Office SIP Endpoint support is fully integrated into IP Office core No other components are needed SIP endpoints will need VCM module capacity in IP Office like any other IP phone Next to SIP telephones SIP terminal adapters are supported to connect analog phones and fax machines This offers a flexibility to support Fax machines and Audio T 38 SIP extensions function like any other IP Office extension This means they e Can make and receive calls to any other extension independet of type of extension e Delivers end to end Media just like any other IP telephone on IP Office For calls between two SIP extensions of a SIP extension and a Avaya IP telephone the audio is transmitted end to end for basic telephone calls Conferences etc However require a VCM resource See chapter VCM modules for details e Can use short codes and authorization codes like any other phones e Transmit In band call progress tones are delivered from IP Office e ASIP phones needs to register with IP Office like any other IP telephone Authentification with Userna
102. or 0 Transfer call to operator Yes 3 or D Delete Yes 8 or U Un delete Yes 4 or H Hold message in category Yes 8 or T Transfer out Yes 7 or R Log in again Yes 9 Increase speed Not supported 8 Decrease speed Not supported 4 Increase volume Not supported 7 Decrease volume Not supported 6 Skip forward Yes 5 Skip backwards Yes 6 Skip to next message component Yes 5 Skip to previous message component Yes 2 or 2 Rewind to start of message skip to previous Yes message 3 Play back header after pressing 2 Yes 1 Print fax or text Available as an option but fax messages not currently supported Options for addressing voicemails 2 or A Alternate between name and number addressing Yes 5 or L Use mailing list for addressing Yes 0 Call the sender Yes provided Caller ID is provided 1 Reply to the sender by voicemail Yes 2 Forward with comment at beginning Yes 3 Forward with comment at the end Yes 4 Record and address a message Yes 1 Record Send messages Yes 2 Get messages Yes 3 Create greetings Yes 4 Outgoing and filed messages Not supported 5 Personal Options Support for options 1 3 7 6 Outcalling Yes 7 Autoscan Autoprint Autoscan supported Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 264 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 PC Requirements General Requirements e The IP Office Preferred Edition license enables a 4 port VoiceMail Pro and up to
103. or on a system wide basis Benefit e Restrict the dialing of specific numbers or types of numbers system wide e Restrict certain users from dialing specific numbers or types of numbers Description IP Office supports call barring at many levels Short codes can be used at the system or individual user level to block the external routing of specific numbers or types of numbers Typically the barring short codes are set to return busy tone however they could route the call to an alternate number or to a Voicemail service that returns a barred dialing message For users the short codes can be allocated to a User Rights template This template is then applied to the Users whose calls need restriction In addition to barring the dialling of certain numbers IP Office can be set to bar the forwarding of calls to external numbers on a per user basis Alternate Route Selection ARS IP Office supports Alternate Route Selection which is more flexible and easier to configure than Least Cost Routing LCR If a primary trunk is unavailable then ARS provides automatic fallback to an available trunk e g analog trunk fallback if a T1 or SIP trunk fails or use PSTN for SCN fallback By configuring ARS calls may be routed via the optimum carrier Time profiles can also be used to allow customers to take advantage of cheaper rates or better quality at specific times of day Multiple carriers are supported For example local calls are t
104. p 05 August 2010 Call Coverage Feature e Allow unanswered calls to alert at other user extensions and be answered there before being forwarded or going to voicemail Benefit e Provide users the opportunity to answer colleague s unanswered calls before they go to voicemail Description When a user has an unanswered call ringing after a configurable delay the call will also start alerting on any call coverage buttons associated with the user on other extensions The call can then be answered by pressing the call coverage button If still unanswered the call is forward or goes to voicemail as normal The time a call rings before also alerting on any associated call coverage buttons can be adjusted for each user External Call Lamp I ndication Feature e New system wide configuration parameter to select the LED flash pattern for external calls on Bridged and Coverage appearances Benefit e The user can determine if the covered call is internal or external Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 142 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Outbound Call Handling Features Every business needs to make calls but depending on the type of business these calls may need to be treated in a special way such as recorded against a project or client through the use of Account Codes A business may have several sites linked via a private network but certain users like customer service
105. port e Power Supply From phone system Requirements for IP interface 1603 1603SW 1603 1 1603SW 1 e Power Supply Optional IEEE 802 3af Power over Ethernet PoE adapter class 2 or optional wall plug local power supply e Codecs audio G 711 G 729a b Dynamic Jitter buffer Echo Cancellation Comfort Noise Automatic Gain Control e QoS Options UDP Port Selection DiffServ and 802 1p q VLAN e SNMP Support Yes e IP Address Assignment Static or dynamic IP address assignment e Ethernet Ports 1603 Single Ethernet 10 100 line interface Support of optional Gigabit Ethernet Adapter e Ethernet Ports 1603 SW Ethernet 10 100 line interface with a secondary 10 100 port for co located laptop or PC with VLAN separation Support of optional Gigabit Ethernet Adapter e Well suited for everyday use where typically smaller sized data files transferred web email file attachments or less demanding data transfer application usage thus less sensitive to data transfer completion times e For highly demanding data traffic processing with large amounts of small packets we recommend the 1616 phone for full speed data throughput Language Support e 1403 1603 Supports the following languages English French Spanish German Italian Dutch Portuguese and Russian English and 4 of the other languages at once in the phone Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 70 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20
106. queue limit can be set to control the maximum number of calls to wait against a hunt group While queuing if Voicemail is operational the caller will be played the announcements for this hunt group Announcements From IP Office 4 0 onwards Hunt group announcements are separated from hunt group queuing and can be used even when queuing is off Hunt group announcements are now supported by Embedded Voicemail in addition to VoiceMail Pro Further times for the first announcement second announcement and between repeated announcements are configurable Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 155 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Contact Center Features Contact Centers have specific needs for reporting on how calls are handled and these are covered in a separate section of the Product Description Basic handling of telephony requirements for a Call Center is a standard part of IP Office from Automatic Call Distribution ACD and Call Queuing to agents logging on and selecting the groups that they service Login A contact center agent function login is required before the agent is able to make or receive calls from their phone A login idle period can be specified which will dictate how long an extension can be idle before the user is automatically logged out ensuring that an extension is not left logged in and calls go unanswered Monitor Calls A user can monitor other people
107. resources of IP Office These network resources can range from dial up ISDN connections point to point leased circuits managed IP networks or Frame Relay as IP Office supports all these types of network connections Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 195 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Data Networking Features Integral 10 100 Mbit Layer 3 Ethernet Switch Layer 3 switching is particularly useful in situations where it is desirable to have a trusted and unsecured network where the unsecured network is uncontrolled and carries public traffic on it It is possible to set up a firewall between two LAN segments using the IP Office layer 3 switch 1P500 and IP500 V2 support a two port Layer 3 Ethernet switch with the firewall between them Both of these switched ports have their own IP addresses LAN1 and LAN2 and in order for traffic to pass from one port to the other a route is configured in the system s routing tables DHCP Server IP Office can manage your IP Network for you through its integral DHCP Server IP Office can be configured to hold a pool of IP addresses for users on the Local Area Network When a user powers up their PC the system will allocate them an IP address for the duration of their session The DHCP server also provides the user s PC with the address of the Domain Name Service DNS server and the Windows Name Service WINS server Alternati
108. rights reserved Page 163 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 SI P Endpoint Support Session Initiation Protocol SIP pronounced just like sip as in sipping from a fire hose on a hot day is an open signaling protocol for establishing any kind of real time communication session The communication session can involve voice video or instant messaging and can take place on one of many devices that people use for communicating laptop computer PDA cell phone IM client IP phone and so on SIP has been developed in the Internet Engineering Task Force IETF by common participation from various vendors including Avaya Avaya IP Office supports SIP for telephony functions to enable the usage of standard based SIP endpoints for Voice and Fax communication Different to pure SIP systems IP Office expands the feature set beyond the SIP standard offering a wealth of IP Office features also on SIP endpoints delivering a feature rich system that a pure SIP server based on the SIP standard only can t deliver With that IP Office delivers the best of both worlds supporting standard based IP telephones while delivering a wealth of features consistently between SIP digital and Avaya IP endpoints IP Office SIP endpoint implementation is built on two major SIP components SIP User agents and SIP Server components SIP Components SIP Endpoints User Agents User agents UAs are applications in SIP endpoints such as a SIP pho
109. s s Please re enter your new password coon TINANA COSSNNNNNO NCW Gang posmos AVAYA cone Welcome Manke Sinat Shange past TER AVAYA lt Delete Put in Folder 5 Muk as tead Mak as woad a Forward Voicemail Pro roser e v E Inbox F Stata Callar IQ Received on v Lenath at twor i 8 Trash r a 0001212 01 May 2008 16 24 03 1m9s Bee 5 5 r 0056269 30 April 2008 15 15 06 38s saisai Cr a 0001905 22 April 2008 15 07 22 4s ae 16 April 2008 15 1 c Forward to Extensions N Moke Message I Number Name AVAYA Manke 7675 1 9227 Exn9227 al Message From Recevet Lergh M 9228 Extn9228 a 16 April 2008 15 16 55 8s T 9229 xn9229 X Delto O Putin Folder Ld Save Mant a Makasumead forward m 9231 Exin9231 Windows Media Player M 9232 Exin9232 Select media player y m 9233 Extn9233 of uu Fane Forward Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 243 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 UMS Web Access requires the VoiceMail Pro installation to be on a server with IIS pre installed In addition the VoiceMail Pro UMS Web Access option must be selected during installation Once installed the system will require the following additional configuration e P Office Power User Teleworker and Office Worker licenses for the number of users that will be configured to use UMS e Users selected for UMS support must be enabled by the system administrator in IP O
110. set of rich yet easy to use communication capabilities e Example user Sales Executive Banker Lawyer Project leader Phones for the different Usage categories e Walk Up 1603 1403 5402 2402 T3 Compact Europe only e Everyday 1603SW Basic Everyday 1608 9620 9620C 1408 5610SW 4610SW 5410 2410 T3 Classic Europe only e Receptionist Assistant 1616 with BM32 if needed 9650 with SBM24 1416 with DBM32 if needed 5621 4621SW with EU24 5420 2420 with EU24 T3 Comfort Europe only e Executive 9630 9640 5621 4621SW 5420 2420 T3 Comfort Europe only Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 58 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 9600 Series I P Telephones Avaya one X Deskphone is a family of next generation IP telephones that delivers a new and unique communications experience to drive increased productivity The Avaya one X Deskphone family features an intuitive user interface which helps to make users proficient and confident in performing common telephone tasks such as setting up a conference call or completing a transfer With high quality audio it is much easier to hear and understand other people which speeds business while reducing fatigue and stress The Avaya 9600 Series Deskphones are built with future growth and enhancement in mind with many modular add ons that can be added as they are needed protecting investments and leading to improved total cost of own
111. solution as future functionality additions will happen only on DECT R4 The new 3720 and 3725 handsets offer enhanced capabilities the latter supporting a color screen and Bluetooth headset The functionality GAP of DECT R4 requiring a AIWS server for corporate directory access has been closed with Release 6 moving access to IP Office telephone book back onto the Master base station While being fully supported on IP Office Release 5 the current IP DECT solution with the 3701 and 3711 handsets will be replaced by the new DECT R4 solution with superior features in the upcoming future End of Sale will be announced Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 90 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Wireless DECT R4 The Avaya DECT R4 solution delivers the productivity boosting benefits of IP and wireless communications across multiple offices in a convenient lightweight handset It provides businesses with a highly functional wireless solution with the ability to scale to support large numbers of users This system also supports users in different offices connected via a WAN The Avaya DECT R4 solution radio fixed part or IP base station IPBS connects to the IP Office using an IP protocol based on H 323 Avaya s DECT R4 solution features all advantages of a full blown DECT solution for the enterprise market Cost effective high wireless voice quality in a frequency band exclusively reserved for DECT tha
112. solution with the ability to scale to support large numbers of users This system also supports users in different offices connected via a WAN The Avaya IP DECT solution radio fixed part RFP or base station connects to the IP Office using an IP protocol based on H 323 The Avaya IP DECT solution supports up to 120 handsets and 32 base stations Each base station can be powered over the LAN using the Power over Ethernet PoE standard Each indoor base station can also optionally be connected to main power via an external power adaptor Each outdoor base station can only be powered using PoE no individual power supplies are available to power the outdoor IP DECT base station In EMEA and APAC this system supports the 3701 and 3711 handsets In North America only the 3711 handset is supported Note The regulatory requirements for the radio part base station and Handset are slightly different in the US and Canada compared to EMEA and APAC Therefore while providing the same functionality the hardware is different in these two regions Each Base station has the following features e 8 simultaneous Voice and up to 12 Signaling Channels e Codec G 711 G 723 G 729 for base station IP trunk connection e Handover While in motion the handset performs continuous measurements to determine which IP DECT base station has the strongest signal The one that can be best received is defined as the active Base station To prevent the handset from rapi
113. taking and order processing systems front end systems to help desks support desks contact centers secure access to information through PIN checking survey systems remote time sheet management etc The ability to interact with database information is enabled through the purchase of the IP Office Advanced Edition The VoiceMail Pro Client supports four Database Action Icons which can be implemented into the VoiceMail Pro call flows The entry of the IP Office Advanced Edition license will enable the VoiceMail Pro server to use these actions in call flows W oicemail Pro Client d lol x File Edit Actions Administration Help 4 2 BG IETEIER TAAA e A a E eg Hg i Specific Start Points Modules gt BookShop_Search_ISBN Ss Database Open A Users B Database Execute Groups A E Database Get Data Gl Short Codes Database Close a Default Start Points BE 35 e Success a ictal Capture ISBN 20m Timeout a Failure p Modules ae BookShop_CurrentBc EJ Request ISBN From DB Timeout p age BookShop_CurrentBc Success i Success D fi age BookShop_Search_ f Jat End p j2 n age BookShop_SystemPr Empty oe BookShop_Welcome age BookShop_Search_ Failure p Example Call Flow Utilizing Database Actions The database actions that are provided through the VoiceMail
114. the 1st instance and subsequent instances of the PC based operator console Additional licenses can be added for up to 4 SoftConsoles running at any time Customer Service Agent This User Profile is targeted at employees who are responsible for fielding customer service calls This agent license enables a user to use IP Office Customer Call Reporter It provides them with a web browser interface to view key statistics in real time and also allows supervisor to track their performance with IP Office Customer Call Reporter Up to 150 agents can be licensed on IP Office Customer Call Reporter e Customer Service Agent License 1 User IPO LIC CUSTMR SVC AGT RFA 1 217650 e Customer Service Agent License 5 Users IPO LIC CUSTMR SVC AGT RFA 5 217651 e Customer Service Agent License 20 Users IPO LIC CUSTMR SVC AGT RFA 20 217653 Customer Service Supervisor This User Profile enables service supervisors to track measure and create reports for agent or a group of agents productivity via a web browser interface This supervisor license enables a supervisor to use IP Office Customer Call Reporter Up to 30 supervisors can be licensed on IP Office Customer Call Reporter e Customer Service Supervisor License 1 User IPO LIC R6 CUSTMR SVC SPV 1 229442 Release 6 onwards CCC to CCR Migration This upgrade license will convert ALL Compact Contact Center CCC licenses to Customer Call Reporter CCR This includes all super
115. the called party is unable to take the call A mailbox user can configure the responses played back to the caller based upon the reason the caller was routed to the voicemail The supported call states are e Busy Engaged The user is currently on a call and unable to accept a second call e No Reply The user is away from the desk and unable to take a call e Internal A greeting to be played to internal calls e External The greeting to be played to external callers e Out Of Hours The greeting played when a hunt group is operating out of hours Out of hours is defined with IP Office Manager and is only applicable to hunt group mailboxes A greeting can be recorded for each of the above conditions through the Telephone User Interface TUI If a recording is made for each condition the order of play back to a caller will be 1 Out of hours Hunt group mailboxes only 2 Internal External greeting 3 Busy Engaged 4 No reply A mailbox owner will need to record greetings against these conditions to deliver the greeting that they wish to present to a caller one X Portal for IP Office amp Phone Manager Pro users can record and manage their voicemail greetings through the application GUI Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 253 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Hunt Group Broadcast Messages With VoiceMail Pro two modes of operation exist for the handling of hunt
116. the particular license each supported instance may be consumed either when it is configured for use or alternatively when it is actually being used When no further instances of a license are available further use of the licensed feature is not allowed Typically for port channel and user licenses multiple licenses can be added to give a higher number of supported ports channels or users However licenses above the capacity supported by the particular IP Office control unit will not work The following sections detail the current individual IP Office licenses The actual licenses are indicated by a icon and the following information e License Name in IP Office Configuration Avaya orderable part name Material Code License description IP Office Upgrade License From Release 6 onwards IP Office needs a valid Release Entitlement to run For new IP500 V2 systems the Release Entitlement will be free of charge delivered with the SD Card To upgrade an older IP Office system to Release 6 an Upgrade license is required e Upgrading from R5 or earlier to Release 6 up to 32 users IPO LIC UPG R6 0 SML 229421 Single control unit with no external expansion modules e Upgrading from R5 or earlier to Release 6 more than 32 users IPO LIC UPG R6 0 229420 e Allows any Release from 6 x to 10 x inclusive to run IPO LIC UPG R6 TO R10 229422 Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 322 IP Office Rele
117. their call forwarding and follow me numbers Together these actions provide a comprehensive Personal Numbering service for the user who needs to remain in contact regardless of their physical location Users with Mobile Twinning configured are able to remotely activate their twinning capabilities through VoiceMail Pro call flow Incoming Call ISDN Mobile Network In the office Working from home On the road Diagram illustrating Personal Numbering Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 249 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Accessing Database Information within Call Flows IVR VoiceMail Pro provides the ability to construct powerful interactive systems based upon DTMF telephone key entry This is achieved by using the flexibility provided from the built in call flow actions As a caller passes through any part of a defined call flow the system is capable of interacting with most third party databases using the standards based ADO interface ActiveX Data Objects The system is capable of retrieving information from a database and writing information into databases The result of this is that powerful Interactive Voice Response systems IVR can be delivered to specifically meet the requirements of the business and the customer experience that is required Example interactive systems that can be built as a result of these facilities include Information bulletin boards order
118. to answer time the number of calls overflowed and lost the average abandon time as well as the grade of service e Trace Reports The Trace Report lists in chronological order all the events date and time stamped that involved the subject selected e Alarm Reports Alarm reports can be created for the Supervisor Views All the alarms for the selected subject are listed over a user specified time period Totals are included that show the number of warning and critical alarms received for each unique alarm type included in the report e Voicemail Reports The report shows the following information Total calls answered by the Auto Attendant VMPro total calls abandoned lost in Auto Attendant and a table of unique call flow trigger names with a tally of the number of times the trigger has been received e g who pressed 1 for sales in the Auto Attendant Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 284 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Creating an IP Office Customer Call Reporter Report From the seven basic report templates within IP Office Customer Call Reporter a user can create over 100 different reports depending upon how they want to see the information that is most useful for their business All standard report templates have common fields that can be completed to create a report And when entering details in a field a wildcard can be used to represent everything The common fields are listed
119. to create a library of vertical voicemail applications or just easy dissemination to other IP Office voicemail sites thanks to its import and export functionality Activation of the external relays on the IP Office system For example remotely checking the status of the office heating and then turning it on from your mobile cell phone on your drive in to work Key features of VoiceMail Pro include Personal voice mailbox for users and hunt groups Personal Numbering follow me Extended personal greetings to customize the information presented to a caller based upon the availability of a user Unified Messaging UMS offers voice mail email synchronization between the VoiceMail Pro server and the email client UMS Web Access allows access to voice mails via a web interface from an internet browser UMS integration of VoiceMail Pro with Microsoft Exchange 2007 Server for full message synchronization Enables mobile messaging integration e g Blackberry when used with Exchange 2007 server integration Forwarding of voicemail messages to email systems via SMTP VoiceMail Pro client a graphical user interface for programming and configuring applications both locally and remotely Data base access via Interactive Voice Response IVR for individual business requirements Audiotex and Auto Attendant services including dial by name Sophisticated queue announcement facilities Access and control of voicemail via the digital or I
120. using more than one button module changes the power class of the phone to Class 3 The total number of SBM24 button modules supported on one IP Office system is 42 subject to the total system limits Please refer to System Button Module Support 8 for the total system limitations of button modules on IP Office A Button Module adapter Ferrite adapter is required when SBM24 button expansion module is used with the 9630G or 9640G IP telephones Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 66 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Bluetooth Adapter The Bluetooth Adapter for 9600 Series IP Telephones allows Bluetooth communications devices such as headsets to interoperate with 9600 Series telephones The adapter allows highly mobile workers to use the same Bluetooth headset with their 9600 Series Deskphone as they use with their cell phone The Avaya ABT 35H Bluetooth headset when used with the Bluetooth Adapter supports a wireless range of up to 30 feet from the Deskphone and provides simple call control answer hang up directly from the headset For users while at their desk the Bluetooth Adapter allows the freedom of hands free communication along with investment protection for those already utilizing Bluetooth headsets while on the go It supports the Avaya ABT 35 as well as many other third party Bluetooth Headsets The Bluetooth Adapter can be used with all 9600 phones except the 9620L It requires
121. voicemail messages emails and fax message VoiceMail Pro can also provide the ability to retrieve email messages through the telephone When operating in INTUITY mode and with Power Users and or Mobile Workers licensed these users will be presented with a list of both voicemail messages and email messages The emails can then be read out over the telephone The benefit to the user is that their messages are now accessible while in and out of the office through any telephone The user s email account needs to be configured in IP Office manager to enable TTS functionality When accessing messages through the telephone all new voicemail messages will be presented to the mailbox owner before any new email messages When accessing an email message the system refers to the message as New message with text Emails will be read based on the user language setting in IP Office depending on the TTS engine capability With no additional TTS engine installed VoiceMail Pro TTS will use the TTS engine installed with the Microsoft Windows operating system If using Avaya TTS then 22 languages are supported If using 3rd party TTS please refer to the vendor documentation for supported languages Avaya TTS is an optional license Where the user has email reading in their voicemail box they will be able to record a voice reply to the email and send it as a WAV attachment to a reply email to the person who sent the email A maximum of eight users can use TTS f
122. with Cannot be Intruded setting would prevent others from joining their call Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 135 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Inclusion This feature enables selected users to intrude on calls that are already in progress The intruding party intrudes on the existing call and all parties hear a tone The speech path is enabled between the intruding party and the called user the other party is forced onto hold and will not hear the conversation On completion of the intrusion the called party speech path is reconnected to the original connected party The feature is enabled or disabled on a per user basis through the Manager Private Call Users can set a status of private call using short codes or a programmed button Private calls cannot be recorded intruded on bridged into or monitored Hot Desking Hot Desking allows a number of users non exclusive use the same extension Each user logs in with their own identity so they can receive calls and can access their own Voicemail and other facilities For example sales personnel who visit the office infrequently can be provided with telephony and Voicemail services without being permanently assigned a physical extension When finished they simply log out to make the extension available to others or if users log in at another phone they are automatically logged out of the original extension Remote Hot Deskin
123. with correct formatting can also be downloaded Additionally labels can be printed in the correct format directly from IP Office Manager For 1600 Series phones requiring Gigabit Ethernet support a Gigabit Ethernet adapter is available providing 10 100 1000 Mbps support for both the 1600 Series phone and co located laptop or PC Note that no Ethernet cable is included with the 1600 Series phones If a cable is needed it should be ordered separately at the required length Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 68 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 1603 and 1603SW IP Telephone 1403 Digital Telephone This telephone is best suited for the Walkup and Basic Everyday user IP Office Communication Manager The Avaya 1403 1603 supports 3 line appearances Each of the buttons includes dual LEDs red green providing explicit status for the user For a familiar look and feel the 1403 1603 includes several fixed feature keys for common telephone tasks including conference transfer drop hold and mute In addition the 1403 1603 includes a 2 way speakerphone The display on the 1403 1603 measures two lines by 16 characters and is backlit for easier viewing in all lighting conditions The 1603 SW telephone has the same features functionality as the 1603 phone it adds on top of that however a secondary Ethernet port and is therefore targeted at the basic Everyday user The newly introduced 1603 1
124. 0 100 line interface with a secondary 10 100 port for co located laptop or PC with VLAN separation e Support of optional Gigabit Ethernet Adapter 9620L external 9620C integrated adapter using adapter interface Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 61 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 9630 9640 9640G Telephone Smart sleek stylish and highly functional the Avaya 9640 IP Telephone is designed for the Essential user those for whom the telephone is essential in order to perform their jobs Workers who conduct much of their business on the phone moving from one call to the next The Avaya 9630 9640 delivers advanced communications capabilities high definition audio a brilliant high resolution pixel based color display on the 9640 an integrated WML application interface one touch access to Avaya IP Office mobility or forwarding features in a solution designed for those who are absolutely dependent on voice communications for their business operations With built in Gigabit Ethernet on the 9630G and 9640G these phones are also perfectly suited for customers with very high requirements for data network performance IP Office Communication Common Features e Display Housing e 9 line 3 8 inch backlight graphical display with 320 240 pixels 9650 grayscale 9650C color e Flip stand dual position e Fixed Buttons 11 plus Four way navigation cluster button e Volume up d
125. 00 Universal Quad Analog Trunk LS Card This card provides four analog trunk ports These are 2 wire loop start interfaces and are available in all territories This card supports Caller ID where provided With IP Office R3 1 and later this module supports optional 16ms echo cancellation Please note that ground start analog trunks are supported via the IP Office Analog Trunk 16 Expansion Module Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 346 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 1P500 BRI So8 Module The IP500 BRI So8 module provides 8 S Bus interfaces for Basic Rate ISDN devices such as video conferencing fax servers or ISDN telephones For installations in a rack this module requires the IP500 Rack Mounting Kit The IP500 BRI So8 Module is functionally identical to the 1P400 So8 Module IP Office 500 BRI Sod EXPANSION The IP500 BRI So8 expansion module supports both point to point and point to multipoint connections A maximum of 10 terminal endpoints identifiers TEIs are supported on each bus Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 347 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 I P400 Phone Module This module provides additional analog telephone interfaces e Two Wire e DTMF signaling No rotary or Loop Disconnect e Time Break Recall No Earth Recall e Caller ID capable e Message Waiting Indication MWI capable High Voltage Pu
126. 00 support a maximum of 30 T3 DSS modules per control unit Please refer to System Button Module Support 8 for the total system limitations of button modules on IP Office Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 88 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 System Button Module Support IP Office supports a number of different button modules to provide phones with additional programmable buttons The limits stated below are those applicable for the IP Office 4 2 2Q 2009 maintenance release and higher e BM32 1616 Up to 32 DBM32s supported 32 buttons each up to 1024 buttons e DSS4450 4412D 4424D Up to 8 DSS4450 modules per system maximum of 2 per DS expansion module including the 1P406v2 50 buttons each max 400 buttons e DBM32 1416 Up to 32 DBM32s supported 32 buttons each up to 1024 buttons e EU24 EU24BL 4620 4621 5420 5620 5621 4620 4621 5620 5621 Up to 8 EU24s per system 24 buttons each max 196 buttons e SBM24 9630G 9640 9640G 9650 9650C Up to 42 SBM24s per system 24 buttons each up to 1008 buttons e T3 Series All T3 phones Up to 30 T3 DSS modules supported 36 buttons each up to 1080 buttons T3 DSS buttons are not included in the overall system limit for additional button module buttons e XM24 6416 6424 Up to 10 XM24 units per system maximum of 2 per DS expansion module including the P406v2 with a maximum of 1 per 6
127. 006 12 55 59 DE April 2006 15 32 23 lt AccessT ype Write With Merge Write With Merge Write With Merge Write With Merge Administrator Write With Merge Administrator Write With Merge System Reboot Warm Start Administrator Write With Merge Administrator Write With Merge Administrator Write With Merge Administrator Write With Merge Administrator Security Login LIL Security User Administrator Administrator Administrator Administrator Outcome Success clean Success clean Success clean Success clean Success clean Success clean Success Success Warning Success Warning Success warning Success Warning Failure Audit Details Security User Date and Time of Access PC Login PC IP Address Administrator 04 April 2006 12 52 05 Avyayal 23 192 168 42 203 PC MAC Address Access Type Outcome 00 13 d3 af fa O68 Write With Merge Success Warning ltems Changed ltem Type ltem Name User Extn207 Account Code Account Code Product Description IP Office Release 6 0 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 294 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Manager is also used for maintenance functions such as e Upgrade to the IP Office system software e Systems running 2 1 or later have the added benefit of being able to send software over an IP network link to a system and have it validated before committi
128. 010 Index Hold 7 77 80 82 113 117 129 130 131 135 136 148 158 194 196 222 253 261 308 Hold Call 130 158 222 Hold Call Waiting 130 Hold CW 158 Hold Music 129 130 158 Hong Kong 302 Hook 152 157 Hook Dialing 152 Hot Desk 136 185 Hot Desking 136 Hours greeting 155 HP s Network Node Manager 297 HTTP 199 Hunt Group Broadcast Messages 254 hunt group call handling 147 Hunt Group call ringing 137 Hunt Group Calls 137 138 147 154 155 Hunt Group Disable 158 Hunt Group Enable 158 Hunt Group Enable Disable 134 Hunt Group exceed 156 HUNT GROUP EXTENSION 293 HUNT GROUP NAME 293 Hunt Group Recording 257 HuntGroup csv 293 Hybrid PBX 160 Hz 167 l 155 187 Iceland 302 ICLID 176 Illuminated 3 line 111 Illuminated 5 line 112 IM 219 Immediate Reboot 293 IMS 265 IMS Pro Connection 265 IMSAdmin 265 Inbound Call Handling 153 Incoming Call 134 153 176 198 219 222 234 236 257 Incoming Call Routes 134 153 234 236 257 incoming call scripting 219 India 302 indicating Talk 113 industry standard 187 Information Bulletin Boards 250 Information Protocol Routing 200 316 Information within Call Flows 250 Inhibits COLP 176 Inline Power 10 100 BaseT Switching Module 167 input rating power 312 In Queue Announcements 261 Insert 129 250 258 Installation Guide 113 INT 300 Integral 10 100 Mbit Layer 196 Integral Static 15 IntegralT3 58 IntegralT3 IP 58 Int
129. 0x10 Header 5 Window 64874 Sum 0x667c Urgent 0 Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 296 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP SNMP is an industry standard designed to allow the management of data equipment from different vendors using a single Network Manager application The Network Manager will periodically poll equipment to solicit a response if no response is received an alarm is raised In addition to responding to polls IP Office monitors the state of its Extensions Trunk cards Expansion Modules except WAN3 module and Media cards so that if an error is detected IP Office will notify the Network Manager IP Office allows two separate Network Managers to be configured so that both a customers Network Manager and a Maintainers Network Manager to be notified of the same alarm condition As the IP Office solution comprises many applications the core software notifies SNMP events from both VoiceMail Pro and Embedded voicemail to warn of approaching storage capacity limits IP Office has been tested against CastleRock s SNMPc EE and HP s Network Node Manager part of the OpenView application suite 3 SNMPc Management Console d File Edit View Insert Manage Tools Config Window Help 4 e S BQD lH Aee Sl o Q all A eo O x H A 192 168 44 192 168 44 255 Client IP_Office_403 sun IP_Office_403 192 168 44 255
130. 10 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 149 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Centralized Personal Directory Feature The IP Office Personal Directory is a list of up to 100 numbers and associated names stored centrally in the system for a specific user A directory entry can be used to label an incoming call on a caller display telephone or on a PC application The directory also gives a system wide list of frequently used numbers for speed dialing via one X Portal for IP Office Phone Manager or a feature phone with a suitable display For example Mr Smith can be displayed when a known Caller ID is received A user can also select Mr Smith in the Directory List in Phone Manager one X Portal for IP Office or on a display phone to speed dial this number Description e The personal directory capability allows up to 100 entries per telephony user e The system limit is e 10800 for IP Office 500 and IP Office 500 V2 e 3600 for IP Office 412 e 1900 for IP Office 406 V2 e All entries may be added deleted or modified by Manager one X Portal for IP Office a telephone or an external service e The personal directory data is sent updated whenever the user is logged in a SCN Edit Max 10000 per system Update on login os Ka n n a a IP Office View only View Edit View Edit Manager warn 7 Sar tap oe 6 IE ri a 1608 1616 1 1608 1616 an TUL ATTER R Hot Desk Benefit e The user has a persona
131. 10 entries The method of operation varies according to the phone type but in all cases the call records can be used for return calls Call Logs ETR sets 317 Use this feature to program extensions to log answered Caller ID calls so that calls answered at an individual extension can be viewed in the Caller ID Call Log Once the feature is activated for an extension when a user activates the Caller ID Call Logging and Dialing F23 all Caller ID calls that are answered by that extension are logged Up to 3 extensions can be designated to log all calls both answered and unanswered regardless of where they terminated in the system Call Pickup INTERCOM 6xx This feature is used to answer any intercom transferred or outside call ringing at another specified extension Call Timer Display Displays the duration of a call from the time it was answered Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 32 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Call Waiting Call waiting applies to analog single line telephones and applies to the following types of calls e Intercom calls e Transferred calls e Forwarded calls e Covered calls e Outside calls if the extension has a line appearance of the line e Voice Signaled calls Caller I D Features The following Caller ID features are supported e Caller ID Inspect FEATURE 17 Allows you to view Caller ID information for a second call without disconnect
132. 12 e 1P500 Phone Expansion Module 56 Available in two variants for 16 or 30 analog extensions with calling line presentation e 1P500 Digital Station Expansion Module 5 Available in two variants for 16 or 30 digital extensions for Avaya series digital telephones e P500 Analog Trunk 16 Expansion Module 54 US version only Provides 16 analog loop start or ground start trunks with power failover of two trunks 1P500 Analog Trunk 16 Module This expansion module provides an additional sixteen Loop Start or Ground Start two wire analog trunks Ground start trunks are not available in all territories The first two trunks on the module which are automatically switched to power fail sockets on the rear of the unit in the event of power being interrupted must be loop start for correct power fail operation For installations in a rack this module requires the IP500 Rack Mounting Kit The IP500 Analog Trunk 16 Module is functionally identical to the 1P400 Analog Trunk 16 Module IP Office 500 Analog Trunk n 2 13 4 15 16 PFI PF2 EXPANSION Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 54 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 1P500 Digital Station Module This expansion module provides additional Digital Station DS ports for selected Avaya 1400 2400 4400 5400 6400 T3 EMEA only Series phones and 3810 wireless phones North America only The IP500 Digital Station module is available
133. 1603SW I are functionally equal to the 1603 1603SW but feature a higher quality graphical display with white backlight identical to the display of the digital 1403 telephone Common Features e Display Housing o Backlit display 2 rows by 16 characters Green backlight for 1603 1603 SW white backlight for 1603 1 1603SW I 1403 o Reversible wedge stand for desktop and wall mount use e Fixed Buttons 10 o Volume up down separate volume levels for the handset speaker and ringer Mute button Speaker button o Avaya Menu button options and settings access o Hold button Conference button Transfer button Drop button Redial button e Programmable Contextual buttons 3 o 3 line appearance key buttons with dual LEDs red green and paper labels Printing tool available Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 69 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 e Key Labels Icons and text used on fixed feature keys e Speakerphone Two way handsfree speaker and microphone e Hearing Aid Compatible Yes ergonomic hearing aid compatible handset also supporting TTY acoustic coupler e Message Waiting Indicator Yes also useable as a ringing call alert indicator e Personalized Ring Patterns Yes 8 e Headset Socket No e Upgradeable Firmware Yes e Expansion None e Color Black e Mounting Desk or wall mountable Requirements for 1403 e Connect to Digital Station DS
134. 2 85 86 87 170 172 including 163 G 711 A law U law 172 G 711A 187 G 711MU 187 G 723 98 G 723 1 170 172 G 723 1 MP MLQ 172 G 723 1 163 G 723 1 6K3 187 G 726 16kbps ADPCM 258 G 729 98 172 G 729 Annex 172 G 729a 104 163 170 187 G 729a b 77 80 82 85 86 87 G711 encoding 102 104 Gatekeepers 160 163 requests 162 Gateway 14 100 115 160 162 163 169 183 194 195 Greetings 235 236 253 261 Greetings amp Mailbox Navigation 235 greetings provide 253 Ground Start 14 54 176 300 315 345 350 Ground Start 176 GROUP 293 Group Listen 158 Group Listen Off 158 Group ListenOn 158 Group working 98 H Handover 98 Hands Free Pouch 100 Handset 20 45 85 86 87 98 100 111 112 113 117 128 132 137 152 154 183 197 230 231 236 255 Handset Liquid Crystal Display 113 handset offers high resolution 100 Handset Volume Control 113 117 Hands free Speakerphone 112 Hardware 44 98 228 265 334 Hardware provides 44 Head Office 17 Header Compression Header Message 261 Headset 77 80 82 85 86 87 100 111 112 113 118 124 157 158 Headset Socket 77 80 82 85 86 87 Headset Toggle 158 headset microphone 160 Heat Dissipation 312 Held Calls Panel 222 Held Panel 222 Help Desks Support Desks 250 HH 293 High Voltage 171 172 316 118 348 Product Description IP Office Release 6 0 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 360 Issue 20 p 05 August 2
135. 20 5621 2420 4621 4625 Telephones These telephones are best suited for the Executive User and with the optional EU24 Button Module good for the Receptionist Assistant User Works on IP Office and Communication Manager 4621 SW 4625 SW d Note that 4621 and 4625 while supported on IP Office R6 are not longer available for new sales Common Features e Display 7 lines x 29 characters e Fixed Feature Buttons 10 Conference Headset Transfer Drop Redial Speaker Hold Mute Volume Up Volume Down e Programmable Feature Buttons e DS Phones 24 arranged in 3 switchable display pages of 8 matching the 8 physical display buttons e IP Phones 24 arranged in 2 switchable display pages of 12 matching the 12 physical display buttons e Key Labels Icons and text used on fixed feature keys e Speakerphone Two way handsfree speaker and microphone e Hearing Aid Compatible Yes e Message Waiting Indicator Yes can also be used as a ringing call alert indicator e Personalized Ring Patterns Yes 8 e Headset Socket Yes e Embedded Applications Speed Dial List 104 and Call Log Missed Incoming Outgoing Also WAP WML browser supported on IP phone models e Upgradeable Firmware Yes e Expansion Supports the EU24 DSS expansion module with additional Avaya 1151 power supply e Color Multi gray e Mounting Desk or wall mountable e Adjustable Desk S
136. 2420 4610 4620 4621 4625 5410 5420 5610 5620 5621 and 9600 series phones e Reply to a message to either an internal or external number if Caller ID available e Support for hunt group announcements e Fax option for rerouting fax calls via the auto attendant menu e Support for Fast Forward Rewind Skip Message 9 and Call Sender when listening to messages e No license required Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 235 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 I P Office Preferred Edition Voicemail Pro IP Office VoiceMail Pro is enabled by the IP Office Preferred Edition and is the most advanced messaging and call flow application for IP Office systems It can handle up to 40 simultaneous calls depending on license and system settings Each user has the option of turning their voicemail on or off When on the system automatically answers their telephone when they are not available to take a call plays a personal greeting and records a message When a message has been left the user will see a message waiting lamp lit on their telephone and can press a retrieval button to collect their messages VoiceMail Pro can also ring the user to deliver any new messages Voicemail messages are time and date stamped and the caller s number recorded VoiceMail Pro can be configured to delete read messages automatically unless the user chooses to save the message permanently
137. 35 136 156 231 236 309 INTUITY 187 219 236 245 246 247 253 254 255 260 261 Intuity Audix 187 261 Intuity Audix 4 4 187 Intuity Audix Emulation Features 261 Intuity AUDIX 187 Intuity Emulation 234 Intuity Feature 261 INTUITY Mode 245 246 247 255 Intuity TUI 261 Invited 222 IP Address Assignment IP application LAN 169 IP Authentication Header 316 IP DECT 3700 228 IP DECT Capacities 98 IP DECT IPO STARTER KIT 98 IP DECT System 98 IP DECT Telephone 98 111 112 IP DECT Wireless Handset 125 IP Encapsulation Security Payload 316 IP extension calling 303 IP Extensions 17 163 303 IP Hard Phone 160 IP Office Management Utilities 292 IP Office Manager 17 45 131 135 141 148 176 199 246 253 254 257 265 279 293 298 IP Office Phone Manager application maintains 149 IP Office Phone Manager Lite 279 IP Office Phone Modules 348 IP Office Professional Edition 300 IP Office Professional Edition Upgrade 45 IP Office Small Community Networking 130 131 133 135 137 148 184 IP Office Standard Edition IP Office stores list 143 IP Office Support Fax 171 IP Office Supports 171 200 IP Office Time Profiles 257 IP Office Voicemail Pro CD 265 IP Office Voicemail Pro Intuity Audix Emulation Features 261 IP Office VoIP 171 IP Office s 180 77 80 82 85 86 87 45 236 261 278 45 278 303 IP Office s Directory 129 IP Office s list 143 IP Offices Transit Network Selection 176
138. 36 CAT 167 CAT5 167 312 Catalyst 167 CCBS 176 CCC 45 136 154 185 236 CCP 316 CD 258 CD Rom 231 CDRs 143 CE UL Dentori Safety Approved 312 cell mobile 248 Central Office 52 176 194 195 334 345 Centralized 18 20 128 174 183 185 187 234 236 260 261 Centralized INTUITY Audix 234 Centralized Messaging 260 Centralized VM 260 Centralized Voice Mail 185 Centralized voicemail 18 174 187 236 261 Centralized Voicemail Services 261 Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol 198 316 Channel Associated Signaling 176 Channel Monitor 158 Channel Voice Compression 300 CHAP 195 198 200 201 316 Charger Unit 113 checkbox 246 Checking 176 Circuit Switched 175 Circuit Switched Data Call Basic 187 Circuit Switched Data Call Basic Call 175 187 Circuit Switched Voice Networking 175 Circuit switched 160 Cisco 115 167 Cisco Systems 167 C LAN DEFINITY 9 5 187 Clear Call 158 Clear CW 158 Clear Hunt Group Night Service 158 Clear Hunt Group Out Service 158 Clear Hunt Group Out Of Service 158 Clear Quota 158 CLI 118 219 308 315 CLI Feature 118 CLI Schemes 315 CLI ANI 236 CLIP 176 CLIR 176 Clock 196 Speaking closet switch wiring 167 Co Ax 300 Code Used 143 Codec G 711 98 Codecs 77 80 82 85 86 87 169 187 Cold Start 293 Color Backlight Display 82 COLP Inhibits 176 COLR 176 Comfort 58 100 124 comma separated 231 Common Features 77 80 82 84 85 86 87 236 261 Product Description
139. 416 6424 phone 24 buttons each giving a maximum of 240 XM24 buttons The maximum number of additional button module buttons per system is 1024 regardless of if the buttons are configured for use or not Only exception is use of T3 DSS only where if no other button modules are used a total of 1080 buttons is supported e 12 x BM32 5 x EU24 20 x SBM24 is allowed 984 buttons in total e 15 x T3DSS 15 x BM32 is allowed 1020 buttons in total e but NOT 8 x BM32 10 x EU24 because it exceeds the maximum number of 8 EU24s even though total buttons lt 1024 e and NOT 14 x BM32 5 x EU24 20 x SBM24 total 1048 buttons this exceeds the maximum 1024 buttons per system Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 89 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Wireless and Remote Phone Solutions Avaya IP Office Wireless Solutions include analog digital and IP based WiFi wireless phones These are solutions employees can use every day to work more effectively and be more responsive to customers all while increasing revenues and keeping communication costs firmly under control Also Avaya IP Office Mobility Solutions integrate seamlessly with IP Office enhancing each customer s investment IP Office s in building Mobility Solutions improve communication with staff that because of the function they perform are mobile within the workplace Using wireless technology such individuals may be
140. 4T 4A 8DS 16 VoIP e During power fail Analog port 2 is connected to POT port 1 Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 339 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 IP Office Small Office Edition 4T 4A 8DS 3 or 16 VolP The IP Office Small Office Edition 4T 4A 8DS provides e Four Analog Loop Start Trunks Caller ID enabled e Four Analog extension POT ports with power fail switchover such that analog trunk port 2 is connected to analog extension port 1 e Eight Digital Station DS ports for selected 2400 5400 and 6400 phones plus 3810 wireless US phones T3 Series phones are not supported from Release 4 0 onwards on Small Office Edition e 3 or 16 VoIP Codecs G 723 1 G 711 and G 729a and 48ms echo cancellation e 4 Switched Ethernet ports Layer 2 e Dedicated Switched Ethernet WAN port Layer 3 e 2 x PCMCIA Slots for optional Wireless and Embedded Voicemail card support e Expansion Slot for optional WAN card V35 V24 X 21 BRI or T1 PRI e Serial DTE port e Audio input port for external music on hold source e External O P socket supporting two relay on off switch ports e g for door entry systems 8 x Digital Station Ports AVAYA IP Office Small Office Edition 3 ANALOG 4 DS1 2 4 DS5 6 meee me 4 x Analog 4 x Analog 4 x Switched Ethernet WAN Port Trunk Ports Extension LAN Ports at default LAN2 Ports POT Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reser
141. 54 Personal Numbering 236 249 261 Personal Options 261 Personalized Greeting 261 Personalized Ring Patterns 183 197 77 80 82 85 86 87 Personalized Ringing 117 131 Phone 16 300 312 Phone 16 Module 300 312 Phone 16 Module V2 300 Phone 30 Module 300 312 Phone 30 Module V2 300 Phone Manager application 134 135 Phone Manager Feature Summary 219 Phone Manager GUI 253 Phone Manager Lite 16 45 149 Phone Manager Lite Pro PC Softphone 45 Phone Manager PC Softphone 18 160 Phone Manager Pro 16 18 45 121 137 149 219 253 254 261 303 Phone Manager Pro PC Softphone Phone V2 348 physical logical 171 Pickup 137 Pick Up 133 PIN 16 144 250 261 279 prompted 234 requesting 277 PIN checking 250 PIN Code By Pass 261 PIN code menu 279 PIN Restricted Calling 144 Plain Old Telephone Services 160 Plain Ordinary Telephone 300 Platform Support 261 Play Advice switching 257 played back 253 261 PoE 58 77 80 82 84 85 86 87 98 160 167 Point Compression Microsoft Point Point Protocol Point 316 Point WAN 171 point to multipoint 347 Point to Point 176 183 194 195 197 347 Point to Point Protocol 194 197 Power Distribution Units 167 Power Fail Ports 315 Power Options IP Telephones 167 Power Supply 77 80 82 84 85 86 87 167 300 312 Power Supply Units 312 Powered Data Unit 167 Powered LAN 58 PPP 172 194 197 201 316 PPP Fragmentation 172 PPP MP 316 PPP Multilink Protocol 316 PR 176
142. 6 V120 316 V24 196 V24 V35 X21 300 V35 196 V5 0 258 V90 15 VAC 167 VB 18 236 252 VB Scripts 18 236 252 VC 300 VCM 14 45 47 85 98 137 169 171 180 183 185 261 297 298 303 334 351 Virtual 115 160 183 197 276 Voicemail 261 Virtual Office 115 Visual Basic 236 252 261 308 Visual Basic Scripts 261 Visual Message Waiting Indication 118 Visual Voice 132 235 236 261 Visual Voice NOT 132 VLAN 77 80 82 85 86 87 VM 146 Voice Call 153 170 187 Voice Communication Solution 14 Voice Communication Solution Features 14 Voice Compression 17 47 98 162 163 169 171 180 183 235 300 334 351 Voice Compression Module 162 163 169 171 183 300 334 351 Voice encoding 104 300 Voice encoding G711 102 Voice Forms Questionnaire Mailboxes 236 Voice Mail 7 111 112 146 222 255 Voice Messaging 14 Voice Networking 18 45 Voice Priority Processors 100 voice processing 231 Voice Recording 137 236 257 Voice Recording Library 265 Voice Recording Library Management 265 Voice Recording Library 258 voice samples telephone 169 voice traffic 100 169 171 195 VoiceDirector 176 Voicemail 16 17 18 20 45 80 82 121 128 131 132 134 135 136 137 138 141 142 144 147 155 156 157 158 163 169 174 185 187 195 219 222 234 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 254 255 256 257 258 260 265 277 279 293 297 298 300 309 310 312 334 alter 154
143. 6 200 Queue 00 00 01 AgentA Inbound 01707364416 200 Queue 00 00 06 AgentA Inbound 01707364416 200 Queue 00 00 07 AgentA Inbound 01707364416 200 Queue 00 00 02 AgentA Inbound 01707364416 200 Queue 00 00 02 AgentA Total Calls 28 External Inbound Calls Internal Calls 5 External Outbound Calls gt fi 1 100 z Target Name Queue 01 12 2008 22 12 2008 9 00 17 00 Supervisor Name Mark Gallagher Ungrouped Peas cals Answered Lost Volcemat o ner Aowera Answortrime Time service 9 MainB 4 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 00 Queue 23 17 9 0 0 0 0 52 94 00 00 01 00 00 08 37 50 Queue2 2 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 00 02 0 00 Presented Calls 26 Average Speed to Answer 50 00 Answered Calls 20 Average Speed to Answer Time 00 00 01 Lost Calls 9 Average Abandon Time 00 00 08 Overflowed Answered 0 Grade of Service 36 00 Overflowed Lost 0 Answer Threshold 1 Routed To Voicemail 0 Lost Call Threshold 1 No Answer o External Outbound 0 Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 286 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Supervisor Wallboard For the release of IP Office R6 Customer Call Reporter now provides a browser based wallboard that can be used in businesses who want to display key statistics in a group area such as on an LCD television screen The wallboard has the ability to display all the statistics currently available within Customer Call Reporter but can also provide two additional new featur
144. 6 allows multiple Distributed VoiceMail Pro servers to be placed at selected or all of the IP Office nodes Into one SCN there can be one Centralized VoiceMail Pro one Backup VoiceMail Pro as a backup for the Centralized VMPro and up to 30 Distributed VoiceMail Pro theoretical value The Centralized VoiceMail Pro server will keep its role as the main voicemail server It provides the media store for voicemails left on the system as well as the media services required on the SCN to IP Offices not supported by a local VoiceMail Pro server Centralized VMPro Distributed VMPro Distributed VMPro Backup VMPro The retrieval of voicemails will require access to the Centralized VoiceMail Pro while other voice resources will be available locally providing local capabilities for queuing announcements call recordings auto attendants and leaving of voicemails On failure of a Distributed VoiceMail Pro the Centralized VoiceMail Pro would be used for all functions as if no Distributed VoiceMail Pro servers were present Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 240 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 There are no separate licenses for VoiceMail Pro Distributed VoiceMail Centralized VoiceMail or Backup VoiceMail These scenarios all require the same Preferred Edition license but will be configured differently in IP Office Manager according to the required function ero es E System
145. 7 wire speed 172 Wired Equivalent Privacy 102 104 Wireless 7 14 17 18 20 55 58 90 98 100 102 113 125 128 160 167 300 315 349 Wireless Access Points 17 100 300 Wireless Module 315 Wireless Telephones 125 Wireless VoIP 18 Within SoftConsole 222 WLAN 100 167 WLAN Compatibility List 100 workflow 236 workforce 245 workgroup 105 workgroups 16 World 116 160 194 Rest 278 WorldCom 176 worlds companies LANs 160 Worst Case 167 312 Wrap Up 309 WS X4148 RJ45V 167 WS X6348 RJ45V 167 X X 21 183 194 196 300 315 X 21 V35 WAN 334 X 25 197 XM24 55 125 349 XM24 DSS Unit 125 Y Year 7 Yes 77 80 82 85 86 87 219 234 261 Z Zetafax Networks 245 18 58 90 100 102 113 Product Description IP Office Release 6 0 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 373 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Performance figures and data quoted in this document are typical and must be specifically confirmed in writing by Avaya before they become applicable to any particular order or contract The company reserves the right to make alterations or amendments to the detailed specifications at its discretion The publication of information in this document does not imply freedom from patent or other protective rights of Avaya or others All trademarks identified by the or are registered trademarks or trademarks respectively of Avaya Inc All other trademarks are the property of their respective owner
146. 8 140 141 227 Appearance Buttons 140 141 appearance feature 58 84 Applicable 52 138 149 253 257 Application Level Gateway 180 Applications Platform 16 18 Applications Platform Features 16 ARP receiving 199 ARS 135 144 190 Assisted Transfer 236 261 Audio 45 85 86 87 100 135 162 163 170 172 236 258 276 277 300 315 334 Audio Codec 170 Audio CODECs 172 Audio Conferencing 276 Audio Volume 85 86 87 Audio waveform 258 Audiotex 236 Audit 171 293 AUDIX RFA 187 August 187 345 August 2003 187 135 144 190 7 154 155 234 235 236 261 Product Description IP Office Release 6 0 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 353 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Index Australia 302 Austria 302 Authorization Codes 143 Auto Connect 199 Auto Connect Time Profile 199 auto attendant offers 248 Auto Attendant Audiotex 261 Auto Create Extensions 163 Automatic Call Distribution 156 Automatic Callback 130 Automatic Intercom 138 Automatic IP 15 Automatic Number Identification 176 automatic manual allow 257 automatic manual recording calls 257 B Back When Free 158 Backlight 82 84 104 backlit 100 121 BACP 198 316 Band DTMF 163 172 Bandwidth Allocation Control Protocol Bandwidth Required For Each 170 Bandwidth Required For Each Voice Call 170 bar 144 309 queue panel displays 222 198 316 Base 7 18 45 47 52 58 98 113 121 196 300 312 316 Base Unit 113 121 196
147. A law voice encoding and multi country locale settings IP Office External Expansion Modules Except where noted all the following are supported by the IP406 V2 1P412 IP500 and 1P500 V2 control units 1P500 e IP Office 500 Expansion Module Phone 16 700449507 Adds an additional 16 analog Plain Ordinary Telephone ports to control units e IP Office 500 Expansion Module Digital Station 16 700449499 Adds an additional 16 Digital Station ports to control units e IP Office 500 Expansion Module Phone 30 700426224 Adds an additional 30 analog Plain Ordinary Telephone ports to control units e IP Office 500 Expansion Module Digital Station 30 700426216 Adds an additional 30 Digital Station ports to control units e IP500 Analog Trunk 16 North America only 700449473 Provides an additional 16 Analog trunks loop start or ground start and two power fail sockets Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 300 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 1P500 and I P500 V2 Base Cards Only supported in the IP500 and IP500 V2 e IP Office 500 Extension Card Digital Station 8 700417330 e IP Office 500 Extension Card Phone 8 700417231 e IP Office 500 Extension Card Phone 2 700431778 e IP500 Media Card Voice Compression Module 32 700417389 Voice Compression Module required for IP trunks and extensions 4 channels are enabled by default Additional channels up to the maximum of 32 are enabled throug
148. API 2 1 and 3 0 Individual desktop PCs connected to the Local Area Network communicate with IP Office via an IP connection over the LAN Each PC is capable of controlling one telephone device see diagram below PSTN ae IP Office IP Office User Windows PC IP Office TAPI2 Microsoft TAPI 2 1 and 3 0 are specifications and developers interfaces for controlling and monitoring a telephony device The specification requires that a certain amount of core functionality is implemented and additionally defines a series of optional functionality that switch vendors may also implement TAPI Link Pro 3rd Party TAPI Support TAPILink Pro provides all of the features and functionality of TAPILink Lite but additionally provides third party CTI operation This means that a single server can control and monitor any number of telephone devices In addition TAPILink Pro provides the ability to monitor and control groups This allows an application to be notified when a call enters a queue and can also redirect it to another location TAPILink Pro also supports additional TAPI functionality that is not available through TAPILink Lite This functionality is supported through the LineGetLineDevStatus and LineDevSpecific calls The additional features are e Agent login e Agent logout e Set and retrieve divert destination e Set and retrieve extended divert status Forward All Calls Forward on Busy Forward on No Answer D
149. API to deliver a copy of the voice message e Unified Messaging The Unified Messaging Service within Preferred Edition provides a higher level of integration to synchronize both voicemail and email inboxes e VoiceMail Pro Web Access Together with UMS comes the ability to access voice mails via a web browser using this voicemail messages can be managed and listen to using either the PC or the IP Office extension e Auto Attendant Simplify service for administrators with this easy to use feature with the ability to construct customized automated services allowing callers to efficiently navigate the system and reach the right person without the assistance of an operator Available with Preferred Edition and with Essential Edition e Interactive Voice Response IVR and Text to Speech Create automated customized systems allowing callers to interact with business information for example reading email account enquiry systems automated ordering systems ticket purchasing systems PIN number checking remote time sheet management etc Enhance theses systems by using Text To Speech to read information back to callers Available with Advanced Edition e Queue Manager and Campaign Manager Powerful voice and IVR applications for the Contact Center that facilitate agent and traffic management for better productivity and customer service e Customer Call Reporter Available with Advanced Edition and combined with the built in ACD functionality of IP
150. AYA All rights reserved Page 20 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Hardware Control Unit PARTNER Version software runs on the IP 500v2 control unit A PARTNER Version Secure Digital SD card is required and is installed in the rear of the control unit providing operating software Feature Key Licenses and directs the system to boot up in PARTNER mode An optional SD card may be installed in the Optional SD card slot providing additional storage for Voicemail recordings System Logs and redundant backup capability Do RaZz LAN VAN e StS eS a oo eee i S ne T ne e a a R5232 DTE Reset Expansion ports for Status LEDs Port switch Expansion Modules nagia System SD card slot External LAN Ports 1 only i Optional SD card slot music on hold LAN LAN External output switch input WAN LAN2 IP500 V2 Back View Lard Slots RE gt _ NN _ i cy 1 2 3 4 IP Office 500V2 IP500 V2 Front View The front of the IP500v2 Control Unit has 4 expansion bays which supports the following system modules e Combo Card Max 2 per system The Combo Card provides 6 Digital Station DS ports Ports 1 6 2 Analog Station ports Ports 7 8 4 CO Line ports Ports 9 12 and 10 Voice Compression Channels There are no Power Failure Transfer ports on this card e ETR 6 Card Max 3 per system The ETR 6 Card provides 6 ETR PARTNER ACS telephone Station ports Ports 1 6 and supports 1
151. Advanced Charger e Supports easy replacement of telephones e Connected to configuration tool PDM Portable Device Manager via USB or Ethernet e Charge time 4 hours e Rackmount Charger e Same functionality as the advanced charger but for up to 6 DECT phones 3720 and 3725 e Charge time 4 hours e Multiple Battery Charger e Charges 6 batteries 3725 Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 96 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 e Portable Device Manager Software to be used in combination with Advanced or Rackmount Charger in order to Manage the 3720 and 3725 phone e Requirements Windows XP Professional Service Pack 2 SP2 or Windows Vista Business operating system Sun Java Runtime Environment J RE 6 or later Acrobat Reader 5 or higher e Other accessories e Handset Basic Belt Clip e Handset Swivel Belt Clip e Handset Leather Case 3720 and 3725 e Handset Security Chain Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 97 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Wireless Avaya P DECT Note While still supported on IP Office release 6 and available for upgrades we strongly suggest to use DECT R4 for new installs The IP DECT solution delivers the productivity boosting benefits of IP and wireless communications across multiple offices in a convenient lightweight handset It provides businesses with a highly functional wireless
152. Aid Compatible Yes Message Waiting I ndicator Yes can also be used as a ringing call alert indicator Personalized Ring Patterns Yes 8 Headset Socket Yes Embedded Applications Speed Dial List 48 and Call Log Missed Incoming Outgoing Also WAP WML browser supported on IP phone models Upgradeable Firmware Yes Expansion None Color Multi gray Mounting Desk or wall mountable Adjustable Desk Stand Yes Supplied with phone Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 80 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Special Features for the 5410 and 2410 e Messages Button Dedicated button to collect voicemail Requirements for 5410 and 2410 e Connect to Digital Station DS port e Power Supply From phone system Requirements for 5610 and 4610 e Power Supply IEEE 802 3af Power over Ethernet PoE or individual power supply unit Avaya 1151 series e Codecs G 711 G 729a b e QoS Options UDP Port Selection DiffServ and 802 1p q VLAN e SNMP Support Yes e IP Address Assignment Static or dynamic IP address assignment e Ethernet Ports Two port full duplex 10 100 BaseT Ethernet switch for PC pass through connection e Auto negotiation provided separately for each port e 802 3 Flow Control e Phone has priority over PC port at all times Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 81 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 54
153. Commercial or residential security is provided via two way handsfree communication from a door or gate Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 121 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Kalika Communications Doorphone Entry System ce ij J e Supports a doorway intercom system with up to 46 buttons e The system can be programmed to enable multiple extensions to answer and control the operation of the door and can be used with both single and multiple door entry systems e It is ideal for apartment complexes or where different companies occupy different floors and require their own unique door entry solution e The Kalika Communications Control Unit is available in several versions and is equipped to provide two way voice communications electrical lock control and label lamps e It is weatherproof and remotely programmable e For sales enquiries and product information contact Kalika Communications at info kalika co uk Kalika also offers an RVI Remote visual identification application which can screen pop an image onto the Avaya browser based handsets RVI is displayed frame by frame in a J PEG image form and is used as an identification tool It is designed to complement the existing IP camera already supplied by Kalika Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 122 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Interquartz Doorphone e Choice of m
154. D card feature key mandatory e IP Office 500 V2 Software License Feature Key Mu Law 700479710 Configures the control unit for Mu law voice encoding and US locale settings e IP Office 500 V2 Software License Feature Key A Law 700479702 Configures the control unit for A law voice encoding and multi country locale settings e IP Office 500 V2 Software License Feature Key IP Office Partner Version 700479728 Configures the control unit for the NA Partner Version 1P500 Control Unit 700417207 Includes 4 x front slots for combinations of extension VCM cards and trunk daughter cards 1 x smart card slot for locale settings and license feature key 1 x compact flash slot for embedded voicemail option 2 port Layer 3 LAN switch 9 pin DTE serial port for system diagnostics 3 5 mm jack for Music on Hold audio input and 2 switch external door relay control port 8 x external expansion module ports to support additional analog trunks digital or analog extensions Includes auto ranging internal power supply Regional power cord and software documentation CD pack not included Only one variant of control unit is available but regional locale is determined by the appropriate smart card feature key mandatory e IP Office 500 Software License Feature Key Mu Law 700417470 Configures the control unit for Mu law voice encoding and US locale settings e IP Office 500 Software License Feature Key A Law 700417488 Configures the control unit for
155. DEFINITY ACM branches 187 DEFINITY ACM occupying 187 Delete Message 261 deleting 132 Delphi 308 Denmark 302 Deploying IP 167 Depth 111 312 Designing IP Telephony 162 Desk Wall Mount 117 deskers 136 desking 136 DevConnect 232 Developer Connection Program 232 DeveloperConnect 232 Developers 230 231 232 309 310 DevLink 231 310 DevLink Lite 231 DevLink Pro 231 DevLink Reserved Fields 310 DHCP 15 102 104 171 196 200 279 316 DHCP Server 196 200 279 Dial3K1 158 Dial56K 158 Dial64K 158 Dial calls 138 143 Dial CW 158 Dial Direct 158 Dial Direct Hot Line 158 Dial Emergency 143 158 Dial Extn 158 Dial Inclusion 158 Dial On Pickup 157 Dial Pad 222 227 Dial Paging 158 Dial Plan 135 Dial Speech 158 Dial V110 158 Dial V120 158 Dial Video 158 Dialed Number 129 131 144 176 258 controlling 148 Dialed Number Identification String 176 dial in dial out to from 195 Dialing In 169 176 195 200 334 dialing plan 135 174 DialPhysicalExtensionByNumber 158 DialPhysicalNumberByID 158 Dial Up Circuit Support 196 DID 131 176 DID DDI 176 Differentiated Services Field 316 Diffserve 183 Digital Station 16 Module V2 300 Digital Station 30 300 Digital Station 30 Module V2 300 Digital Station Expansion Module 55 349 Digital Telephones 18 113 Digital Wireless 3810 Telephone 113 Digital Wireless North American 90 Dimensions 111 312 Direct Dialing 20 128 138 248 Direct Dialing In 176 Direct I
156. GB of disk space However prompts and recorded messages consume an additional 1MB of disk space per minute e For a busy environment you can expect to require at least 1 000 minutes of message recording space that is 1GB Web Server Operation If web browser access to Unified Messaging Services UMS Web Access and or Campaigns is required Microsoft IIS Web Server must be installed on the VoiceMail Pro PC before installing VoiceMail Pro Both applications must run as a service A server operating system is required for IIS UMS Client Requirement UMS IMAP access requires IMAP4 capable email clients such as Outlook For voicemail web access see Web Server Operation above Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 265 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Server PC Consolidation The VoiceMail Pro server application with all its components can be installed on a single server PC together with the Avaya one X Portal for IP Office server application and the customer Call Reporter application For this scenario the following limits have to be considered e A maximum of eight VoiceMail Pro ports with a maximum of four ports TTS e A maximum of 50 one X Portal for IP Office users e A maximum of 30 Customer Service Agents e A maximum of 500 calls per hour Voicemail to Email Connection Voicemail to Email operation is supported using either MAPI or SMTP MAPI requires the VoiceMail Pro server PC to have a
157. IP Office Release 6 0 Product Description y f A R e A LAS i We J d A 3 a k p J 15 601041 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 11 04 2010 AVAYA All Rights Reserved Notice While reasonable efforts were made to ensure that the information in this document was complete and accurate at the time of printing Avaya Inc can assume no liability for any errors Changes and corrections to the information in this document may be incorporated in future releases Documentation Disclaimer Avaya Inc is not responsible for any modifications additions or deletions to the original published version of this documentation unless such modifications additions or deletions were performed by Avaya Link Disclaimer Avaya Inc is not responsible for the contents or reliability of any linked Web sites referenced elsewhere within this Documentation and Avaya does not necessarily endorse the products services or information described or offered within them We cannot guarantee that these links will work all of the time and we have no control over the availability of the linked pages License USE OR INSTALLATION OF THE PRODUCT INDICATES THE END USER S ACCEPTANCE OF THE TERMS SET FORTH HEREIN AND THE GENERAL LICENSE TERMS AVAILABLE ON THE AVAYA WEBSITE AT http support avaya com Licenselnfo GENERAL LICENSE TERMS IF YOU DO NOT WISH TO BE BOUND BY THESE TERMS YOU MUST RETURN THE PRODUCT
158. IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 5 Features IP Office provides a comprehensive telephony feature set to enable a fast and efficient response to a telephone call Features such as Caller ID display and call tagging allow employees to see who is calling and who they are calling before they pick the call up Client information can even be popped up on the user s PC For those who are not tied to a desk Wireless handsets and twinning offer mobility around the office For those out of the office be it on the road or working from home comprehensive and easy to use call forwarding facilities PC Softphone and a remote access service allow them to remain in telephone contact and access centralized resources at all times Incoming calls can be efficiently handled using either Direct Dialling DDI DID or dedicated operators For out of hours calls or times when you just can t take calls IP Office provides voicemail and optional Auto Attendant services Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 128 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Basic Call Handling Tones IP Office generates the correct user tones for the geography These tones are generated for all IP Office extension types analog digital and IP Supported tones are e Dial both primary and secondary depending on geography e Busy e Unobtainable e Re order e Conferencing tone depending on geography Caller I D
159. IP extensions after call setup to be routed directly to each other This allows the IP Office system to free up voice compression resources after establishing the end to end connection allowing the resources to be used in the most efficient way Auto Create Extensions IP Office can automatically create an extension entry for new IP phones added onto the local area network In cases where the local area network is not secure this facility can be disabled but simplifies installation of IP telephone systems Fax Transport Avaya Proprietary Fax Transport allows fax calls to be routed over VoIP trunks between IP Office systems on an IP network using a proprietary IP Office transport protocol Fax Transport T 38 IP Office supports the standardized protocol T 38 for transporting FAX calls between IP Office and SIP trunks or SIP endpoints T 38 is only supported on IP Office 500 hardware It requires the IP Office to be equipped with VCM 32 or VCM 64 modules T 38 allows the reliable transmission of Fax messages over a IP channel independent of Codec used for the Voice communication Platforms Supported IP500 only must be fitted with VCM32 or VCM64 module Extensions Supported T 38 Transport Layers Supported UDPTL with optional redundancy error correction Call Types Supported Voice calls which transition to fax relay on detection of fax tones Calls which are negotiated as fax only Product Description 2010 AVAYA All
160. LAN1 LAN2 DNS Voicemail Telephony LDAP System Events SMTP CDR SMDR Twinning YCM SBCC Voicemail Type Voicemail Destination Voicemail IP Address Auto Attendant Announcements voicemail Pro v gO Messages Button Goes To Visual Voice Backup voicemail IP Address 192 168 42 101 192 168 42 142 Voicemail Channel Reservation Unreserved Channels 4 oo E Voice Recording o i E ma ice Recording o o 2 Mailbox Access o EJ lt None gt Centralized Yoicemail Embedded voicemail Group Yoicemail Remote Audix voicemail voicemail Pro Distributed Voicemail Configuration of the different VoiceMail Pro options in IP Office Manager Each central distributed or backup site requires at least a server with a Preferred Edition license Other features which should be distributed over the SCN require suitable licensing for example additional voicemail ports or the Advanced Edition for IVR ContactStore VB Scripting and so on Product Description IP Office Release 6 0 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 241 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Interaction of Voicemail with Email Systems As standard VoiceMail Pro allows for a simple voicemail alert where the entire voicemail is forwarded copied as a WAV attachment to any MAPI or SMTP compliant email application Microsoft Outlook Exchange Lotus Notes etc Forwarding allows emails and voicemail messages to be unif
161. MM 293 mm inches 312 Mobile Twinned Call Pickup 158 Mobile Twinning 18 45 158 249 mobile cell 138 146 147 236 242 255 Mobile Cell Phone 138 146 147 236 242 Mobility 20 90 98 100 113 128 136 Mobility Solutions 90 Modify 254 Modify existing lists 254 Modular 17 44 234 260 Modular Messaging 260 Modular Messaging Voicemail 234 Monitor 52 136 152 156 176 219 227 231 232 257 258 278 292 296 297 298 345 Monitor Calls 156 Most Avaya 149 MP 316 MPPC 316 MSDE 258 MSP 231 Mu law 300 Multiclass 172 Multi Class Extension Multi Link PPP 316 Multiclass Extensions Multilink PPP 172 Multi Level Tree Structure 261 Multi Link 169 197 316 Multilink PPP Product Description IP Office Release 6 0 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 364 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Index Multilink PPP Multiclass Extensions 172 multiple incoming 140 Multiple Mailboxes Forward 261 Multiple Subscriber Number 176 Multiple Time Entries 155 multipoint 162 point 176 Multipoint Connection Units 162 MultiVantage 187 Music on Hold 300 Mute 77 80 82 111 112 117 118 148 MWI 131 348 N NA 90 349 NAME 293 Calling 222 NAT 15 183 199 316 discover 180 Netgear 115 Netherlands 302 Network Address Translation 15 183 199 316 Network Address Translators 316 network addresses 15 183 199 316 Network Alchemy 45 Network Assessment 171 network called Public Switched 160
162. Not Disturb Calls to them will go to voicemail if enabled or else get busy tone unless you are in the user s Do Not Disturb exception list Logged Out The user has logged out from their phone Calls to them will most likely go to voicemail if available IB his icon is used when the status is not known Presence within one X Portal for IP Office allows the user to create sets of call redirection settings Through the configuration tab the user can create different Presence entries and associate different rules to each such as forwarding to a different number or Do Not Disturb In case of Do Not Disturb the user can establish a list of numbers DND exceptions from whom the user wants to receive calls Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 209 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Instant Messaging Another one X Portal for P Office User From the Directory entry of a user the option chat with allows the establishment of an instant messaging session Such sessions can be established only with other logged on one X Portal users and can be established while on multiple calls a Agent 4 Work phone 4311 Call Add to conference Chat with Agent amp Addto Sales Mj Agent A 4311 Call MarkG 6750 Do you want to join the consultation council call Agent A 4311 es When is it MarkG 6750 Now Agent A 4311 Let me finish this call and then I ll jain
163. Number in Use SSA can be launched independently or from IP Office Manager and there can be up to two 2 SSA clients connected to an IP Office unit at one time Note SSA is not a configuration tool for IP Office systems For information on configuration refer to IP Office Manager Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 298 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Chapter 17 Configurations Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 299 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 17 Configurations 1P500 V2 Control Unit 700476005 Includes 4 x front slots for combinations of extension VCM combination cards and trunk daughter cards 1 x System SD card slot for e software image e configurations and country settings e license keys e phone firmware e music on hold e embedded voicemail prompts and recordings 1 x Optional SD card slot for software upgrade image 2 port Layer 3 LAN switch 9 pin DTE serial port for system diagnostics 3 5 mm jack for Music on Hold audio input and 2 switch external door relay control port 8 x external expansion module ports to support additional analog trunks digital or analog extensions Includes auto ranging internal power supply Regional power cord and software documentation CD pack not included Only one variant of control unit is available but regional locale is determined by the appropriate System S
164. Office CCR enables a small business to track and measure customer service and agent productivity levels e IP Office CCR Informal Call Center e The new CCR application delivers e Simple Intuitive Reporting e Browser Thin Client Architecture e Single Server Efficiency with VoiceMail Pro e Target Segment Small Business lt 30 agents e Can support up to 150 agents e 30 supervisors e one administrator Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 16 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Management Tools The IP Office solution phone system router firewall DHCP server is easily managed through the IP Office Manager IP Office Manager is a Windows PC software application that connects to the IP Office system using TCP IP It can be on the same LAN as the IP Office remote on the WAN or connected via the Remote Access Server with a Telephone Adaptor Router or the optional internal modem The System Status application is a useful diagnostic tool that provides enhanced details about equipment and resources in the IP Office system This includes indication of alarms and details of current calls in progress for local or remote diagnostics Scalable Platform The IP500 V2 servers media modules trunk interface cards and software applications give small and mid size businesses the options they want to meet today s communications needs and plans for the future It offers a modular f
165. P Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 1P500 BRI Trunk Card Euro ISDN This type of card can be added to an IP500 Digital Station card P500 Analog Phone card or P500 VCM card It allows that card to then also support up to 4 BRI trunk connections each trunk providing 2B D digital channels The card is available in 2 port 4 channels and 4 port 8 channels variants The ports on IP500 BRI cards can be individually configured to operate as an S interface SO mode When set as an S interface the settings for the Line will be exactly the same as for a circuit on an So8 Expansion Module e These trunks support the mobility features of Mobile Call Control and one X Mobile client 13 1P500 Universal PRI Trunk Card This type of card can be added to an IP500 Digital Station card 1P500 Analog Phone card or IP500 VCM card It allows that card to then also support primary rate digital trunk connections Available in single and dual versions the IP400 PRI card provides single and dual primary rate trunk interfaces respectively The PRI is configurable for T1 E1 or ELR2 MFC use depending on the territory Details of the supported ISDN supplementary services and protocols for each PRI are given in the Public and Private Voice Networks section The IP500 Universal PRI trunk cards incorporate an integrated CSU DSU The CSU function allows the trunk to be put in loop back mode for testing purposes This can be set manually u
166. P after call setup A license for the maximum required number of simultaneous SIP calls is also needed Up to 128 simultaneous calls are supported IP Office also supports the T38 protocol which allows Fax over IP There are several possible network topologies for SIP trunk systems as shown in the following diagrams Option 1 Service provider with a Session Border Controller SBC which solves NAT traversal issues this is the most reliable and preferred method SIP Service Provider Eee SIP NAT Firewall Router Peer Session Border Controller Internet Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 180 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Option 2 Direct connection from the IP Office s second Ethernet port to the internet via a DMZ demilitarized zone port on the router To make this configuration secure the IP Office firewall is set to drop all packets except SIP Unsecured LAN SIP Service Provider DMZ IP Office Secured LAN Firewall Router Option 3 Connection to the ITSP over NAT using 3rd party STUN Simple Traversal of UDP through NAT servers in the network to discover the NAT mechanism being used STUN server SIP Service Provider IP Office a sees censerecessceecscacsornesceessescevensncecesce Router Product Description IP Office Release 6 0 2010 AVAYA
167. P terminal display Visual Voice 22 supported prompt languages Chinese Mandarin Danish Dutch English UK English US Finnish French France French Canadian German Greek Hungarian Japanese Italian Korean Norwegian Polish Portuguese European Portuguese Brazilian Russian Spanish Castilian Spanish Latin American Swedish Conditions e g test if out of hours Broadcast group messages Automatic and on demand call recording with an option for ContactStore search and replay of saved messages Voice forms questionnaire mailboxes Campaign Manager Personal distribution lists Tag information retrieved from a database to a call and delivers it with the call to an agent Visual Basic VB Script support to allow the configuration of the voicemail system through VB scripts rather than VoiceMail Pro call flows Text to Speech facilities to allow emails to be read out over the telephone and or for database information to be read to a caller in 14 languages Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 237 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 e Housekeeping facilities for the management of messages e Automatic detection and routing of fax calls within Auto Attendants and within a subscriber s voicemail box e Support for a range of the INTUITY telephone user interface features in INTUITY emulation mode e Recording of system prompts through the telephone handset or u
168. PRI T1 or SIP line routed automatically to a specific extension hunt group or calling group When a Direct Inward Dialing DID call arrives the PARTNER system collects the digits from the T1 service provider that is the number that was dialed and matches the number to a DID Mapping Table you created If the incoming number matches an entry in the DID Mapping table the call rings at the matching extension or hunt group Direct Line Pickup INTERCOM 68LL INTERCOM 8LL With the Direct Line Pickup features you can access a ringing or held call or a call in progress You can also select a line to use that is not assigned to your telephone The Direct Line Pickup features are e Direct Line Pickup Active Line e Direct Line Pickup lIdle Line Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 34 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Display Language All system telephones offer the choice of 3 display language e US English e Canadian French e Latin American Spanish Each individual extension may select their own language Distinctive Differentiated Ringing PARTNER Version provides different ring patterns for external calls internal calls and transferred calls Do Not Disturb FEATURE 01 Use this feature to be able to press a programmed button to prevent incoming calls for the extension from ringing lights still flash When Do Not Disturb is on outside callers hear ringing while inside ca
169. Phone Card 42 gt Maximum 3 IP500 V2 only e Combination Card with 4 Analog Trunks 4 Maximum 2 no daughter card 1P500 V2 only e Combination Card with 2 BRI Trunks 50 gt Maximum 2 no daughter card P500 V2 only Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 47 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 1P500 Digital Station 8 Card This card provides 12 RJ 45 ports The first 8 ports are DS ports for the connection of Avaya digital phones other than IP phones The card can be fitted with an IP500 daughter trunk card which then uses the additional 4 RJ 45 ports for trunk connections e This card accepts one IP500 trunk daughter card of any type e This card supports selected Avaya 2400 5400 and 6400 Series phones plus T3 phones EMEA only and 3810 wireless phones North America only e 4400 Series phones 4406D 4412D and 4424D are not supported on this card only on Digital Station expansion modules Therefore a maximum of 360 x 4400 Series phones are supported in the system 1P500 Analog Phone 2 Card This card provides 2 analog extension ports 1 2 for the connection of analog phones The card can be fitted with an IP500 daughter trunk card which then uses the last 4 RJ 45 ports 9 12 for trunk connections e This card accepts one IP500 trunk daughter card of any type 1P500 Analog Phone 8 Card This card provides 8 analog extension ports for the connection of analog phones The c
170. PoE Class 3 devices Please note that the 9600 phones are supported on IP Office I P500 and I P500 V2 hardware only Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 59 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 9620L 9620C I P Telephones Avaya 9620 IP Telephones are specifically designed for the everyday telephone user those who typically rely on multiple communications tools such as e mail and instant messaging IM yet still require a high quality and intuitive telephone for voice communications The Avaya one X Deskphone family features an intuitive user interface which helps to make users proficient and confident in performing common telephone tasks such as setting up a conference call or completing a transfer With access to up to 12 lines and features through a simple to navigate interface plus a clear view of 3 lines features with LED indicators the phones are efficient to use while the small footprint consumes minimal space on a users desktop IP Office Communication Manager Common Features e Display Housing e 7 line 3 45 inch backlight graphical display with 320 160 pixels 9620L grayscale 9620C color e Flip stand dual position e Fixed Buttons 10 plus Four way navigation cluster button e Volume up down separate volume levels for the handset speaker and ringer Mute button LED Speaker button LED Headset button LED e Avaya Menu button browser options and settings access
171. Pro Client are e Database Open Opens a link to the required database Multiple databases can be accessed during a call but only one database can be opened at one time e Database Execute Provides the ability to enter a query on the opened database The query can Select data from the open database or can Insert data into the database e Database Get Data Provides access to the data that has been retrieved from a database through the Database Execute action The user can retrieve the next item previous item first item in the list or the last item in the list e Database Close This action will close the current database If the database is open when a call terminates then the database will be automatically closed Interaction with the opened database is done through Structured Query Language scripts SQL An administrator can enter SQL script directly into the specific section of the Database Execute action For administrators that are not familiar with SQL scripts a script can be created automatically through the use of a SQL Query Builder Wizard Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 250 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Using Text To Speech TTS Facilities within a Call Flow Text to Speech TTS can be used to further enhance IP Office IVR and call flow capabilities TTS facilities can enhance the callers experience by allowing the system to read back to them any information t
172. RKER 20 229436 Office Worker This User Profile is targeted at users who are working in the office In conjunction with a wired or wireless Avaya Phone they are provided with functions to control their communication with a PC e g control audio conferences or enabling them to control the voicemails with an e mail client this requires Preferred Edition The Office Worker license enables a user to use Unified Messaging Service UMS and one X Portal for IP Office without Telecommuter functionality The license instances are consumed for each user being configured e Office Worker License 1 User IPO LIC R6 OFF WORKER RFA 1 229438 e Office Worker License 5 Users IPO LIC R6 OFF WORKER RFA 5 229439 e Office Worker License 20 Users IPO LIC R6 OFF WORKER RFA 20 229440 Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 325 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Teleworker This User Profile is targeted at users who are working from home or elsewhere with Internet connection to the office They are provided with the ability to leverage the PSTN ISDN via Telecommuter mode without incurring any remote phone charges Alternatively the new IP Office Softphone can be used if the quality of service of the local internet connection is adequate The Teleworker license enables a user to use one X Portal for IP Office and the IP Office Video Softphone UMS functionality for voicemail email integration is also e
173. Receptionists secretaries and managers are examples of this type of user people who answer incoming calls transfer customers to different departments or extensions and monitor several line appearances throughout a typical day For the Receptionist Assistant user the 1416 1616 provides the most one touch line feature speed dial buttons without the need to scroll through on screen lists All 1400 1600 phones share a consistent design line and feature a button centric layout With fast access to all needed features like hold transfer and conference easily readable back lit displays and a stylish design they are an important addition to the Avaya portfolio of phones for the Small and Mid Size market All phones share a number of feature keys with clear paper labels On the 1408 1608 and 1416 1616 features are also available through a feature list on screen that makes selecting features and line appearances easy even when hotdesking to another phone The phones are accompanied by a complete set of accessories like cost efficient power supplies easy to use paper labels and spare parts For powering options for the 1600 IP phones refer to the section Power Options for IP Telephones 16 For easy and efficient generation of labels free DESI printing software is available from http support avaya com on the 1600 Phone Series page This can be used to print all labels correctly formatted on plain paper or available DESI labels A PDF document
174. S TO THE POINT OF PURCHASE WITHIN TEN 10 DAYS OF DELIVERY FOR A REFUND OR CREDIT Avaya grants End User a license within the scope of the license types described below The applicable number of licenses and units of capacity for which the license is granted will be one 1 unless a different number of licenses or units of capacity is specified in the Documentation or other materials available to End User Designated Processor means a single stand alone computing device Server means a Designated Processor that hosts a software application to be accessed by multiple users Software means the computer programs in object code originally licensed by Avaya and ultimately utilized by End User whether as stand alone Products or pre installed on Hardware Hardware means the standard hardware Products originally sold by Avaya and ultimately utilized by End User License Type s Designated System s License DS End User may install and use each copy of the Software on only one Designated Processor unless a different number of Designated Processors is indicated in the Documentation or other materials available to End User Avaya may require the Designated Processor s to be identified by type serial number feature key location or other specific designation or to be provided by End User to Avaya through electronic means established by Avaya specifically for this purpose Copyright Except where expressly stated otherwise the Prod
175. S buttons are not included in the overall system limit for additional button module buttons e XM24 6416 6424 Up to 10 XM24 units per system maximum of 2 per DS expansion module including the P406v2 with a maximum of 1 per 6416 6424 phone 24 buttons each giving a maximum of 240 XM24 buttons See the Telephones Section 58 for specific limits on the number of each type of telephone supported on DS modules Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 55 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 1P500 Phone Expansion Module This module provides additional analog telephone interfaces e Two Wire e DTMF signaling No rotary or Loop Disconnect e Time Break Recall No Earth Recall e Caller ID capable e Message Waiting Indication MWI capable High Voltage Pulsed High Voltage Line Reversal The IP500 Phone module is available in 2 versions giving 16 or 30 extensions Telephones can be located up to 3280 feet 1km from the control unit For extensions located out of the building additional line protection will be needed For more information on cabling and out of building guidelines see the IP Office Installation Manual IP Office 500 TW 1 13 20 21 22 23 24 ee S ee EXPANSION 24 DC 5 04 MAX DIGITAL STATION Y2 24 DC 1 54 PHONE v2 e P Office Phone Modules provide support for a variety of analog MWI methods These methods are 51V Stepped 81V 101V and Line
176. S system There are several power options in addition to IEEE Power over Ethernet available to customers to power their Avaya IP telephones e Avaya Individual Power Supply for 4600 and 5600 phones Avaya provides individual power supplies that can be used to power each IP phone which provides a single 48 volt output The power supply can operate globally within a wide range of Alternating Current AC input voltages 90 264 Volts Alternating Current VAC 47 63 Hz This power supply has a green indicator LED that shows the unit has power to the PHONE socket on pins 7 amp 8 of the CAT5 cable This item is available in two different versions with and without an internal battery for uninterrupted power to the phone e Avaya individual Power Supply for 1600 Series phones The 1600 Series phones have a special power connecter to allow the connection of a cost efficient power supply These power supplies come in several versions for different countries and voltages e Avaya Power over Ethernet adapter for the 1603 phone The 1603 phone does not support Power over Ethernet natively A small adapter is needed The adapter will fit completely in the stand of the phone offering a cost efficient option of either using a power supply or a PoE adapter IP Telephone Power Consumption Measured in Watts using an IEEE 802 3af power supply at 48V This table shows the power consumption of the phones currently shipping Older versions of phones might have a d
177. SIG may be favored as the chosen signaling standard within multiple vendor environments and provides the following supplementary services which are also available between IP Office and DEFINITY MultiVantage 155 ACM equipped with the relevant RFA licenses Integral Communication 55 Manager IP Office e Simple Telephony Call Basic call ETS 300 171 172 e Circuit Switched Data Call Basic call ETS 300 171 172 e Calling Connected Line Identity Presentation ETS 300 173 e Calling Connected Name Presentation ETS 300 237 238 e Message Waiting Indication ETS 301 260 255 Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 187 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Messaging Networking There are 2 options available today to provide messaging interoperability between IP Office and Definity MultiVantage ACM The first option provides Centralized Voicemail while the second allows Avaya voicemail systems to be networked The requirements functionality and restrictions are summarized below e IP Office to DEFINITY MultiVantage ACM connected to Intuity AUDIX over a QSIG link E1 T1 or IP Incoming Call E1 T1 leased line or IP Network i oi Communication Manager with Intuity AUDIX IP Connection e No local Voicemail required on remote branch IP Office but AUDI X license required on every IP Office e Requires Intuity Audix 4 4 connected via C LAN to DEFINITY 9 5 see IP Offi
178. TNER ACS systems Essential Edition PARTNER Version only e Analog Phones IP500 Phone 2 Phone 8 and Combination cards plus IP Office Phone 16 or 30 Expansion Modules support standard analog phones faxes and modems with support for calling line identification and message waiting indication where these services are provided e Wireless Telephones Avaya IP DECT base stations can be added to support the Avaya IP DECT 3701 and 3711 telephones as well as the DECT R4 3720 and 3725 telephones The IP Office Digital Station interfaces support the Avaya 3810 telephone The Avaya 3600 Series wireless VolP telephones are also supported e Third Party SIP endpoints IP Office s integrated SIP Server supports third party SIP endpoints such as desktop telephones softphones and conferencing speakerphones Application and Feature Licensing Some IP Office applications and features cannot be used unless a valid license key is present in the IP Office system configuration Each license key is derived from the feature being enabled combined with the serial number of the Feature Key installed with the IP Office system IP500 and IP500 V2 systems use a mandatory Feature Key installed with every system Licenses are supplied in two forms time limited trial licenses and indefinite licenses Trial licenses allow applications to run in fully functional form for 60 days from the date of license generation after which time they cannot be used until upgra
179. TNER Version provides the same 2 digit extension numbering plan as PARTNER ACS PARTNER Version supports all current and Euro versions of PARTNER ACS telephones PARTNER Version also introduces a new line of digital telephones 14xx Series sets which will work in conjunction with the PARTNER ETR sets Also supported is our current 3920 and 3910 wireless products as well as most analog devices fax wireless headsets analog phones The original MLS series telephones and older wireless telephones are not supported PARTNER Version includes Embedded Voice Mail providing a 2 port Automated Attendant upgradeable to 6 ports and voice mail coverage activated for all telephones System Capacities PARTNER Version supports the following may not be attained simultaneously e 48 Stations e 56 Trunks e Up to 18 ETR Stations e Up to 12 analog CO lines e Up to 46 Digital Stations e 1 PRI T1 24 lines e Up to 48 Analog Stations e Up to 20 SIP lines System Programming System programming is accomplished in 2 ways e Telephone User Interface TUI from extension 10 or extension 11 and uses the same administration codes as the PARTNER ACS system e Graphical User Interface GUI PARTNER Version provides a Simplified Manager mode in the IP Office Manager software allowing you to program the system in less than 30 minutes Please specty te System pyareters Paten Conigpa ation e Product Description 2010 AV
180. The maximum BTU per system is therefore calculated based on total number of power supplies installed in the system For example for a IP412 this would be 1 for the base unit and up to 12 for the expansion modules e P412 Maximum Heat Dissipation 13 x 392 5 5 103 BTU hr Remember to budget for the power requirements of any additional devices that are to be co located with the IP Office such as server PC s voicemail etc Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 313 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Power Supply e Input e 1P406 V2 1P412 and expansion modules 2 5mm DC inlet socket 24Vdc power input Rating 24V DC 2A maximum e IP Office 500 System Unit IEC AC inlet socket 100 240V AC 50 60Hz 81 115VA 2 5A maximum e Power Supply Units All CE UL Dentori Safety Approved e Standard 40W Power Supply Unit All control and expansion units unless otherwise indicated Supplied with the control or expansion unit 40W PSU with integral lead to the unit Connection to switched mains supply requires separately supplied country specific IEC 60320 C7 power cord 2 wire figure 8 connector e Input 100 240V AC 50 60Hz 81 115VA 2A maximum e Output 24Vdc 1 875A output power 45W maximum e Small Office 45W Power Supply Unit Supplied with the unit 45W PSU with integral lead to control unit Connection to switched mains supply requires separately supplied country specific IEC 60320 C13 p
181. VAYA All rights reserved Page 140 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Call Appearance Buttons Feature e Uses a programmable button on the Avaya digital and IP telephone to represent an incoming or outgoing call e Separate buttons are used to represent each simultaneous call that the user can make or answer e Where possible the status of the calls ringing connected or held is indicated by the button indicator Benefit e Call appearances allow a single user to make answer and switch between multiple calls by pressing the appropriate call appearance button for each call Description On Avaya IP Office digital and IP telephones that have programmable buttons those buttons can be set as call appearance buttons through the IP Office Manager The number of call appearance buttons set for a user determines the number of simultaneous calls they can make and answer Note that the use of call appearance buttons overrides IP Office call waiting features It is only when all call appearances are in use that subsequent callers receive either busy tone voicemail or follow a forward on busy action When call appearance buttons are used a minimum of three call appearance buttons is recommended where possible although some phones are restricted to two call appearance buttons by the number or design of their programmable buttons Alerting Ring Tone for Covered Calls Feature e The alert signal ring tone for inc
182. VoiceMail Pro Client Out calling is only available in INTUITY Mode The administrator sets the number of retries and time interval between retries on a system wide level Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 255 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Campaign Manager As part of the IP Office Preferred Edition and VoiceMail Pro Campaign Manager enables the gathering of repetitive information from inbound calls Such as brochure requests to be fully automated leaving agents free to deal with other more complex calls which require human interaction A definable sequence of recordings are played to the caller with time in between each recording to allow the capture of the caller s spoken answers and or the caller s key presses via DTMF At the end of the transaction the caller can be thanked and the completed transaction retrieved by an agent via a web interface or a short code Campaign Manager allows calls in queue to break out of the queue or be directed in an overflow situation to complete their transactions thereby increasing customer satisfaction by affecting an answer to their call This ensures that a minimum of customers give up when forced to wait in a queue or even worse hear a recorded message stating that they are calling outside of office hours In a Contact Center environment when agents are busy an overflow to Campaign Manager relieves congestion and pressure on agent groups An agent
183. Voicemails can be collected remotely by dialing into the VoiceMail Pro server If the number the user is dialing from is recognized home number or mobile cell phone for example the user will listen to their voicemail straight away If the source number is not recognized the user will be prompted for a mailbox number and a PIN code for that mailbox before they can listen to their voicemail Users have the ability to set and change their own PIN codes When a voicemail needs to be forwarded to other users VoiceMail Pro provides many options e Voicemails can be forwarded to another mailbox or group of mailboxes e Recipients can add their comments to the voicemail before forwarding to another mailbox or mailboxes e Voicemails can be forwarded as email WAV attachments All options are available in a choice of languages both spoken voice prompts and graphical programming interfaces and have the choice of IP Office TUI and INTUITY emulation TUI Call Flows with VoiceMail Pro for Intelligent Call Handling At the heart of VoiceMail Pro is the ability to construct call flows from a series of different building blocks These building blocks allow automation over tasks like answer a call listen for tone dialed digits make a call etc VoiceMail Pro call flows allow far more than just guiding a user to the group or extension they require Call flows allow VoiceMail Pro to dial back users as soon as a voicemail message is left for them it provides remote
184. Wait Time Busy Not Available Calls Waiting Current Wait Time Grade of Service nternal Made New Messages Outbound Calls External Overflowed Answered Overflowed Calls Overflowed Calls Waiting Overflowed Lost Queue State Time Routed to Other Routed to Voicemail Transferred Fa meal Je AE tho 0 0 Dja ajs D iini t 3 o RN SEERUSERLSEREEERILERNEE Slee Agent View In Customer Call Reporter the Agent view is part of the agent reporting license every licensed agent will be able to run their own view An Agent is able to login via a thin client web browser session and associate with a Supervisor The Agent view also displays any alarms that have been set by the Supervisor TOTAL o o f J o Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 289 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Call Statistics The Customer Call Reporter provides detailed statistics to help small businesses understand exactly where a call has been within the business Statistics are measured against also refer to the table below e Queues Points in the call center where a queue forms such as hunt groups e Agents Individuals that are members of queue groups who answer the calls Statistic Full Name Available for Call Type Warning Include Overflow Alarm Queue Agent Ext Int Type From Agent State Queue Nore Agent State Queue Tim
185. YA All rights reserved Page 317 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 PC Specification Server Applications Dependencies Applications Minimum Intel Intel PC Pentium Celeron Resources VoiceMail Pro 256MB RAM Any To avoid replacing the server when adding Standalone new applications we recommend that a VoiceMail Pro IMS Campaign Manager All Athlon 64 chips are supported VoiceMail Pro i If the database being queried is located on IVR TTS i 3 the VM Pro server the query speed of the All Athlon database will be affected by the amount of account the memory requirements of the database being queried VoiceMail Pro ContactStore 3000 All Athlon 64 chips are supported Reporter Dual Core 64 4000 one X Portal for 2GB RAM D945 Not tested AMD Athlon IP Office 10GB free Dual Core 64 4000 disk space Key e VM Pro VoiceMail Pro e TTS Text To Speech e IMS Integrated Messaging Pro e IVR Third Party Database Access e CM Campaign Manager e CCC Compact Contact Center Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 318 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Client Applications Dependencies Applications Min PC Intel Intel AMD Resources Pentium Celeron Phone Manager Lite Pro SoftConsole A maximum of four SoftConsole applications can be run per system a clock speed jlicense controls the number of simultaneous SoftConsole users
186. Yes Copy to Email Yes Yes Listen To Email Text To Speech Yes 2 No Send Email notification Yes Yes Unified Messaging Service UMS Option No Save Message Yes Yes Delete Message Yes Yes Forward Message to another Mailbox Yes Yes Forward to Multiple Mailboxes Yes Yes Forward with a Header Message Yes Yes Repeat Message Yes Yes Rewind Message Yes Yes Fast Forward Message Yes Yes Pause Message Yes No Skip Message Yes Yes LI FO FIFO Message Playback Option Yes No Set Message Priority Yes 2 No Set automatic message deletion timeframe Yes No Alphanumeric Data Collection Yes 2 No Callers Caller I D time and date announced Yes Yes Call Back Sender if Caller I D available Yes Yes Remote Access to Mailbox Yes Yes User Definable PI N Code Yes Yes Known Caller I D PIN Code By Pass Yes Yes Breakout to Reception Internal and Internal and external external 1 Requires UMS enabled through the Power User Office Worker and the Teleworker licenses and MS Exchange Server 2007 with a mobility solution for example a Blackberry not provided by Avaya 2 Intuity mode only Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 262 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 In Queue Announcements Queue Entry Announcement Queue Update Announcement Queue Position Announcement Time in Queue Announcement Time in System Announcement Estimated Time to Answer ETA Exit Queue to alternative answer point Auto Attendant
187. a Contact Closure control jack on the back panel This is a 3 5 mm stereo jack that can drive two external adjunct relays This feature allows users at eligible extensions to control an external adjunct by entering feature codes at their system or standard telephone The port can control a variety of devices the most common being door strikes night bells lighting or voice recording systems Copy Settings 399 This feature allows a System Administrator to copy extension specific programming from one extension to another When the Extension Copy operation is performed the destination extension will have the same properties as the originating extension Extension Copy can only be performed from an Attendant Extension in System Programming Mode or from the Windows Manager PC application Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 33 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Dial Code Features e F represents the FEATURE button e I represents the INTERCOM button e XX represents a system extension number e PP represents a Personal Speed Dial code e G represents a single digit group number e LL represents a system line number ial Code Feature ave Number Redial aller ID Call Logging and Dialing Hot Dial ontact Closure 1 ontact Closure 2 ystem Release Direct Inward Dialing DI D Use this feature to have Direct Inward Dialing DID numbers on a
188. a separate Wedge stand Gigabit Ethernet Adapter The 9600 Gigabit Ethernet Adapter can be fully integrated into a wedge stand of the 9600 phones and provides a transparent upgrade option if customers decide to install Gigabit Ethernet at a later date It is fully integrated into the management interface of the 9600 phones It requires a separate Wedge stand Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 67 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 1600 Series I P Telephones 1400 Series Digital Telephones Avaya one X is a portfolio of communications solutions that deliver a powerful and consistent communications experience for the end user across a variety of devices and interfaces Avaya one X solutions provide Intelligent Access to Intelligent Communications driving enhanced productivity and competitive advantage Avaya one X Deskphone Value Edition also called the 1600 Series of IP telephones is a family of cost effective IP Telephones designed especially around the needs of the Small and Mid Size Business customer For users of a digital solution the 1400 Series of Digital telephones offer the same functionality and consistent communication experience on a line of digital telephones giving customers the choice to select the right solution regardless of the method of connection With IP Office Release 6 the line of 1600 phones has been further enhanced with the 1600 1 series providing an easier t
189. a time profile is no longer applied to a hunt group already set to Out of Service The Out of Service mode is controlled manually from a handset While in this mode calls are presented to the Out of Service group Voicemail can also be used in conjunction with hunt groups to take all group related messages play an announcement when the hunt group is in Night Service or Out of Service mode and give announcements while a call is held in a queue For internal voicemail use a broadcast option is provided This feature will alter the voicemail box operation so that the message notification will only be turned off for each hunt group member when they retrieve their own copy of the message Small Community Networking SCN Distributed Hunt Groups Small Community Networking SCN Distributed Hunt Groups Hunt groups in a Small Community Network can include members located on other systems within the network Note Distributed Hunt Groups are not supported for use with CCC or CCR Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 154 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Night Service When a hunt group is in Night Service mode the hunt group is temporarily disabled Callers to this hunt group will e Pass to a Night Service Fallback group used to provide cover e g pass calls to a manned extension or an external number e Be played the Out of Hours greeting if voicemail is operational e Receive the busy tone
190. abels Printing tool available Note For typical installs the first 3 buttons are reserved for standard call appearances a minimum of 2 call appearance buttons is needed for standard operation o Three contextual softkey buttons Key Labels Icons and text used on fixed feature keys Feature Menu Mobile cell phone style menu with access to most often used features like Call Forwarding Park Settings etc On screen status indication for activated features like call forwarding Speakerphone High quality two way handsfree speaker and microphone Hearing Aid Compatible Yes ergonomic hearing aid compatible handset also supporting TTY acoustic coupler Message Waiting I ndicator Yes also useable as a ringing call alert indicator Personalized Ring Patterns Yes 8 Headset Socket Yes Embedded Applications o Centralized call log and contact application fully transparent between 108 1608 1416 1616 phone 9600 phones and one X Portal for IP Office o Contacts application up to 100 entries and Call Log Missed Incoming Outgoing up to 30 calls o Access to company directory and Visual Voice applications on IP Office Upgradeable Firmware Yes Expansion Module interface e 1616 For up to 3 BM32 32 button expansion modules Note An external power supply is needed for all installs with more than 1 button module e 1416 for up to 3 DBM32 32 button expansion modules Note An external power supply is needed in any
191. ace the future IP Office allows all the technologies to co exist IP Office connects to the PSTN and to IP trunks the VoIP equivalent so providing a Hybrid PBX function where both legacy and future technologies can be used together to minimize operating costs and offer optimize business communications through both voice and data IP Office has digital telephones built on both TDM and IP technology that provide the same user interface offering a flexible choice of solution that can mix for example TDM phones in the office and IP phones at a remote site of at home With the choice of IP phones including real and virtual software phones IP Office can take communications to a new level Buying IP Office allows you choice you can use the pure POTs or the pure VoIP capabilities of IP Office or use both at the same time to allow seamless technology transition of your business without the disruption of having to choose between them now Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 160 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 IP Office Turns VolP into IP Telephony In order to make use of VoIP IP Office uses signaling protocols called H 323 right now and Session Initiation Protocol SIP which allow IP Office to establish end to end connections for the voice path through the IP network It ensures each end of the connection is able to transmit and receive voice and provides the network addressing for end to end pac
192. ach IP Office can be fitted with an optional Voice Compression Module VCM to support VoIP connections e The 1P406 can be fitted with a single module offering up to 30 simultaneous calls e The 1P412 is capable of supporting two modules of all types allowing up to 60 simultaneous calls e The IP500 is capable of supporting two VCM 32 64 modules allowing up to 128 simultaneous calls Does the IP Office support Fax over IP The IP Office supports a proprietary method for carrying Fax calls over IP between IP Office systems It also supports T 38 on SIP trunks and SIP extensions Network Assessment With IP Office optimum network configurations can support VoIP with a perceived voice quality equivalent to that of the Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN However not every network is able to take advantage of VoIP transmissions It is important to distinguish between basic compliance with the minimal VolP standards and validated support for QoS which is needed to run VoIP applications over a data network With the exception of standalone configurations where IP phones connect directly connected to the ports on IP Office Avaya now requires that all customers formally audit their networks for IP telephony readiness before attempting to install any VoIP application A network assessment should normally include e Physical inventory of all equipment inclusive of the current version of code and configurations as needed e An accurat
193. ack mounting kit The 1P406 V2 includes Eight Digital Station DS ports for supported 2400 4400 5400 6400 and T3 Series phones plus 3810 wireless US phones Two Analog telephone ports e Two Wire e DTMF signaling No rotary or Loop Disconnect e Timed Break Recall No Earth Recall e Caller ID capable a variety of standards see later e MWI capable 82 5V and Line Reversal Eight 10 100 Mbps LAN Switched ports Layer 2 unmanaged Support for optional embedded voicemail auto attendant Compact Flash card 9 pin DTE Port for maintenance or Feature Key connection for application licensing X 21 V35 WAN interface Support for up to 6 IP Office Expansion Modules e Phone modules 8 16 30 e Digital Station modules 16 30 e Analog Trunk Module 16 e So8 module External O P socket supporting two relay on off switch ports e g for door entry systems Audio input port for external music on hold source Two trunk interface card slots for analog BRI PRI T1 E1 or CAS E1R2 Internal socket for IP Telephony expansion voice compression modules from 4 to 30 channels Internal socket for internal modem 2 or 12 for Remote Access Services 50 Data channels Up to 20 VoiceMail Pro ports TRUNK EXP 1 4123 B TTT e000 cF A 000o 6000 von POT Analog Phone Ports 1 2 Unit Status LED LAN Switch Ports 1 8 ar x Red Starting Layer 2 unmanaged Ethernet switch DS Digital Station Ports 1 8 Green Started Full du
194. adio Base Station can handle up to eight concurrent calls while each Compact Radio Base Station can handle up to 4 concurrent calls A special protocol called on air synchronization ensures that active calls are seamlessly handed over from one DECT R4 Radio Base Station to the next one if a user with an active call roams through a building To make sure that the on air protocol works and that the whole building is covered by the ranges of the DECT R4 Radio Base Stations a site survey is needed to determine the number and placement of the DECT R4 Radio Base stations within the building Avaya offers these site surveys as a service offer by AGS as well as measurement kits for business partners who want to do these site surveys on their own The on air synchronization as well as the access to the phonebook of IP Office is done by a special software master server that can run in parallel to the standard DECT R4 Radio Base Station software on the same hardware f f ji ANAVA wes o DECT R4 Radio Base Station with internal DECT R4 Radio Base Station with antennas external antennas Each base station has the following features e Two variants of the standard Radio Base Station With Internal antenna and with External Antenna due to regulation in the US only the base station with internal antenna may be used e There are several antennas available for the base station with external antenna Standard Directional Single Directional Dual Omnidirectio
195. age 3 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Contents Call RECOrdiING ccceecceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeesnaaeeneneees 257 IP Office ContactStore ccccccecesceeeeeeeeesseeeeees 258 Centralized Messaging with Avaya Communication MANAGER riesi EEES E E 260 Voicemail Feature Comparison ccceeeeees 261 PC RequireMments ccccccseceeeeeeeeeeeteteseeeeessaeeseaes 265 13 Mobility On Site Mobility cc eeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseaaeeeeneees 268 External Mobility ccccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeseaeeeeees 270 3rd Party Mobility Solutions for Use with IP Office 273 14 Audio Conferencing IP Office Preferred Edition Meet Me Conferencing SOIUTIOMS 45 ete tiv A rede iiaa gae aa a a patie 277 IP Office Conferencing Capacity cccceeee 278 IP Office Standard Conferencing Features 279 15 The Contact Center Customer Call Reporter cccccceeeeeeeesseteeeeeees 282 16 Management Utilities IP Office ManagQel cccccecceeceeeeeeesteteeeeeeeesaeeseees 293 Monitor ehoas tities eet alee 296 Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP 297 System Status Application 0 cceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeees 298 17 Configurations Country Availability 0 ccceecceeeeseeeeeeeeeeseteeteeeees 302 Sample Configurations ccccccceeeeeeeeeeetteeeeseees 303 18 TAPI Functions Supported by IP Office TAPI 2 1 Functions Supporte
196. ail Messages Forwarding Status Forward Unconditional Forward On No Answer Forward On Busy Follow Me Forward Hunt Group Calls The directory panel on the right shows information on following e Directory entries Including IP Office users hunt groups and external directory user non IP Office extensions e Single directory entry details Including IP Office users hunt groups and external directory user non IP Office user e Script When a script has been configured for either the calling or called number the script is displayed in this panel For example an operator may be answering calls on behalf of more than one company To ensure the call is answered with the correct company name a script file can be created with the company name details The script is displayed whenever a call is received for that company COMPANY ONE Call Information Calling Name Company One All calls are to be announced Calling Number 01707364416 Called Name Anne Webb General Enquiries Extension 123 Called Number 209 Call Status Alerting Incoming Duration 00 05 e Conferencing Within SoftConsole calls can be conferenced when held or a conference can be created through the two conference rooms e Conference Held Calls An operator can conference calls that are in the Held Panel All calls in the Held Panel will be conferenced e Queue Panel The queue panel displays a bar graph of the number and the status of exte
197. ain countries IP Office can support a Secondary Dial Tone when an access digit is dialled though this limits some functionality like Alternate Route Selection ARS IP Office can also be configured to work without line access digits by analyzing digits as they are dialled and determining if they are for an internal number or should be sent out on a line this is valuable in SOHO installations where users will not necessarily be used to dialling an access digit for an outside line Paging All Avaya digital and IP phones supported on the IP Office that have loudspeakers can be used to receive broadcast audio messages without having to install a separate paging system Paging can be to individual phones or groups of phones Analog extension ports can be configured for connection to external overhead paging systems usually through an adapter such that a port can be included in a paging group to permit mixed phone and overhead paging Some Avaya digital and IP phones are able to answer a page by pressing a key while the page is going on this terminates the page and turns it into a normal call This feature is supported across the IP Office Small Community Network Intrude The Call Intrude feature allows a user if permission through IP Office Manager is given to join an existing conversation whether this is an internal or external call A user with the Can Intrude option can join a call on any extension on the system however a User
198. aiting Light support e Forward voicemails between known remote users e Fully featured VoiceMail Pro at every branch office e VoiceMail Pro Networked Messaging will only accept an incoming voicemail message for a local mailbox It will NOT forward it to a remote Voicemail server If required this facility is available through Avaya Interchange e VoiceMail Pro Networked Messaging is limited to Avaya Messaging Servers not third party messaging platforms Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 189 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Common Networking Features Alternate Route Selection Alternate Route Selection ARS allows calls to be routed via the optimum carrier Time profiles can also be used to allow customers to take advantage of cheaper rates or better quality at specific times of day If a primary trunk is unavailable or congested then ARS provides automatic fallback to an available trunk e g analog trunk fallback if a T1 or SIP trunk fails or use PSTN for SCN fallback Multiple carriers are supported For example local calls are to go through one carrier between specific hours and international calls through an alternative carrier Carrier selection using 2 stage call set up via in band DTMF is possible It is possible to assign specific routes on a per user basis e g only allow expensive routes to be used by critical staff Note Existing Least Cost Routing LCR configur
199. all where this was available to IP Office through ANI Caller ID or DNIS at the time of the call e The direction of the call incoming outgoing or internal e The owner of the call recording e The target or dialed number which may be different from the number that actually took the call Recordings within IP Office ContactStore are stored as WAV files IP Office ContactStore uses the G 726 16kbps ADPCM compression standard which provides the best compromise between storage capacity and CPU loading IP Office ContactStore is designed to perform compression as a background task which does not impact the systems ability to record search or play other calls It takes approximately 1 minute to compress a two hour recording The compressed recordings are stored as 16kbps G 726 format storage requirements are therefore 8MBs per hour of recording The IP Office ContactStore suite can be installed onto the same server as VoiceMail Pro but must be loaded onto a separate partition Alternatively IP Office ContactStore can be installed on a separate drive within the same server or on a separate server The minimum PC specification when VoiceMail Pro and IP Office ContactStore are installed on the same server is detailed in the Voicemail System requirements later in this chapter IP Office ContactStore stores recorded calls with certain security in place Access to recordings is strictly controlled according to the security constraints configured wit
200. all IP Office control units Park As an alternative to placing a call on hold a call can be parked on the system to be picked by another user The call park facility is available through the user s telephone one X Portal for IP Office Phone Manager or SoftConsole Calls are Parked against a park slot number which can be announced over a paging system so the person the call is for can go to any phone and collect the call by dialling the park slot number For convenience Phone Manager has 4 pre defined park buttons On digital phones with DSS BLF keys it is possible to program Park keys that will indicate when there is a call in a particular park slot and allow calls to be parked or retrieved There is a system configurable timeout that determines how long a call may remain parked before it is re presented to the extension that originally parked the call Automatic Callback Feature e When calling an extension that is busy set the system to call you when the extension becomes free This feature is also called Ringback When Free e When calling an extension that just rings set the system to call you when the extension is next used This feature is also called Ringback When Next Used Benefit e Carry on with other work and let the system initiate a call for you when the extension becomes available Description Depending on the type of phone a user has call back when free is accessed by dialing a short code while listening to inte
201. all arrives 222 Call Back Sender 261 Call Back When Free 130 131 185 Call Barring 143 144 call billing 231 Call Center 16 115 156 230 245 254 Call Completion Busy Subscriber 176 callcosting 143 Call Coverage 134 140 142 Product Description IP Office Release 6 0 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 354 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Index Call Coverage Buttons 140 142 Call Detail Records 292 Call Details 292 298 Call Details Panel 222 Call Duration 222 call flow programming interface 252 Call Flow Utilizing Database Actions 250 Call Flows 249 250 251 252 277 Call Forwarding 14 20 128 146 249 Call Handling 7 16 20 128 133 219 222 Call History 149 219 222 228 Call Hold 184 187 Call Identifier 310 Call Intrude 135 158 Call List 158 Call Listen 158 236 Call Log 58 80 82 85 86 87 129 136 143 219 Call Pickup 137 158 Call Pick up 112 185 Call Pickup Any 158 Call PickUp Extension 156 Call Pickup Extn 158 Call Pickup Group 158 Call Pickup Line 158 Call Pickup Members 158 Call Pickup User 158 Called Calling Line ID Presentation 175 Called Calling Name 175 184 Called Calling Name Presentation 175 Called Calling Number 184 Caller Display 116 348 Campaign Manager 16 236 256 261 Can Intrude 135 309 Cancel All Forwarding 158 Cancel Ring Back When Free 158 Captaris 245 carrying Fax 171 CAS 334 345 Cascaded Out calling 255 Castele 245 Castelle Fax 245 Castilian 2
202. alls are established by IP Office there is no need to check bills nor to pay for expensive hotel calls Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 137 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Twinning and Mobility Twinning allows a primary extension and a secondary number extension or external to operate together as a single telephone When a call is presented to the primary phone the secondary will ring If the primary telephone does not ring for example in Do Not Disturb the secondary phone will not ring Internal Twinning This is typically used in scenarios like workshops or warehouses where team supervisors may have a desk with a fixed phone but also have a wireless extension e g DECT When a call is made from either twinned phone the call will appear to have come from the primary phone when the secondary is an extension on the IP Office system Other users of the system need not know that the supervisor has two different phones The supervisor s Coverage Timer and No Answer Time are started for the call and if the call is not answered within that time the call will be delivered to available coverage buttons if applicable and then Voicemail if applicable The following features are supported with internal twinning e Follow Me To e Follow Me Here e Forwarding e Do Not Disturb inc exceptions e Context less hunt group actions Membership Service Status Fallback Group configuration e Vo
203. alone client not requiring any additional server or in combination with one X Portal for IP Office If used in combination with the one X Portal application the softphone delivers a centralized call log synchronized with many IP Office telephones as well as a number of collaboration features like presence status indication and instant messaging one X Portal can be used with the standard deskphone while working in the office and switched to softphone when working remote Details about IP Office Softphone can be found in the chapter User Call Control Applications 20 Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 271 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Mobile Messaging Maa Mobile Messaging means managing your voice messages together with email messages using the mobile cell phone Similar to a unified messaging solution on the desktop PC it enables the user to manage all of their daily messages in one place in this case the mobile messaging application of the mobile cell phone like for example Outlook Mobile on Windows Mobile devices At the low end of the range of mobile messaging options is the simple voicemail to email forwarding using SMTP which is standard with both the Essential and Preferred Edition The synchronization of the voice message status between all a user s devices Outlook voicemail telephone interface one X Portal mobile cell phone so that listening to a new message a
204. amily is subject to change without notice Not all components and features documented are available in all territories refer to your Avaya Representative for further details This document should be read in conjunction with any issued technical bulletins and or product offer announcements Avaya IP Office Simple Powerful Communications for Small Businesses What is I P Office IP Office is a versatile communications solution that combines the reliability and ease of a traditional telephony system with the applications and advantages of an IP telephony solution This converged communications solution can help businesses reduce costs increase productivity and improve customer service How can I use it in my business Avaya IP Office unifies your communications providing your employees with a solution that lets them handle all their business communications on the device of their choice their laptop mobile phone office phone or home phone using wired wireless or broadband connections What are my choices Successful companies are always looking for new ways to do more with less keeping their business flexible innovative and competitive without driving up operating costs and capital expenses Avaya IP Office is the right choice for any small business today whether you are 5 25 or 250 employees just getting started or already established have a single office a home office or multiple stores sites Does your busine
205. ansion Modules The EU24 EU24BL are phone expansion modules that work in association with a 5420 5620 1 2420 4620 1 4625 phones They provide an additional 24 programmable buttons with associated display label and status icons Only one EU24 can be used per phone The EU24BL has a backlight and is for use with the 4621 and 5621 only The EU24 EU24BL supports an additional 24 Call Appearance Feature buttons by displaying a column of 12 buttons at a time with a dotted line separating the two columns Common Features 24 Programmable call appearance feature keys Automatically labeled from the system no paper labels Connects directly to the associated phone Requires an Avaya 1151 series power supply even for IP phones already using Power over Ethernet PoE IP Office supports a maximum of eight EU24 EU24 BL s on each IP Office system subject to total system limits Please refer to System Button Module Support 8 for the total system limitations of button modules on IP Office Note that EU24 BL while supported on IP Office R6 is not longer available for new sales Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 84 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 T3 Telephones The T3 range of digital Upn and IP telephones provide European style with context sensitive displays and are available in select European countries only T3 Compact This telephone is best suited for the Walkup
206. apter Rechargeable Battery Belt Clip Charging Stand User and Installation Guide Wall Plate Adapter 2 AC Adapters Rechargeable Battery Bettclip Charger Unit Wall Mount Stand Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 114 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 VPN Phone Functionality VPN Phone is a full featured IP Telephony solution that provides secure communication over public ISP networks to an IP Office system at the company headquarters It is a software only product that runs on the standard 5610 5620 5621 or 4610 21 IP telephones In combination with one of these phones and the most popular VPN gateway products the software extends enterprise telephony to remote locations VPN functionality is also supported on the new 9600 IP phones not requiring a separate software load VPN Phones offer the full IP Office telephony features that are available on IP Office IP phones at the users desktop in a remote location like a home office From release 6 onwards no license for VPN functionality is needed for either 5600 or 9600 Series phones IP Phone with YPN Client Software VPN Gateway Integrates the functionality of the VPN device into the Avaya IP phone VPN Phone is ideal for IP Office customers supporting work at home users e Virtual Office workers e Remote workers e Remote call center e Business continuity support e Very small locations that require a s
207. ard can be fitted with an IP500 daughter trunk card which then uses the additional 4 RJ 45 ports for trunk connections e This card accepts one P500 trunk daughter card of any type When fitted with an Analog Trunk daughter card it provides a single power fail port Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 48 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 1P500 ETR 6 port Phone Card This card provides 6 ETR ports for the connection of ETR 6 18 34 D Euro Style and Refresh digital phones as well as 3910 3920 wireless phones The card can be fitted with an 1P500 daughter trunk card which then uses the additional 4 RJ 45 ports for trunk connections A maximum of three of these cards is allowed in the 1P500 V2 chassis This card e accepts one IP500 trunk daughter card of any type When fitted with an Analog Trunk daughter card it provides a single power fail port e works in IP500 V2 only e is only supported by the IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version please see chapter 1b 1P500 Combination Card with 4 Analog Trunks This card works in the IP500 V2 only and provides e 4 Analog trunk ports e 2 Analog extension ports for the connection of analog phones e 6 Digital Station DS ports for the connection of Avaya digital phones e 10 VCM channels to support IP telephones or voice networking This card already includes a IP500 trunk daughter card therefore no additional daughter card is
208. ase 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 IP Office Group Collaboration Licenses IP Office Preferred Edition The following license is supported on all current IP Office control units e Preferred Edition IPO LIC PREFRD VM PRO RFA LIC DS 171991 In particular this license enables e advanced messaging e multi level automated attendant e secure meet me conferencing e call recording e conditional call routing e Text to Speech TTS for e mail reading for users with appropriate User profiles e queue announcements This system license enables VoiceMail Pro and provides the initial 4 ports If additional voicemail ports are required the appropriate licenses can be purchased at time of initial purchase or later see Additional Messaging Ports licenses section below IP Office Preferred Edition Messaging VoiceMail Pro is a messaging server application that runs on a Windows server PC It is enabled through the Preferred Edition license see above Messaging services to multiple IP Offices can be supported when they are connected in an IP Office Small Community Network SCN In this centralized voicemail scenario only the central IP Office requires the Preferred Edition license The other IP Offices within the network do not require a Preferred Edition license However from Release 6 onwards due to load balancing capacity increase and resilience reasons it is possible to have more than one Preferred Edition License in the SCN By
209. ased on the Smart Card Feature Key fitted to the control unit A Smart Card Feature key is mandatory on all IP500 control units for correct operation of the unit regardless of whether the unit is using any licenses e 1P500 V2 SD Card Feature Key For P500 V2 control units the serial number is based on the System SD Card Feature Key fitted to the control unit A System SD Card Feature key is mandatory on all IP500 V2 control units for correct operation of the unit regardless of whether the unit is using any licenses There are three types of System SD card available which defines the default operating mode e System SD CARD A LAW e System SD CARD MU LAW e System SD CARD PARTNER For licensing each IP Office control unit must have its own Feature Key and licenses The Feature Key associated with one IP Office system cannot be used to validate the licenses of another IP Office system Since licenses are based on the serial number of the Feature Key they cannot be moved between systems with different Feature Keys If a Feature Key is lost the license will become invalid If it is necessary to exchange a Feature Key due damage or upgrade then the existing key and licenses can be exchanged license swap through the Avaya Direct International ADI website https adi avaya com Please contact your Avaya Distributor or Avaya Channel Account Manager CAM for more information Some licenses enable a number of ports channels or users Depending on
210. ations are automatically converted to ARS when upgrading to 4 1 or higher Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 190 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Network Numbering Schemes IP Office uses fully flexible network numbering options Dialed digits can be manipulated to add or remove digits access codes etc in order to fit into any numbering scheme Two types of numbering schemes are commonly deployed Linked Numbering and Node Numbering schemes In linked numbering schemes each site within the network has a unique range of extension numbers and users simply dial the extension number of the called party Often linked numbering schemes are used in very small networks lt 5 sites with less than 500 extensions With node numbering schemes each site is given a node ID and this is prefixed by the user when dialing extensions at other sites In this way extension numbers can be replicated across sites while still appearing unique across the network Node numbering schemes are common in larger networks Linked numbering schemes and node numbering schemes are sometimes both used within the same network with node numbering used at the large offices and linked numbering employed at clusters of satellite offices The following figures depict these two types of numbering schemes Linked Numbering Scheme Node Numbering Scheme Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 191
211. ators 4 hours talk time and 80 hours standby Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved IP Office Release 6 0 Page 102 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 3626 Ruggedized Wireless Telephone While no longer available this WiFi telephone is still supported on IP Office Release 6 The Avaya 3626 Wireless Telephone is a WiFi standard 802 11b telephone that runs using H 323 The 36261102 supports all of the features of 3616 with the following differences e Designed for industrial environments e Ruggedized durable design e Push to talk walkie talkie feature for broadcast communications between employees Note 3626 supports both R1 0 and R2 0 firmware on the set itself However as of R3 1 of IP Office only 3626 phone R1 0 firmware is supported Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 103 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 3641 Ruggedized Wireless Telephone The Avaya 3641 Wireless Telephone is a WiFi standard 802 11a b g telephone that runs using H 323 The 3641 supports the following features Slim lightweight design with large display Backlight display with Icons Simple to use with improved user interface Navigation and soft keys for simple access to frequently used operations Office quality speakerphone for handsfree operation 802 11a b g standard compatible Radio Frequency 2 4000 GHz b g or 5 8 GHz a FCC certification Part 15 247
212. ature Key card slot IP500 and IP500 V2 Front View Ground Point 5 cPuo CHF TII CiFO Status LED s Reset switch Slot for embedded External f voicemail memory music on old card input External output switch for example door relays IP500 Back View CPU or orkes O R5232 DTE Status LEDs Port System SD card slot External Optional SD card slot music on hald External output switch input IP500 V2 Back View R5232 DTE 4 EXPANSION Expansion ports for IP400 Expansion Modules LAN Ports LAN LAN1 WAN LAN2 Reset switch LAN Parts LAN LAN1 WAN LAN2 USB Port Not used Expansion ports for Expansion Modules Product Description IP Office Release 6 0 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Issue 20 p Page 46 05 August 2010 I P500 Base Cards The IP500 control unit has 4 slots for the insertion of cards These cards can be divided into two types base cards and daughter cards Base cards include a front panel and ports for cable connections Daughter cards can be added to a base card in order to provide additional facilities typically trunk connections The following base cards are available e IP500 Digital Station 8 Card 48 gt Maximum 3 e 1P500 Analog Phone 2 Card and Phone 8 Card 48 gt Maximum 4 e 1 P500 VCM Card 505 Maximum 2 e 1P500 4 Port Expansion Card 51 Maximum 1 e 1P500 Legacy Card Carrier 51 Maximum 2 e ETR 6 Port
213. atus of the users one X Portal for IP Office shows these conditions State Icon Description Available The normal state for a user showing that their work extension is not in use Busy The normal state for a user showing that their work extension is currently on a call The user has logged out from their phone Calls to them will most Logged Out likely go to voicemail if available ener This icon is used when the status is not known Do Not Disturb The user has set Do Not Disturb Calls to them will go to voicemail if enabled or else get busy tone unless you are in the user s Do Not Disturb exception list Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 148 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Call History Feature e Access to a list of called received and missed calls from the phone and or IP Office user productivity applications Description IP Office keeps a record of calls made and received including unanswered calls Details are store for both users maximum 30 entries and hunt groups maximum 10 entries The method of operation varies according to the phone type but in all cases the call records can be used for return calls With IP Office Release 6 a centralized call log is supported by 1400 1600 and 9600 Series phones not 1403 or 1603 1603SW and one X Portal for IP Office leading to consistency between the two 5400 Series and 5600 Series call logs are stored on the phone
214. aughter trunk cards can be fitted to existing 1P500 base cards to provide support for trunk ports The daughter card uses the ports provided on the base card for cable connection The addition of an IP500 daughter trunk card is supported on IP500 Digital Station P500 Analog Phone and IP500 VCM base cards They are not supported on the IP500 Legacy Card Carrier base card For those base cards that support daughter cards there are no restrictions on the combination of card types However in systems with both Analog Phone 8 base cards and analog trunk daughter cards combining the two types are recommended as it then provides analog power failure support for one trunk extension Not applicable to the Analog Phone 2 base card Each daughter card is supplied with the spacer pegs required for installation and a label to identify the card s presence on the physical unit once installed e 1P500 Analog Trunk Card Maximum 4 e 1P500 BRI Trunk Card Maximum 4 e 1P500 Universal PRI Trunk Card Maximum 4 1P500 Analog Trunk Card This card can be added to an IP500 Digital Station card P500 Analog Phone base card or 1P500 VCM card It allows that card to then also support 4 analog loop start trunks It also provides one analog V 32 modem e When fitted to an IP500 Analog Phone 8 base card not Phone 2 the combination supports 1 power failure extension to trunk connection Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 52 I
215. bedded Messaging Card 297 Embedded Voice Memory 315 Embedded Voicemail 16 17 45 155 158 169 234 235 261 297 300 Enable ARS Form 158 Enable Internal Forward Busy 158 Enable Internal Forward Unconditional 158 Enable Internal Forwards 158 enabled disabled 135 Encapsulation 197 Product Description IP Office Release 6 0 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 358 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Index Encapsulation 197 Frame Relay 172 encoding G711 102 104 Enlarged earpiece 105 Enterprise 100 115 245 276 ENTITY MIB 316 entry double 279 Entry level voicemail 235 EnumerateAddresses 308 equating Exchange User 265 Equisys 245 ERP 245 escalates doctor s mobile cell 255 ESP 316 ESP DES CBC Cipher Algorithm 316 Estimated Time Answer 261 Estonia 302 ETA 261 Ethernet 15 17 45 54 77 80 82 84 85 86 87 98 100 160 167 180 194 196 300 334 Ethernet eliminates 167 Ethernet LAN 100 160 Ethernet Ports 17 77 80 82 85 86 87 180 194 Ethernet Switch 15 194 196 300 EU24 55 82 84 349 Euro ISDN 52 Euro ISDN BRI 300 Except 85 88 147 180 183 278 297 300 4601 167 Exchange SMTP GFI FAXmaker 245 executing Acquire Call 156 Executive Wireless 125 Exit Queue 261 Expansion 17 44 45 47 54 55 77 80 82 84 88 176 297 298 300 303 312 334 348 349 350 Expansion Cards 300 Expansion Module Digital Station 30 300 Expansion Module Phone 30 300 expansion module
216. benefits of the system are delivered to the desktop The phones that support handsfree operation are intended for individual use only not for group and conference room operation The telephones listed below are the preferred and premier range of telephones for use on the IP Office These telephones are sold worldwide in every country that the IP Office is available This telephone range consists of both digital and IP telephones IP Office worldwide digital phones IP Office worldwide IP phones 1403 Telephone 6d 1408 Telephone 7 1416 Telephone 73 5402 Telephone 7 gt 5410 Telephone 8 5420 Telephonel 82 gt 9620L 9620C IP Telephone 60 gt 9630G 9640 9640G IP Telephone 62 gt 9650 9650C IP Telephonel 64 1603 IP Telephonel 685 1608 IP Telephone 68 1616 IP Telephone 68 5610SW IP Telephone 80 gt 5621 IP Telephonel 824 In addition to the telephones above the IP Office supports a wide range of phones as listed below However note that some of these phones are only available in certain countries and regions Other digital analog phones Other IP phones T3 Compact Upn and 1P 855 T3 Comfort Upn and IP 87 T3 Classic Upn and IP 86 gt T3 DSS Module 8 2402 Telephone 7 2410 Telephone 8 2420 Telephone 82 gt EU24 EU24BL DSS Unit 84 Analog Telephones 11 Interquartz Gemini 9281 AV 9330 AV and 9335 AV analog telephones 118 3641 Ruggedized Wireless WiFi Pho
217. branch office and remote workers while building the office and remote workers while building the best possible foundation for your future growth IP Office provides each location with a scalable up to 384 extensions telephony solution that supports voice networking and offers e A uniform dialing plan making it easy to call co workers anywhere on the network and improve customer service e Consistent user experience by sharing the same phones and messaging interface as in headquarters e A user defined central directory that is automatically synchronized e Least cost routing and bandwidth on demand e Centralized voicemail and or the ability to network voicemail systems together The benefits of networking e Operate a network of branch offices with a consistent set of communications and services across all locations gain the efficiencies of universal functions and end user familiarity e Leverage any existing investment in Avaya systems at other sites e Centralize services e g operator voicemail as well as management and administration to reduce costs e Speed deployment of remote offices respond more quickly to market demands e Improve inter site communication to simplify information exchange and enhance customer service Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 174 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Private Circuit Switched Voice Networking Private voice networks are built using struc
218. cable cuts hardware failure and so on But loss of money and reputation does not necessarily have to follow such a failure The IP Office Resilience and Backup functionalities are supported by VoiceMail Pro A VoiceMail Pro server connected to a Primary IP Office can automatically re connect to a Backup IP Office if the connection between the two IP Office systems gets lost This covers the failure of an IP Office or the connection between them A Preferred Edition license is required on the backup IP Office system for this scenario Introduced with Release 6 a Backup VoiceMail Pro server offers additional comprehensive functionalities to keep the business communication up and running A Backup VoiceMail Pro server can be added to an IP Office VoiceMail Pro system to take over the voicemail functions in the case of a failure at the primary VoiceMail Pro system The Backup VoiceMail Pro server can act in different scenarios e One IP Office one Primary VoiceMail Pro server and one Backup VoiceMail Pro server where the backup is either at the same location as the IP Office VoiceMail Pro or at an external site e A Primary IP Office with a Primary VoiceMail Pro server and a Backup IP Office with a Backup VoiceMail Pro server at a second location e A SCN with a Centralized VoiceMail Pro server connected to an IP Office at one site and a networked IP Office with a Backup VoiceMail Pro server There might also be additional IP Office and Dis
219. can collect the completed transaction via a web browser or via a short code representing the park slot number of a particular campaign This number can be pre programmed under a DSS key and used by agents to access the campaign If the DSS key incorporates a BLF lamp that lamp is lit when new campaign messages have been left Agents then transcribe the caller s answers into a database or other records 4 Campaign Web Interface Microsoft Internet Explorer yo Test Next New Next Active Next Processed Ident State DateTime CLI Name Brochure Address 6 New 19 04 2004 2 ae 203 amp 00 02 Nw i Neto 203 00 04 00 04 E 00 02 IN gt 19 04 2004 5 a New l 203 00 02 Si 00 01 amp 00 01 14 13 f i 4 Hold CTRL while selecting multiple qualifier a Internet yy Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 256 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Call Recording IP Office Preferred Edition and VoiceMail Pro also offer call recording services that allow the automatic manual recording of calls for a variety of applications such as for training purposes or to monitor abusive callers As standard recordings can be directed to the called extension s voicemail box or to any other mailbox for later retrieval Alternatively recordings can be stored in a central database for retrieval through a Web based browser b
220. can connect to an IMAP server integrated with the VoiceMail Pro server VoiceMail Pro will deliver new voicemail messages by using the voicemail to email capability sera UMS IP Office gt I l l Mail Server e g Exchange fi N N 4 he ae optional PC with Desk Phone Mail Client e g Outlook New voicemails arrive as emails with a WAV attachment and the user can handle them like any other email If a voicemail has been listened to its status will change to read independent of the device that has been used to access the voicemail If the user deletes it it will be deleted everywhere Users that have UMS access enabled just need to add an additional email account to their email client to be able to use the unified messaging features No additional client software installation is required The instructions how to add this account and configure the web address for the VoiceMail Pro Web Access can be provided by an administrator by email without the need for system administration or external support VoiceMail Pro UMS Web Access The second interface UMS offers to the users is a web interface allowing voicemail access via a web browser such as Internet Explorer or Mozilla Firefox with the ability to listen to targeted voicemails by using either the PC s multimedia equipment or the desk phone Change Password B User name l Please enter your current password sooo Please enter your new password
221. can have pre programmed Call Flows for weekly conference calls e g every Tuesday between 2pm and 5pm using PIN code 1234 for a sales call etc If multiple conference calls are scheduled users can select which one they want to attend via a simple menu Should users encounter any issues calls can be automatically routed to the operator for assistance For additional security if Caller ID information is provided by the network VoiceMail Pro can make Calleri D checks before allowing calls into a conference Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 277 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 I P Office Conferencing Capacity IP Office provides a flexible conferencing solution with 128 conferencing channels on the IP500 and IP500 V2 allowing multiple conferences of any size from 3 to 64 parties This means that several conferences of different sizes can all run at the same time if the total calls do not exceed the systems conference resources So the system will support 42 x 3 party conferences 2 x 64 party conferences or any combination in between IP Office does not impose limits on the mix of internal and external calls in conference but if all internal participants disconnect from the conference bridge the external participants can be disconnected automatically by the system for added security configurable system setting Notes 1 Analog Trunk Restriction In conferences that include external analog
222. ce dial tone the mobile user can dial the FNE 31 DID DDI that has been programmed in the IP Office Similarly once dial tone is heard the user can dial numbers and short codes as if the user is logged into an analog extension on the IP Office Mobile Call Control and one X Mobile require twinned calls to be routed through specific trunk types on IP500 IP500v2 only e 1P500 PRI U single or dual daughter cards e 1P500 Dual or Quad BRI daughter cards e SIP trunks RFC 2833 IP Office Softphone al Usable both inside the office and at remote locations IP Office Softphone is a PC based telephony client allowing a user to make and receive phone calls right from his PC equipped with e g a headset of speakerphone In addition the softphone supports end to end Video between two softphone users on a IP Office network Full voice access to the IP Office system is available wherever reliable access to the company network exists This can be in meeting rooms using a Voice ready Wi Fi network at a remote office site using the local Ethernet interface or at home or in a hotel room when connecting to the company network through a VPN Virtual Private Network The softphone offers standard calling functionality like several call appearances hold transfer and access to a large number of IP Office features via dedicated feature keys Access to IP Office directory is of course also available IP Office Softphone can be used as a stand
223. ce Manager The first two trunks on the module are automatically switched to power fail socket in the event of power being interrupted They conform to ANSI T1 401 and TIA EIA 646 B standards Not available in all territories E1R2 Channel Associated Signaling Provided by the IP400 PRI E1R2 and IP500 Universal PRI cards The IP400 PRI E1R2 cards are available in two versions supporting either RJ 45 or coax network connections Each card provides channels that can be configured for MFC Pulse or DTMF dialing dependent on the requirements of the network Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 179 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Session Initiation Protocol SIP IP Office supports SIP trunking SIP trunks allow IP Office users to take advantage of new telephony services being offered by Internet Telephony Service Providers ITSPs In many cases these telephony services can offer substantial savings in comparison to traditional exchange lines The IP Office solution allows all users regardless of their phone type to make and receive SIP calls SIP trunks are handled like any other line on IP Office affording all the call routing and toll control needed to manage inbound and outbound calls SIP trunks on IP Office require the provisioning of voice compression channels through the installation of VCM modules within the control unit RTP Relay is also supported to allow the IP stream through SI
224. ce Offer Announcement dated August 2003 for more information on compatibility e Maximum of 19 IP Offices can be supported on 1 INTUITY AUDIX server 20 total with DEFINITY ACM occupying one slot e Requires QSIG and Private Networking licenses on DEFINITY MultiVantage ACM e User mailbox with Message Waiting Light support e Forward voicemails between users e No auto attendant enhancement currently being investigated e No call recording e No queuing at remote sites e No Fax over IP to AUDIX e No Small Community Networking support when AUDIX is configured on IP Office Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 188 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 e Avaya IP Office VoiceMail Pro networked to Avaya Modular Messaging Octel Intuity AUDIX via Interchange 3210 Avaya Communication Avaya IP Office Manager Public or Private Network Ext 3000 Ext 2000 VoiceMail Pro Server Leaves message Interchange S3210 for ext 3000 Avaya Intuity AUDIX e Requires local VoiceMail Pro on every branch IP Office licensed with VoiceMail Pro Networked Messaging RFA e Requires Avaya Interchange S3210 on Modular Messaging Octel or Intuity Audix e Provides 2 000 remote mailboxes per VoiceMail Pro server i e per branch office to be extended to 10 000 remote mailboxes by next VoiceMail Pro maintenance release e User mailbox with Message W
225. cense Feature Key A Law 300 Software License Feature Key Mu Law 300 software documentation CD 300 SOHO 135 Sophisticated Queue Announcement 236 SOS Emergency key 111 Speaker button 152 Speaking Clock 236 261 Special Features 4625 SW 82 5410 80 5420 82 5621 SW 82 Special Services 176 Specialty Handset Support 117 Speed Dial 80 82 88 148 219 Speed Dial List 80 82 Sprint 176 SQL 250 SQL Query Builder Wizard 250 SSA 298 SSA connects 298 SS CNIP 175 SS CNIR 175 SS CONP 175 SS CT 175 SS MWI 175 SSS 176 Product Description IP Office Release 6 0 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 369 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Index STAC 316 Stac Lemple Ziv 198 STAC LZS Compression Protocol 316 stackable 45 334 Stand Charging 113 Stand Power Supply Adapter Charging 113 Standard 40W Power Supply Unit 312 Standard Edition 18 Professional Edition 45 standards based 14 15 153 standards based TAPI 153 Starter Kits 98 starting Day One 7 station access 58 Status 17 45 84 102 133 136 141 148 154 222 227 232 236 258 292 298 Status Application 17 45 298 Status Bar 222 STD15 316 STD16 316 STD17 316 STD56 316 STD57 316 Still Queued 236 strings 176 Absence Text 133 Structured Query Language 250 STUN 180 316 Sub addressing Allows 176 subject 7 129 156 257 email 242 Summary 52 125 171 Positioning 234 Supervised Transfer called 131 supervisor s Coverage Timer 138 Sup
226. ch e Auto negotiation provided separately for each port e 802 3 Flow Control Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 85 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 T3 Classic This telephone is best suited for the Everyday User It is available in Europe only Common Features Display 4 lines x 26 characters Fixed Feature Buttons 5 preprogrammed keys with printed text labels and 2 for Audio Volume control Programmable Feature Buttons 6 preprogrammed keys with indicators and printed text labels 4 programmable keys with printed text labels Speakerphone Two way handsfree speaker and microphone Hearing Aid Compatible Through optional handset Message Waiting and call log Indicator Yes Personalized Ring Patterns Yes 8 ring patterns Headset Socket No Optional headset add on available Embedded Applications Navigation Cursor Control Call signaling via LED and or ringer Alpha entry via dialing keypad Optional Add Ons Up to 3 DSS Modules T3 Headset link for wired headsets Color Graphite gray or polar white Mounting Desk Adjustable Desk Stand Display adjustable Features for T3 Upn Upgradeable Firmware No Optional Add Ons up to 3 DSS Modules Connect to Digital Station DS port Power Supply From phone system Features for T3 IP e Upgradeable Firmware Yes e Optional Add Ons up to 3 DSS Modules with AEI Headsetlink e Power Supply IEEE 802 3af Power over E
227. cisssneicssasecciriavesuextionctde austere 246 Outbound Call Handling Features eeee 143 Networked MeSSaQing scscscssessesstecseeseeseeseesnen 247 FOFWAICING PEE E vende skh esttardaeventease 146 Auto Attendant oc cccccccccccccccceccccececcccecececccecseseeeececeee 248 Avaya Digital and IP PROMES ssseseeeteeteees 148 Personal NUMDETING c csscscssescseesseeeeseeesseeeseeeees 249 Inbound Call Handling ceccceeeseeeeseeeeeeseeeeees 153 Accessing Database Information within Call Flows Contact Center Features 156 IVR ee enai Ta a aE ra sat aAa Ea 250 Miscellaneous Features 157 Using Text To Speech TTS Facilities within a Call System Short Codes 0 ccccccsscccccesssseeeeesssteeeeeeees 158 FOW viene ati a ees 251 Visual Basic VB Scripting 0 ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 252 6 IP Telephony Extended Personal GreetingS ccccccseseeeees 253 Gateways Gatekeepers and 1 323 Technology Hunt Group Broadcast Messages 254 OVEFVICW woes eeeeceeeeceneeceneeeeeeaeeteeaeeeeeaaeeseeeeeesaaeeteneees 162 ene Personal Distribution Lists cceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeneee 254 IP Telephony Features ccccceeeseeeeeeeeenteeeeeeeeaaes 163 SIP Endpoint SupDOFE essccscossscccsssssccsscseecrnseeecenen 164 Cascaded Out Callling ccccececeeeceeeeeteeeteeeeeeeees 255 Campaign Managet c ccccccceesscceeeeeeeseseeeeeeees 256 Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved P
228. d 308 TAPI 3 0 functions Supported c cceeeeeeeteeeenees 308 Device Specific Data c cccecceceeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeseeeees 309 DevLink FieldS cceecceeseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeseeeeeees 310 19 Technical Specifications Interfaces ioia etana ame aeiiae ai aaan 315 PrOtOCOlS arit aar EE OEE a ae tee 316 PC Specification ccccccccescceceseeceeeseeeeeeeeeeesaeeesees 318 20 Licenses 21 Appendix IP412 ControlsWnitisreciatistercennseecevethonieeh adeniin taraia 334 IP406 V2 Control Unit eee eeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeees 336 IP400 WANS 10 1 00 0 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeteaeeeeees 338 IP400 So8 Expansion Module cccecseeeeees 338 Small Office Edition 0 ccccceceeseeeeeeeeeeesteeteeeees 339 IP400 Trunk Interface Cards 345 IP500 BRI S08 Module cccccceeseeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeees 347 IP400 Phone Modul cccccceeeeeeeteeeeeeeseeeeaes 348 IP400 Digital Station V2 Module ceeee 349 IP400 Analog Trunk 16 Module 350 Internal Daughter Cards cccccccesseeeeeereeeeseeeeees 351 Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 4 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Chapter 1 Introduction Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 5 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 1 Introduction This document is not a contractual document The specification of the Avaya IP Office f
229. d or new templates can be created e Specify the maximum length of call notes IP Office supports a wide range of different telephone types These have different display sizes so the operator can define the character length of messages sent to each user according to the type of phone they use e System Tray working The application can be minimized and left running in the system tray so that it can pop on received calls SoftConsole Telephone Requirements e SoftConsole provides extensive call management but it still requires an IP Office telephone to provide the speech path SoftConsole has been tested and is certified to work with all Avaya wired digital and IP phones that are listed in Telephones 5 chapter e SoftConsole cannot be used with IP DECT 3700 Series telephones SoftConsole PC Requirements e P Office software release 2 0 or later e PC requirements e Always refer to the latest Avaya SME Technical Tip or Technical Bulletin for any updated information with regard to Operating Systems Service Packs or PC hardware e Refer to Technical Specifications section of the Product Description for Operating System and Hardware requirements e A maximum of four SoftConsole applications can be run per system An IP Office license controls the number of simultaneous SoftConsole users e SoftConsole requires a SoftConsole license for each user This license is part of the IP Office Receptionist user license Product D
230. d IP phones there are keys that can be programmed with a range of selected special functions These keys can be used for calling other extensions on the system Direct Station Select or DSS keys or can be used for options from speed dialing numbers to controlling features such as Do Not Disturb Many features use an indicator to show whether a feature is enabled Button programming is done through the IP Office Manager as part of the system configuration although some phones allow the user to program buttons and functions where given administration rights Busy Lamp Field BLF Indicators Feature e Status indicators which show the status of a programmable buttons associated feature or function Benefit e Indication of when a button or associated feature is active Description Avaya digital and IP phones have programmable buttons which can be assigned to various features When those buttons include some form of BLF indicator the button can also be used to indicate when the feature is active For example a button associated with another user will indicate when that user is active on a call A button associated with a group will indicate when the group has calls waiting to be answered The directory entries in one X Portal for IP Office and the speed dial icons within the IP Office Phone Manager and SoftConsole applications also act as BLF s When the icons are associated with internal users the icons will change to indicate the current st
231. d date for the report e Language If the default language is not required then another language can be selected that your system supports Filters can be used in the report to provide exactly the type of information the customer is looking for The filter field is used to refine the data and offers the following options in a drop down list All Answered Refused Refused Overflowed Overflowed All Overflowed Off PBX Overflowed on PBX Transferred and Lost Calls The default setting is all Reports can also be scheduled for future delivery to any network printer or email address in any of the supported formats Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 285 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 IP Office Customer Call Reporter Report Examples Call Details Report eo i E R gt S 13 100 z My Call Details Report Type Call Details Repor All Unarouped Time Stamp 02 12 2008 13 09 37 02 12 2008 13 10 18 04 12 2008 12 31 28 04 12 2008 12 32 12 04 12 2008 12 56 14 Summary 01 12 2008 22 12 2008 09 00 17 00 Supervisor Name Duration 00 00 01 00 00 04 00 00 07 Mark Gallagher Status Reference Answered Answered Lost Answered Answered 000140 000141 000143 000144 000145 Call Summary Report mou D gt My Call Summary Report Report Type Call Summary Report Target Name Queue Call Direction Number DDI Queue QueueTime Agent Inbound 0170736441
232. db335a unable to process Each auto attendant has a single menu of 12 items 0 9 that a caller can select from to either be transferred to a predefined number to another auto attendant or to replay the greeting The greeting for the menu is controlled by time profiles to allow three alternative messages to be played i e Morning Afternoon and Evening These messages can be labeled and then re used in as many auto attendants as required Please note that the IP406 V2 and IP500 embedded voicemail memory cards are identical but these are not interchangeable with the Small Office Edition card Only Avaya supplied memory cards with the voicemail and auto attendant applications pre installed can be used IP Office Release 6 0 Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 344 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 I P400 Trunk I nterface Cards 1P400 trunk interface cards fit into the card slots on the Small Office Edition IP406 V2 and IP412 control units and in any slot of the IP500 when combined with the IP500 Legacy Card Carrier They provide analog ISDN or CAS trunk connectivity Not all interfaces are available in all territories The following table shows how many of each card type are supported by each of control unit Small Office 1P406 V2 1P500 Edition 1P400 Universal Analog Trunk 4 2 2 1 P400 Quad BRI 2 2 1P400 PRI E1 x 2 2 2 1P400 Dual PRI E1 X 1 Slot A 2 2 1P400 E1R2 x 2 2 2 1P400 Dual E1R2 x 1 Slo
233. dditional E1R2 B channels for P500 PRI U cards configured for E1R2 operation Each port can support up to 30 B channels in this mode e 1P500 Universal PRI Additional Channels 2 E1R2 Channels License IPO LIC P500 E1R2 ADD 2CH 215186 e 1P500 Universal PRI Additional Channels 8 E1R2 Channels License IPO LIC P500 E1R2 ADD 8CH 215187 e 1P500 Universal PRI Additional Channels 22 E1R2 Channels License IPO LIC P500 E1R2 ADD 22CH 215188 e IP500 Universal PRI Additional T1 Channel Licenses These licenses are used to enable additional T1 B channels for P500 PRI U cards configured for T1 PRI or T1 robbed bit operation Each port can support up to 23 B channels T1 PRI or 24 B channels T1 robbed bit in these mode e 1P500 Universal PRI Additional Channels 2 T1 Channels License IPO LIC IP500 T1 ADD 2CH 215180 e 1P500 Universal PRI Additional Channels 8 T1 Channels License IPO LIC IP500 T1 ADD 8CH 215181 e 1P500 Universal PRI Additional Channels 32 T1 Channels License IPO LIC IP500 T1 ADD 22CH 215182 e I1P500 Voice Compression Module Licenses The Voice Compression Module Channel Licenses are not needed with Release 6 but still needed with Release 5 When upgrading a system from Release 5 to Release 6 each available VCM Channel will be automatically converted into 3 Avaya IP Endpoint licenses E g If a customer has a VCM32 Module which enables 4 VCM channels plus a 8 Channel License then this will be con
234. ded at cost to the full license but can be ordered at any time during the product ownership For further details of the IP Office licenses including Trial Licenses refer to the Licenses 32 section Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 18 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Chapter 2 IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version roduct Des ROD 2010 AVAYA All rights reserve d Page 19 iP Office Re sled e 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 2 IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version The IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version known hereafter as PARTNER Version is the next evolution of communications system for small businesses PARTNER Version is designed to work directly out of the box without any programming or administration allowing users to immediately make and place calls via analog trunks PARTNER Version provides the end user a similar desktop experience as the PARTNER ACS eg 2 dedicated intercom buttons key system functionality Caller 1D etc This helps minimize training requirements and provides the end user with the same comfort level they have come to expect with the PARTNER ACS system PARTNER Version provides the bulk of the feature set that the current PARTNER ACS R8 supports plus integrates enhanced features from the IP Office Essential Edition platform such as Mobile Twinning Visual Voice Mail 64 party Conferencing SIP Trunking Full PRI T1 and more PAR
235. ded flexibility and to minimize the installation effort The bundles that have previously been available in EMEA will continue to be available and are compatible with the pre licensed base stations described above if the latest software is installed on the IP DECT system e g upgrade an existing 5 base station system with an Upgrade Kit when adding an extra base station instead of upgrading the system license to a 6 license Additional upgrade licenses will continue to be available for systems that need to expand their current coverage or capacity IP DECT Capacities Maximum handsets 120 Maximum base stations 32 Total base stations repeaters 32 Maximum simultaneous calls 100 May be limited by the available VCM voice compression channels for calls to non IP destinations Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 99 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Wireless WiFi 802 11 The Avaya IP Wireless solution offers an advanced Voice over IP VoIP client for wireless networks This solution allows SME s to take advantage of the cost savings and simplified management of a converged voice and data infrastructure 3616 20 26 Supported but not L TFTP Serve Avaya m 7 IP Office 5 longer available j IP Connection me 802 11 Access Points Avaya Media Gateway j Voice Priority Processor QL NetLink OAI Gateway W oe j Application Server Optional The 3641 and
236. default Preferred Edition provides standard voicemail mailbox functions to all IP Office users and hunt groups plus support for call recording and call waiting announcements to callers A range of additional features can be enabled by further licenses e Additional Messaging Ports Licenses The Preferred Edition license includes support for 4 messaging ports The total number of messaging ports supported can be increased by adding combinations of the following licenses up to the maximum supported by the particular IP Office control unit IP406 V2 20 IP412 30 IP500 1P500 V2 40 e Additional Messaging 2 Ports IPO LIC VM PRO RFA 2 LIC CU 174459 e Additional Messaging 4 Ports IPO LIC VM PRO RFA 4 LIC CU 174460 e Additional Messaging 8 Ports IPO LIC VM PRO RFA 8 LIC CU 174461 e Additional Messaging Pro 16 Ports IPO LIC VM PRO RFA 16 LIC CU 174462 e Messaging Feature Licenses The Advanced Edition license provides Customer Call Reporter ContactStore Call Recording Library Interactive Voice Response IVR Visual Basic scripting and generic Text To Speech TTS The following licenses enable specific Messaging features beyond those already provided with Advanced Edition These additional licenses all require the Preferred Edition Voicemail Pro license as a pre requisite e UMS Web Services Licenses also enabled by the Teleworker and Power User licenses UMS Unified Messaging Server allows users to acces
237. demarks are the property of their respective owners Documentation information For the most current versions of documentation go to the Avaya Support web site http www avaya com support or the IP Office Knowledge Base http marketingtools avaya com knowledgebase Avaya Support Avaya provides a telephone number for you to use to report problems or to ask questions about your contact center The support telephone number is 1 800 242 2121 in the United States For additional support telephone numbers see the Avaya Web site http www avaya com support Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 2 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Contents Power Options for IP Telephones 0 ceeee 167 Contents VOIP PROS nE rA A ER 169 1 Introduction 7 Public and Private Voice Networks Avaya IP Officen a das et len ened 7 Private Circuit Switched Voice Networking 175 What s New in IP Office Release 6 11 Public Voice Networking ccecceeeeeeeeeseeeeeees 176 Voice Communication Solution Features 14 Session Initiation Protocol SIP ccceeeeee 180 Data Communication Solution Features 06 15 Packet Based Voice Networking 0 csee 183 Applications Platform Features 16 Supplementary Services within IP Networks 184 Management Tools c eee ee eeee tees eeeeaeeeeees 17 Small Community Networking
238. der 4 Darren Baker x 6 Chris Boseley Calls Waiting Transferred 7 Mark Gibson 7 Mark Swan ik 0 BHi WB2 IP Office Customer Call Reporter 1 2 2 16 AVAYA Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 287 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Real Time Reporting Customer Call Reporter provides real time monitoring of call center activity This is achieved via a thin client web browser session logged onto the IP Office Customer Call Reporter server Within the supervisor client a user can program up to 3 different views of their call center This is a very useful feature as now a Supervisor can divide their responsibilities into different views and compare the results of those views For example assume that a call center supervisor is responsible for the following hunt groups in IP Office Computer Sales 201 Monitor Sales 202 Warranty Service 203 and non Warranty service The Supervisor can create two separate views entitled sales and service and compare the number of calls length of call etc This allows a supervisor to see a whole system as it relates to the business function sales service The Supervisor views are private and can only be seen with a login A view may be created that shows specific Hunt Group and Agent statistics as well as Alarms and Warnings Each of the three views are summarized and made available to any Agents when they login and select their corresponding Supervisor An example o
239. diagnostics SSA provides information on the following e Alarms SSA displays all alarms which are recorded within IP Office for each device in error The number date and time of the occurrence is recorded The last 50 alarms are stored within IP Office to avoid need for local PC e Call Details Information on incoming and outgoing calls including call length call ID and routing information e Extensions SSA details all extensions including device type and port location on the IP Office system Information on the current status of a device is also displayed e Trunks IP Office trunks and connections VoIP analog and digital and their current status are displayed For VoIP trunks QoS information is also displayed e g round trip delay jitter and packet loss e System Resources IP Office includes central resources that are utilized to perform various functions Diagnosing these resources is often critical to the successful operation of the system This includes details on resources for VCM Voicemail and conferencing e QoS Monitoring QoS Parameters from connected calls such as jitter and roundtrip delay are monitored AR IP Office System Status TechStaffSamba 135 64 181_220 A AYA IP Office System Status lip Snapshot LogOff Exit About System Resources Music un Hold Source External Configuration Size 1024K LaRcsources Configuration Used 172K Memory Free 837K SkHz Clock source Line 1 Slot 1 Port 1
240. ditional Messaging ports Example 3 ContactStore Recording Library in an I P500 Small Community Network Remote P500 Required IP500 Voice Networking 4 Channels e IP500 Voice Networking 4 Channels Licenses Preferred Edition Messaging 4 Ports e Advanced Edition or Messaging ie i Recordings Administrator Advanced Edition or Messaging Recordings Administrator Optional 1P500 Voice Networking Additional IP500 Voice Networking Additional Licenses Channels Channels Additional Messaging ports Preferred Edition Messaging 4 Ports Additional Messaging ports Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 331 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Chapter 21 Appendix Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 333 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 21 Appendix The following equipment is no longer sold by Avaya but is still supported by IP Office Release 6 0 1P412 Control Unit With a greater internal data transfer capability than the 1P406 V2 the IP412 is more suitable for meeting the needs of the small contact center or businesses with a CRM focus The IP412 differs from the 1P4060 V2 by providing a greater trunk expansion capability of up to four PRI trunks The IP412 is a stackable unit with an optional 19 rack mounting kit The 1P412 includes e 9 pin DTE Port for maintenance or Feature Key connection for application lic
241. dling into your customer service operations Handle voice mail and email in a single mailbox Communication with customers Set up a formal or informal customer service center Integrate your customer data base into your call handling Manage the quality of your customer interactions Work anywhere Give your employees all the communications capabilities they have at the office whether they are working from home a hotel or a remote office A complete conferencing solution Don t pay any more fees to outside conferencing service providers Get Web and audio based conferencing that are easy to set up and use Secure converged communications Use IP Office as a secure router with a built in firewall VPN Route voice calls over a managed Internet service VoIP and pocket the savings Simple administration Windows based graphical tools cut the time and expense of administration Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 10 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 What s New in I P Office Release 6 IP Office Release 6 is a major release which allows IP Office systems to address better the needs of smaller sites as well as adding considerable capabilities in the areas of multi site networking user productivity and new telephones New Platform and Hardware Support IP Office Control Unit Support IP Office Release 6 is supported on the IP Office 500 IP500 and the new IP500 V2 and as well as
242. dly switching back and forth between two base stations that are equally well received threshold values are used Handover between base stations occurs seamlessly whether a call is active or not e DECT Networking An IP DECT telephone can travel from one office to another which is connected over a wide area network WAN link and make and take calls In this scenario the main IP DECT controller remains at one headquarters location Given the degree of integration available to wireless users with DECT there are a variety of means by which calls can be routed to wireless handsets e DDI DID Since each wireless handset is an extension on the IP Office system calls may be routed directly using a DDI DID number e Transfer Calls may be transferred to DECT extensions by operators or other extension users and DECT extension users may transfer callers to any other extension user e Hunt group compatibility Wireless handsets may be programmed as members of groups and answer calls in the same manner as any other extension within that group e Group working Wireless handsets may be programmed as members of groups and attract calls in the same manner as any other extension within that group DECT handsets must NOT be configured into collective groups e Divert destination Users may initiate any or all diverts from an Avaya desk phone to a wireless handset e Twinning Twinning allows calls to a user main extension number to alert at both that
243. e lt 51 9991 Agent State System CO Noe Agent State System Time ff None Agents ACW gt 1 15 Agents Available lt 1 15 Agents Call Share None Agents Logged On lt 1 15 Agents Present None None gt 1 99 gt 1 99 gt 1 99 gt 1 99 lt 1 100 gt 1 60 gt 1 60 gt 1 15 gt 1 99 gt 1 60 lt 1 100 gt 1 99 gt 1 60 gt 1 99 gt 1 99 gt 1 99 gt 1 99 gt 1 99 gt 1 99 gt 1 99 gt 1 99 None gt 1 600 21 gt 1 99 gt 1 99 gt 1 99 Answered Calls Answered External Non Queue Answered Internal Non Queue Answered Internal Queue Average Answer Average Answer Time Average Wait Time Busy Not Available Current Wait Time Grade of Service nternal Made Lost Calls New Messages Outbound Calls External Overflowed Answered Overflowed Calls Overflowed Calls Waiting Overflowed Lost Queue State Queue State Time Pe ORERE Be OESE e BURE PONE RE GHEND Eoee eOe e EOE eE OEE ORG0E Jf Routed to Voicemail Transferred Ea i i aan za Ooae EN a E e a Ess a a Le f E Agent State System Time Agentsacwo 7 Agents Available 7 Agents Call Share AgentsLoggedOn 7 AgentsPresent Y Answered Calls Y Answered External Non Queue _ Answered Internal Non Queue __ Answered Internal Queue Y Average Answer Y Average AnswerTime 7 Average Wait Time 7
244. e Call Retrieve Call Ring Back When Free Secondary Dial Tone Set Absent Text Set Account Code Set Authorization Code Set Hunt Group Night Service Set Hunt Group Out Of Service Set Inside Call Seq Set No Answer Time Set Mobile Twinning Number Set Mobile Twinning On Set Mobile Twinning Off Set Outside Call Seq Set Ringback Seq Set Wrap Up Time Shut Down Embedded Voicemail Startup Embedded Voicemail Suspend Call Suspend CW Toggle Calls Unpark Call Voicemail Collect Voicemail Node Voicemail On Voicemail Off Voicemail Ringback On Voicemail Ringback Off Product Description IP Office Release 6 0 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 158 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Chapter 6 IP Telephony Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 159 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 6 IP Telephony Technological innovation is changing the way we communicate This time it is coming in the form of changing the way telephone calls are transmitted It brings with it several new capabilities that change the meaning of the phrase telephone call through the use of Voice over Internet Protocol VoIP Basically VolP means voice transmitted over a packet data network VoIP is often referred to as IP Telephony because it uses the IP protocols to make possible enhanced voice communications throughout the world wherever IP connections have been delivered IP Telephony unites a company
245. e Via a Phone 2 or Phone 8 Module e To an ETR station port directly or bridged with a PARTNER ETR telephone set The major features work the same regardless how they are connected eg Hold Conference Transfer Call Waiting Message Waiting Incoming Caller ID Analog phones have access to all dial code features familiar to PARTNER users eg Call pickup Line pickup Call Forwarding activation deactivation etc Analog phones connected to a PHONE or COMBO module default to intercom dial tone To place an outgoing call the user will dial 9 Analog phones connected to an ETR module follows programmed Automatic Line Selection Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 27 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 System Administration The PARTNER Version can be programmed in 2 ways e Telephone User Interface TUI from extension 10 or extension 11 and uses the same administration codes as the PARTNER ACS system see Table 1 Button Programming Features use the same codes as the PARTNER ACS system see Table 2 TUI programming is an alternate way to do System Administration and Programming on the PARTNER Version It is based on the PARTNER ACS TUI but with improvements Using TUI System Administration on ETR and 14xx sets the buttons under the display become soft keys which are used to navigate and change the administration items There are also shortcut codes which enable the administrator to
246. e Voicemail Server will call to inform the user of a new message Conversely a specified location can be set which restricts remote access from only that location this specified location can also be a designated dial back number thereby minimizing the threat of unauthorized remote access IP Office systems can also incorporate remote access dial back services so that if a user always remotely accesses the office from a single location e g their home then after login verification the system will disconnect their call and dial them back In addition to the added level of security dial back provides it can also be an excellent method of consolidating remote access charges onto the central office telephone bill In addition to remote access from Telephone Adaptors all ATM4 trunk cards including the IP500 V2 Combination Card ATM support switching of the first analog trunk to an integral V 32 modem for remote access LAN to LAN Routing All businesses now have a need for data routing whether it s a requirement to share resources such as email servers file servers and internet gateways or seamlessly transport data between sites or network to and from their customers and suppliers This is why each IP Office platform offers IP routing as standard Embedding a router within IP Office removes the costs complexity and additional points of failure of external WAN multiplexers by allowing data and voice traffic to converge and share the network
247. e and complete network topology for all networked sites inclusive of IP addressing and physical logical connections e An evaluation of the network s topology to check that the design is both sound and reasonable e Measurement of packet loss jitter and delay over the course of multiple days and measured on a per minute basis A graphical representation of the data is the preferred output method e Examination of QoS Class of Service CoS parameters in place in the network e Summary of findings and possible actions to correct problems The assessment should leave you confident that the implemented network will have the capacity for the foreseen data and voice traffic and can support H 323 DHCP TFTP and jitter buffers in H 323 applications With this in mind if you require support during or after an IP Office VolP installation a copy of your network assessment documentation will be requested by your support channel For more details about available tools resources and services to enable you to audit your network for VoIP readiness please contact your local Avaya representative Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 171 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 IP Packet Flow Control While a high performance switch forwards data packets at full wire speed to and from its ports simultaneously there may be times when a switch port may not be able to accept packets at the rate it is receiving t
248. e connected to one access point in order to avoid quality problems In addition AVPP ensures that the phone can run in energy efficient mode when not in use The following AVPPs are available to meet customer needs e AVPP100 Serves 80 calls simultaneously e AVPPO20 Serves 20 powered on handsets e AVPPO10 Serves 10 powered on handsets Wireless Access Points When using the Avaya Wireless IP solution customers can utilize wireless access points from various vendors The list of compatible wireless access points is large and constantly growing Please visit http www polycom com support voice wi fi view_certified html and select WLAN Compatibility List for the latest information Benefits e Supports 802 11 a b g standards for Wi Fi networks converging voice and data over a single network e Seamless integration with IP Office e Excellent voice quality on converged wireless networks e Lightweight durable handsets specifically designed for workplace use e Improved display battery life processor power all with lower costs e Increased range of AVPP s to address the needs of diverse construct sizes e Multitude of accessories are available e Dual Charger full charge accomplished in approximately one and a half hours e Quick Charger full charge accomplished in approximately one and a half hours e Single Dual and Quad Chargers for the 3641 and 3645 phones e Belt Clip e Nylon Pouch e Carrying case with Lanyard e Hands Fr
249. e for property maintenance associates e 6 phones 3 at each site in meeting and facility rooms e 6 Fax machines 2 at each location All employees should be accessible at anytime under one number service Kit List e 3 x 1P500 V2 Control Unit e 3 x 1P500 Analog Phone 2 Card e 3 x 1P500 Universal PRI Trunk Card with additional channel licenses to allow 16 active channels per site e 3 x 1P500 VCM 32 Card e 3 x Region specific power cord e 3 x IP500 V2 feature key System SD Card e 6 x 1603 for the meeting and facility rooms e 15 x 1608 for the back office associates and shared desks e 30 x 1616 IP Phones for the building managers e 1 x 9650 IP phones for the manager e 3 x Voice Networking license 4 channels e 3 x 20 User Avaya IP Endpoint license e 1 x Preferred Edition e 1 x Advanced Edition e 2 x 20 User Power license for the building managers and the manager e 1x5 User Office Worker license for the back office associates e 1x 1 User Office Worker license for the back office associates e 4x 20 User Mobile Worker license for the property maintenance associates Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 303 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Scenario 2 A one location German business working in capital goods industry would like to optimize their communication and lower the costs The work roles are e 3 account managers often on the road or on customer site but sometimes in t
250. e optional rubber feet The mid span is 1U in height 1 75 inches and has up to twenty four RJ 45 sockets on the bottom row and twenty four data and power output RJ 45 sockets on the top row The units provide a maximum of 200 Watts or a peak of 16 8 watts per port Data is unaffected by power delivery if the device does not require power The mid span power units are also referred to as PDU Powered Data Unit devices Power over the LAN will simplify the installation and support of IP telephones for our customers and are available in 3 sizes 6 12 or 24 ports with optional SNMP management capability SSIES ssesss seses Mid Span power supply Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 168 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Vol P FAQ Network Requirements Quality of Service QoS is a measure of the performance of a network that reflects the availability of network service and the quality of network transmissions The term itself refers to a number of networking technologies and techniques and does not necessarily restrict itself to any single protocol or standard There are a number of measures that can be taken on the LAN and WAN to make them good enough to carry voice traffic Some of these are the implementation of standards based QoS protocols while are simply a matter of network architecture and good network management practices The term good enough is intentional Every customer will
251. e retrieval e Visual Messaging on Digital telephones only Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 41 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Application Programming I nterface TAPI Application Programming Interface TAPI allows new and existing server based applications from Avaya s Developer Connection DevConnect program to work with and enhance the operation of the PARTNER Version system The current requirement is to support a screen pop type application called Pickup IP which is also supported on IP Office The TAPI API only supports 1st Party TAPI applications System Programming Procedures pu o D e c 0 wn ystem Date Number of Lines Transfer Return Rings wn Line Coverage Extension all Waiting 9 Oe E 2 tilio Bios 3 31 39 2 13 IO ol lt U D 5 gl Z alala 91s 2o 0 oF aller ID Log Answered Calls aller ID Call Log Line Association Call Coverage Rings O Code 101 103 104 105 107 109 119 123 124 125 126 127 128 203 205 206 301 303 304 305 306 307 309 310 311 316 317 318 320 efo Ye Feature 321 VMS Cover Rinas 322 Remote Call Forwarding 323 _ Personalized Station Ringing 399 copy settings 401 Outgoing Call Restriction 402 To Cali Prex 403 System Passwora 405 Disallowed List Assignments 407 Allowed Phone Number Lists
252. e the following features e Personal security restrictions The restrictions are applied as you log into the web server e Criteria based search filter fields to perform specific searches e Replay controls Use the replay controls to start stop pause skip forward skip backward or to export the recording to a readily playable wav file e Audio waveform display The waveform presents a graphic representation of the audio content of the call Use the waveform to avoid replaying static or silences and to move easily to specific portions of a call The Search and Replay screen shown below provides filter fields that you can use to search for calls Help About AVAYA ContactStore Change Password powered by Verint Systems Cees Logout Results Administration Select All Select None 7 z me e Administer System Call Startva Partiesv Typev4 Targetvs fel Search Filters 24 04 09 02 13 54 00 15 2205 Extn2205 2207 Extn2207 Outgoing 2207 C Call Start Range C 24 04 09 02 14 26 00 12 3103 Extn3103 2205 Extn2205 Incoming 2205 a jorosos 24 04 09 02 24 27 00 09 2205 Extn2205 2207 Extn2207 Outgoing 2207 5O 13 0509 C 24 04 09 02 25 19 00 12 3103 Extn3103 2205 Extn2205 Incoming 2205 B Dee 28 04 09 00 37 53 00 05 2205 Extn2205 2207 Extn2207 Outgoing 2207 O Length Target Number Call Set O am For a single IP Office ContactStore is enabled by the Advanced Edition license Note For ContactStore to work for
253. e twinned extensions is in use DECT R4 Capacities Feature DECT R4 Maximum Handsets Maximum Base Stations if Master Server is on a standard RBS Total Base Stations Compact Base Stations Maximum Base Stations if Master Server is on a Compact RBS Total number of Compact Base Stations Maximum simultaneous calls May be limited by the available VCM voice compression channels for calls to non IP destinations DECT R4 on IP Office does not support Redundancy option Licensing and Redundancy Other then IP Dect Dect R4 does not require any licensing by itself next to the licensing for the appropriate VCM channels in IP Office Dect R4 on IP Office does not support Redundancy option Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 94 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 DECT R4 I nbuilding Wireless Server Al WS The Avaya Inbuilding Wireless Server enhances the functionality of the DECT R4 with additional functionality such as IP Office and LDAP directory access centralized management and software update as well as handset to handset SMS plus basic web messaging Avaya n Building Wireless Server AlWS is a server for handling wireless services and messaging It runs on a solid state embedded Server AlWS Hardware It comes pre installed with the appropriate features activated on that server For installation and maintenance this server is managed by a PC using Windows Internet Explore 6
254. ectory entries on one IP Office to be shared by other IP Offices as a centralized system directory for an SCN e The total maximum number of entries is 5000 with entries in the IP Office configuration taking priority over temporary imported entries Manager LDAP HTTP Overall Maximum 1P406v2 2500 2500 2500 25000 1P500 2500 5000 5000 1P500 V2 gt LDAP Import lt lt lt ae P 4 IP Office HTTP Import Manager HTTP Import esr XY M n Edit View only view m Benefit e Ability to use external directory services with different interfaces e One system directory for an SCN Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 151 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Self Administration The IP Office administrator may give select users the ability to change some of the phone settings themselves For example button programming The range of changes that the user can make depends on the phone type in use On Hook Dialing Avaya digital and IP phones allow the user to make calls by just dialing the number on the keypad without having to lift the handset or pressing a speaker button Usually the call progress can be monitored using the speaker in the phone on phones that support handsfree the whole conversation can be had without having to lift the handset In Release 6 this has been extended to allow en bloc dialing This allows the whole number to be entered and then
255. ed Page 282 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Ordering IP Office Customer Call Reporter Customer Call Reported supports the following maximum configurations for IP Office e 150 Agents e 30 Supervisors Activation of IP Office Customer Call Reporter is provided on an R6 system with the purchase of the IP Office Advanced Edition RFA the Advanced Edition is a specialized call center bundle which also enables the following e Contact Store for IP Office CSIPO e IVR Module e VB Scripting e 1 Customer Call Center Supervisor Additional agents and supervisors can be purchased on top of the Advanced Edition RFA The IP Office Release 6 has a setting in IP Office Manager for designating which hunt groups will be reported upon by IP Office Customer Call Reporter Any hunt group that contains an agent who is not properly licensed will not be able to retrieve any reporting on that group real time or historical IP Office Customer Call Reporter Server Operating System Requirements The Customer Call Reporter server is supported on the following platforms e Microsoft Windows Server 2008 All Versions e Microsoft Windows Business Server 2003 R2 e Microsoft Windows Server 2003 SP2 e Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 IP Office Customer Call Reporter Server Hardware Requirements The minimum server specifications are as follows e IP Office Customer Call Reporter server Intel Pentium D 945 core AMD Athlon 64 4000 with
256. ed and unattended e Message waiting with direct voicemail access e Audio Conference IP Office based e Local call log local directory e Access to IP Office directory system corporate personal e Feature keys for up to 12 IP Office features like e Forwarding various methods like all busy no answer e Park Unpark e Pick up any group member e Voice Mail on off Features keys can be selected and self administered from a list of features that is downloaded from IP Office If equipped with an audio device with hook switch control Softphone allows calls to be made or answered even when the screen saver of a PC is activated and the PC is locked Until the PC is unlocked no screen will be shown but ringing calls can be accepted through e g a headset with hook switch Licensing and Provisioning IP Office Video Softphone forms part of the Teleworker or Power User profile A user can log onto the Softphone using their normal username and password License entitlement will be checked against that user before the login is accepted Unlike Avaya hard phones Softphone does not require an Avaya IP Phone License to work on IP Office While the Softphone is a thick client application it is extremely easy to install and provision Installation of the application on a standard PC requires minimal to no configuration as all provisioning of the product is done from the IP Office as a provisioning server If a DHCP server is present and set up
257. ed to individual dial in users and data services Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 199 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Light Weight Directory Access Protocol LDAP IP Office supports LDAP directory synchronization This allows the telephone number Directory names and telephone numbers held in IP Office to be synchronized with the information on an LDAP server limited to 5000 entries Although targeted for interoperation with Windows 2000 Server Active Directory the feature is sufficiently configurable to interoperate with any server that supports LDAP version 2 or higher Remote Access Server RAS IP Office provides RAS functionality allowing external users to dial in to the local area network from modems telephone adaptors and routers Several of the previously described features and services can be applied to the dial in users to create a powerful Remote Access Server Dial in users can be authenticated using either PAP or CHAP Once authenticated the DHCP server can automatically assign the user an IP address to use while connected to the LAN Individual time profiles and firewalls can be applied to the user restricting what they have access to and when they have access For further security and accounting ease IP Office can automatically call a user back This keeps the cost of the telephone call on the company telephone bill removing the need to process individual expense claims
258. ee Pouch e Noise canceling headset e Over the ear headset Avaya IP Wireless Telephony Solution AWTS Open Application Interface OAI Gateway The AWTS Open Application Interface OAI Gateway enables third party software applications to communicate with the Avaya IP Wireless Telephones This serves as a two way messaging device Many companies provide applications that interface to your in house paging systems email and client server messaging Other vendors with complementary systems such as nurse call telemetry alarm and control system manufacturers are currently developing applications to interface with the Avaya IP Wireless Telephone solution Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 101 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 3616 Wireless Telephone While no longer available this WiFi telephone is still supported on IP Office Release 6 The Avaya 3616 IP Wireless Telephone is a WiFi 802 11b telephone that runs using H 323 The 3616 supports the following features Lightweight innovative design Simple to use 802 11b standard compatible Radio Frequency 2 4000 2 835 GHz SMI Transmission type Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum DSSS FCC certification Part 15 247 Management of telephones via DHCP and TFTP Voice encoding G711 Transmit Power 100mw peak lt 10mW average Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP 40bit and 128 bit 2x16 character alphanumeric plus status indic
259. egrated H 323 Gatekeeper 14 Integrated Management Suite 297 Integrated Messaging 16 261 Integrated Messaging Pro 16 18 265 Intelligent 7 153 Interaction 7 250 256 Voicemail 242 Interactive Voice Response building 236 Interchange 187 Internal Call 131 138 310 Internal Daughter Cards 351 Internal Directory 185 Internal Modem 17 334 351 Internal Modem Card 17 351 Internal Twinning 138 Internal External 253 Internal External greeting 253 Internet Access 15 169 194 197 334 Internet browsing 199 Internet Explorer 258 Internet IP Security Domain Interpolation 316 Internet Key Exchange 316 Internet Protocol 160 Security Architecture 316 Internet Protocol Control Protocol 316 Internet Protocol refers type 160 Internet Security Association 316 Internet Service Provider 199 Internet Standards Specification 172 Internet Telephony 7 14 180 Internet Telephony Service Providers 180 SIP trunking 14 internets 316 Internetworking 187 interoperability 184 232 messaging 187 Interoperable 187 interoperate 200 networking 14 interoperation 200 Interpolation Internet IP Security Domain 316 7 16 44 250 Product Description IP Office Release 6 0 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 361 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Index Interquartz 118 121 125 Interquartz Doorphone 121 Interquartz Gemini 118 125 Interquartz Gemini 9281 AV 125 Interquartz GeminiPhones 118 Introduction 58 292 IP Telephony 160 Intrude 1
260. el limit for QSIG Additional channels can then be licensed in increments of 4 A Voice Networking license is still required to enable TDM QSIG even though there is no limit to the number of TDM QSIG calls that can be made or received once licensed Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 186 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Internetworking with Other Avaya Products IP Office will support the most appropriate way for communication with any other existing PBX s in a customer network whether TDM or IP based With Avaya DEFINITY MultiVantage Avaya Integral Enterprise or Avaya Communication Manager ACM the protocols used will be QSIG or H 323 over T1 E1 or IP links VolP networking using H 323 IP Office since release 1 1 in US and release 1 2 in EMEA has been successfully tested to be interoperable over IP trunks with Avaya Communication Manager ACM The protocol supported is H 323 using industry standard compression codecs types G 711A G 711MU G 729A and G 723 1 6K3 The features currently supported are as follows e Desk to desk dialing basic voice call e Calling Connected Party ID number e Calling Connected Name Presentation e Call Hold e Call Transfer IP Office Communication Manager These features allow for simple networking needs between IP Office remote branches to a DEFINITY ACM at the main site QSIG networking using T1 E1 links TDM Alternatively Q
261. els over a 1 54M circuit Each channel of the T1 trunk can be independently configured channelized to support the following signaling emulations with handshake types of immediate delay or wink e Loop Start e Ground Start e E amp M Tie Line e E amp M DID e E amp M Switched 56K e DID Channels configured for DID DDI support incoming calls only The carrier or Central Office will provide the last x digits that were dialed to be used for call routing e Wink Start IP Office T1 trunks support both DNIS and ANI services where available from the central office e Dialed Number Identification String DNIS Provides a string of digits to the IP Office depending on the number dialed by the incoming caller This string can then be used to route callers to individual extensions groups or services e Automatic Number Identification ANI Provides IP Office with a number identifying who the caller is This may then be used for routing or computer telephony applications T1 trunk cards incorporate an integral CSU DSU eliminating the need for an external unit The CSU function allows the trunk to be put in loop back mode for testing purposes This can be set manually using the monitor application or automatically from a Central Office sending a Line Loop Back LLB pattern The DSU function allows the T1 trunk to be shared between data and voice services North American Primary Rate Interface Provided by the IP400 PRI T1 and IP500 Universal
262. emand Call Recording 236 Open Application Interface 100 Open CTI 16 OpenView application 297 Operator SoftConsole 16 Optional Add Ons 85 86 87 Other Avaya Products 58 187 Other Features 261 278 Out Of Hours 253 Outbound Call Handling Features 143 outcall 255 Outcalling 261 Outlook 16 219 245 Goldmine 219 Output Port 121 315 Overflow Group 154 Overhead LAN 170 Product Description IP Office Release 6 0 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 365 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Index Overhead WAN 170 P PABX s 14 162 provide 17 Packet Based 183 Packet Based Voice Networking 183 packet filtering 199 packet switching 183 packetization 172 packetized VoIP allowing 183 packetized VoIP calls 183 packets arrive port 172 packet switched 160 Packet Switched Telephony 160 Packet switched VoIP 160 Pager 242 Paging Calls 138 receiving 348 Pakistan 302 Pan European Connection 315 PAP 195 198 200 201 316 Park 130 131 138 158 222 227 228 236 256 310 Park Call 158 Park ID s 222 Park Return 138 Park Slot Panel 222 227 228 Park Slots 130 222 227 228 256 310 pass calls 155 Password 132 195 198 228 293 316 PC application 254 PC application Phone Manager Pro 254 PC Based 234 PC Requirements 265 PC Softphone 16 45 128 219 PC Softphones 20 PCMCIA 300 PCMCIA Slots 300 PCMCIA Wireless 300 Permanent Virtual Circuits Personal 249 Personal Distribution Lists 219 2
263. ensing e X 21 V35 WAN interface e Support for up to 12 IP Office Expansion Modules e Phone modules 8 16 30 e Digital Station modules 16 30 e Analog Trunk Module 16 e So8 module e External O P socket supporting two relay on off switch ports e g for door entry systems e Audio input port for external music on hold source e Two trunk interface card slots for analog BRI PRI T1 E1 or CAS E1R2 e 2 internal sockets for IP Telephony expansion voice compression modules from 4 to 30 channels e Internal socket for internal modem 2 or 12 for Remote Access Services e 108 Data channels e Up to 30 VoiceMail Pro ports e Two 10 100 switched Ethernet ports Layer 3 Expansion Module WAH Port Unit Status LED Trunk Port LAH Ports Status LEDs Status LED Red Starting Status LEDs 104 00Mbps auto sensing Green Started Layer 3 Ethernet Switch EXPANSION 2 4 6 a 640 12 PEGA CETERE gt 1 3 5 7 9 11 DTE Serial Port z ote Port Expansion Ports 1 12 9 pin D type socket pin D Type socket X21 V35 or V24 Audio Input Port DC Power Input Socket 3 5mm Stereo jack socket To external power supply unit Trunk Interface Card Slots External Output Socket Alltrunk card types 3 5mm Stereo jack socket Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 334 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Expansion Modules Through support of up to twelve external Expansio
264. ented with dial tone and can proceed to dial as with Mobile Call Control The benefit is that in some territories the initial call from the mobile phone will be free since it is never answered enabling centralized billing and greater control over costs Avaya one X Mobile Client Support IP Office supports the Avaya one X Mobile Single Mode Client running on selected Symbian Single Mode or Windows Mobile 5 or 6 handsets This provides a graphical interface for call control and allows a one number service for both incoming and outgoing calls For a full list of supported handsets see http support avaya com IP Office systems supporting one X Mobile require a dedicated DID DDI number for each feature required e g hold transfer Mobile Call Control and one X Mobile support require twinned calls to be routed through specific trunk types on 1P500 1P500 V2 only e 1P500 PRI U single or dual daughter cards Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 138 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 e IP500 Dual or Quad BRI daughter cards e SIP trunks RFC 2833 In IP Office Release 6 the Mobility features are available to users with either a Mobile Worker or Power User license With either internal and external twinning users may be allowed to enter a twinned number or may just be able to activate deactivate the twinning function depending on administrative settings Such user activation can be achieved thro
265. er systems CTI is delivered by a physical connection between each handset and computer first party CTI This introduces additional points of failure as well as relying on non standard interfaces and handsets On IP Office all devices can be used with CTI Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 230 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 CTI with IP Office IP Office offers a significant CTI capability Several interfaces are supported e TAPI Link Lite e TAPI Link Pro e TAPI WAV driver e DevLink Pro e IP Office SMDR e IP Office Software Development Kit e TAPI Link Lite Provides first party CTI support for Microsoft TAPI 2 1 and TAPI 3 0 so each PC can control or monitor one handset device The software components are supplied with the IP Office system on the User CD Rom and do not required a license key for use e TAPI Link Pro Provides third party CTI support for TAPI 2 1 and 3 0 These components are identical to their first party equivalent the presence of the CTI Link Pro RFA license key which can be purchased in the usual way for products enables this additional functionality e TAPI WAV driver Provides software based support for voice processing The TAPI WAV driver is for use with TAPI 2 1 only for TAPI 3 0 IP Office supports the Media Service Provider MSP interface defined by Microsoft in TAPI 3 0 This functionality will only work in conjunction with CTI Link Pro and
266. erating System Windows XP Service Pack 2 Windows Vista 32 bit and 64 bit arch Windows 7 32 bit and 64 bit e Additional Microsoft Windows Installer 3 1 Microsoft NET 3 5 SP1 Microsoft VC 9 0 Runtime Service Pack 1 e Connection P network connection broadband LAN wireless e Sound Card Full duplex 16 bit or use USB headset Note that these are recommendations Depending on other applications on the PC Softphone cannot guarantee uninterrupted Voice and or Video quality While Softphone runs with high priority on the PC in order not to be impacted by normal applications other programs with similar priority could impact Softphone performance Example applications could be other Multimedia or communication applications like web sharing programs or programs that are essential for PC performance like some Virus scanners or firewall programs Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 212 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 I P Office Video Softphone With Release 6 IP Office introduces as part of the Teleworker and Power User package a new Softphone application The Softphone is a full feature telephony client that supports standard telephony features on a PC running supported Microsoft operating systems including new Microsoft Windows 7 Support of several audio options including support of wireless headsets with full hook switch support provides a flexible telephone option especially
267. erface e Four way navigation key e 6 built in Ul languages e Standby 180 hours Talk Time 16 hours under optimal conditions Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 106 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 3725 DECT This telephone is fully supported on the Avaya DECT R4 system However it can also be used on an Avaya IP DECT system in GAP mode with functionality limited to standard calling functionality DECT roaming and handover Access to IP Office central directory as well as time of day update is not available in GAP mode Standard DECT handset e Color Display with Backlight and Icons e Loudspeaker hands free e Build in Bluetooth 2 0 supporting the headset profile While others standard compliant headsets should work Avaya has only tested and therefore guarantees functionality of the following headsets only SonyEricsson HBH PV702 SonyEricsson HBH GV435 SonyEricsson HBH IV835 Plantronics Voyager510 Plantronics Explorer665 Nokia BH 201 Jabra BT8010 Motorola H350 Motorola H670 Samsung WEP410 e Graphical user interface e Four way navigation key e 19 built in Ul languages However in some languages menu items may appear in the English language e Standby 180h Talk Time 16h under optimal conditions Bluetooth headset interface Bluetooth 2 0 handsfree profile e Liquid and dust protected IP 44 e Multi functional button alarm call answer call etc
268. ership The new telephones also feature a very stylish and professional design including support for customized display screen saver images and custom faceplates with company logos e The 9620L 9620 C a member of the Avaya one X Deskphone Edition family is specifically designed for the everyday telephone user those who rely on multiple communications tools such as e mail and IM yet still require a high quality and intuitive telephone for voice communications The 9620L IP Telephone features a high resolution 3 45 inch 9 cm diagonal monochrome backlit display while the 9620C features a color display for even better readability The 9620L C support up to 12 call appearances administered feature keys with three concurrent line appearances visible at any time e The Avaya 9650 9650C The Avaya 9650 IP Telephone a member of the Avaya one X Deskphone Edition family is specifically designed for the navigator telephone user Navigators such as building receptionists and executive admin staff frequently manage calls for themselves and for groups of people The 9650 features built in button module functionality with one touch access to bridged appearances speed dials and feature keys The Avaya 9650 IP Telephone delivers advanced communications capabilities high definition audio an integrated WML application interface and comprehensive one touch access This is the ideal solution for receptionists executive assistants contact center agents a
269. ervice The service provider may also restrict which numbers can be used for outgoing Caller ID Hold A call may be placed on hold with optional Hold music A held call cannot be forgotten as it is presented back to the extension after a timeout set by the system s administrator See also Park 13 Toggle Calls Toggle Calls cycles round each call that the user has On Hold to their extension locally within the system presenting them one at a time to the user Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 129 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Hold Call Waiting Hold Call Waiting is a compound feature combining hold and answer and provides a convenient way to hold an existing call and answer a waiting call through a single button press Hold Music Music on Hold The IP Office system supports up to 4 sources of music on hold one system source which may be external internal WAV or tone plus up to 3 additional internal sources The internal sources are WAV files saved either in volatile memory or on the optional memory card in an IP500 and IP406 V2 The WAV file must be 16bit PCM mono and sampled at 8Khz with a maximum duration of 30 seconds Alternate sources for music on hold are selectable for use by Incoming Call Routes or Hunt Groups On IP500 systems each source can be up to 90 seconds long 30 seconds on IP406 V2 and IP412 External music on hold sources connect to the 3 5mm Audio socket on
270. ervisors 134 138 254 Supplementary Service 183 184 Supplementary Services within 184 Supplementary Services within IP Networks 184 surfing Internet 334 Suspend Call 158 Suspend CW 158 Sv 310 SW 77 80 82 SwapHold 308 Sweden 302 Swedish 111 112 236 switchable 80 82 118 Switchable Time Break Recall100 118 Switched Ethernet Switched LAN 17 switching Capacity 315 Play Advice 257 WAN 183 synchronization 200 261 Phone Manager 15 System Administration 258 System Administrator 129 131 134 158 257 258 System Announcement 261 systems supporting 247 15 45 334 T T 38 163 171 T 38 Fax 171 T1 14 15 17 52 131 140 144 174 175 176 187 190 196 260 278 300 303 334 345 T3 55 58 85 86 87 88 125 132 176 312 349 Tabs 219 222 227 279 TAPI 16 45 129 231 232 308 309 TAPILink Lite 231 232 308 TAPILink Pro 231 232 TAPI WAV 231 232 Target RAS 310 TCP 316 TCP IP 17 265 316 TCP UDP IP 172 Technical Bulletin 180 228 265 Technical Specifications 228 265 Technology Overview 162 TEls 347 telecommunication 316 telecommunication numbering 316 Telecommuter 137 219 Telecommuter Mode 137 219 teleconferences 7 Telephone Adaptors 17 195 Telephone Cord 113 Telephone Devices 232 telephone establish 162 Telephone Extension Cable Lengths 312 Telephone Options 18 Telephone User Interface telephone wishing 162 telephones including 14 telephones operating 172 Te
271. es e A scrolling message board for important messages during the course of the working day e A standings or leader board which displays the top agents for a particular activity during the day In addition to this the wallboard can also be customized with the company s logo and colors Also there is no limit to the number of statistics that can be displayed caution adding too many statistics may cause the displayed statistics to be too small to be viewed reasonably Wallboard Requirements e The wallboard can run on all the supported browsers for Customer Call Reporter e Microsoft Silverlight is a required plug in that can be downloaded before starting the wallboard Wallboard Licensing The Customer Call Reporter wallboard is based upon the number of supervisors licensed within CCR for each supervisor license purchased there can be one instance of the wallboard If five supervisor licenses are active on the system then five instances of the wallboard can be used throughout the business The wallboard logins do not have to be unique for example the system may have only one wallboard account set up within CCR but that same account can be used for as many supervisor licenses that exist on the system AV AY N IP Office Customer Call Reporter Welcome to CCR CCRCallGenRx2 Top CCRT4GP1 Outbound Calls Ext 1 5 Dominic Ridley Lost Calls Current Wait Time 2 At 1 Brad Trower 3 1 Andy Kemp 1 3 79 4 Andy Alexan
272. es 1400 Series Digital SoftConsole PC Requirement cccccseceeeees 228 T6lGPHONES koarani arar E EARTEN 68 A 5402 5602 SW 2402 4602 SW Telephone 77 E Telephony EIES 5410 5610 SW 2410 4610 SW Telephones 80 OFFICE eesseesssssssssssseeeeseenetsenenssnsssesenneen TAPILink Lite 1st Party TAPI Support 5 232 5420 5621 2420 4621 4625 Telephones 82 TAPILink Pro 3rd Party TAPI Support 232 EU24 and EU24 BL Expansion Modules 84 Buppen ar We elope Eei racea dared 232 To TelephonE Sse eeren a e ESETRE iA OSE A E S E A A US O E A lt t ge System Button Module Support 89 12 Messaging Wireless and Remote Phone Solutions 0 90 IP Office Essential Edition Embedded Voicemail 235 Analog TelephoneS esssssseissssrrssserrrssesrrnsssnens 116 IP Office Preferred Edition Voicemail Pro 236 Headsets aceite aani i iaiia 124 IP Office Preferred Edition VoiceMail Pro Summa adi et Seis aA Oe Mase age 125 Resilience and Backup cee 239 Interaction of Voicemail with Email Systems 242 5 Features Unified Messaging Service UMS 243 Basic Call Handling aI Nag uae eae hi rag codes HEE i Fax MESSAGES 000 cee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeaaas 245 Advanced Call Handling ianiai iniiyakan aini iis 133 Text to Speech Email Reading Microsoft Key and Lamp Operation ssesesseeeeseiee 140 ExGhangarOnly q
273. es with basic data networking needs IP Office can provide a complete data communications and networking solution e Internet Access Firewall protected leased line or dial up connectivity via PRI T1 or WAN port high speed dialed access direct leased line connections for high usage and Web site hosting integral security and efficient access to information and a larger business presence via the Web e Routing Integral Static or Dynamic RIP I II routing for both Internet and Branch to Branch solutions e Security NAT Network Address Translation and built in firewall to protect your internal network and IPSec support allows secure VPN data transmission across public IP Networks using 3DES encryption e DHCP Automatic IP address allocation for local and remotely attached PC s and other devices including IP phones e Remote Access Server Access to local LAN servers via optional two channel V90 modem or digital trunks individual firewall security access control per user and standards based security enable remote workers e LAN Switching The IP500 offers 2 switched Layer 3 Ethernet ports e LDAP client support For standards based directory synchronization with one X Portal for IP Office and Phone Manager Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 15 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Applications Platform Features IP Office provides big business benefits and enhanced productivity for
274. escription 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 228 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Chapter 11 Computer Telephony Integration roduct Des ROD 2010 AVAYA All rights reserve d Page 229 iP Office Re sled e 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 11 Computer Telephony I ntegration Computer Telephony Integration CTI is about bridging the gap between the telephone system and business applications On IP Office this is achieved by use of the IP Office CTI Link a CTI middleware product and Software Developers Kit On IP Office CTI is delivered through adherence to open standards This gives businesses access to a wide range of third party solutions addressing vertical markets and designed to meet their requirements For developers migrating their offering from other platforms to IP Office is quick and easy and the advanced CTI features IP Office offers makes it easy to demonstrate full integration and more business benefits IP Office provides two levels of CTI interoperability CTI Link Lite which is free of charge provides all the functionality required to support the vast majority of applications including screen popping and many third party products CTI Link Pro provides enhanced functionality including the ability to control multiple telephones and gives access to advanced call center operation Because IP networking is integrated into the IP Office system all CTI is done through the LAN On many oth
275. extension and a secondary extension Though not restricted to DECT this feature is aimed primarily at users who have both a desk phone and a wireless extension Calls from the secondary twinned extension are presented as if from the users main extension Presentation of call waiting and busy is based on whether either of the twinned extensions is in use In North America this functionality became available in Release 4 0 7 Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 98 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Avaya IP DECT System licensing A license is necessary for this functionality This license is called the Avaya IP Office IP DECT Mobility Manager license This license is entered through the main base station ADMM and is NOT entered through the IP Office System manager A feature key server is NOT necessary to enable the IP DECT functionality No separate PC or software is required with this system In all regions a plug and play licensing mechanism is available It consists of a pre licensed and ready to go two base station bundle IP DECT IPO STARTER KIT and two pre licensed base stations IP DECT RFP32 34 UPG KIT that can be added to the system independent of the number of licenses in ADMM This allows easier deployment and upgrades of systems without the need to buy a separate upgrade license For IP Office we recommend to use the Starter Kits and the Upgrade Kits for new installations for ad
276. f the Supervisor real time view is shown below 09 33 Alarm HG500 57 65 Grade Of Service 09 33 Alarm HG510 2 Calls Waiting 9 33 Alarm HG503 11 12 Grade Of Service 9 33 Alarm HG510 10 91 Grade Of Service Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 288 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Alarms The Customer Call Reporter provides different levels of alarms for the supervisor and agent to properly manage their call center activity As parameters move from a normal to alarm state the color of the field within the realtime view will change depending upon the level of alarm white for normal yellow for caution red for alarm and blue for alarm acknowledged The following statistics can have alarms set against them within the IP Office Customer Call Reporter Statistic Full Name PETE Biol Warning Alarm Type Queue Agent gt 1 999 gt 1 150 lt 1 150 lt 1 150 gt 1 999 gt 1 999 gt 1 999 gt 1 999 lt 1 100 gt 1 600 gt 1 600 gt 1 150 gt 1 999 gt 1 600 lt 1 100 gt 1 999 gt 1 600 gt 1 999 gt 1 999 gt 1 999 gt 1 999 gt 1 999 gt 1 999 gt 1 999 gt 1 999 gt 1 600 gt 1 999 gt 1 999 gt 1 999 Agent State Queue Time Agents Available Agents Logged On Answered Calls Answered External Non Queue Answered Internal Non Queue Answered Internal Queue Average Answer Average Answer Time Average
277. fault Button Features When connected to the PARTNER Version the top row of buttons on the 18D and 34D sets come pre programmed with the following features e Last Number e Conference Drop e Voice Mail Access e Recall Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 24 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 PARTNER ACS Euro Sets The following PARTNER ACS Euro telephones are supported on PARTNER Version e 6 Button non Display Set e 18 Button non Display Set e 18 Button Display Set e 34 Button Display Set up to 4 per system Not supported e Call Assist 24 CA 24 Adjunct Default Button Features When connected to the PARTNER Version the top row of buttons on the 18D and 34D sets come pre programmed with the following features e Last Number e Conference Drop e Voice Mail Access e Recall Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 25 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Wireless Sets 3920 Wireless 3910 Wireless Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 26 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Analog POTS Telephones PARTNER Version supports a wide variety of industry standard analog telephones and devices for example fax machines credit card readers wireless headsets cordless telephones Analog devices are connected to the system e To one of the analog ports on the Combo Module
278. ferencing equipment required You only need an IP Office system unit with as many digital trunks VoIP channels as external participants as well as Preferred Edition for Meet Me conferences e Ease of use Simply dial the direct number allocated to the conference bridge type in the PIN if required and you have joined the conference PIN codes require Preferred Edition VoiceMail Pro e Conference control from Avaya Display phones IP Office Phone Manager and one X Portal for IP Office For ad hoc conferences with a few participants users can easily set up immediate conferences by calling all parties and bringing them to the conference bridge With one X Portal for IP Office the originator of the conference can keep control the Caller ID number and the associated name if recognized of each participant is displayed If required they can selectively hang up a specific participant e Customized greeting Record a personalized greeting per conference requires Preferred Edition VoiceMail Pro e Conference entry exit tones Single beep on entry double beep on exit e Conference call recording Manual recording initiated by user on IP Office via one X Portal for IP Office Phone Manager digital IP display phone or a short code requires Preferred Edition VoiceMail Pro e Security To prevent unauthorized access to the conference bridge PIN codes Caller ID number screening as well as time and date profiles can be set up using IP Office VoiceMail
279. ffice Manager e Each user must have a voicemail PIN code a blank PIN is not acceptable Integration with Microsoft Exchange Server 2007 As part of UMS VoiceMail Pro can integrate with the Exchange Server 2007 from Microsoft Each user with UMS enabled can be configured to use either the IMAP capability see above or the Exchange integration If the Exchange option is selected all voicemails of the user will be forwarded and stored into the Exchange 2007 message Store instead of the VoiceMail Pro message store VoiceMail Pro is able to deliver new voicemails to Exchange formatted as voicemail which enables Exchange to handle them differently from standard emails If used in combination with a mobility solution voicemails can be managed using the visual voicemail user interface of the mobile device e g Blackberry The following diagram illustrates the two possible ways of integrating with either a standard IMAP based email system or with an Exchange Server 2007 email system UMS Voice Mail delivery UMS IMAP User Exchange 2007 User Desk Desk Phone Phone wih v tt a r massada Phone Manager ER yw one X Portal for IP Office ae oe Mobile Phone MiP office ER ies Manager 3 eoan one X Portal for IP Office VoiceMail Pro O UMS Web Access ri VoiceMail Pro Blackberry Enterprise Server Message Store MS Outlook OL Web Access E Mail Client Both scenarios can exist in parallel on t
280. for IP Office 204 one X Portal for IP Office is a server based applications that the user accesses with their web browser It can only be purchased as part of the IP Office Office Worker Power User and Teleworker user licenses one X Portal for P Office The one X Portal for IP Office is an application that provides users control of their telephone from a networked PC one X Portal for IP Office can be used with any IP Office extension analog digital or any IP telephones wired or wireless and is available as part of the IP Office Office Worker Power User or Teleworker user licenses only one X Portal for IP Office is a server based application that the user accesses via web browser Via separate gadgets one X Portal for IP Office provides easy access to telephony features call information call and conference control instant messaging directory and VoiceMail Pro mailbox AVAYA 3 ars omne Portal for IP Office MarkG 675 amp Available Help Logout Main 288 a D on D Please enter call subject More amp Aex B Andy Co in bey a vee Call work 1860 Brad Agent A 288 Call mobie 5554567788 O Dar E mail work ash example com Edt Delete amp Richard 00 00 04 B Emn Exints61 a Emma Graham P E Enter a name 1234 a ee a oe O State Erom Time Length Type Name Time Duration Calls A O Q Ernie 450 07 Jul 10 39 AM 1s 5 Spare 8 425 16 Jul 11 47 49 AN 8s 75 k
281. for full speed data throughput o Support of optional Gigabit Ethernet Adapter Language Support 1408 1608 Supports the following languages English French Spanish German Italian Dutch Portuguese and Russian English and 4 of the other languages at once in the phone Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 72 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 1616 I P Telephone 1416 Digital Telephone This telephone is best suited for the Receptionist Assistant User Communication Manager poze st f g m 1616 E KA 1616 I X R6 a 1416 E 7 in future The Avaya 1416 1616 supports 16 line appearances feature keys on the phone itself and up to 3 x 32 button expansion modules providing access to a total of 112 line feature keys or speed dial buttons This will satisfy the needs of even the most demanding secretary or receptionist Each of the buttons features a dual LED red green providing explicit status for the user For a familiar look and feel the 1416 1616 includes several fixed feature keys for common telephone tasks including conference transfer drop hold and mute In addition the 1416 1616 includes a high quality two way speakerphone and supports a broad portfolio of Avaya wired and wireless headsets through its integrated headset jack The 1416 1616 features a context sensitive user interface along with three softkeys and a fo
282. ftPhone Telecommuter mode Mobile Twinning Configuration Yes Yes 1000 Yes 100 entries entries maximum maximum Yes 5000 Yes 5000 entries entries maximum maximum Yes 5000 Yes unlimited entries maximum Call history log all missed messages Yes while Yes while Yes 24 7 call logged in logged in log Yes Yes Compact mode Personal Phone Directory System Phone Directory External Phone Directory e g LDAP Active Directory Separated incoming outgoing call log Collect new voicemail messages Yes Yes Yes Voicemail box control I ntuity and I P Office modes Yes es Personal Distribution List set up I ntuity mode Yes Incoming call scripting Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes via analog extension lt Advice of Charge I SDN service provider dependent Door opening control Queue monitoring Future lt wn Conference Control Display Audio Conference Management Screen pop contacts with Outlook Simple Outlook contact record creation Agent Mode Distinctive Ringing WAV file Future J 3 o e 3 fe 3 7 lt oO wn N O Cc oO Cc oO v Yes Yes Yes Yes es Y Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 219 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Feature Post Connect dial sending DTMF while connected to another party Vol P mode to run as an PC Softphone Video Softphone 1 LCS Microsoft Live Communica
283. g Feature e The ability for a user to Hot Desk to other locations within the Small Community Network e Available on Digital Analog and IP phones Benefit e A user can make and receive calls from any office as if using the phone on their own desk e Single number improved mobility and easy access to familiar features e the user has access to the centralized system and personal directory as well as their call log 1400 1600 9600 Series and T3 phones only e Great for consultants managers lawyers working on different offices on different days Description IP Office supports remote hot desking between IP Office systems within a Small Community Network SCN The system on which the user configured is termed their home IP Office all other systems are remote IP Offices No additional licenses are required to support Remote Hot Desking other than the Voice Networking license on each IP500 within the SCN e User Settings When a user logs in to a remote IP Office system all their user settings are transferred to that system e The user s incoming calls are rerouted across the SCN e The user s outgoing calls use the settings of the remote IP Office e However some settings may become unusable or may operate differently For example if the user uses a time profile for some features those feature will only work if a time profile of the same name also exists on the remote IP Office e Break Out Dialing In some scenarios a hot
284. g Library e Interactive Voice Response IVR with external databases e Visual Basic Scripting e 8 ports of Text to Speech TTS to allow database queries using IVR to be read over the phone e The Advanced Edition needs a valid Preferred Edition license as a pre requisite to run Essential Edition Additional Voicemail Ports License 1 P500 V2 only Essential Edition provides embedded messaging does not require the presence of a license However from Release 6 onwards each IP500 V2 system supports Essential Edition by default with 2 ports of voicemail enabled This can be expanded up to 6 channels through licenses in steps of two e Additional Embedded Messaging 2 Ports IPO LIC R6 ESSNTL EDITION ADD 2 229423 Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 324 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 IP Office User Profile Licenses The following chart shows an overview of the functions of each User Profile For users in an Small Community Network SCN when they hot desk to another IP Office system they retain their licensed profile setting as configured on their home system User Functionality Enabled Profile Mobility one X Soft CCR CCR Portal for Console Agent Supervis IP Office Generic or for email reading Basic User P a Office Worker Teleworker Power User Add ons Receptionist Customer Service Agent Customer Service Supervisor oY Mobile User _ i
285. g and receiving calls e IP Endpoint License 1 Phone IPO LIC IP40 IP ENDPOINT RFA 1 LIC CU 174956 e IP Endpoint License 5 Phones IPO LIC IP ENDPOINT RFA 5 LIC CU 174957 e IP Endpoint License 20 Phones IPO LIC IP ENDPOINT RFA 20 LIC CU 174959 Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 329 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Other System Licenses IPSec Tunneling License IPO LIC IPSEC VPN RFA LIC DS 182301 IP Office control units can be configured to support VPN tunnels using IPSec and or L2TP While L2TP tunnels can be configured without requiring a license the use of IPSec tunnels requires this license Note that IP Office VPN tunnels are not suitable terminating VPN links for Avaya VPNremote client phones Centralized I ntuity Audix Voicemail License IPO LIC ACM CENTRAL VM LIC DS 177467 Enables the use of a centralized Intuity Audix or Modular Messaging system for the IP Office voicemail server CTI TAPI Licenses The IP Office TAPI software can be run in two modes 1st party or 3rd party 1st Party mode does not require a license and allows individual users to control their phone using a TAPI compliant application on their PC 3rd Party mode requires licenses and allows a TAPI application to control calls for any users on the IP Office e CTI Link Pro License IPO LIC CTI RFA LIC DS 171988 This license allows the IP Office TAPI software to be run in 3rd par
286. group messages The method used is configured for the group through the IP Office Manager e Hunt group mode Messages are stored in the hunt group mailbox and Message Waiting only informs those individuals configured for message waiting indication from that group This is ideal for scenarios where only a few people such as a call center supervisor need to be initially aware of group messages Any message waiting light lit by this is extinguished when the new hunt group message is accessed by a user This is the default mode of operation e Broadcast mode Messages are not stored in the hunt group mailbox Instead they are broadcast copied and forwarded to the individual mailboxes of the entire hunt group membership This lights the individual messages waiting light of each user of the hunt group until they access their mailbox Personal Distribution Lists Personal Distribution Lists are only available with VoiceMail Pro when operating in INTUITY emulation mode The feature provides the ability for a user to distribute a voicemail message to a list of recipients simultaneously Lists can be configured by a voicemail box subscriber either through their voicemail box telephone user interface TUI or through the desktop PC application Phone Manager Pro The features available to a voicemail box subscriber include e Create up to 20 lists with 360 members per list e Mark a list as private or public Private lists can not be accessed by any ot
287. group must be set for either hunt or rotary ring type and if the call is not answered at the forward destination it will follow the hunt group call handling instead of going to voicemail This can be particularly useful in a sales or support environments where a number of people may be out of the office on Mobile Cell Phones and still participate in the hunt group as if in the office Follow Me Follow Me is similar to Forwarding except that the destination can only be an extension on the same IP Office as the user making use of the feature Follow Me is typically used when a user is going to be working away from their desk for example in a workshop All the call settings the user has on their main phone will apply to calls that follow the follow me feature including forward on busy or no answer Follow Me can be set either from the users main phone Follow Me To or from the phone where they want calls to be received Follow Me Here Several people can have their phones forwarded to a follow me destination and if the phone has a display it will indicate who the call is for Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 147 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Avaya Digital and I P Phones Programmable Buttons As well as the usual dialing keys Avaya digital and IP phones have dedicated function buttons like Mute Volume Hold Conference and Transfer In addition to these on many Avaya digital an
288. gust 2010 Index reachability 7 reading email 16 RealTime 16 172 236 316 Real Time Control Protocol 172 316 real time tracking 16 Reattempt 222 Reboot When Free 293 Rec 316 Recall button receivers 160 Receiving Door 121 Reception 131 157 Breakout 261 Rechargeable Battery 113 Reclaim Call 134 Record Message Record Send 261 recorded message stating 256 Recording 257 Time 261 Recordings 256 257 258 265 Redial Button 113 117 Region 90 98 116 125 303 RegisterCallNotifications 308 relating conferencing 279 Relay Off 158 Relay On 158 236 Relay On Off Pulse 137 Relay Pulse 158 Release 4 0 298 Release 4 0 7 98 Release 4 1 155 196 Remote Access 15 17 20 128 169 194 195 200 236 300 334 351 Mail Box 261 Remote Access Features 195 Remote Access Server 15 17 200 Remote Access Services 20 128 194 195 334 Remote Hot Desking 136 185 Remote Management 279 REN 315 348 Repeat Message 261 Replay 236 258 replay rights 258 Reply 235 246 253 261 requesting Gatekeeper 162 PIN 277 Rest 194 World 278 restricted allowed 199 Resume Call 158 Retrieve Call 158 117 118 158 256 Return On Investment 276 Rewind Message 261 RFA 187 RFC 172 316 Ringer 85 86 87 113 117 118 131 156 Ringer Equivalency 117 Ringer On Off 113 Ringing Patterns 117 Volume Control 117 RIP 15 200 316 RJ45 Ethernet 315 RMS 315 ROI 276 ROTARY 293 router alleviates 194 router firewall DHCP 17 Rou
289. h license keys Includes 128ms echo cancellation e IP500 Media Card Voice Compression Module 64 700417397 Voice Compression Module required for IP trunks and extensions 4 channels are enabled by default Additional channels up to the maximum of 64 are enabled through license keys Includes 128ms echo cancellation e IP Office 500 Carrier Card 700417215 Supports a range of P400 trunk cards e IP Office 500 V2 Combination Card with 4 analog trunks 700476013 IP500 V2 only Combination Card with 4 analog trunks 6 Digital Station DS 2 Phone ports and 10 VCM channels e IP Office 500 V2 Combination Card with 2 BRI trunks 700476021 I P500 V2 only Combination Card with 2 BRI trunk interfaces 4 channels 6 Digital Station DS 2 Phone ports and 10 VCM channels e IP Office 500 V2 ETR 6 port phone card 700476039 IP500 V2 only Supports 6 ETR ports for ETR 6 18 34 D Euro Style and Refresh digital phones as well as 3910 3920 wireless phones Supported on IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version only 1P500 and I P500 V2 Trunk Daughter Cards Only supported in the 1P500 Each requires an IP500 base card other than the 1P500 Carrier card e IP Office 500 Trunk Card Analog 4 Universal 700417405 e IP Office 500 Trunk Card Primary Rate 1 Universal 700417439 e IP Office 500 Trunk Card Primary Rate 2 Universal 700417462 e IP Office 500 Trunk Card Basic Rate 4 Universal 700417413 e IP Office 500 Trunk Card Basic Rate 8 Un
290. h your distributor for local availability Primary rate trunks are available with either a single 24 30 channels or dual trunk 48 60 channels ISDN Primary Rate ETSI CTR4 Provided by the IP400 PRI E1 and IP500 Universal PRI cards ISDN Primary Rate provides 30 x 64K PCM speech channels over an E1 circuit and one signaling channel Signaling Conforms to the ETSI Q 931 standard with Cyclic Redundancy error Checking CRC The following supplementary services are supported e Calling Line Identification Presentation CLIP provides the telephone number of the incoming call to the IP Office e Calling Line Identification Restriction CLIR prevents the telephone number of the IP Office being presented on an outbound call e Connected Line Identification Restriction COLR Inhibits the COLP service e Direct Dialing In DDI where the exchange provides the last x digits of the dialed number on an incoming call This allows IP Office to route the call to different users or services e Sub addressing Allows the transmission reception of up to 20 digits additional to any DDI DID or CLIP information for call routing and identification purposes ISDN Basic Rate ETSI CTR3 Provided by the IP400 Quad BRI and IP500 BRI cards ISDN Basic rate provides 2 x 64K PCM speech channels and one signaling channel using Q 931 signaling and CRC error checking Both point to point and point to multipoint operation is supported Multipoint lines allow
291. handsets This provides a graphical interface for call control and allows a one number service for both incoming and outgoing calls For a full list of supported handsets see http support avaya com IP Office systems supporting one X Mobile require a dedicated DID DDI number for each feature required e g hold transfer Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 270 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Mobile Call Control This allows a user who has answered a twinned call on their mobile cell phone to dial a DTMF sequence star star to put the call on hold and receive IP Office system dial tone The user will then be able to perform supervised and un supervised transfers shuttle switch between held calls and conference Conference add and transfer to a meet me conference Mobile Call Control is a mobility feature similar to but independent of one X Mobile It allows any mobile phone user to access IP Office features without using the one X Mobile client application Mobile users can gain access to the Star Star Service dial tone when they receive a twinned call After receiving a twinned call the mobile user can dial to place that call on hold and get dial tone from the IP Office Once the mobile user receives IP Office dial tone any subsequent dialing done is interpreted as if the user is logged into an analog extension on the IP Office To gain access to the Star Star Servi
292. hat all analog phones in every region of the world will work on the IP Office e Analog phones connect to IP Office via ports marked PHONE ports Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 116 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Avaya 6200 Analog Telephone North America The 6200 range of telephones are single line analog phones that require one tip and ring pair for operation This series of telephones have a Ringer volume control on the side of the telephone and a Handset volume control on the front of the phone They use DTMF dialing only and support the Positive Disconnect function In addition these phones have a Message light a recall button that allows access to system features a redial button that allows automatic redial a hold button with a single associated light and a data jack on the rear of the telephone The 6219 phone adds 10 programmable dialing buttons and the 6221 phone adds a built in speakerphone with mute capability Analog Telephone Features 6211 6219 i k OO xX 7 x Ao O XX Hold with indicator light C ee ee f System Hold O X Y Mute S O X X x Personalized Ringing X 7 Data Jack Cz ee Colors Ringer Equivalency l 0 7A 1 6B 0 5A 1 5B Hearing Aid Compatible EA v QS Specialty Handset Support S Product Description 2010 AVAYA
293. hat has been extracted from a database For example in a book shop the caller dials into the system and is asked for an ISBN number of the book they require The caller enters the ISBN through the telephone keypad and the system locates the title of the book from the database As well as finding the title the system could also look up the author of the book and whether there were any books in stock By using TTS the system could now respond to the call The book Lord Of The Rings costing 6 99 written by J R R Tolkien is in stock From VoiceMail Pro Release 6 onwards it is also possible to use Text to Speech within call flows or auto attendants for announcements A call flow auto attendant can be enabled to read text that has been created by call flow actions and offers much more flexibility because there is no longer the need for pre recorded and static announcements If there is a change to an announcement the call flow action will create the new announcement and will play it to the caller The IP Office Advanced Edition contains 8 port 3rd party Text to Speech capability and can be used either with a TTS engine that has to be purchased separately or when no 3rd party engine is installed with the Microsoft TTS engine which is part of the Windows operating system An alternative is the Avaya TTS license which adds a TTS engine available in 22 different languages e Chinese Mandarin e Italian e Chinese Cantonese e Korean e Dani
294. he normal SMTP server port is 25 The IP Office Manager operates on a local copy of the IP Office configuration file Configurations are prepared and reviewed off line before committing to the IP Office This has the benefit of ensuring a backup copy of the system configuration is always available for disaster recovery Product Description IP Office Release 6 0 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 293 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 IP Office has a built in audit trail that tracks changes to the system configuration and who has made them Manager can display the audit trail to assist with problem resolution The Audit trail records the last 15 changes in the configuration and records the following elements Configuration Changed For configuration changes the log will report at a high level on all configuration categories users hunt group that have been changed Configuration Erased Configuration merged Reboot user instigated reboot Upgrade Cold Start Warm Start Write at HH MM This is when the administrator saved the configuration via the schedule option Write with Immediate Reboot Write with Reboot When Free ES IPOffice Audit Trail Date And Time Of Access 30 March 2006 12 41 24 30 March 2006 12 45 41 30 March 2006 12 47 43 03 April 2006 10 29 49 03 April 2006 10 33 29 03 April 2006 13 11 33 04 April 2006 09 32 14 04 April 2006 10 09 42 04 April 2006 10 12 20 04 April 2006 12 52 05 04 April 2
295. he required priority on the network If not the conversation carried over IP appears as broken up due to packet loss or has unacceptable delays introduced in the conversation latency andjitter With IP hardphones there is need for Power over Ethernet PoE or midspan power to be provided to the phones as the IP phones are no longer powered by IP Office a list of Avaya approved PoE options is available at the end of this section Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 161 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Gateways Gatekeepers and H 323 Technology Overview IP Office uses the H 323 signaling protocol which has the following architectural components e Telephones are H 323 service endpoint devices that can support Audio calls Other types of H 323 devices can support video as part of H 323 e Gateways provide media translation to allow calls to be made to non H 323 devices for instance an analog telephone or the public network to connect with a H 323 device e Gatekeepers control the call processing and security for H 323 devices e Multipoint Connection Units MCU for conferences by adding together media streams These elements are grouped together in what is known as an H 323 zone a zone is analogous to a PABX Each zone has a single Gatekeeper that can be considered as the brains of the system dealing with call distribution call control and the management of resources On power up IP
296. he same system but only one option can be configured for one user A voicemail stored in the Exchange message store can be retrieved by VoiceMail Pro and made accessible for all communication devices as shown in the diagram above Earlier versions of Microsoft Exchange Server are supported by using the IMAP integration described above Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 244 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Fax Messages Integration with fax software integration with fax to the desktop or client fax applications can be realized through the use of fax servers This allows an email client for example Microsoft Outlook to be utilized as an easily affordable unified messaging solution The many benefits of unified messaging include security as faxes are sent to the users PC rather than on paper for everyone to see ease of use and efficiency in terms of storage and retrieval of messages and the great gains that can be made in overall workforce efficiency and productivity To enhance the support of third party fax solutions VoiceMail Pro supports the automatic detection of incoming fax calls Traditionally a dedicated telephone number is provided for all incoming fax calls In addition to or as an alternative to the VoiceMail Pro Menu action or a subscriber s voicemail box INTUITY mode can automatically detect any incoming fax calls and then direct the call to a predefined location The be
297. heir home office as well e 5 service technicians in the field e 10 assembly operators in the manufacturing plant e 3 managers e 5 back office associates e 2 shared desks for account managers and service technicians e 3 phones in meeting room and facility room e 2 Fax machines All employees should be accessible at anytime under one number service Kit List e 1x 1P500 V2 Control Unit e 2 x 1P500 V2 Combination Card with 2 BRI trunks e 1 x Region specific power cord e 1 x IP500 V2 feature key System SD Card including Essential Edition 2 Port embedded voice mail e 3 x 1603 for the facility rooms e 12 x 1608 for the assembly operators and shared desks e 5 x 1616 IP Phones for the back office associates e 3 x 9620 IP Phones with VPN Software for the account managers at home e 3 x 9650 IP phones for the managers e 1x 20 User Avaya IP Endpoint license e 2 x5 User Avaya IP Endpoint license e 2x5 User Power license for the account managers and service technicians e 1 x5 User Office Worker license for the back office associates e 1x5 User Mobile Worker license for the Managers Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 304 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Scenario 3 A lawyer s office has the need of a new communication solution to lower costs and speed up customer service The work roles are e 3 lawyers e 6 administrators e 1 meeting room e 2 Fax machines All employees sho
298. hem For example the switch port may be receiving packets from multiple ports at the same time or the switch port may be receiving packets from a port operating at a faster speed For instance the sending port might be operating at 100 Mbps while the receiving port operates at 10 Mbps or the sending port might operate at 1000 Mbps while the receiving port operates at 100 or 10 Mbps If data packets arrive for a port that is saturated with other packets the packets may overflow the port s buffer resulting in dropped packets and lost data Flow control is a congestion control mechanism that prevents data loss at congested ports Flow control prevents packet loss by controlling the flow of data from the transmitting device to ensure that the receiving device can handle all of the incoming data IEEE 802 3 flow control is used on Avaya IP telephones operating in full duplex mode If the receiving device becomes congested it sends a pause frame to the transmitting device The pause frame instructs the transmitting device to stop sending packets for a specific period of time The transmitting device waits the requested time before sending more data Vol P Standards Supported IP Office supports the following protocols and standards e H 323 V2 1998 Packet based multimedia communications systems e Q 931 ISDN user network interface layer 3 specification for basic call control e H 225 0 1998 Call signaling protocols and media stream
299. her voicemail subscriber Public lists can be used by other subscribers but can not be edited e Public lists can be copied from one subscriber to another by adding the contents into a new list e Subscribers can Create new lists Scan contents of an existing list or Modify existing lists e List members can be added by using the station number or mailbox name names are not supported for VoiceMail Pro Networked Messaging mailboxes e Lists can include voicemail boxes that exist on other Avaya voicemail systems that are available through VoiceMail Pro Networked Messaging e Lists can be added together duplicate members are automatically removed This includes public lists owned by other voicemail subscribers e Mailing lists are accessible to the user at any send message and forward message option within the user s voicemail box e When displayed within Phone Manager Pro distribution lists can have a list description added to it this is only visible within Phone Manager Pro Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 254 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Cascaded Out Calling VoiceMail Pro can send a notification with an escalation capability that a new voice message has been received in a user s mailbox to specified phone number s This is particularly useful in environments such as healthcare and support where important voice messages are left and need to be answered pro
300. here connection is over ISDN IP Office initiates extra data connections between sites only when there is data to be sent or sufficient data to warrant additional channels It then drops the extra channels when they are no longer needed The calls are made automatically without the users being aware of when calls begin or end The rules for making calls how long to keep calls up etc are configurable within IP Office It is possible to have several different routing destinations or paths active at any time linking the office to other offices and the Internet simultaneously Internet Access While the telephone is still the number one business communication tool Internet access is becoming increasingly important for business to business communications The ability to send and receive email is now considered mandatory when dealing with many suppliers and customers while access to the Internet for e commerce applications and information has become vital IP Office systems provide shared secure high speed access to the Internet via exchange lines Central Office digital leased line or IP VPN services Internet security concerns are addressed through the provision of an integrated firewall so removing the need for a standalone firewall The firewall can be configured to cater for a variety of situations and will allow customers to control who can access external resources and when The firewall isolates your private networks from the Inter
301. hin the System Administration pages Each recording has an owner the call owner is the number of the extension that recorded the call You can specify to which extensions each user has replay rights the user can search for and replay all calls owned by those stations Typically an individual may be given rights to replay calls owned by their extension number while managers may have rights to the extension numbers of all of their staff The system will automatically generate alarms showing system warnings Alarms are logged to IP Office ContactStore s database and held for a month before being purged The administrator can define specific Email addresses for alarms to be automatically forwarded to The email recipient could be a local system administrator a manned help desk and or suppliers support desks if you have a support agreement that includes this facility The system sends an email message each time an alarm occurs or is cleared It also sends an email once per day as a heartbeat to let you know it is still operating Failure to receive the daily heartbeat message should be investigated it could indicate that the server has failed Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 258 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 IP Office ContactStore allows replay of recordings by means of a browser based application that is accessible with Internet Explorer 1E V6 0 and higher The Search and Replay facilities includ
302. hnical Specifications Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 311 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 19 Technical Specifications Dimensions IP412 and all Expansion Modules 445mm 17 5 71mm 2 8 245mm 9 7 IP500 445mmm 17 5 73mm 2 9 365mm 14 4 e The recommended minimum clearance front and rear for the connection of cables and other devices is 75mm 3 Weight 1P500 System Unit 3 2Kg 7 0lbs 1P412 Control Unit 3 0Kg 6 7lbs Analog 16 Module 2 9Kg 6 5lbs DS16 Module 3 0Kg 6 7Ilbs DS30 Module 3 5Kg 7 8lbs WAN3 Module 2 8Kg 6 3lbs So8 Module 2 8Kg 6 3lbs Phone 8 Module 2 8Kg 6 3lbs Phone 16 Module 2 9Kg 6 5lbs Phone 30 Module 3 1Kg 6 94lbs Environmental e 0 C to 40 C 32 F to 104 F 95 relative humidity non condensing Call Capacity Busy Hour Call Complete BHCC is a measure used to test IP Office systems under a high call load For BHCC tests each incoming call rings for 5 seconds is answered and stays connected for 6 seconds The BHCC figures for the different IP Office control units are listed below Note that in some cases the BHCC figure achievable will be limited by the number of incoming trunks supported e 1P500 36000 e 1P412 36000 Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 312 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Telephone Extension Cable Lengths The following table details the maximum cable lengths supported for
303. ice site Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 236 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 VoiceMail Pro More than just Voicemail VoiceMail Pro offers much more than just a pure voicemail system Other helpful convenient cost and time saving options are Whisper Announce that prompts callers for information usually their name which is recorded and passed on to the user s extension on answer allowing them to choose to accept the call or not This is particularly useful on CLI ANI withheld numbers usually calls from telesales companies where somebody is trying to sell you something VoiceMail Pro will not intrude onto busy extensions Assisted Transfer allows transfer of a call to a destination but allows the call to return to VoiceMail Pro automatically for other options should the called party be engaged or not answer within a pre determined time Conditional routing of calls Conditions are constructed from a set of basic elements These elements can be combined within a single condition to create complex rules For example the Week Planner can be used to define the company s standard working hours and then combined with the calendar to define exception days such as public holidays vacation Call modules Modules allow you to create sequences of actions that you want to share between a number of different call routing scenarios like a macro in PC applications These modules can be used
304. ice systems support up to a total of 256K worth of encrypted traffic to multiple locations Initially inter working is supported only between IP Offices that are connected either directly on a WAN port or via the LAN using a 3rd Party router IPSec is optional and enabled on IP Office through a License Key Note Check with Avaya for supported scenarios and 3rd party devices VPN Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol PPP via L2TP Public Internet PPP authentication using PAP or CHAP takes place between directly connected routers only When using a public IP Network to connect sites this authentication takes place between the customers router and the service provide router that it is connected to In some circumstances it is desirable to authenticate between the customer owned routers jumping over all the intermediary routers of the service provide network Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol allow this to happen by facilitating a two stage authentication firstly with the service provider router then the customer router on the remote network Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 201 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Chapter 9 User Call Control Applications roduct Des ROD 2010 AVAYA All rights reserve d Page 203 iP Office Re sled e 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 9 User Call Control Applications Avaya provides the following call control application with IP Office Release 6 e one X Portal
305. icemail On Off Access e Call Log Central Call Log for T3 and 1600 phones only e Redial Central Call Log for T3 and 1600 phones only e Personal Directory Entries for T3 and 1600 phones only Mobile external Twinning A typical use for Mobile Twinning would be for a salesperson who has a desk extension but is often out of the office They can give out one phone number to clients but it will ring their mobile cell phone as well as the desk extension External mobile devices can be set as twinning targets even if the primary telephone is logged out e g in the case of a virtual extension From IP Office 4 2 onwards the following additional Mobility features are available in addition to simple mobile twinning but need to be separately enabled per user in IP Office Manager Mobile Call Control This allows a user who has answered a twinned call on their mobile cell phone to dial a DTMF sequence star star to put the call on hold and receive IP Office system dial tone The user will then be able to perform supervised and un supervised transfers shuttle switch between held calls and conference Conference add and transfer to a meet me conference Mobility Callback This feature available from Release 6 allows a user to make an outgoing call from IP Office from their mobile phone The user dials a specific number on the IP Office system which rejects the call and then calls the mobile phone back On answering the user is pres
306. ied and collected from a single source This simple alert option that forwards only the caller s number in the subject of the email is ideal for use with commercial Short Message Systems SMS This information can be forwarded to the display of a mobile cell phone when the user is away from the desk The email notification forwarding and copying can be done for all voice messages and can be activated remotely This is beneficial if you are working from home and have an email connection available Incoming Call SMS alert on GSM VoiceMail Pro Listen to email requires Text to Speech license Email alert message at home or on the road a Picks up the call on no answer In the office LED on the phone Alert on one X Portal Phone Manager Email notification Forwarding voicemail to email is particularly useful for group voicemail boxes as it allows a single voicemail message to be copied to the email of every member in that group Inbox Microsoft Outlook Steve Richards Bie Edit Yiew Favorites Tools Actions Help ciuew OFX Sepecly Purely toal Yf Forward Zsendineceive Sornd Yyorosnize EA ie e 91S BE messages with autorrenew FY FG R O AK 2 2 Inbox 8A DI From Subject Received Sy Colin Training Fri 23 02 2001 08 Outlook Today H Thanks for your help The Document is caled the Trainer s Classroom Set up doc Cheers D Dave RE Your Feedback Requested Fri 23 02 2001 08 na
307. ier scanner 245 CoS 171 Country Availability 302 CPE 197 CPU 258 CPU loading 258 CRC 176 Create 254 CreateCall 308 CRM 245 334 CS ACELP 172 CSU 52 176 297 345 CSU Loop Back 297 CSU DSU 52 176 345 CTI 16 45 134 230 231 232 279 CTI interoperability levels 230 CTI Link Lite 230 CTI Link Pro 45 230 231 CTI Link Pro RFA 231 CTI middleware 230 CTR3 ETSI T Bus Interface 315 CTR4 ETSI T Bus Interface 315 cust 133 Customer Contact 282 Customer Contact Center 282 Customized Voicemail 261 CW 158 CW1308 312 Cyclic Redundancy 176 Czech Republic 302 D D Message 310 Data Access Components 250 Data Call 153 155 175 198 Data Channels 169 334 Data Communication Solution 15 Data Communication Solution Features 15 Data Compression 198 Data Header Compression 198 Data Jack 117 Data Rates 315 data traffic 100 170 183 197 Database 129 236 245 250 251 256 257 258 Datagram Protocol 316 Day One starting 7 Day Night service 121 D channel 16kbps 315 D channel 64kbps 315 DDI 131 176 308 DDI DID 20 98 128 153 176 248 DDI DID call 153 DECT 90 98 176 DECT Networking 98 Default E amp M 315 default greeting 132 Product Description IP Office Release 6 0 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 356 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Index default numbering 135 Definable PIN Code 261 DEFINITY 58 187 DEFINITY 6400 58 DEFINITY 9 5 C LAN 187 DEFINITY G3si 187
308. ifferent power requirement Power Consumption Watts Telephone PoE Conservation Typical Worst Case Class Mode 4e10sw 5610sw 2 40o na 60 PNA 4e25swo 3 6eo8 2 466 37 569 O2 317 CO ee i 3 17 Gig Adapter Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 167 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Avaya Individual Power Supply Avaya provides individual power supplies that can be used to power each IP phone which provides a single 48 volt output The power supply can operate globally within a wide range of Alternating Current AC input voltages 90 264 Volts Alternating Current VAC 47 63 Hz This power supply has a green indicator LED that shows the unit has power to the PHONE socket on pins 7 amp 8 of the CAT5 cable This item is available in two different versions with and without an internal battery for uninterrupted power to the phone 1151 local power supply without battery and with battery backup For 1600 Series phones a separate line of cost efficient power supplies is available in different regional versions Avaya Mid Span Power Distribution Units These power devices are designed for P telephony and provide power over Ethernet PoE for up to 24 IP telephones or wireless LAN WLAN access points in one unit The Mid Span Power units are designed to mount in a 19 inch rack with the data equipment or they can be stacked up to four units high using th
309. ific Medical and Industrial SMI band e Automatic fallback 11Mbps 5 5Mbps 2Mbps or 1Mbps e EEE 802 11 and IEEE 802 11b Compliance e Wireless Fidelity Wi Fi Compliance e Interoperable with other 802 11b compliant devices e WEP or RC4 security e Range up to 550M 1750ft Open 160m 252ft 270m 885ft 400m 1300ft 550m 1750ft Semi Open 50m 165ft 70m 230ft 90m 300ft 115m 375ft Closed 25m 80ft 35m 115ft 40m 130ft 50m 165ft Receiver Sensitivity dBm 82 87 91 94 Delay Spread at FER of lt 1 65ns 225ns 400ns 500ns For wireless operation IP Office Small Office Edition must be fitted with a Wireless LAN card and the Wireless LAN Access Point license key Alternatively a 3rd party wireless access point can be connected directly to one of the LAN ports Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 343 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Optional Embedded Voicemail with Auto Attendant Entry level voicemail and auto attendant applications are available using the Avaya memory expansion kit in one of the PCMCIA slots on the rear of the Small Office Edition This provides small locations with an effective embedded messaging solution with auto attendant without the additional costs of an external PC The embedded voicemail supports up to 10 hours of message storage The number of available voicemail ports to support simultaneous calls to voicemail is 3 ports on the 3 VoIP model or 10 ports
310. ified This feature is supported across the IP Office Small Community Network Call Recording Where IP Office has VoiceMail Pro installed it is possible to record a call and save the recording to the user s mailbox a group mailbox or the voice recording library For example this is useful when a caller is going to give detailed information like an address or phone number and the caller will hear a warning message or tone that the call is being recorded in some countries Where call recording is required for Quality Assurance it is possible to set the IP Office system to automatically record a percentage of calls for later review Beginning with IP Office R4 0 any call normal conference or intrusion and any phone type including IP can be recorded Where advice of recording needs to be played IP Office will ignore Voicemail port licensing if an insufficient number of voicemail channels have been licensed Note for IP phones a VCM channel will be required for the duration of the recording Telecommuter Mode Phone Manager Pro allows the making and receiving of calls and the retrieving of voicemails from an external phone number as if they were in the office with Phone Manager providing the call control The typical scenario is the remote worker that occasionally works from home or from a hotel room This feature also provides billing convenience and potential cost savings for remote workers and mobile work force as all the c
311. igital Station DS and 2 Phone ports 1P500 V2 only e Optional trunk daughter card support e Analog Trunk Module 4 card e BRI 4 and BRI 8 cards 2 x 2B D and 4 x 2B D channels respectively e Single and Dual Universal PRI cards e Support for IP400 trunk and VCM cards using a Legacy Card Carrier e 1P500 Slot for smart card Feature Key required for system operation as well as licensing of optional features e IP 500 Slot for Compact Flash card used for embedded messaging as part of Essential Edition e IP500 V2 2 Slots for SD cards System and optional System SD card is required for system operation as well as licensing of optional features and storage for embedded voicemail in Essential Edition e 9 pin DTE Port for maintenance e Support for up to 12 1P500 Expansion Modules e Phone modules 16 30 e Digital Station modules 16 30 e Analog Trunk Module 16 e BRI So8 module e IP400 expansion modules not WAN3 10 100 or Network Alchemy modules e External output socket supporting two relay on off switch ports e g for door entry systems e Audio input port for external music on hold source e 48 Data channels e Up to 40 VoiceMail Pro ports e Two 10 100 switched Ethernet ports Layer 3 Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 45 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Power supply socket Power supply socket Lard Slots A gt ____ IP Office 500 Fe
312. implement all options of the standard making it hard to almost impossible to predict if a device will work Avaya will only confirm functionality of devices that we have tested and will publish a list of devices that have been tested including if required implementation details and software version used on that device As of time of writing the following devices have been tested successfully with IP Office Release 5 for Audio and or Fax transmission Polycom Soundpoint IP 320 IP 601 Grandstream GXP 2000 GXP 2020 SIP clients on mobile cell phones Nokia S60 v3 SIP client e g Nokia E61i mobile cell phone SIP Analog Teminal Adapters Quick Edition A10 ATA Patton single line M ATA Innovaphone IP22 IP24 IP28 SI P PC based softphones CounterPath eyebeam xlite A updated list will be provided in the IP Office knowledge base and on http support avaya com Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 166 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Power Options for P Telephones Avaya supports the IEEE 802 3af standard for Power over Ethernet PoE on its range of IP telephones With Power over Ethernet both power and data are carried over one CAT 5 Ethernet cable Deploying IP telephones utilizing Power over Ethernet eliminates the need for local power supplies AC adapters and cables and allows power to be provided from the wiring closet switch room where it can be easily connected to a UP
313. ineRedirect e lineRemoveFromConference e lineSetAppPriority e lineSetAppSpecific e lineSetCallPrivilege lineSetStatusMessages lineSetupTransfer lineShutdown lineSwapHold lineUnhold lineUnpark lineSetCallData lineDevSpecific lineGenerateDigits lineGenerateTone lineMonitorDigits lineMonitorTones TAPI 3 0 functions supported The following functions are supported using TAPI 3 0 e I TTAPI Initialize e Shutdown e EnumerateAddresses e RegisterCallNotifications e Put_EventFilter e 1TAddress e get_AddressName e get_dialableAddress e get_ServiceProviderName e CreateCall e TMediaSupport e get_MediaTypes Notes e I TCalll nfo e get_Address e get_CallState e get_CalllnfoString e SetCalllnfoBuffer e I TBasicCallControl e Connect e Answer e Disconnect e Hold e SwapHold e ParkDirect e Unpark e BlindTransfer e Transfer ITCallStateEvent get_Cause get_State get_Call I TCallNotificationEvent get_Call I TCalll nfoChangeEvent get_Call 1 TCallHubEvent get_Event get_Call e TAPILink Lite can be used from C C and Delphi Visual Basic cannot directly use TAPI 2 1 but does support TAPI 3 0 without any third party tools e TAPILink Lite provides detailed information on telephony events including the ability to screen pop based on CLI and or DDI Product Description IP Office Release 6 0 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 308 Issue 20 p 05 Aug
314. ined Fall Back destination This can be particularly useful where calls are normally answered by an auto attendant and a network fault occurs Where multiple call routes are set up to the same destination a Priority level can be associated with the call This priority level is used to determine a call s queue position in place of simple arrival time but note that calls already ringing a free extension are not considered queuing and are not affected by a high priority call joining a queue unless the option Assign Call On Agent Answer is selected for that hunt group A Priority Promotion Timer can be configured to increase the priority of calls which have been in the queue for more than a defined time An optional tag can be added to calls on the Incoming Call Route which can be displayed on the alerting telephone Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 153 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Hunt Groups A hunt group is a collection of users typically users handling similar types of calls e g a sales department An incoming caller wishing to speak to Sales can ring one number but the call can be answered by any number of extensions that are members of the hunt group Four modes of call presentation are supported on IP Office e Sequential One extension at a time sequentially always starting at the top of the list e Collective All extensions in the hunt group simultaneously e Rotar
315. ing conference calls refer to the Audio Conferencing chapter 278 Dial On Pickup Also known as Hotline Automatically dials a specified extension when the phone is taken off hook This facility is commonly used in unmanned reception areas or for door entry systems to allow visitors to easily gain assistance Off Hook Operation Off Hook Station is designed for users who want their analog phone to operate like digital or IP feature phone to isolate the user s phone idle state from the Hook state This is a useful feature when using one X Portal for IP Office Phone Manager or SoftConsole to control the phone state when using a headset on an analog telephone and with call control and dialing from one X Portal for IP Office Phone Manager or SoftConsole External Control Port The IP Office system unit has two electronic switches similar to relays which can be normally open normally closed pulsed open or pulsed closed and activated by dialing a short code or through Phone Manager SoftConsole or VoiceMail Pro action These switches can be used for several purposes for example as a means to control an electronic door release The External Control Port switches are used to trigger control purpose built door release equipment which is supplied by a third party All that needs to be done is to wire the trigger control output of the third party device to the appropriate External Control port pins E911 This is a specific se
316. ing the IP Office Essential Edition Key features of Embedded Voicemail include e Up to 6 ports of voicemail on IP500 V2 e P500v2 The first 2 ports are included in the basic system Up to four additional ports can be added simply by purchasing a license key e IP500 Maximum 4 ports of voicemail e Up to 15 hours message storage e Configurable recording time Default value 2 minutes maximum value 3 minutes e Mailbox security codes ensure a minimum of 4 characters to be set e Multiple languages stored on the flash memory card e Help menus via 4 Greetings and mailbox navigation e Send an email containing either notification or the complete voicemail message e Voicemail breakout personal auto attendant Up to 3 breakout numbers can be set up When callers are directed to your mailbox they can either leave a message or choose to be transferred to one of three numbers e g Operator mobile cell phone colleague etc e Configurable system wide short code for voicemail collect e g 17 e 40 configurable Auto Attendants with 3 time profile base greetings per Auto Attendant e Up to 12 menu items per Auto Attendant with automatic time out to fallback number e Auto attendant supports Dial by Name and direct Dial by Number dial extension number without dialing access digit first e Access and control of voicemail via the digital or IP terminal display Visual Voice This feature is supported on the 1408 1416 1608 1616 2410
317. ing the current call or putting it on hold Use this feature to inspect ringing active or held calls e Caller ID Name Display FEATURE 16 When an incoming call is ringing at a display telephone both the name and number appear on the user s display The Number is displayed on the top line and the Name on the 2nd line In some cases users may wish to see the Caller ID Name on the top line and the Caller ID Number on the 2nd line This feature provides this capability Cell Phone Connect See Mobile Twinning 385 CO Disconnect Time Programmable Use this feature to change the hold disconnect time for an outside line Different telephone companies use different length signals The length of the signal is called the CO or Hold Disconnect time If you place a call on hold and the caller hangs up but the call does not disconnect within a minute after the caller Conference Drop On 14xx digital telephones you may choose which specific party you want to drop from a conference call On ETR and analog telephones the last party added to the conference call is automatically dropped Conferencing PARTNER Version supports up to 64 party conferencing A maximum of 2 analog lines can be in any conference call Conference calls may consist of combinations of analog lines digital lines PRI T1 SIP analog phones ETR phones or digital phones Contact Closure Support for 2 Devices FEATURE 41 and FEATURE 42 The IP500 v2 Control Unit has
318. ingle phone only e Temporary installations such as conferences off site meetings and trade shows VPN Phone has been tested with a number of VPN gateways from major vendors like Cisco or J uniper as well as with smaller VPN access devices from companies like Adtran Kentrox Netgear and SonicWall Refer to the support pages support avaya com for a list of available application notes on VPN gateways tested with each line of phones Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 115 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Analog Telephones As well as providing a lower cost alternative to system specific telephones analog telephones can still deliver a high degree of functionality on IP Office They are particularly appropriate in applications where users require lower entry costs and can be used with Phone Manager for a high proportion of call control Analog telephones that are compatible with caller display functionality can display the telephone number of the calling party if available Simple programming of IP Office can convert that numeric display in to the company name associated with that number Feature activation by analog telephones is via short codes IP Office is pre programmed with a default set of short codes but these can be changed to mimic a legacy telephone system as required Avaya would like to stress that although most analog phones will work on IP Office Avaya cannot guarantee t
319. interface for supporting voice services and fractional leased lines providing up to 256K bandwidth on IP and Frame Relay services e Not available in all territories check for availability Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 342 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Optional Wireless Access Point All IP Office Small Office Edition platforms can be configured to become Wireless LAN access points An Access Point acts as a Hub in a wireless network providing connectivity between devices in the vicinity In ideal conditions a range of up to 550M 1750 ft is achievable although this range will be decreased if walls and other obstacles are present This is used where local conditions impair coverage and additional Access Points are needed to cover the black spots Additional Access Point Internet Coverage Area a ee ee e Integral Access Point The IP Office Small Office Edition wireless network can be secured against intruders using either the Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP or RC4 WEP uses 64 bit encryption key and RC4 uses a 128 bit encryption key Only devices with a matching security key can participate in the network IP Office Small Office Edition complies to the IEEE 802 11 and IEEE 802 11b standards meeting the Wireless Ethernet Compatibility Alliance WECA Wireless Fidelity Wi Fi requirements for interoperability Summary e 2 4 GHz to 2 5 GHz band Scient
320. ion IP Office Essential Edition VoiceMail Pro Embedded Voicemail Number of No Limit Limited only by IP Office Limited only by IP Office configuration Mailboxes configuration supported Maximum Number Up to 40 dependent on license 6 simultaneous calls on IP500 V2 of Concurrent Calls 4 simultaneous calls on 1P500 ports Recording Time PC dependent Requires 1MB per minute 15 hours Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 261 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Features IP Office IP Office Preferred Essential Edition Edition VoiceMail Pro Embedded Voicemail Runs as a service Yes No Multi lingual support Yes Yes Voicemail for Individual users Yes Yes Voicemail for Virtual users Yes Yes Voicemail for Hunt Groups Yes Yes Group Broadcast Yes No Unified Messaging Service UMS Option No Integration with Microsoft Exchange Server 2007 Option No Capable to interact with Blackberry solution Option No Resilience and Backup Option No Small Community Network Operation Yes No Centralized Voicemail Services Yes No Distributed Voicemail Servers in an SCN Yes No Voicemail Ringback Internal and Internal only external Voicemail Help TUI Yes No Message Waiting I ndication Yes Yes Visual Voice interactive menu on phone display Yes Yes Integration with Phone Manager Pro Yes No Personalized Greeting Yes Yes Extended personal Greetings Yes 2 No Continuous Loop Greeting Yes No Forward to Email Yes
321. irements e Phone support Any telephone connected to IP Office although handsfree operation is only supported on suitable Avaya Digital and IP telephones e Server and Browser requirements e one X Portal for IP Office supports the following browsers e Microsoft Internet Explorer versions 7 and 8 e Mozilla Firefox version 3 0 and above e Windows Safari and Apple Safari 3 1 and above e The server requirements are e Intel Pentium D945 core AMD Athlon 64 4000 with 3 GB RAM and 20 GB free hard disk space e OS supported Windows Server 2003 32 and 64 bit e Always refer to the latest Avaya IP Office Technical Tip or Technical Bulletin for any updated information with regard to Operating Systems Service Packs or PC hardware e Licensing one X Portal for IP Office requires a one X Portal for IP Office license for each user This license is part of the IP Office Power User Office Worker or Teleworker user licenses and is not available separately The Telecommuter mode and SoftPhone are available only with Power User and Teleworker Softphone does not require an Avaya IP Phone license on IP Office unlike the Avaya IP hard phones e PC Requirements for IP Office Video Softphone e Processor e Minimum Pentium 4 2 4 GHz or equivalent Video Card with DirectX 9 0c support e Optimal Intel Core 2 Duo or equivalent Video Card with DirectX 9 0c support e Memory e Minimum 1 GB RAM e Optimal 2 GB RAM e Hard Disk Space 50 MB e Op
322. is required Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 31 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Backup Programming Manual 124 The administrator may do a manual system programming backup to the system SD card via the TUI Bridging J oining Calls A user can bridge join on any active call by pressing the associated CO line button assuming Privacy is not active on the originating extension When a call is bridged the red and green LED s will alternate on all telephones which are bridged on the call Call Coverage FEATURE 20 This feature is used to redirect all Intercom Transferred DID and outside calls from a user s extension to another extension When Call Coverage is activated covered calls are routed to the covering extension after a specified number of rings Call Forwarding Follow Me FEATURE 11 The Call Forwarding and Follow Me features both provide a means of redirecting Intercom ICOM CO and Transfer calls from one extension to another specified extension Call Forwarding is the feature used by extensions to send their calls to another extension Follow Me is the feature used by extensions to pull calls in from another extension Call Log Digital Sets Call Log is a fixed button on digital telephones and provides a visual record of calls made and received including unanswered calls Details are store for both users maximum 30 entries and hunt groups maximum
323. iversal 700417421 Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 301 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Country Availability IP Office is available from distribution partners in the following countries Please refer to your country price list for the availability of individual items e Argentina e Brazil e Canada e Chile e Colombia e Mexico e Peru e USA Austria Belgium Bulgaria Croatia Cyprus Czech Republic Denmark Estonia Finland France Germany Greece Hungary Iceland Ireland Italy e Latvia e Lithuania e Luxembourg e Malta e Netherlands e Norway e Poland e Portugal e Romania e Russia e Slovenia e Slovakia e South Africa e Spain e Sweden e Switzerland e United Kingdom Australia China Hong Kong India New Zealand South Korea Taiwan Product Description IP Office Release 6 0 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 302 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Sample Configurations Scenario 1 A three location US business working in property building management would like to optimize their customer service and satisfaction and lower the costs The work roles are e 30 building managers 10 in each location partly at the customer site e 80 property maintenance associates about 30 in each location mostly at the customer site e 1 manager e 6 back office associates two at each site e 9 shared desks 3 at each sit
324. k VoIP 278 trunkinterfacecards htm 345 Trunks back 17 trunks VoIP 279 TTS 246 adds 251 TTS Licensing 251 TTY 236 TTY hearing 236 TUI 236 253 254 255 Tunneling Protocol 201 316 two base station 98 U UK 236 251 UK20 315 unencrypted 198 Uni 47 300 United Kingdom 302 Universal PRI 52 Unlike circuit switched 160 unmaps 199 Unpark 158 308 Unpark Call 158 Unread User 222 unsecured 196 Unshielded Twisted Pair 312 Unstructured Private Circuit 183 Upgrade License 45 278 upgradeable 77 80 82 85 86 87 100 Upgradeable Firmware 77 80 82 85 86 87 Upgrade kit 98 upgrade license 98 Upn 85 125 312 UPS 167 312 UST1PRI 300 USA 302 315 USA Interfaces 315 use depending 52 Use mailing 261 user according type 228 user acquiring call 156 User CD Rom 231 user collecting 195 User Datagram Protocol Simple Traversal 316 user determines 141 user ensuring 125 user executing 156 User Interface 16 104 160 236 user interface offering 160 user making 147 user name 222 310 User Recording 257 user restricting 200 USER RIGHT 293 User Rights 144 293 Using Text To Speech 16 251 UTP 312 Product Description IP Office Release 6 0 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 371 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Index V V 24 196 300 315 V 24 Interface 19 2Kbps 315 V 24 V 28 315 V 24 V 35 X 21 300 V 32 52 195 V 35 183 194 196 300 315 V 90 17 195 300 334 351 V 90 56Kbps 195 V110 31
325. ket transmission IP Office also allows for connecting between the different technologies by translating the signals they use for example an analog phone may wish to connect to a VolP destination This requires both the signaling and voice transmission to be translated IP Office does this easily as it contains technology elements called gateways and gatekeepers that enable translations to happen With a conventional telephone system you plug your analog or digital TDM telephone into an extension socket connected to your PBX or Key System With IP Telephony you connect your digital IP telephone to your IP PBX via the LAN There are two basic types of IP phones e A physical phone which looks very similar to a standard telephone IP Hard Phone e A software application Phone Manager PC Softphone which runs on the user s PC allowing them to use either a headset microphone to make receive calls anywhere they have IP connection IP telephony has the advantage of allowing extensions to be deployed both locally and remotely through the use of IP routing and IP VPN services When making use of IP telephony there are a number of data centric considerations such as which data types have priority on the IP network when there is contention This is set with IP TCP quality of service and should not be ignored In situations where LAN Bandwidth is limited a quality of service capable LAN switch should be used to ensure voice packets are transmitted with t
326. king An DECT R4 telephone can travel from one office to another which is connected over a wide area network WAN link and make and take calls In this scenario the main DECT R4 controller remains at one headquarters location with slave base stations in up to 31 other offices DDI DID Since each wireless handset is an extension on the IP Office system calls may be routed directly using a DDI DID number Transfer Calls may be transferred to DECT extensions by operators or other extension users and DECT extension users may transfer callers to any other extension user Hunt group compatibility Wireless handsets may be programmed as members of groups and answer calls in the same manner as any other extension within that group Group working Wireless handsets may be programmed as members of groups and attract calls in the same manner as any other extension within that group DECT handsets must NOT be configured into collective groups Divert destination Users may initiate any or all diverts from an Avaya desk phone to a wireless handset Twinning Twinning allows calls to a user main extension number to alert at both that extension and a secondary extension Though not restricted to DECT this feature is aimed primarily at users who have both a desk phone and a wireless extension Calls from the secondary twinned extension are presented as if from the users main extension Presentation of call waiting and busy is based on whether either of th
327. l Box Remote Access 261 Maintainers Network Manager 297 make receive headset microphone 160 Malicious Call Identification 176 Manage voicemail 260 Managed Frame Relay Network 183 Managed IP VPN 169 183 Management Tools 17 Manager 5 1 293 Manager application 136 Manager provides 293 manager secretary 141 Managment Information 316 Many Avaya 131 140 148 Many Simultaneous Calls Can 170 MAPI 16 242 265 Mbps 172 183 Mbps LAN 183 MCID 158 176 MCID Activate 158 MCU 162 MDAC 250 Media 17 162 169 172 227 231 246 297 Media Service Provider 231 Medical 7 medical issues 7 Medium Size Companies 7 Meet Me conferencing 276 Meeting 133 Meet Me 45 277 278 Meet Me conferencing 45 Meet Me Conferencing on IP500 278 Meet Me Conferencing Solution 277 Memory 113 118 130 169 300 315 Menu Bar 222 MERLIN MAGIX 58 Message Announcements 261 message archiving 265 message handling individuals 236 Message light 117 message recording 265 Message Storage Capacity 234 Message Waiting 18 85 86 87 113 118 131 175 254 260 Message Waiting Indication 118 131 187 261 348 Message Waiting Indicator 77 80 82 message waiting lamps 131 Message Waiting Light 117 187 Messages Button 80 82 messages consume 265 Messaging Card 17 297 Microsoft application 198 Microsoft Live 219 Mid Span Power 167 Middle East 302 Mid Span 167 Mid Span Power Distribution Units 167 Miercom 7 milli seconds 170 ML PPP 197 316
328. l Forwarding supported on PARTNER Version 1 Remote Call Forwarding FEATURE 11 allows a user to send internal and external calls destined for a particular extension to an external phone number off the system over an analog trunk Remote Call Forwarding will not alert the internal extension but immediately sends the call out to the predefined number 2 Mobile Twinning allows a user to send internal and external calls destined for a particular extension to an external phone The call simultaneously rings at the internal extension and receives the extension s coverage including Voicemail treatment if the call has not been answered This feature is only available on systems that have digital trunks SIP PRI T1 Ring on Transfer 119 This is used to specify what the caller hears while they are being transferred If Ring on Transfer is set to Active callers hear ringing while they are being transferred if it is set to Not Active callers hear beeps or Music on Hold if this is activated and a music source is connected to the system Ringing Line Preference When an extension is on hook and the extension is ringing the user simply goes off hook to answer the call and is automatically connected to the ringing call If more than one call is alerting the system automatically connects the user to the longest ringing call Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 38 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010
329. l details panel on the left shows details of the current call which will include the following information e Calling Name The system directory name associated with the calling number e Calling Number The telephone number of the call originator e Called Name The system user name or hunt group name associated with the called number e Called Number The extension number the incoming call has been routed to by the system e Call Status States the progress of a call The border around the call status panel changes color to indicate the status of the call e Call Duration The length of time that the has been in the state as indicated by the Call Status e Notes This area displays notes or information about the call i e when a call has been returned as there was no answer from the extension it was transferred to If annotation is attached to the call details are shown in the Notes area If a new call arrives the call details panel will display the calls waiting to alert the operator and allow answering of the call based on the Caller ID Product Description IP Office Release 6 0 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 223 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 e Directory Panel A Name Anne Webb gt Number 209 xf Busy Status Idle Do Not Disturb Status Off 4f Login Status Logged In Group Status x Main Out of Group Y Sales In Group CustomerHelp In Group Absent Message BANew Voice M
330. l directory independent from the phone 1400 1600 9600 and T3 only at which they are is logged in e The personal directory is always synchronized between telephone and one X Portal for IP Office Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 150 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Centralized System Directory Feature The IP Office Directory is a list of up to 5000 numbers and associated names stored centrally in the system A directory entry can be used to label an incoming call on a caller display telephone or on a PC application The Centralized System Directory also gives a system wide list of frequently used numbers for speed dialing via one X Portal for IP Office Phone Manager or a feature phone with a suitable display For example Head Office can be displayed when a known Caller ID is received A user can also select Head Office in one X Portal for IP Office or the Directory List in Phone Manager or on the display phone Directory to speed dial this number Description e External directory entries can be obtained from up to three different sources for each IP Office e Locally stored in the IP Office configuration Created and edited using IP Office Manager or by selected 1600 T3 or one X Portal for IP Office users e Temporary entries imported at regular intervals from an LDAP server e Temporary entries imported at regular intervals by HTTP from another IP Office This allows the dir
331. l rights reserved Page 8 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Is IP technology established and reliable Yes With over 150 000 systems deployed worldwide Avaya is 1 in Enterprise and IP Telephony shipments source Dell Oro and Synergy Research Q4 2007 Avaya IP Office has the track record businesses like yours can rely on Aside from receiving the Internet Telephony Excellence Award in 2008 and What to Busy for Business in 2009 customers like you are saving money and boosting productivity Many are managing the system themselves via graphical tools I have old systems but am adding an office Should consider newer technology Not only would this be a way for you to experience the rich functionality of the latest communications applications but we may be able to network with your existing equipment as well as provide a gradual migration plan for your other locations How quickly can I get up and running Just say when an authorized Avaya BusinessPartner can tailor a solution to your needs and your budget By saving you money and helping you grow IP Office repays your investment and lets you reallocate resources to other business priorities Lowering long distance costs Routing phone calls over IP lines Voice over IP is growing in popularity Particularly in the case of international calls VolP generates significant savings If your company is already linking multiple offices using high speed data circuit
332. l ringing or waiting Acquire Call will act like the Call PickUp Extension short code and the user executing Acquire Call will be connected to the oldest ringing waiting call e If the User has a connected call with no call waiting and the Intrude settings of the two Users allow it the call will be connected to the user executing the Acquire Call and the other user will be disconnected e If the User does not have a call the feature will fail Queue Threshold Alert When the number of calls queued against a hunt group exceed a threshold the system can be configured to alert at a selected analog extension port Typically the User to Alert will be a loud ringer or other alerting device The alert does not present a real call Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 156 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Miscellaneous Features Conference Calls Calls can be placed on hold and a conference created using either the phone or desktop applications Additional conference members may be added however a single conference may not have more than 64 members For the IP500 and IP500 V2 the total conferencing capacity is 128 channels This could be alternatively 2 conference of 64 users 3 conferences of 42 users or any other combination maximum 64 participants per conference call Only two calls connecting through analog trunks are permitted in any single conference For more information on manag
333. lephones Section 55 349 telephones utilizing Power 167 Telephony Functions 20 128 Telephony Signals 316 Telephony Tones 316 telesales 236 Test Conditions 261 Text To Speech 16 18 236 246 251 261 265 236 253 254 255 Product Description IP Office Release 6 0 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 370 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Index Text 248 Text to Speech 236 TFTP 100 102 104 171 316 thats 7 that s right 7 There s 7 Third Party Database Access 261 Third Party Fax 245 Third Party Text Speech 18 Third Party Text To Speech 18 Through Network Address Translators 316 TIA EIA 646 B conform 176 til 133 Time Division Multiplexing 44 time during product 18 Time Entries 155 time linking office 194 Time Profile 136 154 155 197 255 257 309 timebands 195 Timed Break Recall 348 Time Division Multiplexed Telephony 160 timeframe 261 timeout 129 130 255 309 TNS 176 To Email 236 242 261 Toggle Calls 129 158 toolkit 231 toolset 16 toolset including 16 Total base stations repeaters 98 Transfer call 222 operator 261 Transmission Control Protocol 316 transmission reception 176 Transmit Power 100mw 102 TransTalk 9040 58 Tray 222 228 Tray working 228 trigger control 157 Trivial File Transfer Protocol 316 Trunk Cards 47 52 303 345 Trunk Interface Cards 300 334 345 Trunk Interfaces 14 17 300 334 345 trunk lines 140 303 trunk providing 52 trunk extension 52 trun
334. lexible chassis which with capacity for up to 16 analog trunks or 16 ISDN BRI trunks 32 channels or 8 digital PRI trunks up to 192 T1 channels or 240 E1 channels using internal daughter cards Up to 12 Expansion Modules may be added to provide a combination of up to 384 analog digital or IP extensions with additional analog trunks through external Analog 16 modules Features include up to 148 optional voice compression channels 2 independently switched LAN ports and built in Embedded Messaging with Essential Edition Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 17 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Telephone Options IP Office supports multiple telephone solutions giving the small and mid size business maximum flexibility to choose according to their current and future needs see Telephones 5 for more details e IP Telephones IP Office s integral H 323 Server supports Avaya 1600 and 5600 Series IP telephones selected Avaya 9600 Series IP telephones Avaya T3 series IP telephones Avaya 3600 Series Wireless VolP telephones and IP Office Video Softphone e Digital Telephones IP500 Digital Station 8 cards and Combination Cards plus IP Office Digital Station 16 or 30 Expansion Modules support the Avaya 1400 and 5400 Series of digital phones and Avaya T3 Series telephones plus selected 2400 and 6400 Series phones e ETR Telephones IP500 V2 ETR 6 cards support the Avaya ETR phones as used on PAR
335. line calls a maximum of two analog line calls are allowed per conference 2 External Participants Each external caller requires a digital trunk VolP channel for example 1 T1 allows 23 24 external parties 1 E1 allows 30 parties and a fully licensed VCM 64 allows 64 parties 3 Use of Conference Resources by Other Features System features such as call intrusion call recording and silent monitoring all use conference resources as does automatic recording if enabled When any of these features are active the number of slots available for conference parties is reduced For example a conference call between 3 parties and being recorded will use 4 conference slots 4 The IP500 Supports 128 Conference Members The total capacity of the 1P500 or IP500 V2 is 128 party conference resources However the restriction of a maximum of 64 parties in any individual conference still applies 5 Meet Me Conferencing on I P500 requires Preferred Edition IP Office 500 and IP500 V2 supports basic or ad hoc conferencing but if Meet Me capabilities are required the Upgrade License to IP Office Preferred Edition should be purchased for direct dial into a conference bridge with PIN code security Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 278 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 IP Office Standard Conferencing Features The IP Office provides the following features and benefits relating to conferencing e No special con
336. ll expected conversations This is not a flexible approach and results in a lot of infrastructure investment that the telephone companies need to recoup via the cost of access charges and calls The Internet has changed this where data services have driven down access charges and allowed voice to travel for free over a multipurpose data network Packet Switched Telephony Unlike circuit switched connections which always require use of dedicated bi directional circuit for the duration of a call VolP technology has enabled telephony and other new and novel features and services to run over fixed and wireless networks including private local area networks These newer network types use packet switched protocols Packet switched VolP puts voice signals into packets Along with the voice signals VoIP packets include both the sender s and receiver s network addresses VoIP packets can traverse any VolP compatible network Along the way they can choose alternate shared paths because the destination address is included in the packet The routing of the packets is not dependent on any particular network route which means the network provides can provide a reliable service at a fraction of the cost of circuit switched providers What Advantage Does IP Office Have IP Office can provide support of PSTN POTs digital time division multiplexed phones AND digital IP phones all on the same system This means you don t have to abandon the past to embr
337. llers hear a busy signal Calls are immediately sent to your voice mailbox Doorphones A doorphone is usually placed near an entrance to screen visitors You can connect up to two doorphones to the system Emergency Phone Number List 406 Create a list of up to 10 telephone numbers that all users can dial regardless of dialing restrictions provided they have access to an outside line Typical list entries include fire police and emergency services numbers police and emergency services numbers Extension Hunt Groups 505 Use this feature to assign any number of extensions to a Hunt Group When extensions are in a Hunt Group an incoming call searches or hunts for the longest idle extension that is available The system supports up to six Hunt Groups Extension Hunt Groups 505 Use this feature to assign any number of extensions to a Hunt Group When extensions are in a Hunt Group an incoming call searches or hunts for the longest idle extension that is available The system supports up to six Hunt Groups Extension Name Display The user name and extension number is displayed on the display telephone External Hotline 311 When a user lifts the handset of an external hotline a predetermined outside number is dialed automatically The external number might be for example a frequently called service bureau The external hotline must be a single line telephone not a system telephone and should not have
338. lsed High Voltage Line Reversal The IP400 Phone module is available in 3 versions giving 8 16 or 30 extensions Telephones can be located up to 1km from the control unit For extensions located out of the building additional line protection will be needed For more information on cabling and out of building guidelines see the IP Office Installation Manual 1 1 19 20 21 22 23 24 POT 25 26 27 28 23 30 as ee S ee DC VP E DTE EXPANSION a 24V DC 5 04 MAX DIGITAL STATION 2 24v DC 1 54 PHONE V2 e P Office Phone Modules provide support for a variety of analog MWI methods These methods are 51V Stepped 81V 101V and Line Reversal The 101V method is only supported when using a Phone V2 expansion module e Each analog port can support a device of maximum 1 REN e On analog ports call information is sent while the phone is ringing and cannot be updated during a call or set on an outbound call the phone may do a local match but this is not controlled by the IP Office The primary purpose of displays is to give information about incoming calls Where the Caller Display standard chosen supports the delivery of text extension name as well as the number both are delivered e An analog extension port can be set for external Paging operation It does not operate like a normal extension and is connected to external equipment through an isolation device The Port will always be busy so it cannot be called directl
339. lysis Traces from different protocols can be color coded to improve the clarity of large log files In addition to monitoring the application captures system alarms and will display an activity log of the last 20 alarms that have occurred 1 SysMonitor v5 2 148321 monitoring 192 168 42 1 00E007020B83 dit View Filters tatus eS A 0xaaal LDAP PPP R2 Routing SNMP System T1 VComp VPN WAN 4156189291 Code 0x10 ATM Cal DTE EConf Frame Relay GOD H 323 Interface ISDN Key Lamp 3537805 Events Packets I Call I Call I Call Detail Records d 0xaaal V Call Delta I Extension Send 4156189291 Code 0x18 M Call Logging V Extension Receive I Extension I Extension TxC 3550305 Basic colors I Extension Cut I Extension RxC E EEM EENE I Line Extension TxP Em fon 8 of MV Map Extension RxP fon amp bt ioe f I MonCM Line Send J MonlVR Line Receive V Targetting I Short Code Msgs J IP Dect I IP Dect Tx Extn 3999203 Custom colors 4036603 l J P Dect Hy Extn BEE EEE g IP Dect Tx Line EEEE GE IP Dect Rx Line T Col ri Define Custom Colors gt gt tace Colour cove 4052205 i Default All Clear All Tab Clear All Tab Set All OK Cancel IP Header info Dst 192 168 42 1 Srce 192 168 42 203 vl 0x45 tos 0x00 len 40 id 0xaaa5 ttl 128 flg 0x02 off 0x0000 peol 6 TCP sum 0x7a0d TCP Header info DstPort SO794 IPO Monitor SrcPort 1039 Seq 1928386035 Ack 4156189367 Code
340. me and password is possible e SIP extensions support auto create in IP Office to make installation fast and efficent Succesfull registration of a endpoint will consume one thrid party license e On one IP address several extension can register with IP Office each consuming a license This enables the connection of SIP terminal adapters with more then one analogue port giving a different extension number to each of the ports Advanced features SIP endpoints support a number of extended features according to the SIP service samples draft also refered to as Sipping 19 This includes e Calling line identification e Hold Consultation Hold e Attended Unattended Transfer e Message Waiting e Do not disturb e Conference Add Some phones support several call appearances making it easy to switch between calls Please not that this does not include bridged appearances or outside line appearances A large number of additional features are supported on IP Office using Featue activation keys These feature include but not limited to e Call forward Unconditional Busy no Answer e Follow me e Park Unpark e Music on Hold e Meet me conferencing e Conference join e Ring back when free Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 165 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 SIP endpoints also support Computer Telephony Integration CTI and therefore applications like One X portal f
341. moves and changes As with all IP Office applications the Manager is multi lingual and coupled with the ability to use the application both locally and remotely it is possible for an administrator to manage any of their IP Offices from any country using their local language preference Access to each IP Office is protected by passwords and definable user rights This allows Manager to operate according to the individual administrator s level of expertise Edit view 25 gt bed 2 IP Offices R BOOTP 3 4 Operator 3 p IPOffice_1 s System 1 4 Line 0 x Control Unit 4 amp Extension 42 User 43 HuntGroup 2 9x Short Code 60 B Service 0 of RAS 1 Incoming Call Route 4 i WanPott 1 Directory 0 7 Time Profile 1 Firewall Profile 1 IP Route 1 Least Cost Routing 0 m Account Code 1 Licence 5 Wa Tunnel 0 Logical LAN 0 Bs User Rights 2 g Auto Attendant 0 H Authorisation Code 0 fx E911 System 1 Tools A Help A 7 201 Extn201 Extension YoicemailOn PhoneManager Type Standard User Extn209 Extn201 209 201 Pro Lite 201 User Voicemail DND ShortCodes Source Numbers Telephony Forwarding Dial In Vo 4 Name Extn201 S Password Confirm Password Extn201 201 Full Name Extension Locale Config lte Record Description A IPOffice_1 System IPOffice_1 T
342. mptly even outside of office hours For example should a patient leave an important message to the main number of the doctor s office the voicemail system can ring the doctor at the office then on no response escalates to the doctor s mobile cell phone his her home phone or the doctor on duty after a programmable timeout This avoids having to rely on an external answering service and allows mobile cell and home phone numbers to remain private The voicemail notification can be sent for e Any new voice messages e Any new priority voice messages Mailbox owners can configure their own options from their handset Telephone User Interface or TUI and through their IP Office Phone Manager e Create own Time Profile defining when notification should take place e g office hours only e Out calling destinations defining where notification should take place and in which priority order Five destinations can be defined by the mailbox owner through the TUI Telephone User Interface The destinations selected in the escalation list are called in sequence The possible destinations are e Desk e Mobile Cell e Home e Delegate e Other Each time an outcall event occurs each number in the escalation list will be called until either the call is answered or the end of the list is reached This process will be repeated on each retry attempt for the number of retries set Out calling preferences are set for global operation via the
343. n IP Office system Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 184 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Small Community Networking When connecting IP Offices together over IP or Packet based networks Small Community Networking enhances feature transparency These networks can support up to a maximum of 1000 users across 32 sites The following additional features are available Busy Lamp Field Camp on Call Back When Free Paging Call Pick up Centralized Personal Directory for 1400 1600 9600 and T3 Telephones as well as one X Portal for I P Office Centralized System Directory for 1400 1600 9600 and T3 Telephones as well as one X Portal for I P Office Centralized Call Log for 1400 1600 9600 and T3 Telephones as well as one X Portal for IP Office Centralized Voice Mail Preferred Edition Support for mailboxes call recording dial by name and auto attendants Remote queuing on remote systems is also supported Internal Directory Absence Text Message Anti Tromboning Distributed Hunt Groups Hunt groups can include users located on other IP Office systems within the network Note that Distributed Hunt Groups are not supported for use with Customer Call Reporter Remote Hot Desking Users can hot desk between IP Office systems within the network The system on which the user configured is termed their home IP Office all other systems are remote IP Offices Note that Remote Hot
344. n IP Office time profile can be used to determine when auto recording is used e Incoming Call Routes Incoming Call Routes can trigger automatic call recording Note It is possible for several recordings to be made of the same call For example if both automatic hunt group recording and automatic user recording are applicable to the same call separate recordings are produced for both the hunt group and the user Recording only continues while the party triggering the recording is part of the call for example e Recording triggered by a user stops when that call is transferred to another user e Recording triggered by a hunt group continues if the call is transferred to another member of the same group e Recordings triggered by an incoming call route last until the call is cleared from the system Call recording uses the conference facility and so is subject to the conference restrictions of the IP Office system For some situations it may be a requirement that call parties are advised that their call is about to be recorded This is done by switching on the Play Advice on Call Recording option via the VoiceMail Pro client The maximum length of any call recording is 60 minutes Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 257 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 I P Office ContactStore The standard call recording facilities provided with IP Office and VoiceMail Pro can be extended further by usi
345. n Modules IP412 can be enhanced to support a mixture of analog digital or IP phones to maximum of 360 phones in any combination If additional analog trunks are required these can be aggregated in groups of 16 on each analog expansion module Data Channels A Data Channel is used for Remote Access RAS Internet Access and Voicemail sessions A data channel is an internal signaling resource used whenever a call is made from the IP network to an exchange line Central Office For example four people surfing the Internet will use a single data channel since they all share the same line to the ISP Two people remotely accessing the Office LAN from home will use two data channels since they have dialed in on separate lines IP extensions do not use data channels Data channels are used for voicemail connections with a maximum of 30 available for VoiceMail Pro on a P412 Modems and Voice Compression modules You can add additional hardware to the IP412 system to add one modem card 12 V 90 modems and 2 Voice Compression Modules VCM Each VCM supports from 4 to 30 simultaneous Voice over IP sessions and is used for either providing networking between sites over a Wide Area Network or supporting IP Telephones and Soft phones Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 335 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 I P406 V2 Control Unit The IP406 V2 control unit is a stackable unit with an optional 19 r
346. n the Voice Compression Module IP Office must be fitted with an optional Voice Compression Module to enable IP telephony Silence Suppression Silence suppression is a technique used to make the best use of available bandwidth such as the connection over which the caller is listening not speaking Silence suppression works by sending descriptions of the background noise rather than the actual noise itself during gaps in conversation thereby reducing the number and frequency of voice packets sent on the network Background noise is very important during a telephone call Without noise the call will feel very unnatural and give a perception of poor quality Compression IP Office supports a wide range of voice compression standards including G 711 G 729a and G 723 1 The method of compression can be either automatically established on a call by call basis or be configured on an individual extension basis Fast Start When fast start is supported by an IP extension this facility reduces the protocol overhead allowing an audio path to be established more quickly Out of Band DTMF When out of Band DTMF is configured on an IP extension the extension will signal to the other end of the connection which digits need to be regenerated by a local DTMF generator on behalf of the sending IP extension This is useful when navigating external voicemail systems and Auto Attendants Direct Media Path Direct Media Path allows the speech path between two
347. nabled providing synchronization with any IMAP e mail client this requires Preferred Edition The license instances are consumed for each user being configured Release 6 onwards e Teleworker License 1 User IPO LIC R6 TELEWORKER 1 229430 e Teleworker License 5 Users IPO LIC R6 TELEWORKER 5 229431 e Teleworker License 20 Users IPO LIC R6 TELEWORKER 20 229432 Power User This User Profile is targeted at key knowledge workers with the need for both Mobile Worker and Teleworker functionality The Power User license enables a user to use one X Portal for IP Office Softphone all Mobility features and Unified Messaging Service UMS The license instances are consumed for each user being configured Release 6 onwards e Power User License 1 User IPO LIC R6 PWR USER 1 229426 e Power User License 5 Users IPO LIC R6 PWR USER 5 229427 e Power User License 20 Users IPO LIC R6 PWR USER 20 229428 Receptionist This User profile is targeted at operators receptionists and provides a visual PC interface for call handling and management for multiple sites Up to 4 of these users are supported on each site The Receptionist license enables a user to use IP Office SoftConsole This is a Windows PC application intended for receptionists and operators Up to 4 SoftConsoles can be licensed on a single IP Office system e Receptionist User License IPO LIC RECEPTIONIST RFA LIC CU 171987 Enables
348. nager licenses remain supported and available The four main user profile licenses Office Worker Tele worker Mobile Worker Power User are now distributed around the SCN so that when a user hot desks from one system to another on the network their profile Office Worker Power User etc moves with them Upgrade License If upgrading to Release 6 from a previous release an Upgrade License must be present This comes in three variants e standard upgrade to 6 0 e upgrade to 6 0 for small sites up to 32 users e multiple upgrades for several future releases up to and including Release 10 For new installations no upgrade license is required on the 1P500 V2 platform Small Community Networking Enhancements Resilient Voicemail amp expansion to 1000 users Enhancements to SIP Trunking Dial from call log using configurable line prefixes Easier setup of incoming SIP calls to Hunt Groups Support for SIP session timers Multiple account credentials per SIP trunk Register SIP Line using domain name The Diversion header can be used to present the originating calling id to twinned devices where supported by the carrier Enhancements to ISDN Trunking The Redirecting Number information element can be used to present the originating calling id to twinned devices where supported by the carrier Calling Name can be presented for outgoing calls where supported by the carrier Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights
349. nal e One variant of the Compact Radio Base Station with internal antennas The compact base station has the same look and feel as the base station with internal antenna e Outdoor housing available for both versions e 8 Simultaneous voice and up to 12 signaling channels for the standard Radio Base Stations e 4 Simultaneous voice and up to 12 signaling channels for the compact Radio Base Stations e Codec G 711 G723 G 729a b for base station IP trunk connection e Power Consumption e Power over Ethernet or local power supply supported e Power over Ethernet IEEE 802 3af class 2 typical 4W maximum 5W consumption e Dimension 200 w x 165 d x 56 h mm including mounting bracket e Weight RBS 450g Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 93 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 DECT Feature Overview Given the degree of integration available to wireless users with DECT there are a variety of means by which calls can be routed to wireless handsets Handover While in motion the handset performs continuous measurements to determine which DECT R4 base station has the strongest signal The one that can be best received is defined as the active Base station To prevent the handset from rapidly switching back and forth between two base stations that are equally well received threshold values are used Handover between base stations occurs seamlessly whether a call is active or not DECT Networ
350. nce rooms The names will appear on the telephone displays of users in the conference room maximum of 10 characters e Keyboard Mapping This tab allows the operator to assign keyboard short cut keys for SoftConsole functions e Keyboard Actions This tab allows the operator to specify the default action when alphabetic or numeric characters are pressed e Alphabetic Keystrokes Begin directory search or Open call annotation window e Numeric Keystrokes Begin directory search or Open pop up dial pad e Appearance This tab allows the operator to change the appearance of SoftConsole fonts skins and the call information window color e SoftConsole This tab allows the operator to save the changes made to the configuration of SoftConsole either automatically or manually to a local configuration file on the PC Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 227 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 SoftConsole Administration SoftConsole has an administration mode that enables the operator to configure the following settings e Control panel views The BLF panel call history panel held calls panel and park slot panel can be hidden or made visible e Change the Administrator password e Edit operator profiles Each operator can have a personalized profile which can be configured by the administrator e Create and modify templates SoftConsole comes with three predefined templates which can be modifie
351. ncy bands in EMEA APAC NAR and CALA with the same hardware and firmware Please check type approval for availability in the different regions The Avaya DECT R4 solution on IP Office supports up to 120 handsets and 32 base stations Each base station can be powered over the LAN using the Power over Ethernet PoE standard Each base station can be also powered by an external power supply There are two versions of the base station IPBS available a standard base station with fixed antennas and an enhanced base station with a variety of external antennas External antenna not available in the US Both base stations can be installed in an outdoor housing to provide an external base station IPBS 3725 IP Office Up to 32 RBS and up to 120 Users possible In all approved regions this system supports the 3720 and 3725 handsets base station F Avaya Inbuilding Wireless Server AIWS Advanced Charger EE Rackmount Charger gra party Messaging Server Product Description IP Office Release 6 0 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 92 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 IP DECT Radio Base Station RBS The DECT R4 Radio Base Stations are used with IP Office only It connects directly to a LAN switch using Ethernet cabling The DECT R4 Radio Base Stations can either be powered by Power over Ethernet or by using external power supplies that are available as accessories Each standard DECT R4 R
352. ne 104 3645 Rugqgedized Wireless WiFi Phone 105 3701 IP DECT Wireless Handset 11 3711 IP DECT Wireless Handset 112 3720 DECT R4 Wireless Handset 108 3725 DECT R4 Wireless Handset 10 3810 Wireless Telephone 113 4610SW IP Telephone 805 4621SW IP Telephone 824 The following phones are fully supported on IP Office R6 but are no longer available for new sales Other digital analog phones Leg 6408D Telephone 6416D Telephone 6424D Telephone XM24 DSS Unit 20DT DECT Telephone with IP DECT only 4406 4412 4424 4450 DSS Unit Other IP phones 5601 IP Telephone 4601 IP Telephone 4602SW IP Telephone 5602SW IP Telephone 4610SW IP Telephone 5620 IP Telephone 4620 21 IP Telephone 4625SW IP Telephone 3616 Executive Wireless WiFi Phone 3620 Healthcare Wireless WiFi Phone e For maximum cabling distances please refer to the IP Office Installation Manual acy Telephone Support The following telephones are not supported by IP Office Release 6 They may function but have not been tested with IP Office Release 6 and any faults reported with IP Office Release 6 will not be fixed e 20DT Analog DECT used with IP Office Analog DECT and Compact DECT e TransTalk 9040 Product Description IP Office Rele ase 6 0 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 125 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Chapter 5 Features Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 127
353. ne cell phone PDA or workstation that interface between the user and the SIP network SIP Servers IP Office has implemented the required functionaliy of the SIP servers mentioned below not only to provide SIP endpoint support but also to allow full interoperability between SIP endpoints other IP telephones based on H 323 Digital and Analog telephones as well as IP Office trunks Analog digital or SIP based SIP servers provide centralized information and enablement services in a SIP ecosystem The core SIP servers and their functions are summarized here IP Office provides the required the features of the following two servers for Voice and FAX communication e Registrar Server When SIP IP phones come online they need to make sure that others are aware that they re available to take and make calls The Registrar authenticates and registers the IP phone often directly related to a specific user when it comes online and then stores information on the phones logical identities e Proxy Server A proxy server takes SIP requests processes them and passes them downstream while sending responses upstream to other SIP servers or devices A proxy server may act as both a server and a client and can modify a SIP request before passing it along A proxy is involved only in the setup and teardown of a communication session After user agents establish a session communications occur directly between the parties Functionality of the following
354. ne extensions Getting started Is your communications network ready for IP Office We ll make sure Avaya has created a whole set of assessment and automated configuration tools to make sure that when your system is installed it s ready to meet your needs starting Day One Keeping ongoing management simple Concerned about needing extra resources to administer a system as powerful as IP Office There s no need for worry IP Office comes with a whole set of graphical tools to keep ongoing management simple Does my current phone system give my business what it needs If it is based on old technology probably not Your competitors will react faster and appear more professional with the latest in communications software IP Office delivers the capabilities that allow you to keep up with or overtake the competition Do I need to understand the technology to implement it No IP Office is designed specifically to give you more functionality without making more demands on your resources Rely on your certified Avaya BusinessPartner for support before during and after your purchase We ll take care of you so you don t have to worry Do I need to spend a lot Not at all You have choices based on your budget needs Easy leasing or financing plans not only make this affordable they help you quickly cut monthly expenses immediately And you only have to buy lease what you need when you need it Product Description 2010 AVAYA Al
355. nefit to a business or user is that only one number is required for either voice or fax calls The VoiceMail Pro can store the default fax location for the automatic routing of fax calls Alternatively with fax tone detection at the voicemail box each voicemail box can have a fax location number If a voicemail box owner has set his or her own fax number then that number is used instead of the default fax location Voicemail box subscribers can set their own fax number through their mailbox menus Most fax solutions can be used in conjunction with IP Office however the following products have been tested and verified to operate in the above scenarios e Equisys Zetafax Zetafax for Networks provides versatile network fax software solutions for small businesses corporate offices and distributed enterprise businesses It enables employees to send and receive faxes at their desktop without the need to print fax communications take them to a fax machine and send them manually Zetafax can be seamlessly integrated into market leading email systems like Exchange allowing users to send and receive faxes directly from their Outlook client In addition Zetafax can be integrated with other existing applications such as accounting or CRM systems for fast automated faxing from the desktop or back office Further product information available from www equisys com e Open Text Fax Server formerly Captaris RightFax RightFax offers a broad scalable
356. ness customers Customer Call Reporter Overview Contact Centers are a requirement at nearly every level of business from very small informal groups of 5 or 10 customer service reps to large formal campaigns that can involve thousands of agents However customers in the small business market are generally very nervous about making such a high profile investment in a contact center solution They require a business intelligence solution that deploys easily can be managed with very little training and can provide statistics on each segment of the business Small businesses also do not have the resources for extra IT staff to administer databases servers etc so they need a solution that can be easily understood by their own employees It should operate as a service to each of the clients IP Office Customer Call Reporter Concept IP Office Customer Call Reporter is Avaya s new server based contact center product designed explicitly for small businesses Drawing upon the latest web and design technologies IP Office Customer Call Reporter introduces significant new capabilities to effectively and efficiently manage a multi site call center environment The product focus is on ease of use and deployment simplicity to ensure improved ongoing productivity and lower support costs In its native web server environment the IP Office Customer Call Reporter can be simply installed onto a single server without the need for any client softwa
357. net thereby ensuring that your network remains beyond the reach of hackers while configurable service quotas can be set against a remote access service to ensure authorized users can gain access Service Quotas place a time limit on outgoing calls to a particular IP Service so limiting costs Each service can be configured with an alternative fall back for example you may wish to connect to your ISP during working hours and at other times take advantage of varying call charges from an alternative ISP You could therefore set up one service to connect during peak times and another to act as fallback during the cheaper period Firewall NAT DNS Server Service Quotas Internet Access Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 194 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Remote Access Features IP Office s integral firewall service quotas and timebands all apply to remote access calls Remote access security can be supplemented by CHAP encrypted passwords to verify the end users or PAP which does not support encryption Timebands can control the hours within which the remote access service is available A trusted location can be set for dial in These are locations that the System will allow either data access e g a user dialing in from home or access to voicemail without a voicemail code for a user collecting their voicemail messages from a mobile The trusted location is also the location th
358. ng IP Office ContactStore IP Office ContactStore stores and catalogs recordings so that they are easily accessible for later retrieval Any recordings that you instruct VoiceMail Pro to send to the Voice Recording Library are placed in a database IP Office ContactStore is provided with the VoiceMail Pro software DVD set and has an inbuilt 45 day trial license A fully featured IP Office ContactStore system can be installed and used for 45 days from the creation of the first recording After this time the system will stop taking recordings until a license is purchased and installed onto the IP Office IP Office ContactStore has a number of components these are e An MSDE database into which details of all recorded calls are inserted e A browser based call search and replay application e A browser based system configuration and status monitoring application e Disk space management Oldest recordings are automatically deleted as needed e Optional archive management Recordings are automatically written to a DVD RW drive To allow you to search for calls easily the details of the recordings are stored within a MSDE database It contains one record for each call recorded and additional records for each party on the call and the owner of the call The information that is held for any recording is e A unique reference for the recording e The start date and time e The duration of the recording e The name and number of the parties on the c
359. ng This feature is local to the telephone and not supported on all types of telephones Message Waiting I ndication Message waiting indication MWI is a method IP Office uses to set a lamp or other indication on compatible telephones when a new message has been left for the user either in a personal voice mailbox or in a group mailbox or call back message When the message has been played or acknowledged the lamp is turned off All Avaya digital and IP phones have in built message waiting lamps one X Portal for IP Office and Phone Manager also provide message waiting indication on screen For analog phones from IP Office 3 1 a variety of analog message waiting indication MWI methods are provided Those methods are 51V Stepped 81V 101V and Line Reversal The MWI method must be selected from the IP Office Manager when configuring a system to match the properties of the analog phones Note that the 101V signaling is only available on IP500 Phone cards and expansion modules plus version 2 P400 Phone 8 16 and 30 expansion modules not on the 1P406 V2 control unit Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 131 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Visual Voice Feature e Provides interface to voicemail through handset display and buttons e g Listen Save Delete Fast Forward Benefit e Quick access to voicemails and commonly used messaging features Description You can access and cont
360. ng to the upgrade e IP Office Manager Release 6 is backwards compatible with systems from release 2 1 onwards to allow a single management application e Importing and Exporting IP Office configuration information in ACSII CSV files Manager will create files for the following data e Configuration csv which is a complete list of items as per Manager 5 1 and earlier e Directory csv containing fields NAME NUMBER e HuntGroup csv containing fields HUNT GROUP NAME HUNT GROUP EXTENSION GROUP HUNT ROTARY IDLE QUEUING VOICEMAIL BROADCAST MESSAGES EMAIL ADDRESS e License csv is import only containing fields LICENCE OPTION LICENCE KEY e ShortCode csv containing fields SHORT CODE TELEPHONE NUMBER FEATURE NAME e User csv containing fields NAME EXTENSION NUMBER USER RIGHT EMAIL ADDRESS e User templates for rapid programming and user rights for setting up user access levels Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 295 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Monitor The IP Office Monitor application is a real time maintenance utility to assist with IP Office trouble shooting As the application connects to the IP Office over an IP connection it can be used from both local LAN and remote locations WAN A simple interface allows an engineer to select which protocols and interfaces are to be monitored and decoded The trace can either be captured directly to screen or as a log file for later ana
361. nnel Monitor Clear Call Clear CW Clear Hunt Group Night Service Clear Hunt Group Out Of Service Clear Quota Conference Add Conference Meet Me CW Dial Dial 3K1 Dial 56K Dial 64K Dial CW Dial Direct Dial Direct Hot Line Dial Emergency Dial Extn Dial Inclusion Dial Paging DialPhysicalExtensionByNu mber DialPhysicalNumberBy D Dial Speech Dial V110 Dial V120 Dial Video Disable ARS Form Disable Internal Forwards Disable Internal Forward Unconditional Disable Internal Forward Busy or No Answer Display Msg Do Not Disturb Exception Add Do Not Disturb Exception Delete Do Not Disturb On Do Not Disturb Off Enable ARS Form Enable Internal Forwards Enable Internal Forward Unconditional Enable Internal Forward Busy or No Answer Extn Login Extn Logout Flash Hook Follow Me Here Follow Me Here Cancel Follow Me To Forward Hunt Group Calls On Forward Hunt Group Calls Off Forward Number Forward On Busy Number Forward On Busy On Forward On Busy Off Forward On No Answer On Forward On No Answer Off Forward Unconditional On Forward Unconditional Off Group Listen Off Group Listen On Headset Toggle Hold Call Hold CW Hold Music Hunt Group Disable Hunt Group Enable Last Number Redial MCID Activate Mobile Twinned Call Pickup Off Hook Station Park Call Private Call Private Call Off Private Call On Priority Call Record Message Relay On Relay Off Relay Pulse Resum
362. numbers each Disallowed Lists allow you to specify telephone numbers that users cannot dial For example you may want to prevent calls to a specific telephone number or to categories of numbers such as international numbers You can create up to eight Disallowed Phone Number Lists of up to 10 telephone numbers each Allowed and Disallowed Phone Numbers can be up to 12 digits long and may include 0 9 and hold a wildcard character displayed as Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 30 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Attendant Positions Extension 10 and Extension 11 serve as system attendant positions TUI System Administration can only be done at these extensions Night Service and Unlock capabilities can only be initialized from Extension 10 When a user dials 0 Extension 10 will ring Auto Dialing Enables you to dial outside numbers extension numbers feature codes or account codes with a single touch by pressing a programmed button 3 types of auto dial are supported e Auto Dial Outside e Auto Dial ICM internal extension e Auto Dial ICM Page voice signaling Automatic Callback When calling an extension that is busy press the Auto Callback softkey and the system will call you when the extension becomes free Automatic Daylight Savings Time 126 This feature automatically updates the system clock for annual Daylight Savings Time and Standard
363. nward Dialing 131 Direct Media 85 163 169 236 Direct Media Path 163 Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum 102 Direct Station Select 55 148 349 Directory 7 15 118 129 149 174 200 222 227 309 Directory Entry 222 Directory Panel 222 Directory csv 293 Disable ARS Form 158 Disable Internal Forward Busy 158 Disable Internal Forward Unconditional 158 Disable Internal Forwards 158 discover NAT 180 Disk Space 258 265 Display Backlight 82 Display Msg 158 Distinctive 131 219 Distinctive Ringing 131 219 distinguish doorphone 121 distribute 154 185 231 245 voicemail 254 Distributed Hunt Groups 154 185 Disturb 133 232 DMS100 176 DMS 100 315 DMS 250 315 DMZ 180 DND 135 146 bypass 135 DNIS 176 258 DNS 196 198 Do Not Disturb 133 135 138 146 148 158 232 309 Product Description IP Office Release 6 0 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 357 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Index Do Not Disturb Exception Add 158 Do Not Disturb Exception Delete 158 Do Not Disturb Off 158 Do Not Disturb On 158 Domain 196 198 265 Domain Name Service 196 198 Door Entry 45 121 137 157 227 334 doorphone distinguish 121 doorphone calls 121 Doorphone Entry 121 Doorphones 121 DS 17 47 55 58 77 80 82 85 86 87 113 312 316 349 DS 16 Module 312 DS 30 Module 312 DS Field 316 DS Phones 77 80 82 DSS 55 85 86 87 88 125 148 256 349 DSS key 256 DSS key incorporates 256 DSS Modules 85 86 87
364. o not Disturb e Retrieving the extension locale language e Set and clear the message waiting lamp e Enable and disable group membership e Generate and detect DTMF digits and tones requires the TAPI WAV driver Support for Developers The Developer Connection Program DevConnect is the Avaya developer partner program and is designed for third party companies who are creating a product for sale and who wish to receive technical support Membership of the program is at the sole discretion of Avaya DeveloperConnect members pay an annual fee for which they receive technical support directly from Avaya In addition Avaya will perform interoperability testing between IP Office and the member s product and may also create opportunities for joint marketing including exhibitions use of Avaya s logo and other benefits More information on the DeveloperConnect program can be found at www devconnectprogram com Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 232 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Chapter 12 Messaging Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 233 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 12 Messaging Messaging enables users to manage all of their messages in particular emails and voicemails in one place Since the main messaging platform is typically email IP Office Preferred Edition enables voicemails to be managed via the email system
365. o 2000 remote mailboxes on each VoiceMail Pro server and will operate with other IP Office systems supporting this feature as well as with Avaya Enterprise solutions IP Office Public or Private Network Intuity Audix eaves Note In this scenario message for Avaya Interchange will ext 3000 be required at the central site VoiceMail Pro Ext 2000 en Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 247 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Auto Attendant VoiceMail Pro provides an easy to use multi level configuration tool the VoiceMail Pro client which allows network managers and system administrators to construct an interactive menu system based upon DTMF telephone key entry This allows an Auto Attendant system to be built and configured to suit business needs be that on its own or as a back up for the regular operator when call volumes are high VoiceMail Pro offers the caller the ability to dial the name of a person via the phone keypad like Text messaging on mobile cell phones In response the Auto Attendant offers the caller a best match name or if there is more than one a selection list is offered and the caller can select which one they want to call As an example VoiceMail Pro can be used to build an Auto Attendant that prompts callers to enter 1 for sales 2 for support 3 for admin or O for the operator allowing them to be transferred to the appropriate department wi
366. o go through one carrier between specific hours and international calls through an alternative carrier Carrier selection using 2 stage call set up via in band DTMF is possible It is possible to assign specific routes on a per user basis e g only allow expensive routes to be used by critical staff Note Existing LCR configurations are automatically converted to ARS when upgrading to 4 0 Maximum Call Length This feature allows the system to control the maximum duration of any call based on the dialed number This could be used for controlling calls to cellular networks or data calls made over the public network to ISPs PIN Restricted Calling See Account Codes 143 Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 144 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Transferable Dial Out Privilege Feature e A privileged user Operator Supervisor can transfer an outside line external dial tone to a user that does not have external privileges Benefits e Provides the company with control over external calls e Provides the ability to provide outside line access for restricted phones e g those in public areas or conference rooms Idle Line Preference Feature e Going off hook will select the first Idle line appearance and the user will be connected to an outside line Benefit e Provides the ability to select a specific external line for companies that prefer to work in key system m
367. o read graphical display with white backlight consistent with the displays of the 1400 family Designed with the reliability you expect from Avaya one X Deskphone Value Edition telephones provide critical features and capabilities not often found in competitively priced models The family of 1400 1600 phones consist of three models designed around different user needs e The 1403 1603 phone is designed for the Walk Up user and basic Everyday user For a Walk Up scenario the 1403 1603 is used common areas in offices stockrooms lobbies or drop in desks Users can be building visitors employees or even customers who need a phone with a simple familiar user interface The 1603 phones comes in two versions The 1603 a basic phone without Ethernet switch for locations where no PC is connected to the phone typically for the walkup user as well as the 1603 SW with a basic Ethernet switch to connect additional components to the phone well suited for the basic Everyday user e The Avaya 1408 1608 IP Telephone is designed for the Everyday user Everyday users typically rely on several forms of communication including voice and email and while they require a quality telephone they rarely handle large amount of calls at the same time Cubicle workers and sales staff are examples of Everyday users for whom the 1408 1608 delivers a productivity enhancing telephone e The Avaya 1416 1616 IP Telephone is designed for the Receptionist Assistant user
368. ode Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 145 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Forwarding This is the ability to forward a user s calls to another extension or external number such as a Mobile Cell Phone Calls can be forwarded in a number of ways and if the call is not answered at the forward destination it will go to IP Office voicemail if enabled for the user and call supervision is available There are three separate forward destinations one for forwarding on busy one for no answer and one for forward unconditional Once the numbers have been entered the user can toggle the forwarding to be active or not as required without having to re enter the numbers If the user is a member of a hunt group some types of hunt group calls can also follow forward unconditional Users can select if forwarding is applied to external calls only or all calls Call forwarding is processed after Do Not Disturb and Follow Me conditions are tested Associated Features Precedence e Do Not Disturb DND e Forward Unconditional e Voice Mail VM e Forward Busy e Follow Me e Forward No Answer e Hunt groups e No Answer Interval Coverage to Operator Feature e An operator or a group of operators can be configured to provide coverage for external calls that would otherwise go to voicemail Benefit e Any unanswered calls will be routed to an operator or a Group of operators For example local governmen
369. odels 1 2 and 4 button e Slim design 16mm thick e Strong aluminium casing e Optional PC configuration e Remotely programmable via DTMF e Connection via analog extension port or trunk port e Relay lock control e Backlit inlay cards e Internal heating system e Day Night service e Combination lock control e For sales enquiries and product information contact Interquartz at support analogphonesavaya com Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 123 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Headsets Avaya offers ergonomically designed communication headsets and amplifiers for the Avaya IP Office telephones This full line of professional and contact center solutions set the standard in sound quality and durability Avaya headsets are designed for maximum all day comfort and are available in styles that suit nearly any wearer and any usage pattern Whether you want the freedom to communicate handsfree while working at your desk or the ability to roam while talking you will find a solution that suits your individual needs Please check www avaya com for a current list of supported headsets Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 124 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Summary All Avaya telephones are designed to ensure that features and functions are easily accessible to the user ensuring that through ease of use the full
370. of the following optional Daughter Cards ATM 4 or PRI T1 When an ATM 4 is added ports 7 8 become Power Failure Transfer ports and ports 9 12 provide 4 additional CO Line Ports e DS 8 Card Max 3 per system The DS 8 Card provides 8 Digital Station ports Ports 1 8 and supports 1 of the following optional Daughter Cards ATM 4 or PRI T1 When an ATM 4 is added ports 9 12 provide 4 additional CO Line Ports e Phone 2 Max 3 per system The Phone 2 module provides 2 additional Analog Station ports and supports 1 of the following optional Daughter Cards ATM 4 or PRI T1 e Phone 8 Max 3 per system The Phone 8 module provides 8 additional Analog Station ports and supports 1 of the following optional Daughter Cards ATM 4 or PRI T1 Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 21 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Expansion Carrier PARTNER Version supports 1 of the following base cards e DS 16 provides additional 16 Digital Stations e Phone 16 provides additional 16 Analog Stations Daughter Cards PARTNER Version supports the following daughter cards which are mounted on any ETR 6 DS 8 Phone 2 or Phone 8 base card e ATM 4 provides 4 analog CO line ports Supports Caller ID e PRI T1 supports full PRI or T1 Limit 1 PRI T1 module per system Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 22 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010
371. office financial or hospitality industries This compact handset offers a high resolution backlight graphic display a new improved user interface and design and a lightweight form factor e Avaya 3645 is a slightly larger version that in addition supports push to talk functionality for broadcast communication between employees Due to its rubberized sized grips and the larger ear cup it is especially well suited in noisy and industrial environments e Access to 2 6 lines or selected features through the line key and the FCN key no individual labels are supported for the administered functions on the function keys status information only for call appearances but not for line appearances Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 100 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Avaya Voice Priority Processors The Avaya Voice Priority Processor AVPP is an Ethernet LAN appliance that works with access points to provide Quality of Service QoS on the wireless LAN All packets to and from the wireless phones pass through the AVPP and are encapsulated for prioritization as they are routed to and from IP Office AVPP is fully compliant with the IEEE 802 11a b g standards AVPP is required for QoS because the current IEEE 802 11a b g wireless LAN standards provide only limited mechanism for differentiating audio packets from data packets It also delivers quality of service by limiting the number of phones that ar
372. oming calls for covered phones can be set to the following values Ring default Abbreviated Ring and No Ring Benefits e The ability for a user to choose how the covered call will alert e To keep the alerting noise low in open plan offices Bridged Appearance Buttons Feature e Allow the user to have an appearance button that matches another user s call appearance button Benefit e Answer and make calls on behalf of the other user e Audible indication of calls presented to the bridged user where programmed e Visual indication of when the other user has calls presented held or connected e Join and exchange calls using the paired call appearance and bridged appearance buttons Description A bridged appearance button matches the activity on one of another user s call appearance button For example when the call appearance shows a ringing call the bridged appearance button will also show the ringing call and can be used to answer that call Similarly if the bridged appearance button is used to make a call the call activity is shown on the matching call appearance button The call appearance button user can join or takeover the call using their call appearance button Bridged appearance buttons allow paired manager secretary style operation between two users and are only supported for users who have call appearance buttons Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 141 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20
373. on the 16 VoIP model Personalized greetings and PIN code access can be enabled for each mailbox by the mailbox users Inactivity timeout and return to operator options ensure efficient message handling Mailbox users can also access their mailboxes when out of office using a simple remote login sequence Up to 40 independent auto attendants can be configured on the platform These may be linked together to form multiple tiers of attendants The choice of which auto attendant is to answer a call can be made on any of the criteria on the Incoming Call Routing form such as called number calling number and time of day Wa Avaya IP Office Manager File Edit View Tools Help E MEA a y Sperm i IPOffice_2 7 Auto Attendant I Out of Hours IP Offices Auto Attendant aay RAS 1 Name Incoming Call Route 2 8 Dut of Hours WeanPort 1 lt Directory 0 ET Time Profile 3 aay Firewall Profile 1 Auto Attendant Actions Out of Hours IP Route 0 Key Action Destination Normal Transfer Main h a Least Cost Routing 0 Normal Transfer 201 Extn201 A Account Code 0 Normal Transfer 201 Extn201 Be Licence 0 Replay Greeting Not Defined Not Defined Sl Tunnel 0 Not Defined Not Defined Logical LAN 0 Q User Rights 8 om Auto Attendant 1 Re Authorization Code 0 Not Defined Not Defined x E911 System 0 Not Defined Not Defined mR oOonnnfkwon o Received BOOTP request for 00016c
374. on the status of the call Keyboard shortcuts are available for Answer Hold Drop and Call functions and can be configured by the user Active calls can be easily parked by clicking on a park slot whilst displaying the active call Four Call Park slots zones which can be shared between users and operators or within a department on the same IP Office system further add to the ease with which the entire call handling process is streamlined with one X Portal for IP Office Such parked calls can be retrieved either through one X Portal for IP Office Phone Manager SoftConsole or a desktop phone The call park slot names can be configured by the user Conferencing Controls one X Portal for IP Office allows the setting up of an ad hoc conference call from calls on hold and or the directory or a meet me conference It is possible to configure the Conference ID of the user for meet me conferences Once the conference is set up the conference originator will have the following functions e mute unmute a party oneself e mute unmute all e drop a party from the conference e hold the conference while others keep talking e record the conference Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 205 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Call Log Gadget Call History The call log displays details of calls you have made received and missed and it will report the last 30 calls Users can use the call log to make a call
375. one cannot guarantee uninterrupted Voice and or Video quality While Softphone runs with high priority on the PC in order not to be impacted by normal applications other programs with similar priority could impact Softphone performance Example applications could be other Multimedia or communication applications like web sharing programs or programs that are essential for PC performance like some Virus scanners or firewall programs Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 218 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Feature Summary Feature Phone PMPro one X Portal Manager Lite for IP Office Web browser based OS independent Windows Linux Mac support Click to dial Citrix terminal server support Inbound outbound call handling Phone call control Configure phone preferences Configure keyboard short cuts CLI ANI Name display Speed dial Busy Lamp Field management Yes 15 icons Yes 100 icons Yes from maximum maximum per Personal amp tab System Directory Speed Dial tabs to group Busy Lamp Field icons Yes 1 tab Yes 10 tabs Yes 5 maximum Personal Directory tabs maximum Transfer call by drag and drop to a speed dial icon See Yes be ee View internal users presence Yes Telephony Yes Telephony Yes Telephony LCS 1 LCS 1 User Status Send Instant Messages IM to internal users Yes requires Yes requires LCS 1 LCS 1 Yes not PC Yes So
376. one is put down before the destination has answered the original caller will be automatically transferred This is called an Unsupervised or Blind Transfer Alternatively a user can wait for the destination to be answered and announce the transfer before hanging up to complete the transfer This is called a Supervised Transfer Unless restricted by the system administrator the IP Office makes no differentiation between internal or external call transfers Distinctive and Personalized Ringing The IP Office uses different ringing sequences to indicate the type of call for example whether internal or external This feature is called distinctive ringing For analog phones the distinctive ringing sequences used are adjustable For digital and IP phones the distinctive ringing sequences are fixed as follows e Internal Call Repeated single ring e External Call Repeated double ring e Ringback Call Single ring followed by two short rings This ring is used for calls returning from park hold or transfer It is also used for call back when free and voicemail ringback calls This feature is supported across the P Office Small Community Network 185 Personalized Ringing In IP Office the term personalized ringing is used to refer to changing the sound or tone of a phone s ring On many Avaya digital phones the ringer sound can be personalized Changing the ringer sound does not alter the ring sequence used for distinctive ringi
377. onel 365 Voice Messaging 40 gt Centralized Telephone Programming from admin phones 425 Line Coverage Extension 374 Visual Messaging 40 gt CO Disconnect Time Programmable 335 Line Ringing Options 374 Voice Mail to e mail Feature description can be found on the following pages TUI Feature Programming Codes if applicable are also provided Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 29 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 911 Emergency Dialing 911 Emergency Dialing can be made from any extension regardless of any restrictions Abbreviated Ringing 305 This feature activates or deactivates Abbreviated Ringing at the system telephone at a specific extension When you are on a call and Abbreviated Ringing is Active any incoming call rings only once The green light next to the line button flashes until the call is answered or the caller hangs up or for a transferred call until the call returns to the transfer return extension This feature prevents incoming calls from distracting you when you are busy on another call To allow calls to ring repeatedly set Abbreviated Ringing to Not Active Absent Text Messaging FEATURE 28 This feature allows you to post a message such as Do Not Disturb or Away from desk on the display of your PARTNER ETR or DS system phone When another extension calls your extension your active Absent Text Message ap
378. onfiguration One of the advantages of a meshed configuration is that it removes the risk of a single point of failure within the network Also the names and numbers groups line services etc on the separate IP Office systems should be unique to reduce potential maintenance confusion Each IP Office system broadcasts UDP messages on Port 50795 These broadcasts typically recur every 30 seconds but BLF updates are potentially more frequent There are no updates if there is no activity and the overall level of traffic is very low typically less than 1 kbps per system From IP Office Release 2 1 35 and higher SCN is supported between IP Office systems with differing software levels but network features will be based on the lowest level of software within the network This option is intended to allow the phased upgrading of sites within a SCN and it is still recommended that all systems within a network are upgraded to the same level where possible If larger networks are required QSIG can be used to link multiple Small Community Networks together Functionality between the communities is governed by the QSIG feature set 1 P500 Voice Networking License On IP500 and IP500 V2 systems Small Community Networking requires one or more additional licenses QSIG H 323 and SCN capabilities are not enabled by default in the IP500 and IP500 V2 An additional license is required to enable this functionality with 4 simultaneous networking channels no chann
379. or Yes also useable as a ringing call alert indicator e Personalized Ring Patterns Yes 8 e Headset Socket Yes e Embedded Applications e Centralized call log and contact application fully transparent between 9600 phones 1408 1416 1608 1616 phones and one X Portal for IP Office e Contacts application up to 100 entries and Call Log Missed Incoming Outgoing up to 30 calls Please note that the Voice dial feature of the 9600 phones on Communication is not available on IP Office e Access to company directory and Visual Voice applications on IP Office e External Applications WML Application Interface e Upgradeable Firmware Yes e Expansion e 2 Adapter interface e USB 1 1 adapter e SBM24 Module interface for up to 3 x SBM 32 button expansion modules Note If more than one button module is used Power Class of phone needs to be switched to Power Class 3 e Color Black e Mounting Desk or wall mountable with optional wall mount adapter e Supports the following languages English French Spanish German Italian Dutch Portuguese and Russian English and 4 of the other languages at once in the phone Note While it may be possible to download other languages onto the phone this will not be applicable to any data sent by IP Office If you switch the language to any not listed above the display will show a mixture of the new language and the user s default language on IP Office Requirements for IP interface
380. or Small business the following features are supported with One X portal and via the TAPI interface e Outgoing call without remote activation of speakerphone headset e Hang up e Hold e Attended Unattended transfer e Conference IP Office based e Voicemail collect e Set forwarding DND IP Office based e Park Ride IP Office based The features work similar like CTI features in combination with an analog telephone e g a outgoing call will first ring the SIP phone and after connect the outgoing call will be placed Avaya Phone Manager Phone Manager Pro and Soft console are currently not supported in combination with SIP endpoints The SIP endpoint support implementation is compliant with the following standards or RFCs RFC 3261 SIP session Initiation Protocol RFC 1889 RTP RFC 1890 RTP Audio RFC 4566 SDP RFC 2833 RTP DTMF RFC 3264 SDP Negotiation RFC 3265 Event Notification RFC 3515 SIP Refer RFC 3842 Message Waiting RFC 3310 Authentication RFC 2976 INFO RFC 3323 Privacy for SIP PAI and draft ietf sip privacy 04 RPID For codecs support please refer to chapter to VolP Standards Supported 17 While great care has been taken to be compliant with SIP standards no guarantee can be given that all devices claiming support of SIP will work flawlessly The SIP standard is constantly evolving with new features and methods introduced Also while being standard compliant not all devices
381. or add the caller to the Personal Directory The call log shows the actual call history independent of whether the user was logged in at the time or not The call log is centralized and also available on the desktop phone Calls are ordered in 4 tabs e All all calls e Incoming e Outgoing e Missed ni Owssed Type Name Time Spare 6 425 16 Jul 11 47 49 Av 8s Chris 400 15 Jul 3 37 24 PM Os Spare 8 425 15 Jul 3 37 24 PM Os Qs Marke 670 15 Jul 3 36 53 PM 20s MarkG B70 14 Jul 3 35 39 PM 6s Spare 8 425 14 Jul 8 34 17 AM Os Mark 431 14 Jul 7 36 42 4M 14s Duration Calls 75 7 7 10 45 1 43 Call Log gt A A a a v Clear Tab 7 Each tab can be ordered by name number time of the call duration number of calls and call type The order can be ascending or descending To make a call from the call log the user simply clicks on the number they wish to call Product Description IP Office Release 6 0 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 206 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Messages Gadget Voicemail Access one X Portal for IP Office will show new saved and old voicemails received and provides access into the user mailbox allowing the user to play rewind fast forward save and delete messages The voicemails can be ordered by state new saved read private urgent caller called party time and length The order can be ascending or descending The user can ea
382. orter project times and supporting dispersed organizations and complex supply chains Furthermore the Return On Investment ROI is very short as Meet Me conferencing is a built in feature of IP Office Preferred Edition The typical ROI of just 4 to 6 months compared to Service Provider conferencing services based upon 2 hourly conferences with 5 participants per week Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 276 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 I P Office Preferred Edition Meet Me Conferencing Solution The conferencing solution built in to IP Office enables multiple callers to talk in an audio conference Callers can be on site personnel as well as external parties whether field based engineers sales staff on the road customers or suppliers Conference calls can be planned in advance or established ad hoc as and when required Purchasing E Manager Please enter London Office _ 4 J your PIN code P VYoiceMail Pro devon Office n t i Supplier N Mobile Worker Sales Director Home Worker IP Office Preferred Edition with VoiceMail Pro complements the built in conference bridge facility on IP Office systems by allowing participants to enter conferences through dedicated numbers adding guidance prompts as well as requesting PIN codes as participants enter the conference for security For example if conference calls are regularly scheduled VoiceMail Pro
383. ost effective Telephones designed especially around the needs of the Small and Mid Size Business customer Keys with clear red and green LEDs make access to lines and feature a breeze These phones are especially well suited for cost sensitive customers as well in scenarios where key system functionality is needed They provide an easy migration pass for users that have been accustomed to e g the 4400 line or the PARTNER line of digital telephones Paperless phones for fast installation and cost efficient changes The new 9600 IP phones as well as the 5600 IP and 5400 Digital telephones are especially welcomed where a low cost of ownership is important All phones are equipped with paperless keys making it easy to change features and button assignments from remote The shift page button allows access to a large number of lines or features that are shown dynamically in the display making access to IP Office functionality easy while providing a clean easy to use user interface Access to phones everywhere in and IP Office Network SCN With support of hotdesking across a large line of telephones IP Office phones are perfect in an environment where people change their workplace regularly With a simple login users can make any telephone digital or IP their personal extension This works not only in a single IP Office but also across a small community network making traveling from one company site to another a breeze Even better on
384. osts by identifying the need to change telecommunications services Print Caller ID information The output is generally sent to a PC running an optional Call Accounting software package System Groups PARTNER Version supports the following types of groups Pickup Groups 4 Groups INTERCOM 6xx When a call rings at an extension assigned to a Pickup Group a user at any other extension in the system can answer the ringing call by dialing the Pickup Group code The Pickup Group feature helps when a user needs to answer calls on lines or pools not assigned to his or her telephone Calling Groups 4 Groups INTERCOM 7x 7x A Calling Group is a group of extensions that can be called at the same time Any user in the system can ring or page all extensions in a Calling Group at the same time or transfer a call to a Calling Group The first extension to pick up the call is connected to the caller A typical use of this feature is to have callers ring into a Calling Group of sales representatives or to create a Page All group Hunt Groups 6 Groups INTERCOM 77G 77G When extensions are in a Hunt Group an incoming call searches or hunts for the first available extension Night Service Group 1 Group 504 When Night Service is activated and a call comes in all extensions assigned to the Night Service Group ring immediately regardless of normal Line Ringing settings System Password 403 Allows you to define a fo
385. ot been tested with IP Office Release 6 0 and any faults reported will not be fixed 2 Windows Small Business Server 2003 is supported for the same applications as Windows 2003 Server 3 Exceptions for VoiceMail Pro support Integrated Messaging Pro IMS does not work on Windows Server 2008 or Windows Vista Web Campaigns does not work on Windows Vista Voicemail web access does not work on Windows XP or Windows Vista Please refer to the Voicemail Installation and Administration manual 4 Microsoft Exchange 2000 is no longer n a n a n a n a n a Yes n a oma No Yes n a n a n a n a n a Yes Yes n a n a n a Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 320 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Chapter 20 Licenses Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 321 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 20 Licenses Many solutions applications and features on IP Office systems are licensed and only operate when a valid license is detected This includes features within IP Office applications running on PCs connected to the IP Office system Licenses are 32 character strings derived from a unique serial number for the IP Office system which will be using the license The unique serial number is taken from the Feature Key device fitted to the IP Office system e 1P500 Smart Card Feature Key For IP500 IP Office control units the serial number is b
386. our business Examples e Having calls automatically routed to a cell phone or other location so important customers can get through to the right person in real time e Being able to operate as a 24 7 business without a 24 7 staff e Using your communications to quickly identify when your top customers call Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 9 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 How IP Office is benefiting businesses today e More room for sales With IP Office a leading provider of commercial food service equipment now handles 50 more calls per day without extra staff and without sacrificing the personal service it knows is the key to sales e At the head of the class By relying on IP Office to connect nearly 50 buildings a public school system saved thousands of dollars on inter office calls and simplified communications e Lowering global costs By using IP Office to hold teleconferences and make phone calls across the IP network a strategic consulting firm is saving up to 30 000 per year IP Office can grow as your business grows to meet your needs Capacities 2 384 extensions up to 192 analog lines 192 240 T1 E1 lines 128 VoIP trunk lines Call handling and messaging Get 24 hour support for callers customers without a 24 hour staff IP Office has a range of messaging auto attendant and Interactive Voice Response IVR capabilities Integrate messaging and advanced call han
387. ower cord 3 wire earthed cold kettle lead e Input 100 240V AC 50 60Hz 81 115VA 1 5A maximum e Output 24V DC 1 875A output power 45W maximum e 1P406 V2 60W Power Supply Unit Supplied with the control or expansion unit 60W PSU with integral lead to the unit Connection to switched mains supply requires separately supplied country specific IEC 60320 C13 power cord 3 wire earthed cold kettle lead e Input 100 240V AC 50 60Hz 81 115VA 2 5A maximum e Output 24V DC 1 5A output power 60W maximum e IP Office 500 80W internal Power Supply Integral to the System Unit Connection to switched mains supply requires separately supplied country specific IEC 60320 C13 power cord 3 wire earthed cold kettle lead e Input 100 240V AC 50 60Hz 81 115VA 2 5A maximum Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 314 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Interfaces DTE Port ISDN Ports Analog Trunk Ports Power Fail Ports ISDN Data Rates Analog Phone Ports LAN WAN Audio External Output Port Embedded Voice Memory 9 way D type D Type female connector V 24 V 28 EU Interfaces BRI RJ 45 sockets ETSI T Bus Interface to CTR3 for Pan European Connection PRI E1 RJ 45 socket ETSI T Bus Interface to CTR4 for Pan European Connection PRI T1 J1 RJ 45 socket FCC Part 68 J ATE connection USA Interfaces PRI T1 Service Ground Start GS Default E amp M
388. owing table shows the device specific data available via DevLink Field Data S Message a Field Data S Message O OIN OU BR WIN Re a HH Oo NININININ POR RP RP Poe RoR BWINIKF O O ODN AD UB WN A call id B call id A state B state A connected A is music B connected B is music A name B name B list possible targets for the call A slot channel B slot channel Called party presentation and type Called party number Calling party presentation and type Calling party number Called sub address Calling sub address Dialled party type Dialled party number Keypad type Keypad number Ring attempt count Cause ss 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 43 Voicemail disallow Sending complete Bc tc bc tm Owner hunt group name Original hunt group name Original user name Target hunt group name Target user name Target RAS name Is internal call Time stamp Connected time Ring time Connected duration Ring duration Locale Park slot number Call waiting Tag Transferring Sv active Sv quota used Sv quota time Account code Unique call identifier a Field Data D Message a Field Data A Message A call id B call id Unique call identifier A call id B call id Unique call identifier Product Description IP Office Release 6 0 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Issue 20 p Page 310 05 August 2010 Chapter 19 Tec
389. own separate volume levels for the handset speaker and ringer Mute button LED Speaker button LED Headset button LED e Avaya Menu button browser options and settings access Telephony application button to return to main telephone screen Call Forward shortcut button e Contacts button Call log button LED quick access voicemail Message button with LED and corner message indicator e Programmable Contextual buttons 10 e 4 contextual softkey buttons Context sensitive allocation of e g Hold Transfer Conference and more e 6 self labeled Appearance Feature buttons with LED for access to 24 administered Appearances Features at the side of the display e Key Labels Icons and text used on fixed feature keys Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 62 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Features Menu Mobile cell phone style menu with access to most often used features like Call Forwarding Park Settings etc On screen status indication for activated features like call forwarding Speakerphone Full duplex speakerphone Hearing Aid Compatible Yes ergonomic hearing aid compatible handset also supporting TTY acoustic coupler Message Waiting I ndicator Yes also useable as a ringing call alert indicator Personalized Ring Patterns Yes 8 Headset Socket Yes Embedded Applications e Centralized call log and contact application fully transparent between 9600 phones
390. p 05 August 2010 1608 I P Telephone 1408 Digital Telephone This telephone is best suited for the Everyday user suet Works on IP IP Office Communication Manager 1608 O Y Y S O 1608 1 _ Re CU 1408 in future The Avaya 1408 1608 supports 8 line appearances feature keys Each of the buttons includes dual LEDs red green providing explicit status for the user For a familiar look and feel the 1408 1608 includes several fixed feature keys for common telephone tasks including conference transfer drop hold and mute In addition the 1408 1608 includes a high quality two way speakerphone and supports a broad portfolio of Avaya wired and wireless headsets through its integrated headset jack The 1408 1608 features a context sensitive user interface along with three softkeys and a four way navigation cluster ideal for scrolling through the local contacts list or call logs The display on the 1408 1608 measures three lines by 24 characters and is backlit for easier viewing in all lighting conditions The newly introduced 1608 1 is functionally equal to the 1608 but features a higher quality graphical display with white backlight identical to the display of the digital 1416 telephone Common Features e Display Housing o Backlit display 3 rows by 24 characters Green backlight for 1608 white backlight for 1608 1 1408 o Dual position flip stand e Fixed Buttons 15 plus Four way navigation
391. p to 100 incoming outgoing and missed calls while the application is active Double clicking any logged call dials that number 206 210 209 209 206 206 206 209 210 a I I e Status Bar Theresa Green Paul Jones Anne Webb Anne Webb Theresa Green Theresa Green Theresa Green Anne Webb Paul Jones Ae ee La i ee ieee A Anne Webb Anne Webb 4nne Webb Anne Webb Anne Webb Anne Webb May Spring Anne Webb Date amp Time 1910 2006 15 12 01 1910 2006 15 12 24 1910 2006 15 12 50 1910 2006 15 14 33 20 40 2006 08 53 50 20 10 2006 08 55 09 20 10 2006 08 56 07 20 10 2006 09 06 28 20 41 0 2006 09 14 26 This Shows current status of the system and is divided into four sections that display current connection status current Profile name information messages and The number of new voice mail messages for the operator Information messages include any alarm conditions that are present within the system Product Description IP Office Release 6 0 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 226 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 SoftConsole Options SoftConsole has many configurable options available to the operator to personalize the look and feel The Operator can tailor the usability specifically to each their personal preferences The following configuration options are available e Incoming Calls This tab enables the operator to manage the local SoftConsole directory by creating editing
392. packetization for packet based multimedia communication systems e H 245 1998 Control protocol for multimedia communication e Session Initiation Protocol e Audio CODECs e G 711 A law U law 64K e G 723 1 MP MLQ 6 3K e G 729 Annex A Annex B Annex AB CS ACELP e Silence Suppression e Fax Relay IP Office to IP Office Fax Transport over IP e T 38 Fax support SIP trunks and SIP endpoints e Local End Echo Cancellation 25ms e Out of band DTMF e Jitter buffer 5 frames of jitter buffer e Internet Standards Specification in addition to TCP UDP IP e RFC 1889 RTP RTCP Real Time and Real Time Control Protocol e RFC 2507 2508 2509 Header Compression e RFC 2474 DiffServ Type of Service field configurable e RFC 1990 PPP Fragmentation e RFC 1490 Encapsulation for Frame Relay e RFC 2686 Multiclass Extensions to Multilink PPP e RFC 3261 Session Initiation Protocol SIP e RFC 3489 STUN Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 172 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Chapter 7 Public and Private Voice Networks roduct Des ROD 2010 AVAYA All rights reserve d Page 173 iP Office Re sled e 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 7 Public and Private Voice Networks With Avaya IP Office you can be networked via T1 PRI and BRI ISDN including VolP on the company WAN Networking maximizes the current potential of your branch maximizes the current potential of your
393. pears on the caller s display The system provides 15 pre defined messages plus 2 that may be customized by each user Pre defined messages include Back Soon Do Not Disturb On Vacation Out to Lunch At Home On Holiday until Meeting until Don t disturb until With visitors until With cust til At lunch until Away from Desk Be Right Back Please Call Account Code Entry FEATURE 12 Account Code Entry ACE is used to enter an account code up to 15 digits for an incoming or outgoing call currently being handled The Account code is printed in the SMDR record for the call for the customer to use for cost tracking purposes There are two different ways the feature can be used e Voluntary Account Code Entry is optional e Forced Account Code Entry is mandatory before dialing on an idle CO facility Forced account codes are validated against a list of pre defined account codes which is created via the Manager application Allowed Lists 407 Disallowed Lists 404 Allowed Lists Use this feature to specify telephone numbers that users can dial regardless of other dialing restrictions as long as they have access to an outside line For example if you restrict an entire category of calls through Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 you can permit calls to a specific number in that category by placing that number on an Allowed Phone Number List You can create up to eight Allowed Phone Number Lists of up to 10 telephone
394. plex 104 00Mbps auto sensing ports Green LED Phone connected Yellow LED Not used Port Status LEDs CF Compact Flash Slot DC Power Input Socket To external power supply unit Green LEDs Yellow LEDs On Connected On 100Mbps i Slot for Embedded Voicemail an rere oe re ee Flashing Activity Off 10Mbps Flashing Activity memory card EXPANSION 1 2 3 a 5 6 2 d WAH Port 37 pin D Type socket X21 Y35 or Y24 DTE Serial Port 9 pin D type socket Expansion Ports 1 6 Audio Input Port 3 5mm Stereo jack socket Trunk Interface Card Slots External Output Socket All trunk card types 3 5mm Stereo jack socket Dual PRI cards in Slot 4 only Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 336 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Expansion Modules Through support of up to six external Expansion Modules P406 can be enhanced to support a mixture of analog digital or IP phones to maximum of 190 phones in any combination If additional analog trunks are required these can be aggregated in groups of 16 on each analog expansion module Data Channels A Data Channel is used for Remote Access RAS Internet Access and Voicemail sessions A data channel is an internal signaling resource used whenever a call is made from the IP network to an exchange line Central Office For example four people surfing the Internet will use a single data channel since the
395. possible It provides a single power fail port either port 7 or port 8 A maximum of two of these cards is allowed in the chassis Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 49 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 1P500 Combination Card with 2 BRI trunks This card works in the IP500 V2 only and provides e 2 BRI trunk ports 4 channels e 2 Analog extension ports for the connection of analog phones e 6 Digital Station DS ports for the connection of Avaya digital phones e 10 VCM channels to support IP telephones or voice networking This card already includes a IP500 trunk daughter card therefore no additional daughter card is possible it provides a single power fail port either port 7 or port 8 A maximum of two of these cards is allowed in the chassis 1P500 VCM Card This card provides voice compression channels for use with VoIP calls SIP trunks and IP based voice networking The module is available in variants supporting 32 or 64 channels The maximum number of voice compression channels supported using P500 VCM base cards Combination Cards and or IP400 VCM cards on IP500 Legacy Card Carriers is 148 Please note the maximum number of channels which may be used on each IP500 VCM card varies according to the codec used as shown in the following table Maximum VCM channels available by codec type VCM 32 O vcem6e4 64 Combination Card Card The card can be fitted wi
396. ppropriate compression algorithm for your available bandwidth Audio Codec RTP Voice Packets LAN Overhead Data Payload per bps LAN Delay Second milli seconds G 723 1 6 3K 24 Bytes 33 33 20 800 225 9 867 54 80 G 729a 20 Bytes 50 29 600 270 13 200 65 40 G 711 64K 160 Bytes 50 85 600 34 69 200 8 20 Acceptable Delay End to end delay should be 150 milliseconds or below How Many Simultaneous Calls Can Get Down My Link The following chart illustrates the theoretical maximum number of simultaneous voice calls that can be delivered over a WAN for a given link speed This does not take into account any bandwidth that may be required for data traffic between sites or the physical limit of VoIP calls for the specific version of IP Office in use The number of simultaneous voice calls can be in excess of the capabilities of the individual platform where the calls transit the switch as data traffic In this situation compression resources are not used but obviously must be catered for in the overall bandwidth provision G 723 1 6 3K G 729a 8K G 711 64K Algorithmic Delay seconds a a 64Kbps Link 0 128Kbps Link s 5 1 256Kbps Link 25 19 3 512Kbps Link 51 38 7 1Mbps Link 103 77 14 2Mbps Link 207 155 29 Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 170 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 What is the Maximum Number of Simultaneous Vol P Calls E
397. product line that integrates with email desktop CRM ERP document management imaging archival call center copier scanner systems as well as host legacy and mainframe applications virtually all business applications Further product information available from www captaris com e Fenestrae Faxination Fenestrae Faxination Server for Microsoft Exchange integrates fax into email technology Create faxes on your desktop and deliver them to your chosen fax machine at the click of a mouse Further product information available from www fenestrae com e GFI GFI FaxMaker GFI FaxMaker for Exchange SMTP allows users to send and receive faxes and SMS text messages directly from their email client It integrates with Active Directory and therefore does not require the administration of a separate fax user database GFI FAXmaker integrates via the SMTP POP3 protocol with Lotus Notes and any SMTP POP3 server Further product information available from www gfi com e Open Text Fax Appliance formerly Castelle FaxPress Faxes routed to a user s mailbox by this fax server will be recognized by VoiceMail Pro as faxes and will be supported by VoiceMail Pro Fax features More information is available from www castelle com Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 245 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Text to Speech Email Reading Microsoft Exchange only In addition to providing a unified mailbox for
398. protocols including 199 Proxy Address Resolution Protocol 199 PSK 104 PSTN 140 169 171 IP Office connects 160 SCN 144 190 PSU 312 PTT 105 Public 7 15 52 115 131 143 144 155 160 162 171 174 176 183 196 199 201 236 254 316 345 Public Network 143 144 162 183 Public Switched 171 network called 160 Public Switched Telephone Network 171 called 160 Public Voice Networking 176 Pulse 137 157 176 348 Pulsed High Voltage 348 Push 121 push to talk 100 Put_EventFilter 308 PVCs 183 197 Q Q 931 172 176 183 184 Q 931 signaling 176 QoS 14 77 80 82 85 86 87 100 169 171 183 298 QoS Options QoS Class Service 171 QSIG 14 140 176 185 187 following 175 limit 45 running 260 terminates 175 QSIG Networking 14 QSIG provides level 175 QSIG signaling 175 Quad Chargers 3641 100 Quality Assurance 137 Queue Announcements 234 236 261 Queue Entry Announcement 261 Queue Manager 16 Queue Mode 227 Queue Panel 222 queue panel displays bar 222 queue position 261 Queue Position Announcement 261 Queue Threshold Alert 156 Queue Update Announcement 261 QUEUING 293 Quick Charger 100 Quotas 194 195 197 310 Quotas place 194 R Radio Frequency 2 4000 102 104 Radio Frequency 2 4000 GHz 104 RAID 265 RAS 169 200 334 Rate Adaptation 316 Rating 24V DC 312 77 80 82 85 86 87 Product Description IP Office Release 6 0 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 367 Issue 20 p 05 Au
399. provides 54 350 Expansion Modules 17 45 54 55 82 88 297 300 312 334 348 349 350 Expansion Units 312 Explicit Call Transfer 176 Explicit IV 316 Exporting 293 Extended Callback Control Protocol 198 Extended CBCP 198 Extended Personal 236 253 261 Extended Personal Greetings 236 253 EXTENSION NUMBER 293 extension VCM 300 External 54 External Bell 315 External Call 131 135 External Control 157 External Control Pot 157 External Expansion Modules 54 300 External Number 146 155 176 235 External O P 45 334 External Participants 278 External Systems Forward Emails 261 Extn Login 158 Extn Logout 158 Extreme Alpine Series 163 Extreme Alpine Series switches 163 Extreme Networks 163 F failover 54 Fall Back 153 194 Fast Forward 132 235 261 Fast Forward Message 261 Fast Start 163 Fax 18 163 172 187 235 245 246 261 347 carrying 171 routing 236 fax calls 163 171 Fax Messages 245 246 Fax Relay 172 Fax Transport 163 Faxination 245 FaxMail Pro 245 FCC 102 104 315 Feature Key 18 45 77 98 300 334 Feature Licensing 18 FEATURE NAME 293 Feature Support 261 Feature Table 117 Fenestrae 245 Fenestrae Faxination Server Microsoft Exchange 245 Field Data 310 File Transfer Protocol including 199 Finland 302 Finnish 111 112 236 firewall 15 44 183 194 195 199 279 Small Office Edition offers 196 firewall VPN 7 firewalled 194 firewalled Layer 194 firewall
400. quired Combination Card The IP500 V2 supports up to two new Combination Cards which combine multiple station and trunk ports with voice over IP resources in a single cost effective card These cards are available in two variants supporting either analog or ISDN BRI trunks For more information see the chapter Features 128 ETR 6 Card The IP500 V2 supports up to three new ETR 6 Cards which support up to 6 PARTNER ETR phones The cards are supported in Essential Edition PARTNER Version mode in North American locales For more information see the IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version 205 chapter Essential Edition PARTNER Version The IP500 V2 supports a new mode of operation which resembles PARTNER ACS in many respects including enhanced key and lamp operation simplified administration and support for ETR telephones This mode is only available in North America and Mexico locales For more information see the IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version 205 chapter New Telephone Support Release 6 adds support for the following new telephone families e 1400 Series Digital Phones 1403 1408 1416 plus the DBM32 button module planned to follow during the first half of 2010 e 1600 International Series IP Phones 1603 1 1603SW I 1608 1 1616 1 plus BM32 button module e 9600 Series IP Phones 9620L 9620C 9630 9630G 9640 9640G 9650 9650C plus SBM24 button module e ETR PARTNER Phones 6D 18D 34D Essential Edi
401. r Proxy Address Resolution Protocol allows IP Office to respond on behalf of the IP address of a device connected to it when receiving an ARP request Auto Connect If a service is idle that is no one is using the Internet Auto Connect allows the IP Office to periodically connect to a service This is ideal for mail polling to retrieve email from an Internet Service Provider An Auto Connect Time Profile controls the time period during which automatic calls are made for example not at weekends or during the middle of the night Firewall IP Office integrated firewall provides packet filtering of the most common IP protocols including File Transfer Protocol FTP and Internet browsing HTTP Each protocol passing through the firewall can be restricted allowed access in four different ways e Drop No sessions via this protocol will be allowed through the wall e In An incoming session can punch a hole in the wall to allow traffic in both directions e Out An outgoing session can punch a hole in the wall to allow traffic in both directions e Bothway An incoming or outgoing sessions can punch a hole in the wall to allow traffic in both directions In cases where a protocol is not supported by default the firewall can be customized to control packets based on their content IP Office allows the configuration of as many firewalls as needed through IP Office Manager This permits different security regulations to be appli
402. rally creates new ways of thinking about the role communications can play in your business See what Avaya can do for you You need a communications system every business does To find one that s right for your business start with Avaya With solutions like IP Office we re revolutionizing how small and mid businesses communicate Now is the time to see what an Avaya solution can do for your business Reduce monthly costs Now IP Office will help you lower the cost of communications with capabilities like conferencing making calls over a managed Internet service Voice over IP and the all in one benefits of a converged communications system Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 7 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Leave the office Be accessible With easy flexible options for call message forwarding and one number reachability IP Office keeps everyone in touch Get the freedom to go where you want and never miss important business calls Serve better Sell more IP Office can give you a customer sales and service center designed for your needs and your budget with all the routing and reporting capabilities you need Deliver the personal service that builds sales and loyalty Get connected Talk to your Avaya BusinessPartner Discuss where you want communications to add value to your business Learn about the different service and support options that are available See why thou
403. re deployment Administration and management of the call center is carried out via a thin client through a secure password protected web browser session IP Office Customer Call Reporter Key Features e Real time Call Center activity monitor and historical reporting e Microsoft server based with thin client web browser client connections e Simplified installation and maintenance e Six reporting templates provide drag and drop and user defined filter functionality e Three customizable Supervisor views and summarized Agent views e Report Scheduler e Multi lingual capable e Supports up to 30 Supervisors and 150 Agents IP Office Customer Call Reporter Business Benefits e Lower TCO IP Office Customer Call Reporter provides small businesses with a web based contact center measurement tool producing cradle to grave reporting in an easily understandable format with no client software to load e Standards Based IP Office Customer Call Reporter uses standards based applications such as Microsoft SQL 2005 Express and supports all major web browser software to provide small business installers with greater flexibility in deployment e Ease of Use IP Office Customer Call Reporter s real time charts can be customized by the user in the manner that suits their business best with historical reporting templates that allow the business to filter on the type of date they want to see Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserv
404. remote nodes across a Small Community Network SCN there needs to be a ContactStore license present on each node This is in addition to the Voice Networking license required for SCN IP Office Release 6 0 Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 259 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Centralized Messaging with Avaya Communication Manager Where IP Office is deployed in an Avaya Communication Manager ACM Environment it may be desirable to use one centrally managed voicemail system INTUITY or Modular Messaging to provide voicemail services to IP Office users IP Office can be configured to use an INTUITY or Modular Messaging system over a remote connection such that all messaging calls divert to this location and message waiting indications are provided from the remote location and are displayed correctly on IP Office extensions Connectivity must be either an E1 or T1 circuit or an IP trunk running QSIG services In addition to the IP Office license Key Centralized VM with ACM RFA that enables this service further license keys may be required on the ACM system Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 260 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Voicemail Feature Comparison Platform Support IP Office Preferred Edition IP Office Essential Edition VoiceMail Pro Embedded Voicemail 1P500 V2 Yes Yes 1P500 Yes Yes Capacities Voicemail IP Office Preferred Edit
405. reserved Page 12 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Enhancements to Mobility Mobility Callback can save mobile call charges in some countries by allowing a Mobile Worker user to dial into the IP Office using a dedicated number and be called back and presented with dial tone without the original call being answered Voicemail Enhancements Preferred Edition VoiceMail Pro now supports Resilient and Distributed voicemail scenarios see the Voicemail 234 chapter Essential Edition embedded voicemail now enables extension numbers to be dialled directly from an Auto Attendant without the need to dial a digit first On the new IP500 V2 platform Essential Edition with 2 ports of voicemail is provided as standard while additional ports can be added through licenses up to a maximum of 6 Other Enhancements Persistent SMDR storage the buffer for storing SMDR records now persists after a reboot of the IP Office Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 13 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Voice Communication Solution Features IP Office offers a comprehensive list of features and benefits for the small or mid size business including e Full PBX features Caller ID Call Forwarding Conference Calling Voice Messaging and more e Trunk Interfaces A variety of network trunk interfaces including E1 T1 PRI ISDN SIP analog loop start and analog ground start for comprehensi
406. rged wireless data and voice infrastructure using the 802 11a b and g standard The solution is offered worldwide in selected countries including North America EU countries and selected others For details on this solution please refer to the chapter Telephones of this document Remote Solutions IP Office supports the following VPN remote phone solutions e VPN phone client on 4610SW 4621SW 5610SW 5621SW and 9600 Series IP phones offered worldwide For further details about IP Office On Site Mobility solutions please refer to the chapter Telephones 58 gt of this document Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 268 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Twinning Twinning allows a primary extension and a secondary number internal extension or external number to operate together as a single telephone when a call is presented to the primary phone the secondary will ring If the primary telephone does not ring for example in Do Not Disturb the secondary phone will not ring The following types of calls are eligible for twinning Internal Mobile Twinning external Twinning lt 7 Requires IP500 BRI PRI or SIP trunks and Mobile Call Control to be enabled for that user lt Internal Twinning gamMt This is typically used in scenarios like workshops or warehouses where team supervisors may have a desk with a fixed phone but also have a wireless extension e g DECT When
407. rnal busy tone selecting an option from an interactive menu or pressing a programmed DSS BLF key Callback when free can also be activated from Phone Manager You can also set a callback when free or a callback when next used using a short code without attempting a call Note that a user can only have one automatic callback set at any one time This feature is supported across the IP Office Small Community Network 185 Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 130 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Direct Inward Dialing DI D DDI This relies on the local telephone exchange passing all or part of the dialed number to the IP Office This number can then be used by IP Office call routing software to route the call to an individual phone or groups of phones This service is typically used to reduce the workload on a reception position by giving members of staff or departments individual numbers so they can be called directly For convenience it is common to have the extension or group number the same as the digits supplied from the network but IP Office can convert the number to what ever number is needed by the business within limits In North America T1 circuits are required for DID Transfer Call Transfer allows users to transfer a call in progress to another phone number either internal extension or external public number The caller is placed on hold while the transfer is performed If the ph
408. rnal calls held in a particular queue Up to 8 Call queues can be configured and labeled to reflect incoming calls for specific hunt groups SS a Queue Name CustomerHelp Calls in Queue 2 Recall Calls 0 Status Alarmed Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 224 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 e Held Calls Panel The held call panel enables the operator to manage all calls held at the operator station These calls will appear as a list in panel The operator can perform the following the functions Answer the highlighted held call Answer the longest held call Conference held calls see conferencing section above or Transfer held call Anne Webb Betty Edmund 00 07 e BLF Panel Busy Lamp Field Panel The BLF panel displays icons to indicate the status of selected users Each icon provides information on individual users such as Unread User voicemail messages User status information for example Busy DND and Forwarded is indicated by the various icons used Up to 10 tabs with 100 icons on each tab are supported Exr207 Ext204 4 Ext206 2 Ext209 1 Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 225 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 e Park Slot Panel The park slot panel can contain up to 16 system wide park slots with specific Park ID s for each slot e Call History SoftConsole s call history keeps a combined record of u
409. rol voice messages via the display on Digital or IP phones Visual Voice requires Preferred Edition or Essential Edition and can only be used with large display LCD sets onlyfrom the 1400 1600 2400 5400 4600 5600 9600 and T3 series 1403 1603 1603SW 2402 5402 4601 4602SW 5601 5602SW do not support Visual Voice The fixed message button on certain phones can be configured to invoke visual voice this is the default setting for new configurations This configurable option frees the button programming required currently for Visual Voice Features supported are e access new old saved messages for personal and hunt group mailboxes e next and previous message e fast forward and rewind e pause message e save delete and copy message to other users of the system e change default greeting e change password e change email settings Preferred Edition only Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 132 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Advanced Call Handling Description In larger businesses or businesses with greater reliance on the telephone for internal and external communications some of the more advanced features will improve efficiency and customer service Features like Pick Up which permit users to take a call for a colleague who is temporarily away from their desk of Absence Text which can quickly give information to internal callers about a person s availability Ab
410. rough a menu allowing quick access to seldom used features or even functionality that is not administered to a key Similar to menus found on mobile and smartphones this intuitive self service access frees the user from limits imposed by the number of keys on a telephone and allows access to the vast functionality of IP Office The status indication presents a clear view of important call settings like call forwarding numbers Visual Voice gives menu access to the voicemail messages received by a user for quick retrieval of the most critical information Personal and centralized directory access makes calling a breeze A centralized call log allows one touch call back of missed calls and is fully synchronized with other Avaya IP phones or the one X Portal application Full user mobility between different 9600 phones 1600 phones and 1400 digital phones support hotdesking and user mobility between different phones with access to all the features found on the home phone Customers are becoming more aware of the need to conserve energy due to costs and environmental considerations The 9600 series phones have best in class power performance with the 9620L meeting PoE Class 1 and all other models being Class 2 including the Gigabit versions Over the life of a product the reduced power demand of the 9600 series results in significant cost savings for customers when compared to other competitive offerings that require more power such as
411. rvice for North America When an emergency call is connected IP Office provides calling party information to an external line interface unit The external unit carries out a number to text translation and forwards this to the emergency services bureau so that the originating location of the call is clearly identified Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 157 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 System Short Codes Short Codes are used as commands the IP Office to make changes for the user group or system so need to set up with consideration to security The command may need additional information included with it such as for forward the phone number forwarded to Short codes are a flexible and quick way of setting up certain features IP Office has short codes provided by default on the system or more advanced codes that need programming by the system administrator The full set of short code commands are listed below please see product configuration documents for more detail on how to set them up AOC Previous Call AOC Reset Total AOC Total Auto Attendant Break Out Busy Busy On Held Call Intrude Call List Call Listen Call Pickup Any Call Pickup Extn Call Pickup Line Call Pickup Group Call Pickup Members Call Pickup User Call Queue Call Record Call Steal Call Waiting On Call Waiting Off Call Waiting Suspend Cancel All Forwarding Cancel Ring Back When Free Cha
412. s This document contains proprietary information of Avaya and is not to be disclosed or used except in accordance with applicable agreements 2010 Avaya Inc All rights reserved Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 374 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010
413. s Embedded Applications o Centralized call log and contact application fully transparent between 108 1608 1416 1616 phone 9600 phones and one X Portal for IP Office o Contacts application up to 100 entries and Call Log Missed Incoming Outgoing up to 30 calls o Access to company directory and Visual Voice applications on IP Office Upgradeable Firmware Yes Expansion None Color Black Mounting Desk or wall mountable with optional wall mount adapter Requirements for 1408 Connect to Digital Station DS port Power Supply From phone system Requirements for IP interface 1608 1608 1 Power Supply IEEE 802 3af Power over Ethernet PoE class 2 device or optional wall plug local power supply Codecs audio G 711 G 729a b Dynamic Jitter buffer Echo Cancellation Comfort Noise Automatic Gain Control QoS Options UDP Port Selection DiffServ and 802 1p q VLAN SNMP Support Yes IP Address Assignment Static or dynamic IP address assignment Ethernet Ports Ethernet 10 100 line interface with a secondary 10 100 port for co located laptop or PC with VLAN separation o Well suited for everyday use where typically smaller sized data files transferred web email file attachments or less demanding data transfer application usage thus less sensitive to data transfer completion times o For highly demanding data traffic processing with large amounts of small packets we recommend the 1616 phone
414. s calls by listening in This feature is not available by default it must be specifically enabled in the system configuration An option exists to have a beep tone indicate when monitoring is in use The user is only able to listen they cannot speak into the conversation being monitored Acquire Call Feature e Takeover a call currently connected at another extension This feature is also known as Call Steal Benefit e Assist a colleague who indicates they want you to take the call Description The Acquire Call function can be setup as a special short code or programmed against a button on an Avaya digital or IP phone with programmable buttons Use of the feature is subject to IP Office intrusion control settings the user acquiring the call must be set to be able to intrude and the user whose call is being acquired must be set to can be intruded Acquire call works in two ways invoked with or without a number Without a value in the number field e This allows a user to reclaim a call that was ringing on their phone but has now gone elsewhere for example to Voicemail or Forward No Answer destination The Intrude settings are not checked and the call can be reclaimed even if it has been answered e Ifthe last call to ring this User is no longer ringing or connected on the system the feature will fail With a number where the number is the telephone number of a user who currently has the call to be acquired e If the user has a cal
415. s Two options are supported for TTS operation Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 323 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 e As part of the Advanced Edition that enables the use of the default Text To Speech TTS speech engine supplied as part of Windows operating system or any other SAPI compliant speech engine This allows the creation of automated call flows that speak results of IVR queries Eight 8 licenses are provided with the Advanced Edition system license e Messaging TTS ScanSoft License IPO LIC AVAYA TTS RFA 1 LIC CU 182299 This license enables the use of the TTS speech engines supplied as part of the IP Office Voicemail Pro software set Multiple licenses can combined for the number of simultaneous uses of TTS required up to the number of voicemail channels licensed e Networked Messaging License IPO LIC NTWKD MSGING RFA LIC DS 182297 Voicemail Pro Networked Messaging VPNM can be used between separate IP Office systems each with their own Voicemail Pro server to exchange messages left for different mailboxes This option is not supported within a Small Community Network SCN but can be used between separate SCN networks IP Office Advanced Edition Release 6 onwards e Advanced Edition IPO LIC R6 ADV EDITION RFA LIC DS 229424 In particular this license enables e IP Office Customer Call Reporting CCR including 1 supervisor e ContactStore Call Recordin
416. s the VoIP capabilities in IP Office make it possible to route voice calls over the existing infrastructure providing another way to lower costs and leverage your investment However you do it the VoIP capabilities of IP Office are a way to put money back in your pocket Eliminating conferencing fees For connecting with partners suppliers and dispersed employees conference calls keep people working together and keep travel costs down Many companies rely on third party teleconferencing services and pay a price for the convenience This is particularly true and irritating if a call that s scheduled doesn t happen you still pay the fee Now there s an alternative that will save you money With Avaya IP Office your organization can have its own private secure conference bridge and entirely eliminate fees to third party providers Supporting multiple offices remote workers When employees can t get to the office because of storms medical issues or other reasons but can still work productively at home your business benefits IP Office Phone Manager lets you turn any PC into a phone making it easy and productive to work anywhere And the ability to network phone systems and share messaging systems between offices reduces up front investment and drives long term productivity And keep in mind IP Office delivers a whole range of capabilities Only you can put a number on the value that many of these capabilities will have for y
417. s 199 200 Firstly TTS 246 Product Description IP Office Release 6 0 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 359 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Index Fixed Feature Buttons 77 80 82 85 86 87 Flash Hook 158 Flash Memory 235 Flow Control 77 80 82 85 86 87 172 Follow Me 138 146 147 158 236 249 309 Follow Me Here 158 Force login 309 Forced Account Code set 143 Forward All 148 232 Forward All Calls 232 Forward Busy 146 Forward Emails External Systems 261 Forward Hunt Group 147 158 309 Forward Hunt Group Calls Off 158 Forward Hunt Group Calls On 158 Forward Message 261 Forward No Answer 146 156 Forward Number 158 309 Forward on Busy 141 146 147 158 232 309 Forward On Busy Number Forward On Busy Off 158 Forward On Busy On 158 Forward on No Answer 133 146 158 232 309 Forward On No Answer Off 158 Forward On No Answer On 158 Forward Unconditional 146 147 158 309 Forward Unconditional Off 158 Forward Unconditional On 158 Forward voicemails 187 Forwarding 147 222 Email 261 Multiple 261 Multiple Mailboxes 261 voicemail 236 242 Forwarding except 147 FRAD 183 frame instructs 172 Frame Relay 169 194 195 197 236 316 Encapsulation 172 framed 183 Frame Relay Assembler Disassembler IP Office employs 183 Frame Relay Encapsulation 316 Frame Relay s PVCs 183 framed 169 172 194 195 197 236 316 Frame Relay 183 Front Door 121 158 309 FSK 315 FTP 199 G G 711 77 80 8
418. s agents may need to be able to call colleagues in other offices even when the network is busy while other users can wait for a line to come free Least Cost Routes can automatically translate the internal number to a direct dial call over the public network while other users wait Account Codes Feature e Associate an account code with a call e Validate account codes used against list stored by the IP Office e Include the account code used with call log details Benefit e Through the call records group calls by account code for the purpose of call costing and tracking e Restrict outgoing calls by requiring users to enter a valid account code Description IP Office stores a list of valid account code numbers When making a call or during the call the user can enter the account code they want associated with that call IP Office will check the account code against its list of valid codes and request the user to re enter the code if it is not valid For incoming calls the Caller ID can be used to match it with an account code from the IP Office s list of valid codes and report the account code with the call for billing Individual users can be set to Forced Account Code operation where they are required to enter a valid account code before making external calls By using IP Office Short Codes it is possible to identify certain numbers or call types as requiring a valid account code before permitting the call to proceed for example
419. s the messages in their Voicemail Pro mailbox via either a web browser requires IIS on the Voicemail Pro server using a IMAP compatible email application or using Microsoft Exchange Server 2007 message store The total number of users supported is set by adding combinations of the following licenses Note that a license is consumed for each user configured for UMS access e UMS Web Services 1 User License IPO LIC VMPRO UMS 1 USER 217880 e UMS Web Services 5 User License IPO LIC VMPRO UMS 5 USER 217881 e UMS Web Services 20 User License IPO LIC VMPRO UMS 20 USER 217883 e Messaging Recordings Administrators License IPO LIC CONTACTSTORE RFA LIC DS 187166 also included in the Advanced Edition license As standard Preferred Edition supports automatic and or manual call recording to specified mailboxes Also provided as part of Advanced Edition this license allows Preferred Edition to use a 3rd party application to support the storage and administration of call recordings Currently the supported application for this is ContactStore for IP Office When used manual and or automatic records calls can be routed along with the call details to the ContactStore applications database for storage and retrieval when required e Text to Speech TTS Licenses TTS can be used within customized voicemail call flows to speak information to callers rather than having to record prompts for the call flow or speak results of IVR querie
420. s well as knowledge workers who need quick access to features and call appearances The 9650 IP Telephone features a 3 8 inch 9 65 cm diagonal VGA quality gray scale pixel based display with adjustable angle while the 9650C enhances usability with a color display for even better readability The 9650 supports up to 24 call appearances administered feature keys e The Avaya 9630G 9640 9640G a member of the Avaya one X Deskphone Edition family the 9640 IP Telephone with high resolution color display is specifically designed for the executive telephone user The 9630G IP Telephone features a native Gigabit switch and a 3 8 inch 9 65 cm diagonal monochrome backlit display which has been enhanced with higher resolution 1 4 VGA compared to other available monochrome telephones from Avaya The 9640 IP Telephone features a 3 8 inch 9 65 cm diagonal high resolution color backlit display The 9640G model has the same functionality as the 9640 and adds native support for Gigabit The 9630 9640 supports up to 24 call appearances administered feature keys with six concurrent line appearances visible at any time Common to all phones of the 9600 line on IP Office are two access modes to important IP Office features Features can be assigned to the line feature key of the telephone for easy and quick one touch selection of the functionality giving users of other Avaya telephones a consistent user interface In addition the features can be accessed th
421. sands of growing businesses rely on the innovative Avaya IP Office solution The right choice for you and your business How we communicate is a personal choice it has to match the needs of your business And your needs change depending on whether your employees are working in the office at home or on the road That s why when you choose IP Office you can also choose from a whole range of communication tools and applications designed to boost productivity Choose a basic phone or one with all the bells and whistles Connect our IP phones directly to your office LAN also use them at home and get all the features you have at the office Avaya IP Office Phone Manager software can turn the screen of your PC into a phone And our wireless solutions make it easier to roam the office With all of our IP Office capabilities our goal is to make your communications simple and cost effective Let your Avaya BusinessPartner put together a selection of tools and applications that s right for you Fine tuning performance How many calls are you handling an hour a day What are your peak calling periods How many calls typically turn into sales Avaya IP Office reporting capabilities can help you measure and manage your availability and response to customers Day to day administration Once your system is up and running you will benefit from the graphical administration tools that simplify day to day tasks such as updating directories and moving pho
422. sence Text Feature e Display a text message on the user s phone and IP Office Phone Manager application e Display the same message on other internal phones and IP Office applications when calling the user Benefit e Inform other internal users of your current status and likely availability Description Any user can set Absence Text on their phone even users of standard analog phones but it can only be displayed on selected display phones Phone Manager and SoftConsole that call the user Most supported feature phones give the option of adding some text for example At lunch until 16 00 Absent Status Absent Message On Holiday Until 7 a Absent Text January 2nd l QDo Not Disturb O Forward Unconditional a When a user has an absence text message set call processing is not affected to the user and they still have the choice of using features like Do Not Disturb or Forward on No Answer as appropriate Phones that support the interactive setting of Absence Text will also display it on the users own phone for the benefit of people who come to their desk There are 10 predefined strings for Absence Text e None no text message e Don t disturb until e On vacation until e With visitors until e Will be back e With cust til e At lunch until e Back soon e Meeting until e Back tomorrow e Please call e Custom All may have additional text entered eg message
423. set of DECT R4 handsets on a legacy IP DECT system Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 110 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 3701 I P DECT This telephone is fully supported on the Avaya IP DECT system However it can also be used on the Avaya DECT R4 system in GAP mode with functionality limited to standard calling functionality DECT roaming and handover The built in feature list will not work on DECT R4 e Listen only handsfree speaker e SOS Emergency key for speed dialing an emergency number e Information key that can be used for e Phone number lists and voice mail indication e Information and speaker key flash when active e 50 phone book entries in every handset e 10 possible ring tones with temporary mute e 4 level signal strength display e Speaker and handset volume 3 levels and mute capability e Manual and automatic key lock 1 minute timer e Temporary ring tone muting e Silent charging e 12 menu languages Czech Danish Dutch English Finnish French German Italian Norwegian Portuguese Spanish and Swedish However in the Czech and Norwegian language mode some menu items may appear in the English language e Illuminated 3 line graphic display 96 x 33 pixels variable 3 level contrast e Stand by time Up to 100 hours e Talk time Up to 10 hours e Charge time max 6 hours for empty batteries e Weight 138 grammes including 3 AAA NiMH batteries
424. sh e Norwegian e Dutch e Polish e English UK e Portuguese e English US e Portuguese Brazilian e Finnish e Russian e French Standard e Spanish e German e Spanish Latin e Greek e Swedish e Japanese The Avaya TTS is a per port license The total number of TTS ports on each VoiceMail Pro system is limited to eight On a single or Centralized VoiceMail Pro up to eight concurrent ports can be used for IVR and email reading on a distributed VoiceMail Pro up to eight ports can be used for IVR Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 251 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Visual Basic VB Scripting The VoiceMail Pro call flow programming interface allows an administrator to provide Visual Basic VB scripted logic that can be interpreted by the VoiceMail Pro server This ability enables system administrators to program the voice system via VB Scripts thus providing additional choice and flexibility in providing IVR applications The VB script action contains a VB Scripting parser Syntax checker to ensure the legitimacy of the administrator derived VB Script before its incorporation Each VB script action used within a call flow can contain a maximum of 10 000 characters however a call flow may contain multiple VB script actions within it On a right mouse click in the VB Script window the methods and variables are available will be listed to assist when constructing call flows
425. short codes to be customized to a code more desirable for users By using the Phone Manager Pro application users can label the icons within the application a descriptive name such as Receiving Door or Front Door The flexibility of VoiceMail Pro allows the visitor to enter a predetermined code from the phone granting access This scenario is particularly useful in areas when co workers are working at another site Additionally many doorphones can be connected to station or trunk ports available on IP Office The Avaya IP Office system offers three doorphone solutions to choose from e Avaya Universal Doorphone System North America e Kalika Communications Doorphone Entry System EMEA e Interquartz Doorphone EMEA Avaya Universal Doorphone System e System consists of a controller and a speaker e The speaker is mounted securely on the wall and is connected to the controller which normally resides in the equipment room The controller is connected to a trunk port e Users with the trunk appearance will be notified when a visitor has pressed the Push button located on the weatherproof speaker e Each controller supports two speakers for example Front Door and Back Door e Custom ringing mode distinguishes doorphone calls from external calls e Call waiting tones indicate which doorphone is calling and distinguish a doorphone call from an external line call e Calls can be placed on hold when visitors call from the doorphone e
426. side calls should be answered by the Automated Attendant of the voice messaging system You can set the system for any number of rings 0 6 Assigning more rings gives the operator an opportunity to answer calls before they go to the Automated Attendant VMS Hunt Delay is programmable on a per line basis In addition you can program this feature so that calls can be handled one way during the day and a different way when the system is in Night Service VMS Hunt Schedule Interval 507 Allows you to determine when outside lines are covered by the Automated Attendant Options include all the time only during Day operation Night Service is off or only during Night operation Night Service is on Voice Mailbox Transfer Direct FEATURE 14 Allows you to transfer a call directly into a users voice mailbox without ringing their extension Voice Messaging The PARTNER Version has Embedded Messaging included in the system All extensions are automatically assigned a mailbox Embedded Messaging also provides e A 2 port single level Automated Attendant e Separate Morning Afternoon Evening and Out of Hours menu greetings with time profiles e Dial by Name capability 15 hours of storage e Up to 3 minutes per message e Fast Forward Rewind Replay and Skip capability e Voice Mail to e mail capability Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 40 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 e Remote messag
427. sily call back the caller who left a message from the message gadget Messages 7 unread ex gt H mo pp ba Search State from Time Length Oo A Ernie 450 07 Jul 10 39 AM 1s B go Albert 300 07 Jul 10 37 AM 1s t O gf Alex 456 16 May 8 50 PM 22s B d hAl Alison 289 16 May 6 44 PM Os k E Claire 443 16 May 6 44 PM 5s b Oo gs John 678 16 May 6 30 PM Os t O B Simon 455 16 May 6 30 PM 38s k Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 207 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Directory Gadget Directories one X Portal for IP Office can display several directories of names and associated telephone numbers Aex B Andy Ashley amp Watter Callwork 1860 Brad Call mobile 5554567788 Dave E mail work ash example com Edi Delete Richard B Ein amp Extn1s61 a Emma Graham Enter a name E 1 gt e Personal Directory This is the user s own directory of names and numbers The user can associate multiple numbers e g work home mobile etc with a name and select which number to use when making a call They can also edit and change the directory entries The personal directory can contain up to 100 entries The personal directory is common with the 1400 1600 and 9600 Series phones as well as T3 phones in selected EMEA countries e The one X Portal for IP Office user can add up to 4 additional tabs for personal directory contacts
428. sing multimedia facilities on a PC e Speaking clock e Support for TTY hearing impaired text phone e Centralized VoiceMail within a multi site IP Office environment e Networked Messaging with other Avaya voicemail systems e Capacity of up to 40 ports for a single site system depending on the IP Office control unit e Voicemail channels between VoiceMail Pro and the IP Office can be reserved for business critical functions or left unreserved for any function e Improved voice recording including recording of calls made over IP endpoints including those using direct media automatic call recording triggered by incoming call routes pausing recording when call is parked or placed on hold e User start points in VoiceMail Pro include queued and still queued options Further details on some of the VoiceMail Pro functionality listed above are described later in this section Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 238 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 I P Office Preferred Edition VoiceMail Pro Resilience and Backup Customer service with uninterrupted access to the business is essential for customers who want to place orders for partners who want to negotiate an important contract and for employees who need access to their important messages A failure can be very expensive for a business and there are a number of reasons why a failure can happen power outage lost network connection
429. sing the monitor application or automatically from a Central Office sending a Line Loop Back LLB pattern The DSU function allows the T1 trunk to be shared between data and voice services Here is a summary of the capabilities of the card e Each card is configurable to connect to T1 E1 or E1R2 lines e The card is available in either a single or dual PRI variant The single variant can support up to 24 T1 channels or up to 30 E1 channels The dual variant can support up to 48 T1 channels or 60 E1 channels e On each card 8 channels per interface are enabled by default This means that the single PRI has 8 channels enabled while the dual PRI has 16 channels enabled Further channels may be enabled by the purchase of additional licenses in 2 channel or 8 channel increments e The IP500 PRI daughter card works on any IP500 VCM or extension base card not the Legacy Card Carrier e Up to four Universal PRI cards can be installed in any combination in the IP500 or 1P500 V2 chassis e Diagnostics capabilities e Visual indicators to show service state e Physical test points to monitor traffic e These trunks support the mobility features of Mobile Call Control and one X Mobile client 13 amp Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 53 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 External Expansion Modules Unless otherwise stated each of these modules may be used with the IP500 1P406 V2 and P4
430. sm PPP RFEC3661_ Point to Point Protocol S MP RFC3990 Multi Link Point to Point Protocol O Po RCT Internet Protocol S Trivial File Transfer Protocol NTP RFC868 NTP Network Time Protocol SNMPv1 RFC1157 imple Network Management Protocol STD15 Structure and identification of management information for TCP IP based internets STD16 Concise MIB Definitions STD16 A convention for defining traps for use with SNMP Managment Information base for network management of TCP IP based internets MIB II STD17 Entity MIB Version 2 Routing Information Protocol ENTITY MIB RFC1058 RFC1722 IPSec RIP Version 2 Protocol Applicability Statement STD57 ecurity Architecture for the Internet Protocol IP Authentication Header he Use of HMAC MD5 96 within ESP and AH The Use of HMAC SHA 1 96 within ESP and AH The ESP DES CBC Cipher Algorithm with Explicit IV IP Encapsulation Security Payload ESP The Internet IP Security Domain of Interpolation for ISAKMP Internet Security Association and Key Management Protocol he Internet Key Exchange he NULL Encryption Algorithm and its Use with IPSec Layer Two Tunneling Protocol L2TP L2TP ee Header Compression DiffServ RFC2474 Definition of the Differentiated Services Field DS Field in the IPv4 and IPv6 Headers PPP MP RFC1990 The PPP Multilink Protocol MP Frame Relay Encapsulation RFC1490 Multi protocol Interconnect over Frame Relay RFC1350
431. small and mid size businesses with a full complement of sophisticated applications IP Office provides a number of free applications eg Phone Manager Lite Microsoft TAPI service These applications can be upgraded to provide enhanced functionality through the purchase of license keys e Operator SoftConsole A graphical User Interface GUI for attendants on their PC desktop for call handling Works with a telephone and is an easy way to learn and use sophisticated tools in a comfortable environment e one X Portal for P Office A powerful client server web application that allows the user to control and manage phone calls from a web browser with the standard LDAP protocol for connectivity to external directories e Open CTI interfaces IP Office has a built in TAPI server that integrates easily with popular contact management applications such as Outlook Sophisticated custom applications can be rapidly developed and deployed with our full software development kit e Voicemail Callers can always be answered with a personal voicemail greeting before a message is taken and message notification set Messages can be shared forwarded with colleagues and retrieved by any phone capable of tone dialing When used with one X Portal for IP Office the PC can be used to control message playback e Integrated Voicemail to Email Presentation Voice messages can be copied into email messages and delivered into the email system IP Office uses SMTP or M
432. ss have one location Multiple locations Are you a branch office of a larger organization A home office With IP Office you can tailor the solution to your user needs e g Teleworker Mobile Worker Customer Service Agent etc Whether you have 2 employees 200 or more IP Office is the right choice IP Office Three key things to know Every small and mid size business needs ways to reduce costs and improve the way it operates Like every business you re looking to keep all your customers add new ones and grow at the pace that s right for you Avaya understands this With over one hundred years of experience as a leader in communications we know that the right solution for your business is one that helps you increase profitability improve productivity and gain competitive advantages Serving Customers Effectively with Unified Communications Your office phone cell phone e mail texting instant messaging and more are all essential to the way you work today Unlike other solutions Avaya IP Office uses built in intelligence to simplify your use of wired wireless and Internet communications Instead of keeping your communications separate Avaya IP Office brings them together so you can easily turn a home or mobile phone into an office extension collaborate with dozens of customers or staff members on a conference call and get detailed reports that show how well your company is responding to customers With rich functionality IP Office natu
433. sswords Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol CHAP Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol allows an incoming data call to be authenticated using encrypted passwords The system also provides the option to periodically reaffirm the authenticity of the caller during the data call Data Header Compression IP Header Compression IPHC reduces the header size of the data packet to gain bandwidth efficiency over Wide Area Networks but adds to transmission latency Data Compression IP Office supports both Microsoft Point to Point Compression and Stac Lemple Ziv to provide greater throughput on slow speed wide area network links Bandwidth Allocation Control Protocol BACP Bandwidth Allocation Control Protocol allows the negotiation with the remote end of the data call to request additional calls to be made to improve aggregate data throughput Callback Three types of call back are supported e LCP Link Control Protocol After authentication the incoming call is dropped and an outgoing call is made to a predefined number to re establish the link e Callback CP Microsoft s Callback Control Protocol After authentication from both ends the incoming call is dropped and an outgoing call to a predefined number made to re establish the link e Extended CBCP Extended Callback Control Protocol Similar to Callback CP however the Microsoft application at the remote end will prompt for a telephone number An o
434. st number redial with 5 memories Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 119 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Hotel Phone 9281 AV e Removable inlay card for personalized logo printing e Triple standard message waiting light high voltage reverse polarity and voltage drop e 10 non volatile memories e Ringer indicator light e Ringer volume and pitch adjustment e Last number redial and Recall button e Hearing aid compatible e Wall mountable no additional bracket required e ELR TBR switchable e MF Only Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 120 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Doorphone Entry Systems for IP Office Doorphones offer convenience and security Depending on the needs of the environment door phones may allow internal users to not only speak with someone who is outside but also to easily allow the visitor entrance to the facility or residence Doorphones can be connected to the Avaya IP Office base unit in a variety of ways providing design flexibility based upon needs All of the IP Office base units include an external output port Connections of doorphones to these ports enable the user to gain access to the premises through default system short codes through the optional Phone Manager Pro application and through the optional VoiceMail Pro application The flexibility of the IP Office provides the ability for
435. stems PC Based 1P500 V2 All IP Office systems IP500 Mailboxes IP Office automatically creates mailboxes for each user and hunt group on the system Message Storage Capacity 1MB per minute up to hard Up to 15 hours disk capacity Maximum Simultaneous Calls Up to 40i 1P500 V2 Up to 6 2 IP500 4 Resilience and Backup Yes No Small Community Network SCN Yes No centralized operation Distributed Voicemails in an SCN Yes No Voicemail to email forwarding Yes Yes Unified Messaging UMS Yes No Microsoft Exchange Server 2007 Yes No Integration Centralized operation Yes No Queue Announcements Yes Yes Auto Attendant Yes Yes Call Recording Yes No Intuity Emulation Yes No 1 Up to 40 in a single site environment additional ports can be added in a SCN environment by Distributed VoiceMail Pro 2 The first two ports are included in the basic IP Office system price Additional 4 ports can be purchased and licensed separately Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 234 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 I P Office Essential Edition Embedded Voicemail In environments like retail or home office where space noise or cost considerations rule out using a PC for voicemail Embedded Voicemail will be the favored option for an entry level voicemail service As built in functionality of the IP500 and IP500 V2 hardware it requires no separate server The Embedded Voicemail is enabled by purchas
436. sue 20 p 05 August 2010 13 Mobility Sales or service reps who are always on the road know the challenges missed calls phone tag languishing voice messages delays in decision making and frustrated customers Plus the real possibility of missed transactions and lost revenue Equipped with Avaya IP Office Mobility Solutions mobile associates never need to miss an important customer call or a question from someone in the office And they ll be able to give customers just a single phone number their office number where they can be reached regardless of their location Personal mobile phone numbers are never given out but all calls ring simultaneously on their desk phones and their mobile phones So if they are at their desks or on their mobile phones they ll get the call With IP Office Mobility Solutions they maintain the agility that gives them an edge over larger competitors Decision making will be speeded up quick responds to customers and colleagues are enabled and the solutions will help to ensure that deals close with this real time connection On Site Mobility IP Office offers different solution for users working mainly at the business campus but with the need to be accessible all over the site Avaya On Site Wireless Phone Solutions Avaya IP Office Wireless Solutions include DECT and Wi Fi based wireless IP phones These are solutions employees can use every day to work more effectively and be more responsive to cus
437. t A 2 2 1P400 PRI T1 i 2 2 2 1P400 Dual PRI T1 x 1 Slot A 2 2 Each card requires the use of an IP500 Legacy Card Carrier IP500 does not support E1R2 coax cards 1P400 BRI Card The BRI trunk card provides 4 Basic Rate ISDN T interfaces 8 trunks Details of the supported ISDN supplementary services on BRI interfaces are given in the Public and Private Voice Networks section Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 345 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 1P400 PRI Cards T1 E1 E1R2 Available in single and dual versions the IP400 PRI card provides single and dual primary rate trunk interfaces respectively The PRI is available in T1 E1 and E1R2 MFC variants depending on the territory The dual version is only supported on the IP412 in slot A of the 1P406 V2 and in the IP500 using an IP500 Legacy Card Carrier The Small Office Edition only supports the single T1 PRI card not E1 or E1R2 Details of the supported ISDN supplementary services and protocols for each PRI are given in the Public and Private Voice Networks section T1 trunk cards incorporate an integrated CSU DSU The CSU function allows the trunk to be put in loop back mode for testing purposes This can be set manually using the monitor application or automatically from a Central Office sending a Line Loop Back LLB pattern The DSU function allows the T1 trunk to be shared between data and voice services 1P4
438. t is secure easy to deploy and enhance New with R6 e Access to the IP Office directory has been moved back to the master base station therefore an AIWS server is not required if only IP Office directory access is needed Please note that AIWS is still needed for all other additional functionalities like handset to handset SMS and remote software upgrade e New four channel Compact Base Station for small installs and low users counts Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 91 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 System Overview The complete DECT R4 solution including the new R6 components consists of the following e Two wireless handsets 3720 and 3725 plus a line of accessories e Two 8 channel radio base stations with internal and external antennas with IP interface for usage with IP Office e A 4 channel Compact base station for small installs up to 5 can be used per system e An appliance server for centralized functions like corporate directory and internal phonebook access simple text messaging integration of messaging and other external applications centralized configuration and maintenance etc As the solution contains a handset with liquid protection and BlueTooth headset interface and an appliance server for attaching messaging applications it is especially well suited for verticals like healthcare and retail All handsets and radio base stations support the DECT freque
439. t offices prefer to provide a personal service rather than voicemail Forward on Busy If enabled this forward will be triggered when the user is busy and another call is routed to them but does not include calls for a hunt group that they may be a member of A user is normally considered to be busy when they are on a call but depending on call waiting settings and key and lamp features this may not be the case Forward on No Answer This forward is triggered if a call has been ringing for a user but they haven t answered it within the configured answer time this includes calls that have been indicating call waiting if enabled Forward Unconditional This sends all calls for the user to the forward unconditional number but if the call is not answered within a user s timeout period the call will be sent to IP Office voicemail if enabled Unconditional Forward to Voicemail Feature e The ability to forward calls to Voicemail even when the user s voicemail is not activated Benefit e This feature allows a user who is familiar with the existing IP Office functionality of diverting all calls to a person or a group to follow the same pattern and divert all calls to a voicemail box Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 146 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Forward Hunt Group Calls for a hunt group that the user belongs to can also follow forward unconditional The hunt
440. t one device changes the message status from new to old in all of these interfaces requires the Preferred Edition It contains an IMAP interface to integrate the VoiceMail Pro solution with any IMAP capable email system With the IP Office Preferred Edition in conjunction with an Exchange 2007 Server it is possible to synchronize received voice mails with the email system If the email system also empowers mobile users to receive manage and send messages by their mobile phone Mobile Email all voice mails can be managed as well from the mobile cell phone Together with an appropriate mobility solution like Blackberry the Exchange 2007 integration enables visual voicemail on mobile devices The voice mails provided by the Preferred Edition are specially marked as voicemail so Exchange 2007 handles them different from standard emails so that a mobility solution will be able to show voice mails on the display of the mobile device Users can now browse through the voicemails identify high priority ones by caller information and listen to them first Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 272 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 3rd Party Mobility Solutions for Use with IP Office Although Avaya offers different mobility solutions as mentioned above there are areas for further improvement Together with Avaya DevConnect partners Avaya is anxious to further extend the usability and
441. tand Yes Supplied with phone Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 82 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Special Features for the 5420 and 2420 e Messages Button Dedicated button to collect voicemail Requirements for 5420 and 2420 e Connect to Digital Station DS port e Power Supply From phone system Requirements for 5621 SW 4621 SW 4625 SW e Power Supply IEEE 802 3af Power over Ethernet PoE or individual power supply unit Avaya 1151 series e Codecs G 711 G 729a b e QoS Options UDP Port Selection DiffServ and 802 1p q VLAN e SNMP Support Yes e IP Address Assignment Static or dynamic IP address assignment e Ethernet Ports Two port full duplex 10 100 BaseT Ethernet switch for PC pass through connection e Auto negotiation provided separately for each port e 802 3 Flow Control e Phone has priority over PC port at all times Special Features for 5621 SW and 4621 SW e Display Backlight The display has a backlight for improved contrast Standby mode turns off backlight after time out Special Features for 4625 SW e Color Backlight Display The display is full color and has a backlight for improved contrast Note While still supported the 5620SW and 4620SW phones are no longer available for purchase Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 83 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 EU24 and EU24 BL Exp
442. telephones Gateways and MCU make registration requests to a Gatekeeper which then authenticates accepts or rejects their request to become a member of the zone Once accepted a telephone wishing to make a call sends a call set up message to the Gatekeeper which then determines how to route the call and will then send an alert to the called telephone or if the call is to a non H 323 telephone establish the call via a Gateway within the zone The design of IP Telephony systems has been driven by open standards Digital IP Phones Gateways and Gatekeepers all support the H 323 standard and it is this that allows devices from different manufacturers to work together IP Office has an optional integral Gateway Voice Compression Modules and Gatekeeper functionality required to provide a fully functional IP Telephony solution Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 162 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 I P Telephony Features Gatekeeper The IP Office gatekeeper allows the registration of up to 190 IP extensions on the IP406 360 IP extensions on the 1P412 and 384 IP extensions on the IP500 less the number of analog and digital TDM telephones already configured on the system Gateway The Voice Compression Module provides the H 323 gateway function that allows IP extensions to make calls to other non IP devices The maximum number of simultaneous calls is limited by the number of channels available o
443. th an IP500 daughter trunk card which uses the 4 RJ 45 ports for trunk connections e This card accepts one P500 trunk daughter card of any type For more details about VCM channel requirements please refer to IP Telephony 160 Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 50 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 1P500 4 Port Expansion Card e This card provides connectors for 4 additional expansion modules e The 4 port expansion card must be inserted in slot 4 of the control unit e It is not possible to connect a daughter card to the 4 port expansion card 1P500 Legacy Card Carrier This card allows a variety of P400 trunk and VCM cards to be used with the IP500 control unit The front of the card includes a number of panels that can be snapped off to match the ports available when an P400 trunk card is fitted e This card does not accept any IP500 daughter trunk cards e The IP500 control unit can accept up to 2 IP400 trunk or VCM cards by mounting each card on an IP500 Legacy Card Carrier e This card supports the following 1P400 cards e PRI T1 e f Dual PRI E1R2 RJ45 e VCM8 e Dual PRI T1 e ANLG 4 Uni e VCM 16 e PRI 30 El 1 4 e BRI 8 UNI e VCM 24 e Dual PRI E1 e VCM 4 e VCM 30 e PRI 30 E1R2 RJ45 Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 51 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 1P500 Trunk Cards 1P500 d
444. the Acquire Call feature that only applies to the last call at your extension Hunt Group Enable Disable Feature e The ability for a user to enable or suspend their membership of hunt groups Benefit e A user may need to temporarily join or leave individual hunt groups for example to cover a peak of calls without changing the system programming Description A team supervisor or administrator may not usually take calls for a team but at times of high traffic they may join the group to take calls and when the peak is over leave the group to resume their regular tasks To use this feature the User must be configured as a member of the hunt group by the systems administrator it is not possible for a user to arbitrarily join a hunt group that they have not been identified as a member of Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 134 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Call Waiting A User may not want people calling them to receive busy tone if they are already on another call but have the call receive ring tone and have some kind of alert that there is a call waiting The user can then decide to finish or hold the current call and answer the one that is waiting The amount of information that is available about the call that is waiting depends on the type of phone the user has or if they are using one X Portal for IP Office or Phone Manager As Call waiting tone can be disruptive it is possible
445. the IP406 V2 and 1P412 no longer sold IP Office Release 6 is not supported on the Small Office Edition SOE 1P401 1P403 and 1P406 V1 Note Not all of the features in IP Office Release 5 are supported on all platforms and all phones please see each feature s description in the chapter Features 128 for details IP Office 500 V2 Control Unit The IP500 V2 is a new control unit which is an evolution of the existing IP500 and is fully backwards compatible with it It has 4 card slots into which all existing IP500 cards can be inserted as well as several new cards which are introduced with Release 6 The IP500 V2 requires the presence of a system SD Secure Digital card to operate and to act as its feature key For more information see the chapter IP Office Platform 44 The 1P500 V2 operates in standard IP Office mode as well as a new Avaya IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version SD Card Features As well as acting as the Feature Key for the 1P500 V2 system the system SD card acts as storage for Essential Edition messaging with two ports of voicemail enabled as standard Additional increments of 2 ports can be added through licenses up to a total of 6 ports The system SD card also enables faster implementation times since it can be pre loaded with the correct software configuration and licenses before installation and then sent to site where it can simply be inserted in the system to complete installation with no management software re
446. the PARTNER ACS R8 supports A listing of the built in features is detailed on the following page Feature Overview 911 Emergency Dialling 305 Conference Drop 335 Music On Hold 374 Direct Inward Dialing DID 345 Night Service 155 Allowed Disallowed Listsi3f Direct Line Pickup Features si Application Programming Interface TAPI 425 Display Paging Features 374 Attendant Operator Positions 315 Display Lanquagel 355 Personal Line Termination 38 gt Automatic Callback 314 Distinctive Differentiated Ring 35 Personalized Station Ringing 3 Automatic Daylight Savings Time Do Not Disturb Send All Calls 35 gt POT Support 384 Automatic Extension Privacy 315 Doorphones max of 2 355 Privacy 385 Auto Dialing 315 Emergency Phone Number List 355 Recall 385 Automatic Line Selection 31 External Hotline 3 Redialing Features 38 Automatic VMS _Coverage 315 Extension Hunt Groups 355 Twinning 38 Backup Programming Automatic 3 Fax Machine Extensions s Ring on Transferi Backup Programming Manual 3 Bridging Joining Calls 32 gt Group Calling Ring Pagela gt Speed Dial Featuresls gt a Group Hunting Ring Voice Signal Call Coverage 324 36 Station Lock Unlock 39 Call Forwarding Follow a OOOO O Me Intercom 325 Group Pickup 36 System Password 39 Calltimer s Hot piala VMS Cover Ring Interval 4 Cell Phone Connect see Mobile Twinning 335 Intercom Dial T
447. the telephone ranges These figures assume that standard twisted pair telephone cable or CAT5 network cable is used Unshielded Twisted Pair UTP 50nf Km AWG22 ON eps Cw1308 0 65mm 0 4mm 2400 5400 Series 1200m 3937 1000m 3280 670m 2200 400m 1310 T3 Series Upn 1000m 3280 1000m 3280 400m 1310 Analog Phones 1000m 3280 1000m 3280 400m 1640 800m 2620 Heat Dissipation Note that the above numbers are for reference only For practical purposes for example the calculation of heat dissipation it is recommended to base environmental requirements for example air cooling or UPS ratings on the maximum input rating of the power supplies of the planned IP Office configuration as follows In order to calculate the maximum that is worst case amount of heat that can be generated by an IP Office system it is assumed that all input power is converted to heat whether from the PSU itself the system unit expansion module and or cabling Heat dissipation is normally measured in British Thermal Units BTU s A heat value expressed in Watts can be converted to BTU hr by multiplying by 3 41297 As indicated above you should use the maximum power input of 115 VA of each power supply to calculate this most accurately Using the conversion factor e Heat Dissipation 115 x 3 41297 392 5 BTU hour The metric equivalent to BTU is a Joule where 1 BTU 1 055 Joules This calculates the BTU value per power supply
448. then the option for this to exist on a remote server also applies Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 283 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Historical Reporting The IP Office Customer Call Reporter reporting package has been simplified to enable the user to easily retrieve the reporting information they need from one of seven standard drag and drop report templates The IP Office Customer Call Reporter offers cradle to grave reporting for businesses that want to track specifically how a call was routed through their business The historical reporting is accessed via the Supervisor login and corresponding view as shown below Q Forgot Password i Status 7 Help AVAYA IP Office Customer Call Reporter Username mak i its S Password lecccccee Language English UK l Logon IP Office Customer Call Reporter Report Templates The following main report templates are available with IP Office Customer Call Reporter e Agent Summary Report This report type details the call activity for agents in a queue or for specific agents e Call Details Report The Call Details Report contains details of the total number of calls internal calls optional external outbound calls and the total number of external inbound calls e Call Summary Report The Call Summary Report contains details of the total calls presented and answered the average speed to answer percentage and average speed
449. thernet PoE or individual power supply unit e Codecs G 711 G 729a b e QoS Options UDP Port Selection DiffServ and 802 1p q VLAN e SNMP Support no e IP Address Assignment Static or dynamic IP address assignment e Ethernet Ports Two port full duplex 10 100 BaseT Ethernet switch e Auto negotiation provided separately for each port e 802 3 Flow Control Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 86 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 T3 Comfort This telephone is best suited for the Executive as well as the Receptionist Assistant User It is available in Europe only Common Features e Display 17 lines x 40 characters Integrated keyboard e Fixed Feature Buttons 5 preprogrammed keys with printed text labels and 2 for Audio Volume control e Programmable Feature Buttons 6 preprogrammed keys with indicators and printed text labels 6 preprogrammed keys with printed text labels 10 user programmable keys with associated display labels e Speakerphone Two way handsfree speaker and microphone e Hearing Aid Compatible Through optional handset e Message Waiting and call log Indicator Yes e Personalized Ring Patterns Yes 8 ring patterns e Headset Socket No Optional headset add on available e Embedded Applications Navigation Cursor Control Call signaling via LED and or ringer e Optional Add Ons Up to 3 DSS Modules T3 Headset link for wired headsets e Color Graphite gra
450. thout operator intervention Alternatively a list of personnel and their extension numbers could be listed allowing the caller to directly access the person they want For larger companies it could be department name listed first followed by the list of employee extensions within the department The latter two examples are ideal where company telephone operation has changed from a central operator to direct dialing DDI DID allowing callers to learn the required extension number from the prompting of VoiceMail Pro and then in future dial the extension number or other pre defined variables directly Auto Attendant operation is also ideal where multiple languages are required for example Dial 1 for English 2 for German 3 for French Voicemail Pro Client Intuity local C Specific Start Points Lsers a Groups a Short Codes D A Octault Start Points Lot Voicemail Pro Administrators A Server Queues Ee Modules AutcAttend Data Modified Active Vniremail Sessions N Free Space SARR GR Total Spare 149 048 GR Auto Attendant created using VoiceMail Pro Manager Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 248 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Personal Numbering Contact ability is all important in winning and maintaining business VoiceMail Pro offers users the ability to remotely turn their voicemail on or off set their voicemail email forwarding edit
451. ting Information Protocol RTP 170 180 316 RTP Payload DTMF Digits 316 RTP Relay 180 RTP Voice Data Payload 170 RTP RTCP 172 316 Ruggedized 103 104 105 125 Russia 302 Russian 236 251 RW 258 S Message 310 SO 176 SO Endpoint Call 176 3210 187 Save Message 261 Save Profile 222 200 316 SBC 180 S Bus 347 scalable 17 174 245 Scalable Platform 17 Scan 254 SCN 45 136 154 185 PSTN 144 190 Screen Pop 219 231 Screen Popping 129 SDP 316 Search 227 258 Secondary Dial Tone secretary s 135 Securing L2TP 316 Security Architecture Internet Protocol 316 Self Administration 152 Send Email 261 297 135 158 Product Description IP Office Release 6 0 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 368 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Index Send Instant Messages 219 Separated incoming outgoing 219 Series 18 47 54 55 58 77 80 82 84 117 125 228 232 236 312 349 Server PC 265 serverPC s 312 servers provide 198 Service Packs 228 265 Service Provider conferencing compared 276 Service Provider conferencing services 276 service provider supporting 129 Service Providers 14 44 129 176 180 183 201 219 276 service by service 197 Session Border Controller 180 Session Description Protocol 316 Session Initiation Protocol 160 172 180 Privacy Mechanism 316 Set Absent Text 158 Set Account Code 158 Set Authorization Code 158 Set Hunt Group Night Service 158 Set Hunt Group Out Ser
452. tion PARTNER Version only in North America Licenses for Avaya IP Telephones Release 6 removes the need to purchase VCM channel licenses and instead requires the use of IP Telephone licenses for Avaya IP phones This makes the configuration and purchase of IP telephony simpler and more intuitive See the Chapters IP Telephony 16 and Licenses 323 Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 11 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 New Telephone Features Release 6 adds support for en bloc on hook dialing as well as distinctive ringing for selected telephones New Softphone Release 6 adds the new Avaya IP Office Video Softphone for Teleworkers and Power Users See the Chapter User Call Control Applications 204 New Licenses for Editions and User Profile Release 6 builds on the new application licensing framework introduced in Release 5 by allowing all the functionality of a system edition or user profile to be enabled with a single license key rather than multiple licenses See the Chapter Licenses 322 In addition a new user profile of Office Worker has been introduced giving access to the call and message control functionality of one X Portal for IP Office from within the office The Teleworker profile license now additionally enables access to Unified Messaging and the new IP Office Video Softphone Access to Phone Manager has now been removed from the user profiles although legacy Phone Ma
453. tional ISDN 176 addressing Domain Name Service 196 voicemails 261 admin 248 Administration Administrator 258 293 298 Change 228 ADMM 98 ADO 250 Advanced Small Community 154 185 Advanced Small Community Networking Advice Of Charge 176 219 Alarm Calls 261 Alert 77 80 82 98 113 135 140 142 153 162 222 242 292 User 156 ALG 180 Algorithmic Delay 170 AllCalls 141 All in one 7 17 allocated 196 199 234 279 User Rights 144 Alpha 86 Alphabetic Keystrokes 227 Alphanumeric 85 102 118 261 Alphanumeric Data Collection 261 Alternate Call Routing 14 7 58 148 174 228 245 16 134 152 248 250 252 255 154 185 Alternate Route Selection Analog 16 17 312 Analog 16 Module 312 Analog Extensions 47 121 135 156 348 analog lines 278 303 Analog Phone 17 18 52 143 157 160 312 315 Analog Phone Ports 315 Analog Telephone Features 117 Analog Telephones 117 125 157 162 348 Analog Telephones POTS 116 Analog Trunk 16 300 Analog Trunk 16 EU 300 Analog Trunk 16 NZ 300 Analog Trunk 16 port 176 Analog Trunk Module 45 334 Analog Trunk Module 16 45 334 Analog Trunk Ports 315 Analog Trunk Restriction 278 Analog Trunks 45 52 144 176 190 195 278 300 303 315 334 345 Analog digital 169 ANI 176 219 258 ANLG 47 Announcements ANSI T1 401 conform 176 ANSI T1 607 315 Answer Interval 146 Answered Calls 222 Anti Tromboning 185 AOC 158 176 APAC 90 98 118 125 Appearance 121 13
454. tions Server 2003 PMPro one X Portal for IP Office ea Optional Yes with license Power User and Teleworker licenses only Phone Manager Lite Yes with Power User and Teleworker licenses only Product Description IP Office Release 6 0 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 220 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Chapter 10 Receptionist Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 221 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 10 Receptionist SoftConsole is the PC based Windows Receptionist solution for IP Office It can be purchased with the Receptionist user license SoftConsole has been designed to improve operator service by providing the operator with call information and available call actions to simplify call handling and give the appropriate response to the caller With this easy to use software tool the operator can maintain visibility of the number and type of calls waiting and so ensure that clients are greeted in a professional manner SoftConsole has a similar look and feel to the Phone Manger application and can be minimized in the Windows system tray when not in use but will pop up on the screen when a call is received te AVAYA Title Bar IP Office SoftConsole Anne Webb Hmmm Too hig a aaa an aap aa TUEL Call Information Calling Name May Spring Calling Number 208 Called Name Anne Webb Called Number 209 Call Status Alerting l
455. to turn the feature on or off and even suspend it for a single call useful for conference calls Do Not Disturb DND This is the ability to temporarily stop incoming calls ringing at a user s telephone It will prevent the user from receiving hunt group calls and give direct callers either voicemail if enabled or a busy signal This feature can be enabled disabled from the phone or via one X Portal for IP Office or Phone Manager It is possible to have some calls bypass the DND setting and ring the phone For example a manager might have their secretary s extension number on the DND exceptions list The exceptions list can be easily managed by the one X Portal for IP Office or Phone Manager Both internal and external numbers can be on the exception list Dial Plan IP Office has a very flexible numbering scheme for extensions hunt groups and feature commands While the system has default numbering for feature codes and extensions they can all be re defined Default extensions and hunt groups have 3 digit numbers starting at 200 but these can be changed from 2 to 9 digits through the IP Office Manager There is a default set of feature access short codes but these can be changed to what ever the end user requires within limits This is useful for example if IP Office is replacing a system where DND was accessed by dialling 21 it is possible to change the IP Office Short Code to mimic the code of the replaced system In cert
456. tomers all while increasing revenues and keeping communication costs firmly under control Also Avaya IP Office Mobility Solutions integrate seamlessly with IP Office enhancing each customer s investment IP Office s in building Mobility Solutions improve communication with staff who because of the function they perform are mobile within the workplace Using wireless technology such individuals may be instantly contactable with many obvious benefits e The wireless telephone is carried in the pocket so users are not tied to the desk in order to remain in contact e Users may be contacted instantly to ensure fast accurate decision making and immediate response to problems through planned radio coverage with no blind spots e Once installed the solutions do not incur additional cost like mobile phones would do allowing a tight budget control Wireless Solutions IP Office supports the following wireless solutions e DECT R4 the new DECT based solution for IP Office Running in a separate reserved frequency range this solution provides best in class voice quality and is totally interference free from other radio equipment Details on this solution portfolio can be found in the chapter Telephones of this document e Avaya VoIP Wi Fi Solution leveraging the Wi Fi data network allow a single infrastructure for both voice and data traffic Leveraging an existing voice ready Wi Fi network allows a cost efficient deployment of a conve
457. tributed VoiceMail systems within that SCN The diagram illustrates the second scenario Trunk Lines Trunk Lines Primary armay Backup Backup VoiceMail Pro s IP Office VoiceMail Pro The Primary VoiceMail Pro will establish a link to the Backup VoiceMail Pro and keep the greetings and configuration setting changes synchronized with the Primary VoiceMail Pro Messages and message states are not synchronized between the Primary and the Backup VoiceMail Pro to avoid network overload Ideally the Backup VoiceMail Pro server is a mirror system of the Primary VoiceMail Pro server with all its capabilities like the number of ports licensed features and hardware All required functions have to be licensed through IP Office Preferred Edition and supported by adequate hardware e g to ensure server performance and sufficient IP Office trunk lines The 2 hour run time of a VoiceMail Pro server without licenses does not apply to a backup scenario The Backup VoiceMail Pro server can have limited functionalities e g fewer number of ports if it is acceptable to have limited capabilities for a limited period until the re connection of the main server Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 239 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Distributed Messaging One Centralized VoiceMail Pro server is supported in a SCN of multiple IP Office systems with IP Office VoiceMail Pro release 5 and earlier IP Office R
458. ts for 5602 SW and 4602 SW e Power Supply IEEE 802 3af Power over Ethernet PoE or individual power supply unit Avaya 1151 series e Codecs G 711 G 729a b e QoS Options UDP Port Selection DiffServ and 802 1p q VLAN e SNMP Support Yes e IP Address Assignment Static or dynamic IP address assignment e Ethernet Ports Two port full duplex 10 100 BaseT Ethernet switch for PC pass through connection e Auto negotiation provided separately for each port e 802 3 Flow Control e Phone has priority over PC port at all times Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 79 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 5410 5610 SW 2410 4610 SW Telephones These telephones are best suited for the Receptionist Assistant User Works on IP Office and Communication Manager Note that 4610 while supported on IP Office R6 is not longer available for new sales Common Features Display 5 lines x 29 characters 168 x 80 pixel 4 grayscale Fixed Feature Buttons 10 Conference Headset Transfer Drop Redial Speaker Hold Mute Volume Up Volume Down Programmable Feature Buttons e DS Phones 12 in 2 switchable display pages of 6 matching the 6 physical display buttons e IP Phones 24 in 4 switchable display pages of 6 matching the 6 physical display buttons Key Labels Icons and text used on fixed feature keys Speakerphone Two way handsfree speaker and microphone Hearing
459. tured leased line circuits E1 or T1 or by establishing permanently connected B channels over ISDN circuits between IP Office systems Each channel within the E1 or T1 interface can provide a single voice or 64K 56K data call Where leased line circuits are used within a private networking scenario these E1 or T1 interfaces are typically configured to use QSIG signaling between sites QSIG provides a level of voice feature transparency between PBXs and is the favored signaling standard within multiple vendor and international voice networks The IP Office E1 or T1 module terminates a QSIG connection with a 120 ohm RJ 45 interface IP Office supports the following QSIG services across this network e Simple Telephony Call Basic Call ETS300 171 172 e Circuit Switched Data Call Basic Call ETS300 171 172 e Called Calling Line I D Presentation ETS300 173 e Called Calling Name Presentation SS CNIP SS CONP SS CNIR ETS300 237 238 e Message Waiting SS MWI EN301 260 255 e Transfer SS CT ETS 300 260 261 p QSIG E1 T1 Circuit Switched Voice Networking Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 175 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Public Voice Networking The IP Office platform supports a range of trunks and signaling modes for connection to the public switched telephone network Central Office Some of these lines are only available in certain territories please check wit
460. two SIP servers are generally available by IP Office using existing IP Office functionality Therefore while functionality is provided e g allowing hotdesking also for users using a SIP endpoint in a small community network a consistent methodology between SIP and non SIP endpoints is used to deliver those features e Location Service As users roam the network needs to be continually aware of their locations The location service is a database that keeps track of users and their locations The location service gets its input from the registrar server and provides key information to the proxy and redirect servers IP Office provides hotdesking support delivering a similar functionality but working consistently between SIP and non SIP endpoints e Redirect Server If users are not in their home domains sessions bound for them needs to be redirected to them The redirect server maps a SIP request destined for a user to the device closest to the user In IP Office call forwarding and Follow me functionality is used to provide again consistent functionality between all type of endpoints Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 164 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Supported functionality for SIP endpoints in IP Office Starting with IP Office R5 SIP endpoints are supported on IP Office for Voice Audio and Fax T 38 communication This allows the usage of standard compliant IP telephones using the
461. ty mode A license is required for each server configured to run the IP Office TAPI software in 3rd party mode e WAVE User License IPO LIC TAPI WAV RFA 4 LIC CU 177466 Applications accessing the IP Office TAPI software in 3rd party mode can also be used to stream WAV files to users This license allows streaming to up to 4 users at any time Multiple licenses can be combined for a higher number of user up to the maximum supported by the IP Office control unit IP406 V2 20 1P412 30 IP500 40 Trial Licenses The following trial licenses can be requested Each is valid for 60 days from the date of issue and can only be issued once for a particular IP Office Feature Key serial number Apart from that restriction the trial license works the same as a full license Preferred Edition IPO LIC PREFERRED VM PRO TRIAL RFA LIC DS 189782 Advanced Edition IPO LIC R6 ADV EDITION TRIAL LIC DS 229425 Release 6 onwards Power User Users IPO LIC R6 PWR USER 5 TRIAL LIC CU 229429 Release 6 onwards Customer Service Agent IPO LIC CUSTMR SVC AGT RFA TRIAL 5 227053 Customer Service Supervisor PO LIC R6 CUSTMR SVC SPV 1 TRIAL 229443 Release 6 onwards Teleworker Users IPO LIC R6 TELEWORKER 5 TRIAL CU 229433 Release 6 onwards Mobile Worker Users IPO LIC R6 MOBILE WORKER 5 TRIAL CU 229437 Release 6 onwards Office Worker Users IPO LIC R6 OFF WORKER 5 TRIAL CU 229441 Release 6 onwards
462. uct Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 37 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Personal Line Termination Allows you to assign a line lines to specific extension extensions Personalized Station Ringing 323 Allows you to assign a personalized ring pattern to an extension POTS Plain Old Telephone Set Support POTS single line analog telephones are supported on the system They are connected to an analog station port on the Combo module a port on the Phone 2 Phone 8 or Phone 16 module or to an ETR port Privacy FEATURE 07 Privacy prevents other users from joining on your call Recall FEATURE 03 Use this feature to send a timed switch hook flash over the telephone line to recall a new dial tone or to access certain central office features such as Call Waiting or 3 way calling Redialing Features There are 2 features which offer redial functionality e Last Number Redial FEATURE 05 Last Number Redial redials all digits dialed on the last outside call except account codes e Save Number Redial FEATURE 04 Saves into temporary memory the last outside number up to 28 digits dialed from a system telephone Use this feature to save a number before you hang up on a busy or unanswered call Once saved the number can be redialed at any time The number stays in memory until a different one is saved Remote Call Forwarding Mobile Twinninng There are two types of Remote Cal
463. uct is protected by copyright and other laws respecting proprietary rights Unauthorized reproduction transfer and or use can be a criminal as well as a civil offense under the applicable law Third Party Components Certain software programs or portions thereof included in the Product may contain software distributed under third party agreements Third Party Components which may contain terms that expand or limit rights to use certain portions of the Product Third Party Terms Information identifying Third Party Components and the Third Party Terms that apply to them is available on Avaya s web site at http support avaya com ThirdPartyLicense Avaya Fraud Intervention If you suspect that you are being victimized by toll fraud and you need technical assistance or support call Technical Service Center Toll Fraud Intervention Hotline at 1 800 643 2353 for the United States and Canada Suspected security vulnerabilities with Avaya Products should be reported to Avaya by sending mail to securityalerts avaya com For additional support telephone numbers see the Avaya Support web site http www avaya com support Trademarks Avaya and the Avaya logo are registered trademarks of Avaya Inc in the United States of America and other jurisdictions Unless otherwise provided in this document marks identified by and SM are registered marks trademarks and service marks respectively of Avaya Inc All other tra
464. ugh deskphone buttons Phone Manager or VoiceMail Pro The following types of calls are eligible for twinning Internal External mobile twinning twinning Any internal call on a Call Appearance button Internal or external calls transferred to the extension Direct Dial calls to that extension Hunt group calls vd Calls forwarded from another extension Line Appearance calls configurable x Bridged Appearance calls configurable x Coverage calls configurable x Automatic Intercom calls x Returning transferred held or park calls lt Callback calls from the system Transfer and Park j x Return Paging calls x x Follow Me calls Requires 1P500 1P500 V2 BRI PRI or SIP trunks and Mobile Call Control to be enabled for that user Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 139 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Key and Lamp Operation IP Office offers a full range of Key and Lamp features on Avaya feature phones These features include Line Appearance Call Appearance Bridged Appearance and Call Coverage As these features require a phone with buttons and indicators the features are only supported on certain Avaya digital and IP phones Key and Lamp operation is not supported on analog phones IP Office can have a ring delay set on each appearance button to allow time for the target number to answer before other extensions ring or visual alert only witho
465. ugust 2010 Digital Wireless 3810 Telephone Features 2 line 32 character Handset Liquid Crystal Display LCD 10 hours of talk time and 4 days of standby time 4 displayed operation modes indicating Talk Ringer On Off Battery Low and Message Waiting Single button access to fixed features Hold Transfer Conference and Redial 4 programmable buttons to access features on the PBX 20 Number Memory for quick and easy speed dialing 10 channels supporting up to 10 simultaneous conversations in overlapping radio coverage areas Headset jack Ringer and Handset volume control User selectable ring type Vibrate alert Redial Button Base Unit and Charger Unit The Avaya 3810 Wireless Telephone is a digital telephone designed to work with IP Office from release 2 0 and above by connecting to a Digital Station DS port It offers the mobility inherent in a wireless telephone plus access to a number of features and functionality of the connected communications system A maximum of 5 Avaya 3810 wireless handsets can be connected to the same IP Office in any overlapping radio coverage area This phone is only available in the USA and Canada Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 113 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 The Avaya 3810 is delivered as a single unit containing Base Unit Handset Telephone Cord Base Unit Power Supply Adapter Charging Stand Power Supply Ad
466. uld be accessible at anytime under one number service Kit List e 1 x 1P500 V2 Control Unit e 2 x 1P500 V2 Combination Card with 2 BRI trunks e 1 x Region specific power cord e 1x1P500 V2 feature key System SD Card including Essential Edition 2 Port embedded voice mail e 1 x 1403 for the meeting room e 6 x 1416 for the administrators e 3 x 9650 IP phones for the lawyers e 3 x 1 User Avaya IP Endpoint license e 3 x 1 User Power license for the lawyers e 1x5 User Office Worker license for the administrators e 1 x 1 User Office Worker license for the administrators Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 305 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Chapter 18 TAPI Functions Supported by IP Office roduct Des ROD 2010 AVAYA All rights reserve d Page 307 iP Office Re sled e 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 18 TAPI Functions Supported by IP Office TAPI 2 1 Functions Supported TAPILink Lite provides the following functionality for TAPI 2 1 e lineAddToConference e lineAnswer e lineBlindtransfer e lineCompleteTransfer e lineConfigDialog e lineClose e lineDeallocateCall e lineDial e lineDrop e lineGetAddressCaps e lineGetAddressl D e lineGetAddressStatus e lineGetAppPriority e lineGetCalll nfo e lineGetCallStatus e lineGetDevCaps e lineGetlD e lineHold e linelnitialiseEx e lineMakeCall e lineNegotiateTAPI Version e lineOpen e linePark e l
467. unctionality simultaneously If more than eight users are licensed and configured for TTS the rule first come first serve will apply In an SCN with a Centralized VoiceMail Pro the limit of eight concurrent TTS users for email reading will apply for the whole SCN because only the Centralized VoiceMail Pro delivers TTS Therefore it is necessary to license at least one Power User or Mobile Worker at the central site better will be four to eight users to provide sufficient resources for all users in the SCN Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 246 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Networked Messaging Where organizations are operating a number of voicemail systems across different sites it is important to be able to provide integrated operation between voicemail systems so that messages can be passed between systems and delivered to a user s mailbox seamlessly This is achieved by IP Office VoiceMail Pro being licensed to support Networked Messaging The Networked Messaging solution defines a common set of features to allow inter working between Avaya voicemail systems In INTUITY mode while listening to or having listened to a message the user can select the option to forward the message to another mailbox the mailbox entered can be any mailbox number on the local system or any mailbox on a remote Avaya system The IP Office Networked Messaging facility will allow configuration of up t
468. ur digit password that users can enter from PARTNER telephones to override dialing restrictions if the extension has access to an outside line or turn Night Service on and off Transfer Transfer Return You can transfer calls to an extension or group using the TRANSFER button on a system telephone or the switchhook on a single line telephone Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 39 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Transferred calls return to the originating extension if they are not answered You also can program the number of times a transferred call rings before it returns to an extension Visual Voice Messaging Supported on 14xx digital telephones only Allows the user to manage their voice mail messages via their display Features supported include e access new old saved messages e next and previous message e fast forward and rewind e pause message e save delete and copy message to other users of the system e change default greeting e change password VMS Cover FEATURE 15 Allows you to turn VMS Cover on and off routing unanswered intercom and transferred calls for users extensions to the Call Answer Service of the voice messaging system after the specified number of rings VMS Cover Ring Interval 321 Allows you to define the number of times a call rings before it is sent to a user s voice mailbox VMS Hunt Delay 506 Allows you to determine when out
469. ur way navigation cluster ideal for scrolling through the local contacts list or call logs The display on the 1416 1616 measures four lines by 24 characters and is adjustable for optimum viewing angle Additional caller related information is displayed with active appearances for easier call handling The display is backlit for easier viewing in all lighting conditions The newly introduced 1616 1 is functionally equal to the 1616 but features a higher quality graphical display with white backlight identical to the display of the digital 1416 telephone Common Features e Display Housing o Backlit display 4 rows by 24 characters with adjustable display angle Green backlight for 1616 white backlight for 1616 1 1416 o Dual position flip stand e Fixed Buttons 15 plus Four way navigation cluster button o Volume up down separate volume levels for the handset speaker and ringer Mute button Speaker button Headset button Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 73 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 o Avaya Menu button options and settings access Telephony application button to return to main telephone screen o Hold button Conference button Transfer button Drop button o Contacts button Call log button Redial button Quick access voicemail Message button Programmable Contextual buttons 19 o 16 line appearance feature key buttons with dual LEDs red green and paper l
470. ure Key Local 1306042072 Admansior Spged Ural Serial Number 00e007052b43 000000000001 Jaot Settings System Settinas IP Address 192 168 1 25 Configure User Button Programming Suih Net Maak 255 755 255 N M System Locale Unded States US Enghsh Number soeignod to fret Extension 10 Admenister Auto Attendant Number of Extcnaons on System 46 Contures Configured Setup Aupsliary Equipments a Daytight Saving Enebled Update Trunk Contgurasons Synem Trunks per phones 2 Licenses instalied Essential Edition Additional VoiceMail Forts 4 Sotware Upgrade 2 1 ETR Digital Extensions Connected 10 11 12 13 14 15 18 21 22 Hunt Group Extensions Pickup Group Extensions Night Service Group Extensions NONE Assigned Configure Allowed List Extensions f Fons anna ade Emergency List Configured 911 prerers greteed prevers errress Extensions NOT Cankigured for VoiceMail 15 18 19 71 27 24 35 26 17 38 39 RARR amisa sssssn anast ea Gei te foe ne OME i Bo By using the 10 System Hyperlinks you are able to quickly and easily administer the PARTNER Version system in a short time Further details can be found in the IP Office PARTNER Version Manager documentation guide posted on the Avaya Support website Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 28 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 System Features PARTNER Version provides the majority of the feature set that
471. ure of the 9600 phones on Communication Manager is not available on IP Office e Access to company directory and Visual Voice applications on IP Office e External Applications WML Application Interface e Upgradeable Firmware Yes e Expansion e Adapter interface 9620L none 9620C one expansion module interface for e g Gigabit Ethernet adapter e USB adapter 9620L none 9620C yes e Color Black e Mounting Desk or wall mountable with optional wall mount adapter e Supports the following languages English French Spanish German Italian Dutch Portuguese and Russian English and 4 of the other languages at once in the phone Note While it may be possible to download other languages onto the phone this will not be applicable to any data sent by IP Office If you switch the language to any other not listed above the display will show a mixture of the new language and the user s default language on IP Office Requirements for IP Interface e Power Supply IEEE 802 3af Power over Ethernet PoE or optional wall plug local power supply 9620L PoE Class 1 9620C PoE Class 2 e Codecs audio G 711 G 729a b G 726 Dynamic J itter buffer Echo Cancellation Comfort Noise Automatic Gain Control Ready for future support of G 722 wideband codec e QoS Options UDP Port Selection DiffServ and 802 1p q VLAN e SNMP Support Yes e IP Address Assignment Static or dynamic IP address assignment e Ethernet Ports Ethernet 1
472. ust 2010 Device Specific Data The following table shows the device specific data available via TAPI e Phone s extension number e Force login flag e Forward on busy flag e Login code flag e Forward on no answer flag e System phone flag e Forward unconditional flag e Absent message id e Forward hunt group flag e Absent message set flag e Do not disturb flag e Voicemail email mode e Outgoing call bar flag e User s extension number e Call waiting on flag e Users Locale e Voicemail on flag e Forward number e Voicemail ring back flag e Follow me number e Number of voicemail messages e Absent text e Number of unread voicemail messages e Do not disturb exception list e Outside call sequence number e Forward on busy number e Inside call sequence number e User s priority e Ring back sequence number e Number of groups the user is a member of e No answer timeout period e Number of groups that the user is a member of that i are currently outside their time profile e Wrap up time period i e Number of groups the user is currently disabled from e Can intrude flag e Number of groups that the user is a member of that e Cannot be intruded upon flag are currently out of service e X directory flag e Number of groups that the user is a member of that are currently on night service Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 309 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 DevLink Fields The foll
473. ut ring In Key and Lamp operation IP Office supports up to 10 buttons on each telephone and 10 telephones with the same line appearance Appearance Buttons Feature e Use the programmable buttons available on Avaya digital and IP telephones to represent individual calls e Answer originate and join calls by pressing the appropriate appearance buttons Benefits e Indication of calls connected and calls waiting e Handling of multiple calls from a single phone Description Many Avaya digital and IP telephones supported by IP Office have programmable buttons These buttons can be assigned to appearance functions that allow the handling of calls These functions are e Line Appearance Buttons Used to indicate make and answer calls on a specific external trunk e Call Appearance Buttons Used to handle multiple incoming and outgoing calls from a user s extension e Bridged Appearance Buttons Used to match the call appearance buttons on a colleagues extension e Call Coverage Buttons Used to indicate unanswered calls ringing at a colleagues extension Line Appearance A Line Appearance is a representation of a trunk line on the IP Office system where the indicator tracks the activity on the Line Only external calls can be answered or made on Line Appearances Line appearances can be used with Analog E1 PRI T1 PRI and BRI trunks PSTN trunks They cannot be used with E1R2 QSIG and IP trunks Product Description 2010 A
474. utgoing call will then be made to that number to re establish the link Domain Name Service DNS Proxy Domain Name Service servers provide the translation of names such as www avaya com to the domain s IP address required to establish a connection IP Office provides this service to PCs on the network by proxy Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 198 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Network Address Translation NAT Network Address Translation is a mechanism that allows you to use different IP address on your private network behind a router with a public IP Address When connecting to the Internet ISPs typically want a customer to use an IP address they have allocated Using NAT this is easily accommodated eradicating the need for the customer to change their network numbering scheme and providing additional security to the internal users as their address in hidden to the public Typically a company maps its internal network addresses to a global external IP address and unmaps the global IP address on incoming packets back into internal IP addresses This helps ensure security since each outgoing or incoming request must go through a translation process This also offers the opportunity to qualify or authenticate the request or match it to a previous request NAT also conserves the number of global IP addresses that a company needs Proxy Address Resolution Protocol ARP Support fo
475. ve network connectivity Not all trunk types are available in all territories please check for local availability e Extensions Support for a range of extensions from 2 to 384 that provide sophisticated voice performance for new and growing businesses e Telephones A variety of telephones including analog digital and IP hard and soft phones wired and wireless that provide the appropriate desktop or device phone for every need e Advanced Call Routing Incoming calls are directed to the best available person or messaging service according to the company s unique criteria e Alternate Call Routing Ensures reliable handling of calls by selecting from analog digital or VoIP trunks e QSIG Networking Standards based multi site networking to interoperate with other PABXs licensed feature e Integrated H 323 and SIP Gatekeeper and Gateway for converged communications The IP Office acts as an IP telephony server with Quality of Service QoS support through DiffServ for routing and up to 128ms of Echo cancellation depending on Voice Compression Module VCM card fitted e SIP Trunking IP Office 4 0 and above supports SIP trunking to Internet Telephony Service Providers This approach allows users with non SIP phones to make and receive SIP calls licensed feature Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 14 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Data Communication Solution Features For offic
476. ved Page 340 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 DC Power DTE External I P Socket Port O P Socket Audio I P Socket Functional Earth 2 x PCMCIA slots for Wireless Jack Socket and Embedded Voicemail Knock out panel s for trunk module kits for example i WAN X21 V24 V35 Quad BRI trunks T1PRI trunk Comes with new back panel Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 341 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 IP Office Small Office Edition WAN Expansion Interfaces Both IP Office Small Office Edition variants provide an expansion slot for an optional WAN interface of the following types check locally for availability Each of these interface cards are now described in more detail 1P400 WAN Expansion The IP400 WAN Expansion card provides a single WAN connection X21 V24 or V35 via a 37 way D Type socket Line speeds up to and including 2Mbps are supported on the interface The carrier providing the line dictates the actual operating speed i e in some territories the maximum speed may be 1 544M 1P400 BRI Card The BRI trunk card provides 4 European Basic Rate ISDN T interfaces 8 trunks Details of the supported supplementary services on BRI interfaces are given in the Public and Private Voice Networks section e Not available in all territories check for availability 1P400 T1 PRI Card The IP400 T1 PRI card provides a single primary rate trunk
477. vely for customers who have a separate DHCP Server IP Office can be configured to obtain its address from that DHCP server or be set with its own static IP address Both 1P500 and IP500 V2 have two independent DHCP servers one dedicated to each of the Layer 3 switched LANs Leased Line Support IP Office is capable of connecting to leased line services IP Office WAN services are supported over E1 T1 PRI trunks and BRI trunks E1 T1 trunks can be configured to operate in a fractional mode for point to multi point applications i e a single 2M interface could be treated as 3 x 512K and 8 x 64K going to 11 different locations When using T1 as a Leased Line it is possible to use the same circuit for switched circuit services Not all types of leased line are available in all territories check for availability Dial Up Circuit Support Where the amount of traffic does not justify the cost of a dedicated leased line the system can provide data connectivity via ISDN dial up circuits using its E1 T1 or Basic Rate trunks Where data speeds greater than a single channel are required 64K 56K additional channels can be added to the call as and when they are needed Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 196 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Point to Point Protocol PPP PPP is an industry standard Wide Area Networking Protocol that allows inter working with a wide range of 3rd party routers
478. verted into 36 Avaya IP Endpoint licenses Up to 2 1P500 VCM cards can be fitted into an IP500 control unit The card is available in two variants supporting up to 32 or 64 VCM channels Each card provides 4 VCM channels that do not need to be licensed Additional VCM channels up to the maximum capacity of the cards fitted can be enabled by the addition of the licenses below Multiple licenses can be added to achieve the total number of channels required Note that the maximum achievable number of channels is also affected by the codec being used The following are not needed for Release 6 but if present will automatically be converted into derived Avaya IP Phone licenses at the rate of 3 phone licenses per VCM channel e IP500 VCM Channels 4 Channels License IPO LIC IP500 VCM LIC 4 CH 202961 removed for Release 6 e IP500 VCM Channels 8 Channels License IPO LIC IP500 VCM LIC 8 CH 202962 removed for Release 6 e IP500 VCM Channels 16 Channels License IPO LIC IP500 VCM LIC 16 CH 202963 removed for Release 6 e IP500 VCM Channels 28 Channels License IPO LIC IP500 VCM LIC 28 CH 202964 removed for Release 6 e IP500 VCM Channels 60 Channels License IPO LIC IP500 VCM LIC 60 CH 202965 removed for Release 6 Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 328 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 e IP500 Voice Networking Licenses The use of private voice networking trunks between
479. vice 158 Set Hunt Group Out Of Service 158 Set Inside Call Seq 158 Set Message Priority 261 Set Mobile Twinning Number 158 Set Mobile Twinning Off 158 Set Mobile Twinning On 158 Set No Answer Time 158 Set Outside Call Seq 158 Set Ringback Seq 158 Set Wrap Up Time 158 SetCalllnfoBuffer 308 short code representing 256 Short Codes 130 155 156 157 158 185 197 235 256 279 Short Message System 242 shortcode 348 ShortCode csv 293 Shut Down Embedded Voicemail 158 Signaling Conforms 176 Signaling Channels 98 176 Silence Suppression 163 172 Simple Network Management Protocol 297 316 Simple Outlook 219 Simple Telephony Call Basic 175 187 Simple Telephony Call Basic Call 175 187 Simple Traversal UDP 180 User Datagram Protocol 316 Simultaneous 171 Simultaneous VoIP Calls Maximum Number 171 Small Community Network 130 131 133 135 136 137 148 154 184 185 187 236 SMDR 45 143 231 SMI 102 SMS 242 SMS text 245 SMTP 16 236 242 265 292 SMTP email 292 SMTP POP3 245 SNMP 77 80 82 85 86 87 167 183 292 297 316 SNMPv1 316 So8 300 312 334 So8 Module 300 312 334 Soft 14 104 134 334 SoftConsole 18 45 130 133 137 148 157 222 227 228 SoftConsole Administration 228 SoftConsole gives operator 222 SoftConsole Options 227 SoftConsole PC Requirements 228 SoftConsole Telephone Requirements 228 Software Developers Kit 230 Software Development Kit 16 231 Software Li
480. visors and agents e CCC to CCR Upgrade License IPO LIC CUSTMR CUSTMR CALL REPORTER UPG LIC 217658 Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 326 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Phone Manager Licenses IP Office Phone Manager is a legacy Windows PC application that allows IP Office users to control their telephone through their PC An optional IP Softphone is also available with additional licensing In Release 6 it is recommended to use one X Portal for IP Office and the new IP Office Softphone using Teleworker or Power User licenses instead of Phone Manager Pro e Phone Manager Pro License These licenses control how many users configured for Phone Manager Pro can simultaneously run Phone Manager in that mode Multiple licenses can be combined e Phone Manager Pro per seat 1 User IPO LIC PMGR PRO RFA 1 LIC CU 177468 e Phone Manager Softphone Licenses These licenses control how many users configured for Phone Manager Pro PC Softphone can simultaneously run Phone Manager in that mode Note that running Phone Manager in this mode also requires and consumes a Phone Manager Pro license for each user e Phone Manager Softphone per seat 1 User IPO LIC PMGR SFTPHN RFA 1 LIC CU 171992 Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 327 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 IP Office 500 System Licenses The following licenses are used to enable
481. ween them will be established once the call has been set up as long as they use the same Codecs Direct media is supported between Avaya IP phones and SIP phones It is possible for an IP device to be physically located at one site while being registered at a different site In this case even for VolP across the WAN the VCM would not be used as long as the two IP devices involved in a phone call are registered on the same system Data Channels A Data Channel is only required for Remote Access RAS Internet Access and Voicemail connections e 10 PCs accessing the Internet over a single line 1 Data Channel If multiple lines are used Multi Link PPP then as many data channels are required e g 128k i e 2B channels requires 2 data channels e 10 users dialing in from home on 10 separate lines onto the LAN 10 Data Channels e Voicemail is an IP application on the LAN i e one data channel is required for each voicemail port used Note IP end points do NOT require data channels Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 169 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Bandwidth Required For Each Voice Call The bandwidth used varies depending on the compression method chosen IP Office supports a wide range of compression standards including the most popular G 723 1 and G 729a These will occupy approximately 10K and 13K of bandwidth respectively Use the following chart to choose the most a
482. xt available extension and so on until the call is answered or the caller hangs up For a voice signaled call only the first available extension is signaled if that extension does not answer the call does not keep hunting After an extension receives a Hunt Group call the next call to the Hunt Group will not ring or voice signal that extension first unless all other extensions in the group are busy or do not answer Group Pickup INTERCOM 66G Use this feature to answer any outside intercom or transferred call ringing at an extension in a Pickup Group where G is a Pickup Group number from 1 4 When a call rings at an extension that is in a Pickup Group you can answer the call at any extension without knowing which extension or line is ringing and without being in the same Pickup Group The system can have up to four Pickup Groups Hold Reminder If a call is left on hold for longer than a specified period the extension will ring back alerting you that the call is still on hold This ring continues to sound until the held call is retrieved or until the caller hangs up Hot Dial This feature enables a user to start dialing a number without first pressing the speaker button or going off hook Hotline This feature allows designated extensions to automatically place an intercom call to another designated extension when it goes off hook Intercom Dial Codes e I represents the INTERCOM button e XX represents a system
483. y Start with the extension in the list immediately following the extension that answered the last hunt group call e Longest Waiting Start with the extension that has been free for the longest time An option has been added Assign Call On Agent Alert which means that CTI applications will always correctly report the details for the call that is alerting The previous default behavior is now termed Assign Call On Agent Answer and ensures that the call at the head of the queue is always answered first If all extensions in the hunt group are busy or not answered another hunt group called an Overflow Group can be used to take the calls An overflow time can be set to stipulate how long a call will queue before being passed to the Overflow Group this can be configured either for individual calls or for all calls in the group The system can change the status of users who do not answer a hunt group call presented to them The user can be put into busy wrap up busy not available or logged out The change of status can be set per user and the use of this option can be set per hunt group Outside normal operation a hunt group can be put into two special modes Night Service and Out of service In Night Service calls are presented to a Night Service Group This can be controlled automatically by setting a time profile which defines the hours of operation of the main group or manually using a handset feature code Night service fallback using
484. y System 160 Keyboard Actions 227 Keyboard Mapping 227 Kit List 303 lt L2TP Securing 316 Lamp Operation 140 Language 111 112 133 149 232 234 235 236 246 248 251 293 language depending 234 Lanyard 100 104 Last Number Redial 118 158 Latin 236 251 Latin American 236 Latvia 302 launch 298 Layer Two 316 Layer Two Tunneling Protocol 316 LCD 113 118 132 LCP 198 316 LCR 190 Existing 144 LCS 219 LDAP 15 200 leading email 245 Leased Line 15 175 194 196 197 types 196 Leased Line Support 196 Least Cost 143 144 155 174 Existing 190 Least Cost Routes 143 155 Least Cost Routing 144 Existing 190 LED 85 86 87 118 167 Legacy Card Carrier 45 52 License Key 18 201 231 235 246 250 303 License csv 293 LIFO FIFO 261 Link Control Protocol 198 316 Linked Numbering 191 Linked Numbering Scheme 191 Lite 16 Lithium lon Battery 104 Lithuania 302 LLB 52 176 345 Local Area Network 160 163 194 196 200 232 Local End Echo Cancellation 25ms 172 Product Description IP Office Release 6 0 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 363 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 Index Local Phone Directory 219 Local Telcos 176 Locating SIP Servers 316 Longest Waiting 154 227 Loop Disconnect 348 Loop Greeting 261 Loop Start 14 54 176 300 345 350 Loop start Ground 315 Loop Start 52 176 Lord Of The Rings 251 Lotus Notes 242 245 Low Speed Serial Links 316 LS 345 Luxembourg 302 M Mai
485. y all share the same line to the ISP Two people remotely accessing the Office LAN from home will use two data channels since they have dialed in on separate lines IP extensions do not use data channels Data channels are used for voicemail connections with a maximum of 20 available for VoiceMail Pro on an 1P406 V2 Modems and Voice Compression modules You can add additional hardware to the IP406 system to add one modem card 2 or 12 V 90 modems and 1 Voice Compression Module VCM The VCM supports from 4 to 30 simultaneous Voice over IP sessions and is used for either providing networking between sites over a Wide Area Network or supporting IP Telephones and Soft phones Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 337 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 I P400 WANS 10 100 The 1P400 WAN3 10 100 module provides three WAN connections X21 V35 or V24 via a 37way D Type socket and using an appropriate connector cable Data rates of up to 2 Mbps are supported on each interface the carrier providing the line dictates the actual operating speed i e in some territories the maximum speed may be limited to 1 544 Mbps These WAN interfaces are identical to the single WAN connection provided as standard on the 1P406 and IP412 platforms The IP400 WAN3 10 100 connects to the control unit through the Local Area Network via a 10 100Mbps connection and does not use an expansion port on the control unit P500 does
486. y and can only be accessed by using a shortcode When not receiving a Page the port will remain silent when being paged the page tone is sent before the speech path is opened Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 348 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 I P400 Digital Station V2 Module This expansion module provides additional Digital Station DS ports for selected Avaya 2400 4400 5400 6400 T3 EMEA only series phones and 3810 wireless phones NA only The IP400 Digital Station module is available in 2 variants 16 or 30 extensions DS 7 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 17 4 eeocecese A rhataiatntinhate as DC IP E ee DTE T 16 24 DC 5 04 MAX DIGITAL STATION 2 24 DC 1 54 PHONE 2 0 seeeeoeo eeeceeee 3 16 DS 25 26 27 285 293 30 ee EXPANSION e Telephones can be located up to 1km from the control unit For extensions located out of the building additional line protection will be needed For more information on cabling and out of building guidelines see the IP Office Installation Manual e For systems where Direct Station Select DSS Units are being used IP Office supports a maximum of e Eight EU24 and or EU24BL per system e Two XM24 units on each Digital Station expansion module to a maximum of 10 x XM24 units per system e Two 4450 units on each Digital Station expansion module to a maximum of 8 x 4450 units per system
487. y or polar white e Mounting Desk e Adjustable Desk Stand Display adjustable Features for T3 Upn e Upgradeable Firmware No e Optional Add Ons up to 3 DSS Modules e Connect to Digital Station DS port e Power Supply From phone system Features for T3 IP e Upgradeable Firmware Yes e Optional Add Ons up to 3 DSS Modules with AEI Headsetlink e Power Supply IEEE 802 3af Power over Ethernet PoE or individual power supply unit e Codecs G 711 G 729a b e QoS Options UDP Port Selection DiffServ and 802 1p q VLAN e SNMP Support No e IP Address Assignment Static or dynamic IP address assignment e Ethernet Ports Two port full duplex 10 100 BaseT Ethernet switch e Auto negotiation provided separately for each port e 802 3 Flow Control Product Description 2010 AVAYA All rights reserved Page 87 IP Office Release 6 0 Issue 20 p 05 August 2010 T3 DSS Expansion Modules The T3 DSS Module is a phone expansion module that is compatible with all T3 Upn and T3 IP Telephones except the T3 IP Compact Each module provides an additional 36 programmable buttons with associated printed text labels and indicators and can be programmed for lines groups or speed dial numbers 3 DSS Modules can be added to each T3 phone Power is provided by T3 Upn telephones but an external power adapter is needed for each DSS module when used on T3 IP telephones T3 Comfort with T3 DSS Attached IP Office 406 IP412 and IP5
488. y using ContactStore for IP Office The system administrator can select whether all calls are required to be automatically recorded or just a selection of calls Alternatively calls can be manually selected for recording If for any reasons resources are not available then a recording may not be taken for example all voicemail ports are busy VoiceMail Pro provides a number of methods for triggering the recording of a call Most of the settings and controls for automatic voice recording are accessed through the IP Office Manager application The proportion of incoming and or outgoing calls that should be recorded and the time period during which Voice Recording should operate can be selected e User Recording The calls to and or from a particular user can be automatically recorded By default the recordings are placed in the user s mailbox e Hunt Group Recording The calls to a particular hunt group can be automatically recorded By default the recordings are placed in the hunt group s mailbox but there is the ability to select a target mailbox made for or on behalf of a subscriber e Account Code Recording An account code can be applied to a call by the user before it is made This can be used to trigger recording of outgoing calls e Caller ID Recording Account codes can be assigned to a call by Caller ID matching This allows recording to be based on a Caller ID match e Time Profiles For each user hunt group and or account code a

IP Office Release 6.0

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents